JP2020048880A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Pachinko machine

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have operating means, and some gaming machines execute various settings based on the operation result of the operating means. In such a gaming machine, the interest was improved by operating the operating means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-249877

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an information acquisition condition, and an information storage in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored. Based on the means, the information stored in the information storage means, the discrimination means capable of performing the discrimination, and the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means can be dynamically displayed on the display means. When the possible dynamic display means and the identification information for indicating that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A pre-determination means that has a possible privilege game execution means and can pre-determine the information stored in the information storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the information is executed. The switching condition includes a switching means capable of switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode different from the first effect mode when the switching condition is satisfied. It is easier to establish the case where the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than the case where the pre-determination result is the first pre-determination result.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an information acquisition condition, an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the information thereof. Based on the information stored in the storage means, the discrimination means capable of performing the discrimination and the identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means can be dynamically displayed on the display means. When the means and the identification information for indicating that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution capable of executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player. A pre-determination means having means and capable of pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the information is executed, and a switching condition are established. In this case, the switching means for switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode different from the first effect mode is provided, and the switching condition is the advance of the pre-determination means. It is easier to establish the case where the determination result is the second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than the case where the determination result is the first pre-determination result.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the variable winning apparatus. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning apparatus, a gathering gutter, and a sorting apparatus. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning apparatus, a gathering gutter, and a sorting apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of the receiving member and a sorting device. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device and a sorting device on the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus and the sorting apparatus in line XVII-XVII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus and the sorting apparatus in line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus and the sorting apparatus in line XVII-XVII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus and the sorting apparatus in line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. It is a front view of the variable winning device and the sorting device. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a figure which showed the clock change of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device of the 1st round, and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of a distribution device in each jackpot type. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in the effect standby state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in the effect standby state. It is a side view of the 1st operation unit in the direction view of the arrow XLII of FIG. 40. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in the intermediate effect state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in the intermediate effect state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in the overhanging state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in the overhanging state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member with the rotational displacement of a rotating member. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction in a mode of constant angular velocity. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the angle with the rotation of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a 2nd operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame on the LIIa-LIIA line of FIG. 28, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame on the LIIb-LIIB line of FIG. 28. be. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame on the line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame on the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 33. be. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame on the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 30, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame on the LIVb-LIVA line of FIG. be. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating and reversing effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (A) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside-down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member in the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa of FIG. 57 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line of (b). (A) to (c) are front views of the effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (A) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (A) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (A) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. It is a timing chart which shows the arrangement of the elevating arm member, the drive mode of a drive motor, and an example of the output of a detection sensor in chronological order. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd operation unit in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. 28. FIGS. (A) to (D) are front schematic views of operation units for which examples of combined operations of each operation unit are schematically described in chronological order. FIGS. (A) to (D) are front schematic views of operation units for which examples of combined operations of each operation unit are schematically described in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of the sorting device. It is a front view of the variable winning device and the sorting device. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus and the sorting apparatus in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 73. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a middle member, a slide displacement member, a lower member, and a detection sensor of the distribution device in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75. (A) to (d) are front perspective views of the middle member of the sorting device. It is a top view of a middle member, a state switching device, a slide displacement member, and a lower member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a middle member, a slide displacement member and a lower member in the line LXXIXa-LXXIXa of FIG. 78, and FIG. (C) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member in the LXXIXc-LXXIXc line of FIG. 78. (A) and (b) are side views of the slide displacement member and the ball riding on the upper side surface of the ball guide portion. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow LXXXIc of FIG. 81 (a). Is. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. (A) and (b) are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. It is a rear view of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. It is a front perspective view of the 1st decorative rotating member and the 2nd decorative rotating member. (A) and (b) are schematic front views schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhanging decorative portion. (A) and (b) are schematic front views schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhanging decorative portion. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the guide long hole, the rectangular box part and the overhang decoration part. It is sectional drawing of the 1st operation unit in line XCIII-XCIII of FIG. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit in the overhanging state. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation unit in the XCV-XCV line of FIG. It is a front view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. It is a front view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. It is a front perspective view of the elevating and reversing effect device. (A) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. It is a schematic diagram of the 3rd movement unit which shows typically the displacement of a metal rod and an intermediate arm member. It is a front schematic diagram of the 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (A) is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. It is a front view of the 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of the 3rd operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd operation unit in the CVI-CVI line of FIG. 105. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd operation unit in the CVII-CVII line of FIG. 104. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 2nd Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVI-XVI line of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the sorting apparatus in the 3rd Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are schematics of the third flow path component, the probability variation detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member which schematically show the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. It is a top view. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a third flow path component, a probability variation detection sensor, a normal detection sensor, and a slide displacement member in the CXIa-CXIa line of FIG. 110 (a), and FIG. 110 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 110 (b). ) Is a schematic cross-sectional view of a third flow path component, a probability variation detection sensor, a normal detection sensor, and a slide displacement member in the CXIb-CXIb line. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting apparatus in the fifth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device according to the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the sorting device in 7th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the CXV-CXV line of FIG. 114. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide elongated hole and the rotating member in 8th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide elongated hole and the rotating member in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning dress provided in the front view area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning dress in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the flow path of the ball which won a prize in a variable winning apparatus. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the actual display screen in the first control example. be. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the reach is established in the normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is the third in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of a normal symbol variation in a normal state displayed by a symbol display device. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a game per normal figure (game per long opening) is executed during the normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a chance zone in a normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode. 1 In the control example, the special figure 2 displayed on the third symbol display device is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the state where the reserved ball is acquired. be. In the first control example, the special figure 2 displayed on the third symbol display device is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the state where the reserved ball is not acquired. Is. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half period. In the example, it is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the first half period of the ending period of the probability variation jackpot game displayed by the 3rd symbol display device, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the latter half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game which is displayed, (d) is the ending of the probability variation jackpot game displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the latter half period of a period. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the game state suggestion effect executed in the chance mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and the period other than the high-speed fluctuation period is set. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during a period (during the normal fluctuation period), (b) is the state which the chance mode is set as the effect mode to be displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case where the normal state is set internally, and the frame button is operated during the period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an operation effect during a high-speed fluctuation period among the chance modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an operation effect. In the control example, among the chance modes displayed by the third symbol display device, it is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the operation effect during a high-speed fluctuation period. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol change is executed during the "super chance mode" displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b). ) Is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol change is executed during the “super chance mode” displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when a variation pattern in which the non-reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect when the variation pattern in which the reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the 3rd symbol in the 1st control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the production of the ending period for the normal jackpot in the first control example, and (b) is the production of the ending period for the probabilistic jackpot in the first control example. (C) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down the specific region (V gate) during the probability variation jackpot game in the first control example. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the effect mode set after the jackpot game in the first control example is completed. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the contents of the operation effect in the chance mode in the first control example. It is a figure which showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, and (b) is the main control device in the first control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the 2nd random number table set in the ROM of. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table, and (c) shows the regulation contents of the special figure 2 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a figure shown schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation contents of the ordinary table which was made. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the probability change / time saving table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. be. FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal medium special drawing 2 effect selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the probabilistic effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the continuous advance notice execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the voice lamp in the first control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the V notification execution selection table set in the ROM of a control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect selection table at the time of button operation set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the time saving state selection table set in the ROM of. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the probability change state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on in the 1st control example. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D in the first control example. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state command reception processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information command processing for special figure executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the general drawing-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing in a chance mode executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the notification command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed on the pachinko machine in the second control example and the display screen, and (b) and (c) are the main symbols in the second control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display effect which is executed when the display of a layer is set to off, and the display of a sub-design layer is set to on. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main symbol for the sea used when the sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example, and (b) is a mountain in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the image data of the mountain main image used when the image (mountain background) is set, and (c) is the sub-design which is stored in the character storage area in advance in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed the image data schematically, and (d) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the image data corresponding to various images used as the main symbol for variation in the 2nd control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the variation display of the 3rd symbol (the main symbol, the sub symbol) in the 2nd control example schematically. (A) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the fluctuation pattern used in the effect example in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the flow of the normal effect in the second control example. It is a timing chart, (c) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the reach line advance notice effect in the second control example, and (d) is a timing chart in which the fluctuation direction of the sub-symbol in the second control example is normal. Is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of different notice effects. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 2nd control example. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table in the 2nd control example schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list in the 2nd control example schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the back image change command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed on the pachinko machine in the modified example of the second control example and the display screen, and (b) is the schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display screen and the modified example of the second control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed in the triple reach effect, (c) shows an example of the display screen in the triple reach state by the triple reach effect in the modification of the 2nd control example. It is a figure. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure near the specific winning opening among the variable winning devices of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third control example, and (b) is the specification in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the flow path of the ball which won a prize in a prize opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the flow path of the ball which won a prize in the specific winning opening in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process 4 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the V round processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit middle update process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 4th control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the main in the fourth control example. It is a figure which showed typically the regulation contents of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of a control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. be. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect selection 2 table at the time of button operation set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the voice lamp control in the fourth control example. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the probability change state selection 2 table set in the ROM of the apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 5 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fall-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display effect in the 2nd control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a large number of nails for ball guidance (shown below the center frame 86, in the upper half of the game area) on the base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view. (Not shown) and windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit. It is configured by assembling 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a tapping screw or the like is provided from the front side of the game board 13. Is fixed by.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof can be shielded invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. In the high probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability increases during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in the present embodiment), and the hit probability of the second symbol described later increases and the second Includes a game state in which a ball can easily win a prize in the winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends changes by 100. It becomes a high probability state for the number of times. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuation times.

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal time. And a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 140 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric motors are applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 140a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill the opening 511a of the back case 510 described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to border the window portion of the base plate 60. It is installed. That is, when viewed from the front, it seems that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction. Has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle, and lower. Three symbol rows of are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 140 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 140 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp or an identification label is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side with the lower side as an axis, and the MPU 201 is connected to these via the input / output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to it.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631,731,782,861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIGS. 6A and 6B are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6A shows a closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the flow of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. 6B shows the closing state of the opening / closing plate 65b. The open state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is opened so as to allow the ball to flow down is shown. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6B), the variable winning device 65 receives the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b and guides the ball to the specific winning opening 65a in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b. The upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left and right central portions of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. .. That is, the landing of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b does not occur in the left and right central portions, but mainly occurs in the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the sphere that lands on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to the position closer to the left / right outer side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

The arrangement of the balls after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the sphere flows after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b, it is possible that the sphere is arranged closer to the center position of the left / right side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curvedly formed so as to secure a space on the opening / closing plate 65b side (glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ), The ball that bounces near the center position of the left and right of the opening / closing plate 65b is formed as a curved surface that projects downward from the lower end of the front end portion that is arranged opposite to the front end portion 141. It is possible to reduce the degree of collision and loss of momentum. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball is arranged near the center position on the left and right of the opening / closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape at the bottom of the front design member 141 may be arranged either front or back. In the present embodiment, the radius of curvature in the lateral view is formed so as to be arranged on the lower front side, so that a larger space on the opening / closing plate 65b side can be secured. Further, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the left-right width becomes smaller toward the lower side at the left-right end portion, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening / closing plate 65b on the left-right side.

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning opening 65a with almost no leakage. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, a inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that inclines downward toward the rear is arranged at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that a ball rolled to the left and right outside by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163 to the front side and the left and right inside, and the front end surface is an inclined surface whose arrangement is displaced rearward toward the left and right inside. It is formed.

As a result, when the ball that rolls on the opening / closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided down along the inclination of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be guided to the lower surface of the inclined flow. It is possible to guide the 163a1 with less resistance. Therefore, when the opening / closing plate 65b starts the closing operation with the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b is performed even if the ball is arranged on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, the flow of the sphere becomes poor and the closing of the opening / closing plate 65b is delayed, or the sphere flowed backward due to the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b bounces off the rear wall portion of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening / closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction (front side) for opening the opening / closing plate 65b, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening / closing plate 65b is unintentionally opened or a malfunction occurs.

When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the opening / closing plate 65b closes by the rising operation. That is, the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the operation of the opening / closing plate 65b, so that the ball does not move to the left and right positions of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b and is placed on the opening / closing plate 65b. The ball on board is guided to the specific winning opening 65a with almost no omission.

At this time, if the arrangement of the spheres on the opening / closing plate 65b is closer to the left and right outside, or if the number of spheres is large, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b may be delayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 and the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, the flow of the ball guided by the specific winning opening 65a is retained. It is possible to maintain the quickness of the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b.

Further, instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b on which the ball rests in the open state is formed in a flat shape (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b once flows backward, and then flows in the left-right direction due to the action of the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the collision of balls on the opening / closing plate 65b.

That is, even if a plurality of spheres land on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time, the spheres are once translated backward, so that it is possible to prevent the spheres from colliding with each other on the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b has a shape having an inclined surface in the left-right direction as in the lower surface portion 163a, and a flow in the left-right direction is formed on the rolling sphere. Since the possibility that the movement of the ball becomes irregular can be reduced, it is possible to prevent an unintended malfunction.

In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the receiving member 163 is formed with a contact surface portions 163a3 for contacting the rotating tip portions at both left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. There is. Since the contact surface portions 163a3 are formed in pairs on the left and right, and are formed so as to be able to make surface contact instead of point contact by the shape design matching the shape of the opening / closing plate 65b, it is easy to stabilize the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. In addition, stress concentration can be avoided by receiving a load at the time of contact on the surface, so that durability can be improved.

Further, on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 formed in a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening / closing plate 65b arranged to face each other with a slight gap is formed. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe when the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening / closing plate 65b becomes poor for some reason.

In the present embodiment, a fixed member 161 that limits the flow of the ball is arranged on the front side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and the ball is basically configured so as not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate 65b that comes into contact with the contact surface portion 163a3 is chipped, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening / closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-rear width portion and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b The surface contact with the opening / closing plate 65b is caused, and the stability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b is maintained. Thereby, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state can be improved.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to come into contact with the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since contact with the opening / closing plate 65b occurs when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal, there may be a disadvantage that the load is likely to be accumulated, but the area for distributing the load can be expanded, so that the opening / closing plate 65b It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load received by the contact surface portion 163a3 due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the game ball being accepted by the opening / closing plate 65b can be received in a manner of being pushed into the opening / closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. ..

That is, the ball hits the lower shape of the front design member 141 in a state of being accepted (for example, a state of being sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate 65b and the opening frame portion of the specific winning opening 65a). When they come into contact with each other, they can be guided to the curved shape so that they can flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviating from the opening / closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path constituent portion 336, so that it is easy to secure the field of view to the third flow path constituent portion 336. can do.

Since the ball does not land on the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b is on the left and right outside of the electric accessory 140a. Limited to.

Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided by the specific winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b can be limited to the left and right outer positions of the electric accessory 140a. As a result, it is possible to secure the field of view on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a at the left and right inner positions of the electric accessory 140a with respect to the left and right ends.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side through which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the configurations other than the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the configurations arranged on the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2). A gutter 150 is provided to form a path for flowing the ball into a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion forming a flow path, and the front side portion facing the base plate 60 is opened in the groove-shaped portion. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the ball to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64, and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path for a ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. And a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that form the flow paths of the balls that have entered the general winning openings 63 arranged on both the left and right sides on the left and right sides, respectively.

The first flow path portion 151 is configured as a flow path inclined in the lower left direction from the rear position of the first winning opening 64, and the second flow path portion 152 is inclined in the lower right direction from the rear position of the second winning opening 140. It is configured as a flow path. The third flow path portion 153 is configured as a flow path extending downward of the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, in the front view, the flow of the balls entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is as follows, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the game area. , It is moved from the left and right center position to the left and right outside by the gathering gutter 150. As a result, a space can be provided below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 described later can be arranged using this space.

FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 shows the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300. It is an exploded rear perspective view of. Note that, in FIGS. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, the other parts are omitted, and the other configurations to be assembled to the base plate 60 are not shown. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. Further, in FIG. 9, for convenience of explanation, the center frame 86 is shown in a state of being assembled to the base plate 60.

The fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

Then, in the distribution device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper portion, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right portions. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the set gutter 150, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in the present embodiment can be diverted as they are depending on whether the sorting device 300 is arranged or not. As a result, the variable winning device 65 and the set gutter 150 can be shared regardless of the presence or absence of the sorting device 300.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to accept balls from the game area through the specific winning opening 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path for the balls accepted by the variable winning device 65. In the present embodiment, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change based on the detection result of the sphere flowing through the flow path of the distribution device 300, which will be described in detail later.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 is a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A pre-design member 162 that is fastened and fixed to 161 and a receiving member 163 that is arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161 and fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 so as to accept a ball that has passed through a specific winning opening 65a. And the intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting portion with the sorting device 300, and arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, the receiving member 163. It is provided with a state switching device 165 which is fastened and fixed to and can switch the open / closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

The fixed member 161 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side shape is formed on a flat surface except for a through hole for screw insertion, a fastening position with the front design member 162, and a specific winning opening 65a. .. On the other hand, the shape of the fixed member 161 on the back surface side is a three-dimensional shape that projects toward the back surface side inside the thin-walled portion that is in contact with the base plate 60 on the outer peripheral portion.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin-walled portion is formed in a horizontally long substantially elliptical frame shape, and a through hole having a size capable of arranging the boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary portion 161a, the specific winning opening 65a and a horizontally long plate extending rearward in a horizontally long plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. An extended support plate 161b having a vertically elongated plate-shaped portion extending downward at an intermediate position between the portion and the horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion and having a pair of left and right substantially T-shaped portions is formed.

The extension support plate 161b functions to support both the range behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the distribution device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support portion 161d projecting from the vertically elongated plate-shaped portion of the extended support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a. The protruding support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface of the portion has a function as a portion for supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary portion 161a, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f projecting in a symmetrical shape below the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a abuts on the ball flowing down the distribution device 300 to guide the flow of the ball. Has a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screw to be screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h having female screw portions for screwing the fastening screw to be inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

The fastened portion 161i having the female screw portion for screwing the fastening screw to be inserted into the intervening member 164 is arranged outside the boundary portion 161a at the cut (left-right center position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, among the through holes formed in the base plate 60, the connecting portion between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), The fastened portion 161i is arranged.

The front design member 162 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so as to have a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). The ball can flow down within the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161.

On the back side of the front design member 162, a plurality of female screw portions are arranged at positions that match the through holes 161 g of the fixed member 161 and have female screw portions formed so that the fastening screws inserted through the through holes 161 g can be screwed in. It is provided with a portion to be fastened 162a and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c extending to the back surface side so as to cover the portion to be fastened 162a from above.

Since the extending portions 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, the durability of the fastened portion 162a can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c are formed as inclined surfaces, the flow path of the sphere can be restricted. That is, the upper surface of the extension portion 162b (two locations on the left and right center side) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward to the left and right outside. It is possible to prevent the ball on the portion 162b from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the ball on the extension portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outside of the extension portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

Further, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162c (two locations on the left and right ends) extending to the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that incline downward to the left and right inward, so that the ball flowing on the extension portion 162c can be formed. The flow path can be combined with the flow path of the ball on the extension portion 162b. As a result, the range in which the flowing spheres are arranged can be narrowed (the arrangement density of the spheres can be increased) as compared with the number of spheres flowing down, and the portion where the visibility is not hindered by the spheres (the flow path is Space that is not constructed) can be secured.

The front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is described as plain, and the visibility on the back side is good, but the front design member 162 does not need to be made of plain color. For example, a sticker on which a pattern or a character is illustrated may be attached to the front side of the front design member 162 to decorate the front design member 162, or a groove is dug in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern and the groove is irradiated with light. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent after being plain or decorated as described above.

The receiving member 163 is formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) whose front side is open from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, contact surface portion 163a3, and auxiliary contact surface 163a4. A position that matches the lower surface portion 163a forming the flow lower surface inside the frame, the ball passage hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c into which the fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female screw portion into which the fastening screw to be inserted into the intervening member 164 is screwed. It includes a pair of fastened portions 163d arranged on the side, and a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which the fastening screws to be inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left-right inclined surface that inclines downward to the left and right outward with the central portion of the left and right as the apex, and a inclined flow that inclines downward one step from the left and right outer ends of the left-right inclined surface. By providing the lower surface 163a1, the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is arranged so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with a small resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back surface side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intervening member 164 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, has a main body portion 164a having a light refracting surface that inclines downward toward the rear, and is formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a to be fastened. At the pair of insertion holes 164b into which the fastening screw screwed into the 163d can be inserted, the light emitting substrate 164c arranged above the insertion hole 164b and where the LED is arranged, and the left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body 164a. A pair of fastened portions 164d formed having a female screw portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the distribution device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened member 161 formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a to be fastened. It is provided with an insertion hole 164e into which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light emitting substrate 164c is arranged so that the surface on which the LED is arranged faces diagonally forward and upward, and in the assembled state, the light emitting substrate 164c is located directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6) and the second winning is won. It is arranged directly below the mouth 140. From such an arrangement, the light from the light emitting substrate 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who desires to enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a and looks at the portion diagonally backward and downward.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light emitting substrate 164c to be turned on when the ball entering the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a is controlled. It is possible to make the player easily grasp whether or not the occurrence of the occurrence.

From the above configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. As a result, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed as compared with the case where the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. Further, since the arrangement of the distribution device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the distribution device 300 can be arranged. Relative misalignment can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 163e of the receiving member 163 is inserted, and has a plurality of openings for wiring and for heat dissipation. The lower case portion 165b formed in a deep box shape with the upper side open, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c engaged with the tip of the plunger and together with the plunger. A slide portion 165d that slides and is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b so that the rotating tip portion protrudes from the front end portion of the lower case portion 165b, and rotates with the slide displacement of the slide portion 165d. It includes a moving portion 165e and an upper lid portion 165 g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case portion 165b by fastening screws that are inserted into the plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The rotating tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that a rod-shaped portion can be engaged, and a transmission protrusion 65c projecting from the right end portion of the opening / closing plate 65b to the right enters the recessed portion. Engage. The transmission protrusion 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from the metal shaft rod portion 65d that forms the rotation axis of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be generated as the rotating portion 165e rotates.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 as viewed from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 as viewed from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the distribution device 300 has an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 is formed so as to be insertable. An intermediate member 330 having a pair of insertion holes 331 that are fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and is formed through the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting trough 150 so as to be inserted therein. A substrate 350 housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and having a light emitting means 351 such as an LED arranged on the front side, and a state housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 depending on the presence or absence of energization. A state switching device 360 that is configured to be switchable, and a slide displacement member 370 that is arranged below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between the front position and the rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched. An insertion hole that is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 with the middle member 330 and is formed through the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting trough 150. A lower member 380 having a 381 and a lower member 380 are provided.

Before explaining the details of the configuration of each part, the outline of the function of the sorting device 300 will be described. The distribution device 300 is a device that constitutes a flow path through which the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flows down.

The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the flow path constituents 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. Then, the ball flowing down from the lower member 380 is discharged to the ball discharge path (not shown).

The ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and the flow-down mode provides not only a mere directing effect that entertains the player's eyes but also a player. It has an effect related to game profit, such as causing a change in profit.

The difference in the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down inside the distribution device 300 is mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 when the sphere flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the sphere passes through.

Therefore, the line of sight of the player tends to be easily gathered at the place where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the place where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged as described later). It has been devised on the premise of concentration.

Next, the details of the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member having a U-shape in a top view formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has the above-mentioned insertion hole 311 and a pair of openings 312 formed through so as to accept a sphere, and a mark. A pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent sealing member 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer peripheral portion, and a middle member. A plurality of insertion cylinders 315 having through holes through which the fastening screws screwed into the 330 can be inserted, and a fastened portion 316 having a female screw into which the fastening screws inserted into the middle member 330 can be inserted. A pair of front-rear long protrusions 317, which are long portions in the front-rear direction and are arranged side by side, and which are projected downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. A pair of left and right inner protrusions 318 that are elongated in the left-right direction and are arranged between the pair of front-rear long protrusions 317, and the upper member 310 from the lower surface to the lower side. A pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 that are elongated in the left-right direction and are arranged on the left and right outside of the pair of front-rear long protrusions 317, and a size that allows the upper portion of the substrate 350 to be arranged. It is provided with a storage recess 320 formed as a recess of the above.

The opening 312 is a passage-shaped portion (tunnel-shaped portion) that receives a ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flows downward, and the upper leading edge portion is a tilted posture detection sensor SE1 ( The shape is such that it is cut on an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate (see FIG. 12). As a result, the upper leading edge portion of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with an opening degree such that it does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed in the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312.

The seal member 313 functions as a member that attracts the attention of the player by receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and being visually recognized brilliantly. The details will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion having an inclination formed in accordance with the flow path of the sphere below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a arranged on the front side of the opening 312 is formed so as to incline downward toward the front side, and is connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and is arranged on the left and right inside. The 314b is formed so as to incline downward toward the left and right inward. Then, by configuring the left and right second upper surface portions 314b so that the left-right distance becomes longer toward the front side, it is possible to secure the field of view of the player who visually recognizes the ball through the second upper surface portion 314b.

A counterbore for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw is formed on the upper surface side of the insertion tube portion 315. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above.

The insertion tube portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches the fastened portion 332d having the female screw portion formed on the middle member 330. In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the insertion tube portion 315 on the left side also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, which will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, although the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the front side, the screw head is made inconspicuous to the player who visually recognizes the screw head from diagonally above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sorting device 300 from being deteriorated in appearance due to the fastening screw while fixing the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 to the strength.

The reason why the fastened portion 316 is formed only on the right side is that the insertion cylinder portion 315 is already arranged at two places on the rear side, so one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and the screw head faces downward. The reason is that the sorting device 300 looks better if the arrangement is omitted if it is not necessary even though it is inconspicuous. The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged in pairs on the left and right.

The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set as a position where the flow path of the ball can be avoided and the deterioration of the appearance of the sorting device 300 can be minimized, but the details will be described later.

The front and rear long protrusions 317, the left and right inner protrusions 318, and the left and right outer protrusions 319, which are formed in pairs, are curved so that the arrangement is lowered as the distance from the same location is the same. Formed as a surface. The curved surface has different shapes for the front-rear long protrusion 317, the left and right inner protrusions 318, and the left and right outer protrusions 319, and it is intended to control the flow mode of the sphere by the difference in the shapes.

The middle member 330 has the above-mentioned pair of insertion holes 331, a rear frame-shaped portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially) having a lower bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a box shape), a pair of first flow path constituent portions 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333 and forming a flow path of a sphere, and a first of the first. A pair of second flow path constituents 335 connected to the front end of the flow path constituent portion 334 to form a flow path of the sphere and recessed on the front side of the front frame-shaped portion 333, and a second flow path constituent portion thereof. A pair of third flow path constituents 336, which are connected to the left and right inner ends of the 335 to form a flow path of the sphere and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333, are provided.

Further, the middle member 330 has a left-right elongated shape formed through the lower bottom on the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and functions as a discharge path for a ball, and the discharge hole 337 and the discharge hole 337 thereof. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path constituent portion 336 to the left and right, and a rectangular plate long left and right from the lower side surface at the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. A pair of alignment projecting portions 339, which are projecting as shape convex portions, are provided.

Unlike the front side portion that constitutes the flow path of the sphere, the rear frame-shaped portion 332 does not form the flow path of the sphere, but is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a formed through the front end portion of the left and right central portion in the vertical direction so that the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged, and as a long through hole in the left and right direction. A plurality of female screw portions having a guide hole 332b formed through the lower bottom portion to guide the slide displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360 and a female screw portion formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed. It includes a portion to be fastened 332c and a cylindrical portion to be fastened 332d having a female screw portion at the upper tip into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion cylinder portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

Since the front frame-shaped portion 333 is light-diffused on the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is lowered. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a frame shape having a substantially square shape when viewed from above, and is formed as an insertion hole 333a through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. To be equipped.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are parts that form the flow path of the sphere, respectively, so that the flow direction of the sphere, the inclination angle, and the like are different. It is designed, but details will be described later.

The opening portion 335a whose front side is opened at the connecting position between the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336 can be entered by the symmetrical projecting portion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65. It is a void for. That is, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is arranged so as to enter the inside of the flow path through the opening portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the sphere flowing down the distribution device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are partitioned by the partition plate portion 338, and are composed of a pair of left and right spheres, and are formed in a size that allows the spheres to be discharged in at least two paths. That is, it is composed of at least a left-right length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In the present embodiment, since a plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged according to the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensor SE1. You just have to design the shape of.

The partition plate portion 338 functions as a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path constituent portion 336 as described above, and the details will be described later. The alignment projecting portion 339 is a portion that is fitted with the projecting portion 383a of the lower member 380 to avoid a misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the details will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer on the left and right than the upper portion 352, and is recessed in the lower end portion on the left end side of the lower portion 353 for alignment. A unit 354 is provided.

The recessed portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with the corresponding portion as the internal shape of the middle member 330, and the left and right long lower portions 353 are front and rear of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. The upper member 352 is accommodated in the accommodating recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling off, so that the arrangement is fixed. Although it is configured, details will be described later together with the intention of arranging the light emitting means 351.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330, and is a tip of an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be displaced in a linear motion in the left-right direction. A slide portion 362 that is engaged with and slides and displaces with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted through the fastened portion 332d on the left side and rotates with the slide displacement of the slide portion 362. , Equipped with.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so that the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be received from above, an overhanging portion 362b that projects from the right side surface to the right side, and a lower side surface. It is provided with a guided portion 362c which is projected downward from the front-rear central portion of the

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the forming direction of the recessed portion 362a, it is possible to prevent the slide portion 362 from falling off upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disc portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is a portion for preventing the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction by being inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330. In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is formed to be long in the left-right direction, the posture of the slide portion 362 can be maintained by engaging the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, a circular shape or a rectangular shape.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed in a long cylindrical shape in the vertical direction at the L-shaped connecting portion, and penetrates a size capable of inserting the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330. A support cylinder portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylindrical portion 363b which is projected upward in a columnar shape from the short end side of the L-shape and is inserted into a through hole of the overhanging portion 362b, and an L-shaped longitudinal length. It is provided with a lower columnar portion 363c that protrudes downward from the side tip portion in a columnar shape and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

With the above configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. The displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger is displaced by being energized by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the overhanging portion 362b is displaced accordingly. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to slide and displace in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower members of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and is a lower bottom portion and a lower member of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. A thin plate portion 371 that is sandwiched and supported by the 380 from above and below, an upper protrusion 376 that projects upward from the thin plate portion 371 in pairs on the left and right, and a center on the left and right behind the upper protrusion 376. It is provided with a recessed portion 378 which is recessed at a protruding end of the protruding portion which is projected upward by the portion and is formed so as to be able to accept the lower columnar portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a formed through the rear half portion, and a front-rear length with a width shorter than the arrangement interval of the front side end portion to the upper protrusion portion 376 in the left-right central portion. A recessed portion 372 to be recessed, a pair of lower protrusions 373 to be projected downward in a protrusion shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, and a protrusion along the left and right edges in the rear half portion. A plurality of vertical protrusions 374 projecting in both the upper and lower directions in a strip shape, and a columnar protrusion 375 projecting downward from the rear end in a columnar shape and being inserted into the guide slot 386 of the lower member 380. Be prepared.

The lower ridge portion 373 and the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are portions that are supposed to face and slide with the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides, and are in the middle as compared with the contact on a flat surface. It is a ridge for reducing the contact area with the member 330 and the lower member 380. By reducing the contact area, the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

The upper projecting portion 376 is a columnar portion having a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is arranged so as to pass through the arrangement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332. The width and length of the left and right inner gaps of the upper projecting portion 376 are designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion portion 376.

In other words, the upper projecting portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap between the left and right inner sides, and is configured to suppress the displacement in the left-right direction by abutting with the partition plate portion 338. As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be satisfactorily guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 required to cause the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction. NS.

The protruding portion on which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to pass through the arrangement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332, so that the lower cylinder of the rotating portion 363 is formed. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

As described above, the shape of the placement through hole 332a includes the entire range in which the upper projecting portion 376 to be inserted and the projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged inside. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 has the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-shaped portion 382 formed in a long thin plate shape on the left and right, and a plurality of detection sensors (four in the present embodiment) on the lower side of the plate-shaped portion 382. It includes a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape so that SE1s can be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has an opening on the back side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the sphere passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 passes, and the other portion is closed. Is formed in.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has through holes formed at positions matching the through holes of the detection sensor SE1 in the same manner as the through holes in the vertical direction are formed in the sensor holding frame portion 389, and the two detection sensors on the left and right inside are formed. A ridge 383 that is projected upward in the shape of a long ridge in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of protrusions that are projected at positions separated from the front end of the ridge 383 to the left and right. A pair of guide protrusions 384 and guide protrusions 384 that are projected at positions rearward from the provision 383a and the supported holes 371a of the slide displacement member 370 at positions rearward from the protrusions 383. A pair of guide ridges 385 formed as long ridges in the front-rear direction at both positions on the left and right sides of the ridge, and a long hole-shaped guide ridge 386 extending in the same straight line as the ridge portion 383 in the top view. A curved surface portion 387 formed in the shape of a curved surface projecting rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 formed through the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330 so as to be inserted. ..

The ridge portion 383 is formed as a ridge having a thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370, and the slide displacement member 370 sandwiches the ridge portion 383 with the recessed portion 372. Be placed. That is, the ridge portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction.

The protrusion 383a is designed so that the left and right inner ends are at the same positions as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, by fitting the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusion 339 into contact with the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, the left and right ends of the middle member 330 with reference to the lower member 380 are left and right. The position of the direction can be determined appropriately. At the same time, the back side surface of the frame front portion of the lower member 380 (the portion connecting the protrusion portion 383 with the protrusion portion 383a on the front end side) and the front side surface of the alignment protrusion portion 339 are brought into contact with each other to lower the lower member. The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a misalignment between the third flow path constituent portion 336 as the configuration of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as the configuration of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long on the left and right, and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement within the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 and the ridge portion 383 from colliding with each other. Therefore, for example, the displacement end in the forward direction is determined by the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the ridge portion 383 collide. Compared with the configuration, the durability of the ridge portion 383 can be improved. Therefore, the guidance effect of the ridge portion 383 can be continuously played for a long time.

The guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is damaged, but functions as a portion for preventing a collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, normally, the design is made with a strength that can maintain the use for a set period (for example, 3 years) in a state where the guide protrusion 384 is not damaged, but after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the protrusion 383 is used. The strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed in anticipation of use in a state where the slide displacement member 370 collides with the slide displacement member 370. That is, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to be less than the set period (for example, 2 years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

The guide ridge 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and the thin plate portion 371 is formed so as to be able to be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inside of the guide ridge 385. As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be made small with a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide elongated hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width through which the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 can be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited in the front-rear direction by guiding the cylindrical protrusion 375 to the guide slot 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of a sphere flowing down below the middle member 330. In the present embodiment, the flow of the ball that has entered the out port 71 will be guided, and the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visually recognized. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right outside and the back side of the range in which the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 obstructs the view of the ball passing through the vicinity of the detection sensor SE1 or the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, that is, a guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, a guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, a recessed portion 372, and a lower protrusion 373. It is guided in the front-rear direction by being guided by the ridge portion 383, the guide slot 386 for the columnar protrusion 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper protrusion 376, and the like. As a result, the load at the time of guidance can be shared among a plurality of positions, so that it is possible to avoid applying the load locally, and it is possible to avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion for guiding the slide displacement member 370. Can be done.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper protrusions 376 are guided to the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 is guided to the protrusions 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are poorly assembled and the arrangement is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are preferably located so that the displacement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is kept small as a portion that continuously constitutes the flow path of the sphere. It can be guaranteed that the displacement is small.

In other words, if the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the slide displacement member 370 is not displaced well. Therefore, by detecting that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, it is possible to detect that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective. , It is possible to control to execute the error notification on the assumption that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective.

Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described. Here, a configuration related to the flow of the sphere inside the sorting device 300 and a configuration of entering the flow path side of the sphere will be mainly described.

FIG. 15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 on the XVII-XVII line, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 on the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG.

In addition, in FIGS. 15 to 18, when shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the state of being arranged at the front side position. First, the details of the flow path of the sphere flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

The ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b when the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6B) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path constituent portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335 that follows, and the third flow path component 336 that follows it are all configured as inclined flow paths that are inclined downward, and the flow paths that are connected to each other are connected to each other. Is formed in a spiral shape at an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down to the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path component 335 is based on the flow direction of the sphere that flows down the first flow path component 334. The third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the sphere to flow down in the left-right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path component 336 is the same as the previous rotation direction with reference to the flow direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows a sphere to flow down to the back side in the front-rear direction, which is rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

By forming the flow path in a spiral shape with a right-angled bending angle in this way, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the sphere increases toward the downstream side. More specifically, the sphere flowing down the first flow path component 334 accelerates toward the front side, but the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-rear direction component, so that the first flow path has no component. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence of the acceleration in the component unit 334 is suppressed. Further, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the flow flows backward in the direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path component 334, so that the flow is received from the acceleration in the front-rear direction. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence is suppressed.

Therefore, for example, unlike the flow-down mode in which the ball flows down in the same direction (for example, to the left) consistently from beginning to end, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive flow-down speed of the sphere on the downstream side. In other words, the flow velocity of the ball can be made uniform in the entire flow path, the player's attention to the ball can be kept high, and the situation where the player loses sight of the ball can be easily avoided. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path constituent portion 335, but it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged or backflow by forming the second flow path constituent portion 335. When the second flow path component 335 is not formed (when the length of the second flow path component 335 in the left-right direction is 0), that is, the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are formed. When they are connected, it is necessary to reverse the flow direction of the sphere from the flow on the front side to the flow on the rear side by 180 degrees at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the sphere is large, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth, so that it is difficult to flow the sphere smoothly, and the sphere is likely to stay, clog, and backflow, which is a problem. May occur.

On the other hand, if the switching angle in the flow direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in the present embodiment) as in the present embodiment, the sphere does not reverse in the velocity direction, so that the sphere flows smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid stagnation, clogging, and backflow of balls.

The shape of the flow path at the connection end of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical projecting portion 161f is arranged as a portion that guides the flow of the sphere in a manner of bending the flow direction of the sphere. Will be done.

The symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed so that the portion arranged on the downstream side of the sphere recedes from the path of the sphere rather than the portion arranged on the upstream side of the sphere. For example, the left-right width of the symmetrical projecting portions 161f arranged opposite to each other is formed longer than the left-right width of the partition plate portions 338 arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the rear end portions on the left and right end sides of the symmetrical projecting portions 161f arranged opposite to each other are arranged on the front side rather than the flow path side surface of the second flow path constituent portion 335 near the open portion 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

Thereby, when the sphere collides with the symmetrical projecting portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being excessively decelerated or causing a backflow of the sphere.

Further, at the connecting end portion between the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the first flow path constituent portion 334, the side wall portion 334a curvedly formed at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the sphere. It is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the sphere in an embodiment.

Further, at the upstream end portion of the first flow path constituent portion 334, the arrangement is lowered toward the front side (see FIG. 16), and the first flow path constituent portion 334 is projected upward from the lower surface portion of the flow surface. The curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the sphere in a manner of bending the flow direction of the sphere.

That is, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path constituent portion 334, and abuts on the side wall portion 334a during the flow to switch the flow direction, and the second flow direction is switched. The flow direction is switched by flowing down the flow path constituent portion 335 and abutting against the symmetrical projecting portion 161f during the flow down, and the third flow path constituent portion 336 flows down to reach the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed from a shape that can be aligned by engaging with the projecting support portion 161d of the fixed member 161. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right projecting support portions 161d, and the positional deviation in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 are aligned in the left-right direction. It can be performed.

The ratio of the inclination angle and the length in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 will be described. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. The flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path configuration unit 334, and is set to a slightly loose common inclination angle in the second flow path configuration unit 335 and the third flow path configuration unit 336.

Regarding the length, each flow path constituent portion 334 to 336 has a front side frame-shaped portion 333 formed in an outer square shape as an inner side surface in a top view, and has the same center as the center of the square formed by the front side frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed so that the large square it has is the outer side surface. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, so that a flow path having a width of 12 mm is formed around the perimeter. It is formed.

Therefore, with respect to a normally used sphere having a diameter of 11 mm, the total clearance with the flow path is 1 mm on both sides of the sphere, so that the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. .. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is defined by about 19 mm, it can be said that this is a small clearance, and the misalignment of the flowing sphere is caused. It can be suppressed.

Of the portions constituting the ends of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 arranged on the square surrounding the square front frame-shaped portion 333, the upstream end of the first flow path constituent 334 is used. Since only the curved protrusion 334b that constitutes the square is arranged inside (front side) from the apex of the square, the first flow path component 334 is attached to the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. Compared to short.

Speaking from the measured values in the top view, the flow paths formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 have substantially the same length (33 mm at the center of the sphere), and the length is The length of the flow path formed by the first flow path constituent member 334 (22 mm at the center of the sphere) is about 1.5 times.

From the ratio of the inclination angle and the length of each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 in the longitudinal direction, it can be explained that the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the time required to pass through the first flow path component 334 having the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is the second flow path component 335 in which the inclination angle is loosened and the path length is 1.5 times longer. And shorter than the time to pass through the third flow path component 336.

In the present embodiment, with this configuration, the arrangement shifts to the back side when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and a part of the detection sensor SE1 is hidden by the non-transparent resin portion. The state in which the visibility of the ball deteriorates can be quickly displaced to the front side, and the state can be switched to a state in which the ball is close to the player and the visibility of the ball is high. This makes it easier for the player to avoid losing sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Further, when the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the flow speed of the ball, it is not necessary for the player to quickly move the line of sight toward the ball, and the player's game burden (movement of the eyeball) paying attention to the ball. (Eye strain due to) can be reduced.

When paying attention to the sphere flowing down the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336, the sphere flows down in the left-right direction along the second flow path constituent portion 335. Compared with the case, when the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path component 336, the displacement amount of the ball in the front view is smaller, so that the player who pays attention to the ball has a game burden. , It can be minimized when paying attention to the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are the same, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path component 336. And are equivalent, but the amount of displacement of the sphere in the front view is different. As a result, the apparent flow velocity of the sphere (displacement velocity of the sphere in the front view) flows down the third flow path component 336. The sphere is slower than the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335.

The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which minimizes the game load and makes it easy to pay attention to the ball. It is common in. Therefore, the line of sight of the player is likely to be naturally concentrated on the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336, and the game burden of the player who concentrates the line of sight in this way can be effectively reduced.

Further, in order to secure the field of view of the player paying attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336, in the present embodiment, the open portion 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow path constituent portion 335. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to prevent the meat portion of the second flow path constituent unit 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path constituent unit 336.

Further, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f arranged inside the opening portion 335a is formed only with a portion necessary for contact and guidance with the flowing sphere, and the formation of the shaped portion is omitted on the upper and lower sides thereof. Will be done. In other words, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the upper and lower sides, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, as compared with the case where the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed with a thickness in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is obstructed by the symmetrical projecting portion 161f. It can be lowered and visibility can be improved.

Further, the spheres deviating from the opening / closing plate 65b and heading toward the out port 71 are gathered toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path constituent portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path constituent portion 336, comes into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming a line of sight for visually recognizing the ball flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336 from the diagonally upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path constituent portion 336. Therefore, since the sphere flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the sphere entering the out port 71 are covered in the front and rear and visually recognized, pay attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. The total number of spheres that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, it does not depend on the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or the ball that does not enter the specific winning opening 65a and enters the out opening 71. Enters the field of view paying attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the ball faces the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the nail configuration (so-called gauge quality) planted on the base plate 60, most of the fired balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end portion (the portion that attracts the attention of the player) of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is arranged at the position where the balls (excluding the balls that have entered the balls 64 and 140) gather and the positions where the balls are covered in the front-rear direction. As a result, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 by the flowing sphere.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side has been improved, but in the present embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. It is configured to reduce.

For example, a light diffusion processed surface 333b for causing a light diffusion action is formed on the inner surface of the front frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330 in a shape similar to a prism. In FIG. 17, the portion visually recognized as a sawtooth is the light diffusion processed surface 333b, which is formed on substantially the entire inner circumference of the inner side surface and over the upper and lower sides.

When the action of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, so that the entire surface is visually recognized as if it is shining. However, the visibility on the back side is deteriorated. According to the present embodiment, the visibility is deteriorated when the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 is irradiated with light, and conversely, when the light is not irradiated, at least compared with the state where the light is irradiated. The visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a shield between the light and the light, the shadow of the shield will be visually recognized as a black spot, and it will be easier to determine the position.

A processed surface similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side surface of the left and right outer projecting portions 319, a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side surface of the frame front portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332, and the like (FIG. 17). reference).

Further, the processed surface formed in the same shape is a plate-shaped portion extending on the back surface side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, and is formed on the front frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples thereof include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330, and the like. Will be done.

With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light is diffused to the back surface side, the lower surface side, the inner side surface of the vortex, and the upper side surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a vortex shape from each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336. A machined surface is formed to improve the visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where the light diffusion processed surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed from the third flow path component 336 to the left and right from the player's point of view paying attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 to make it difficult to see immediately.

Further, let's look at the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame portion 389 and dropped from the player's point of view, which visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336 when viewed from diagonally above. Even so, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, it becomes difficult to identify the sphere after passing through the detection sensor SE1 and falling due to the light irradiation on the light diffusion processed surface 340. ..

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is controlled so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

Therefore, in order to grasp how the sphere flowed down from the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the sphere at the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. , It is possible to further improve the attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

On the other hand, if the light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to configure a state in which the shadow of the sphere is easily recognized as a black spot. In this way, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation according to the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the sphere. Further, depending on the presence or absence of the arrangement of the spheres on the front side of the black spots, it is possible to configure a situation in which the black spots are hidden by the spheres and a situation in which the black spots appear not to be hidden by the spheres.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 are formed in the vicinity of the flow path constituents 334 to 336, but the flow formed by the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is consistently formed. It is formed on the side surface on the side that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the road.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 from being scraped due to contact with the sphere, so that the shapes of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. And can maintain the action of light diffusion.

Further, when the sphere comes into contact with the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down or being decelerated. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is reduced even while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path constituents 334 to 336. Can be avoided.

The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, the effect of causing the action of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the sphere by collision with the sphere can be achieved.

In the front frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility is maintained high without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is lowered by the fastening screw.

That is, since the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, it can be used as a blindfold in a place where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame-shaped portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusing processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and the fastening screw reflects light and shines in the portion where the formation of the light diffusing processed surface 333b is omitted, so that the light is diffused. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side, including the portion where the formation of the machined surface 333b is omitted.

The light diffusion processed surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336. For this purpose, the substrate 350 is arranged on the back side in addition to shining brightly. And to give rise to the function of the state switching device 360 as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 becomes a blindfold, and it is possible to easily prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by the player.

The substrate 350 is housed in a form of being supported by the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330, and is arranged in the left and right central portions with a gap from the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332, and slides in the gap. The displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the slide displacement member 370 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332.

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported so that the lower side portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 at the left and right end portions from the front and back (see FIG. 17). At this support location, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a wall thickness portion 332f which is considered to be a wall thickness (see FIG. 16), and there is a gap in the vicinity of the left and right center positions due to the absence of this wall thickness. Born, the slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodating recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is arranged so as to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper side portion 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a glittering effect, and further, the back side of the intervening member 164 can be produced. The visibility of the range of can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper side portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end portion of the light diffusion processed surface 164f, and the light diffusion processed surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape portion that imitates a prism along the surface. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to make it appear as if the light is emitted above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processed surface 164f is arranged at the left and right center side positions of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged on the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 obstructs the field of view and is good. Therefore, if it is formed in at least the arrangement gap of the pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be obtained.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate the seal member 313 and the portion arranged below the seal member 313 and the portion where the sphere flows down, and the details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the switching of the flow path of the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and its significance will be described. In the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 on the XVII-XVII line of FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 on the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. It is a figure. In FIGS. 19 and 20, when shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of a sphere to each detection sensor SE1, and the functions of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically, and include a probability variation detection sensor SE11 having a common function and a normal detection sensor SE12. The probability variation detection sensor SE11 is arranged inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged outside in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening / closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening / closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that pays out the prize ball. That is, when it is detected that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (10 for each detection in the present embodiment) are paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the prize ball to be paid out, but as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the jackpot game by detecting the incoming ball. Function.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 arranged in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching the presence / absence of transition to the probabilistic state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not to win the next big hit.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so as to cover the thin plate portion 371 on the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. The ball is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the sphere passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 so as to be guided by the upper protrusion portion 376 of the slide displacement member.

Since the front side surface 376a facing the sphere of the upper projecting portion 376 is formed in an arc shape having a concave flow path side, the flowing sphere can be smoothly flowed toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retracts rearward from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and enters the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. The passage of the ball is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the sphere passes through corresponds to the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (front position or rear position). Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, when it is not detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and only passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or the time saving state). ) Is controlled.

Here, it has been described above that in the present embodiment, probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots are prepared as jackpot types. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as the operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled so as to operate in an operation pattern so that the sphere easily passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in the case of a probability variation jackpot, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the sphere is controlled. The operation is controlled so as to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult for the probability variation detection sensor SE11 to pass through the through hole and normally makes it easy for the detection sensor SE12 to pass through the through hole. The details of the control will be described later.

As described above, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly linked to the profit obtained by the player, and the arrangement naturally attracts the attention of the player. On the other hand, not a few fraudulent acts that attempt to illegally switch the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 have been found, and countermeasures against them are regarded as important.

As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are arranged on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is in front. By being arranged on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front side position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left side by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, recess of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear side position by displacing the portion (the portion inserted into the setting portion 378) toward the back surface side. This is a normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraudulent act inserts a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through, for example, a ball payout opening or a gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). There is a possibility that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed inward to illegally create a state in which the ball can enter the probability variation detection sensor SE11. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, the thin plate portion 371 is arranged below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 (see FIG. 18), so that the third flow When the thin metal wire is passed through the road forming portion 336 and pressed against the slide displacement member 370, it is difficult to press it against the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371, and it is pressed against the upper projecting portion 376. Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to be released to the left and right outside as described above, even if a thin metal wire is pressed against the metal wire, the load can be released to the left and right outside. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is illegally displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 itself is far from the front side surface to the back surface side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). Since they are separated (about 10 cm), it is possible to make it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

From these configurations, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent activity, it is often configured to maintain the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 by mechanically devising a mechanism for transmitting the driving force (displacement regulation). The configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is configured so that the load is not easily applied to the slide displacement member 370, so that the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be freely designed. The degree can be increased.

Further, when a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire crawled through the third flow path constituent portion 336, the thin metal wire itself flows down the ball that is about to flow down the third flow path constituent portion 336. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the sphere to reach the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

As described above, the profit obtained by the player changes greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. It is desirable to avoid it.

In the conventional model, when the ball is allowed to enter the probability change detection sensor SE11, it is usually configured to restrict the ball from entering the detection sensor SE12, but in the present embodiment, the probability change detection is performed. There is no movable member that regulates the entry of the ball into the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the entry into the sensor SE11 is permitted (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the entry into the normal detection sensor SE12 is also allowed. It is a configuration that can be made to.

Even with this configuration, if 10 balls flow down and at least one of them passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the probability variation state after the big hit game is secured. In the present embodiment, from such an idea, the material cost can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12. Further, as a result of not arranging the movable member, maintenance due to a failure or malfunction of the movable member becomes unnecessary, and the pachinko machine can be used for a longer period of time than the life of the movable member.

On the other hand, as a device different from the movable member, as a device for guiding the ball to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319. And the shape are devised. That is, a portion (that is, a protrusion) in which a mechanism for preventing an unexpected ball from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position is fixedly arranged inside the flow path. It is designed to be realized by the shape of the installation part 317, 318, 319). This will be described below.

First, a device for the shape of the flow path will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal toward the center side in the left-right direction (partition plate portion 338 side) in the lateral direction. (See FIG. 15).

Since this inclination angle is set so that the angle and direction are the same as the inclination in the longitudinal direction of the second flow path constituent unit 335, the second flow path configuration unit 335 to the third flow path configuration unit 336 It is possible to reduce the bounce of the ball when the ball flows in (the bounce in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338).

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate portion 338 side. Therefore, the ball when flowing down from the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side can be arranged on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear side position. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball accidentally passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338) in the arranged state.

Further, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 has a left-right path formed only by the second flow path constituent portion 335. Since the inclination direction is the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the speed in the left-right direction is generated in the left-right inward direction. This also makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the ball accidentally passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, and 319 will be described. The spheres that have flowed down the third flow path constituent portion 336 are first arranged in close proximity to the left and right inner protrusions 318. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest protrusions among the protrusions 317, 318, and 319, but are on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and on the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is arranged on the front side of the partition plate portion 338, it comes into contact with a ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 without leakage while sliding on the partition plate portion 338.

The protruding tip surfaces of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are configured as a downwardly concave curved surface when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protruding portion is left and right than the front end side of the protruding portion. It is formed so as to spread outward and downward so that the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and abuts on the left and right inner projecting portions 318 receives a load in the direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed and flows down. ..

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are formed in a small size, the flow direction of the sphere is not determined by the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318, and the flow direction of the ball is not determined downward or left and right outward. Functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370, the above-mentioned momentum occurs regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

A case will be described separately for the flow of the sphere after it comes into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. In the state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the front position, the ball rolls the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while abutting on the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18). It moves and normally flows to the detection sensor SE12 side.

The protrusion end portion of the front-rear length protrusion portion 317 has the same use as the upper protrusion portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376. As a guide, the upper protrusion 376 constitutes a curved surface starting from the left and right inside and ending at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in top view (see FIG. 17), while the front and rear. The long projecting portion 317 has a curved surface whose starting point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose end point is close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction view. It is configured (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward to the left and right outside, and the sphere that is urged to the left and right outside by contact with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 makes use of that momentum. Since the flow flows in the left and right outward directions, the flow of the sphere can be smoothly formed.

Further, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the sphere that flows in the left-right outward direction, and the ball can be smoothly formed by suppressing the ball bounce. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the flow direction of the ball but to suppress the ball bounce, its shape is significantly different from that of the front-rear long protrusions 317, and the protrusion end is a probability change detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface having a large radius of curvature formed from above the SE 11 to above the normal detection sensor SE 12.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer protrusions 319 are arranged on the front side of the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer protrusions 319. When the installation portion 319 and the sphere come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the sphere is likely to be arranged on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right outer protrusion 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the sphere come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, it is possible to easily apply a load having a rearward component to the sphere, so that the sphere flows backward to the front side. Can be prevented.

From these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging or backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

In the state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper projecting portion 376 are retracted behind the front-rear long projecting portion 317, so that the ball is retracted rearward from the front-rear long projecting portion 317. It flows in contact with.

The front-rear length projecting portion 317 has a surface shape of the projecting end portion (curved surface) such that the normal line passes through the center of the third flow path constituent portion 336, and is the center of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Since the thickness center is arranged directly behind the position, it is easy to give a load in which the components in the left-right direction are suppressed to the abutted sphere. This load functions as a load for flowing the sphere diagonally forward and downward because the protruding tip of the front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that cannot reach the right by the momentum from the left and right inner projecting portions 318 receives the load from the front-rear long projecting portion 317 and flows diagonally downward to the front to the probability change detection sensor SE11 side.

Here, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (backflow occurs) depending on the collision location with the front-rear long protrusion 317, but in the present embodiment, as described above, the left and right internal collisions occur. Since the ball is squeezed diagonally downward from the left and right due to the collision with the installation part 318, even if the ball bounces to the front side, the ball will still be at the rear end of the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 20). , It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the third flow path constituent portion 336 flows backward only by colliding with the rear side surface (see FIG. 19) of the front side frame-shaped portion 333.

What is unique in this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position and the sphere flows to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 side, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position and the sphere flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. Similar to the case, the sphere is displaced outward from the left and right inner protrusions 318 due to the load. This application will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable at the front position and the rear position, and the slide displacement member is being moved down the third flow path component 336 toward the slide displacement member 370. When the 370 closes (moves from the rear position to the front position), a forward load may be applied to the sphere, and a load in the direction (forward) of causing the third flow path component 336 to flow backward to the sphere is applied. May be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the sphere reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility that the sphere collides with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, so that the sphere can flow backward. The sex can be lowered.

Further, the front surface of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing the left and right outer sides, and the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged so as to collide with each other without leaking to the sphere. It is possible to generate an action of guiding the sphere that has reached the rear end of the flow path constituent portion 336 to the left and right outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backflow of the sphere from occurring.

Further, since the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (the operation from the front side position to the rear side position) is not an operation in the direction opposite to the sphere but an operation in the direction away from the sphere, for example, the sphere is the slide displacement member 370. Even if the operation is executed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, the load of pushing the ball back to the front side is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is considered that the opening operation is not likely to cause backflow of the sphere even if the control is executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the sphere.

When the sphere rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (at the stage before it still flows to the left and right outside), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the sphere. Since the load is applied in the direction (backflip direction), the rotation of the sphere can be stopped, the flow of the sphere is stopped, and it is easy to move to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 opens while the sphere is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from being guided by the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of the rolling up to that point. , The ball can be easily guided to the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

The appearance of the distribution device 300 from the player's point of view in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment including the above-mentioned distribution device 300 will be described. In the following, as an example, cases will be described separately in a state where the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different.

21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of arrow XXII of FIG. 16, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. 16 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in his / her favorite posture except that he / she grips and rotates the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, the game is played by sufficiently separating the head from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in a direction of horizontal or downward inclination of about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, the game may be performed by bringing the head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction of descending and tilting by about 30 degrees from the horizontal. In general, the former can secure a wider field of view, but it is difficult to notice small parts, while the latter has a narrow field of view, but it is easy to notice small parts in the field of view.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be made mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. In addition, in FIGS. 21 to 23, the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b is shown for convenience.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half portion is shown for ease of understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the uppermost portion are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half portion arranged in the lower portion 353 will be described here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates the seal member 313 with light. Since the seal member 313 is formed to be transparent in red as described above, when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. Thereby, the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is arranged directly above the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path component 336 can be noticed.

The formation of the light diffusion processed surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the light emitting means 351 from being visually recognized as being stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processed surface 332e, and to concentrate the light around the seal member 313.

The light emission control is not limited at all, but for example, during the jackpot game, the seal member 313 is controlled to irradiate light in a situation where it is desired to pay attention to the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336. By doing so, the seal member 313 can be focused on, and the line of sight can be naturally guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 arranged below the seal member 313.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 causes the light emitting means 351 arranged at a position directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 to emit light when the ball enters the probability change detection sensor SE11, while the ball causes the normal detection sensor SE12 to emit light. When the ball enters, the player can be notified of the passing position of the ball by controlling the light emitting means 351 arranged at a position directly above the detection sensor SE12 to emit light.

The light emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processed surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center side is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each portion.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351 but is formed as a range in which the light is spread vertically (as a band-shaped light extending vertically). Visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the line of sight of the player changes.

The angle of downward inclination (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path constituent portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, in the directional view at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 is narrowed, so that it is compared with the directional view in FIG. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to confirm the switching of the flow mode of the sphere at the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. However, in this view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Since the through hole 332a for arranging the middle member 330 is formed as an opening having a minimum size sufficient for passing the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370, the inside of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) arranged in the above can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, and flow down the flow path constituents 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336, the line of sight toward the sphere on the back side may be obstructed by the sphere on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path constituent unit 336, the spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the sphere on the front side hides the sphere on the back side.

Further, when the sphere normally flows to the detection sensor SE12 side, it flows in the left-right outward direction from the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. After deviating from the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced by the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame-shaped portion 333, so that the movement of the sphere in the process of deviating from the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction When it is preferable to grasp the above, the light flows from the downstream end position (position of the sphere P1) of the second flow path constituent portion 335 to the upstream end position (position of the sphere P2) of the third flow path constituent portion 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere slightly deviated from the third flow path constituent portion 336 in the left-right direction), the sphere hides a sphere in the process of deviating from the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether or not the sphere has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 is determined by whether or not the flow direction of the sphere is switched to the left and right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. This is possible by visual inspection, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the periphery of the right edge portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path component 336 and the second flow path component 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and right of the third flow path component 336. It is configured so that the sphere can flow down along a path including the periphery of the edge (movement from the position of the sphere P1 to the position of the sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the upstream side, it may be difficult to grasp whether the spheres have flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

Further, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the sphere flowing through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the sphere flowing through the second flow path constituent portion 335 are clearly separated by the arrangement in the vertical direction, so that the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized in the directional view is reduced.

In particular, as described above, the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path constituent portion 336 heads for the probability variation detection sensor SE11 after once flowing diagonally downward to the right regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. The flow path is switched between the flow path and the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the sphere visually recognized at the switching position is smaller than that of the case where the sphere is switched as the flow path of the sphere depending on whether the sphere flows directly below or the flow direction of the sphere is switched to the right.

As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is arranged on the upstream side, as in the case where the flow path of the sphere flows directly below or switches to the right. For example, when the left and right inner protrusions 318 are not formed and the sphere toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. It is located behind the center line of the component 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right side of the center line rear of the third flow path constituent portion 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere is located below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. By falling (only the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the sphere is attached to the third flow path constituent portion 336 itself. In addition to the action of partially hiding, the sphere is displaced to the left and right outside the range visible through the third flow path constituent portion 336, so that a part of the sphere is hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333.

Therefore, since the area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 that can be seen from the player's point of view becomes small, it is difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. As a result, it is possible to further improve the attention to the sphere flowing down near the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as the directional view for identifying the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. , Each has its strengths and weaknesses. As a result, even if the method of visually recognizing the sorting device 300 is taken, the player can be made to adjust and select the preferred visual method, instead of requiring the player to play a one-sided game, and the game mode can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player gets tired of the game.

The player's field of view can be secured by various methods, but in the present embodiment, in particular, a gap is formed between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310 to form a third flow path constituent portion. Since the roof portion of the 336 can be removed, the third flow path constituent portion 336 can be easily visually recognized.

Regarding the directional view of FIGS. 22 and 23, the visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, since the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, they are transmitted depending on the thickness of the members. Since less light is emitted, the field of vision is obstructed.

Since the range in which the field of view is blocked by the front design member 162 is narrowed, the directional view in FIG. 23 can make it easier to see the sphere flowing down inside the sorting device 300 as compared with the directional view in FIG. There is sex.

The fixed member 161 and the pre-design member 162 basically have a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light is unlikely to occur (see FIG. 12). As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the sorting device 300 from being deteriorated.

It is formed so that the influence on the visibility is small even for the portion that cannot be functionally flat. For example, the projecting support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the distribution device 300 allow the player to look at the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 so as not to block the line of sight of the player facing diagonally downward. It is arranged outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outside, left and right side lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed thinly with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is arranged between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden, so that the ball flowing down the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336. Visibility can be ensured.

A ball deviating from the specific winning opening 65a flows down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flows down toward the out opening 71. The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of view will be described.

In FIGS. 22 and 23, an example of the arrangement of the spheres flowing down toward the out port 71 in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b is shown. While the opening / closing plate 65b is open, the ball flowing down from above the opening / closing plate 65b rides on the opening / closing plate 65b and is guided to the specific winning opening 65a side. Therefore, the ball flowing down toward the out opening 71 is the opening / closing plate. It becomes a sphere deviated to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extension portion 162b and the extension portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down toward the out port 71.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the arrangement of the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 is below each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336. It is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the visibility of the sphere flowing down the constituent units 334 to 336.

On the other hand, the flow of the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 is a mode in which the ball flows down toward the center side in the left-right direction of the game area at a gentle angle, similar to the flow of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335. Similar to the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335, it has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center positions of the game area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path component 336. That is, since the left-right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path constituent unit 336 are the same positions (left-right center positions), the player moves his / her line of sight up and down to move the out port 71 and the third flow path. The line of sight is guided to a state in which both of the constituent units 336 can be visually recognized.

Therefore, whether the ball launched toward the game area can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening 65a (whether the amount of wasted ball during the big hit game can be reduced) or the extension portion 162b and the extension portion are deviated. The effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path component 336 by the flowing ball regardless of whether the ball flowing down between the 162c and the ball frequently occurs (whether the waste ball during the big hit game frequently occurs). Can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path component 336 while flowing down the second flow path component 335, and the ball can be guided to the specific winning port 65a. In the case of deviating from the above, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path component 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

The ball heading to the out port 71 usually does not cause any action in the game as a waste ball, but in the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, the player's line of sight to the ball heading to the out port 71. Can have a role of guiding to the third flow path constituent unit 336.

In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball flows on the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b and passes on the front side of the second flow path component 335, so that the visibility of the second flow path component 335 can be reduced. There is sex.

On the other hand, the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left and right center positions of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the left and right center position of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so that the ball can be prevented from flowing down on the front side of the third flow path constituent portion 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility around the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the rear end portion is lowered due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the formation length of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336, but the arrangement is likely to occur as an adverse effect. We are trying to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path constituent unit 336. Is formed short.

Not only that, since the slide displacement member 370 is arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. 23, a line of sight that frequently occurs as a player's line of sight toward the rear side diagonally downward. In, it is visually recognized that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 is so close to the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 bites into the outer shape.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a configured to be long on the left and right and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at both left and right ends thereof has a symmetrical flow path configuration. It is collected in the lower left and right center side of the specific winning opening 65a via the sections 334 to 336. As a result, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened as compared with the case where the ball flows down the left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a in the left-right direction. In addition, since the structure required as the flow path of the sphere can be a structure in which the left-right length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it is possible to easily arrange the structure near the lower edge portion of the curved inner rail 61. can.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the design concept is that the specific winning opening 65a is arranged close to the out opening 71, but the structure is not such that the ball flows down from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path constituent portion 335, but the second. By adopting a structure in which the sphere flows backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path component 335 by the third flow path component 336, it is arranged on the out port 71 (front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387). Can be formed at a position directly below the second flow path constituent portion 335. As a result, the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by shortening the vertical arrangement width and the horizontal width of the specific winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's point of view, it is specified in the design of the game area in which the size in the front view is limited to a certain standard. Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

For example, as in the present embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the game area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in the symmetrical game area.

Next, an example of the flow of the ball after entering the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessory (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow will be described.

First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 in this order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is set to pass in about 0.3 seconds. It is designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path after entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the component 336.

Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, it is arranged at the rear end of the third flow path constituent unit 336 for 0.9 seconds. It is configured so that the sphere does not reach the detection sensor SE1 to be generated. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, the position of the slide displacement member 370 does not move, and the ball cannot pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. , The operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without fear of erroneous winning of the ball.

Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winning of the V winning sensor, which is generally seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V probability change attacker, control is performed to release the opening / closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R (the operation of the opening / closing plate is unsuitable). Control with naturalness) can be eliminated. As a result, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate for opening / closing the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment in which he / she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine provided with the V probability variation attacker in the above example, the ball entering immediately after the opening of the V probability variation attacker is likely to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, immediately after opening. On the contrary, a favorable effect (for example, an effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 with a ball) is produced by the ball entering the ball, so that it is not necessary to devise a method for preventing the ball from entering immediately after opening. ..

The time required for the sphere to pass can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (smooth or uneven shape, etc.).

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram of the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 will be in the range of "0-9". Is defined with the jackpot A1 associated with it (see 202b1 in FIG. 24B).

When the jackpot is A1, the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

The jackpot A2 is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 19" (see 202b2 in FIG. 24 (b)).

When the jackpot is A2, the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 39", the jackpot B1 is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 24 (b)).

When the jackpot is B1, a 4-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

The jackpot B2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 49" (see 202b4 in FIG. 24 (b)).

When the jackpot is B2, the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79", the jackpot C1 is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 24 (b)).

When the jackpot is C1, a 4-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

The jackpot C2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 24 (b)).

When the jackpot is C2, the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the big hit game of 4 rounds is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large number of prize balls as compared with the case where a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 described later. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start launching the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition at an early stage.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 140), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", which is a big hit. a is associated and defined (see 202b7 in FIG. 24B).

When the jackpot a is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is executed in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry of the ball into the second winning opening 140), the big hit game of 15 rounds is selected in any case. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery can obtain a large amount of payout prize balls as compared with the case where the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery is won, so that the player can obtain the special symbol. It is possible to increase the motivation to perform a game for performing the lottery of 2 (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning opening 140).

Further, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed by the operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the disadvantage caused to the player will be large even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, there is a disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but there is an advantage that the ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a. When there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern, the special symbol 2 is drawn. By setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot in the third operation pattern, the influence of the disadvantages can be reduced and only the advantage that the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened can be emphasized. ..

That is, since it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery of the special symbol 2 will be delayed, it is possible to realize a jackpot game that is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of paying out the prize balls is good).

The setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as a jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. Further, this jackpot type may be provided at a small ratio (for example, about 20%).

As a result, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game indiscriminately. That is, the displacement motion of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by the player, the player can be delighted at the timing of the displacement motion, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second winning opening 140, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) when it becomes a big hit, is repeated. Since it becomes easier, it becomes easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal winning opening 67 and the second hit random number table 202c are referred to, and the hit of the normal symbol is hit. It is judged whether or not it is. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing time-dependent changes in the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 in the first round and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in each jackpot type.

When the jackpot is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described. In the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the jackpot type only in the first round, and the driving mode is common to the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

In the case of jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. The MPU 201 has an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the ball into the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is executed at intervals of 1.0 second, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

The initial opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) are used. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set to limit the number of balls entering the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a to one while the opening / closing plate 65b is open. It is a setting of the opening time to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the specific winning opening 65a in a row (hereinafter, also referred to as "entering with a continuous ball"), and entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball each reaches the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a and enters the specific winning opening 65a at a time.

In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening / closing plate 65b. In the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front side position at the same time as the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The drive is controlled so that it is displaced to the rear position.

Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). ..

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility is not reduced by the other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In the case of the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening / closing plate 65b. In the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front side position at the same time as the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The drive is controlled so as to displace to the rear position, and the slide displacement member 370 is drive-controlled to displace from the rear position to the front position after 0.8 seconds have elapsed.

As described above, since the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds, before the sphere reaches the slide displacement member 370. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). ..

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility is not reduced by the other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The idea that 0.8 seconds as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and the sphere is the third flow path component. It is set from the idea that the time is longer than the time required to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, about 0.6 seconds after the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336. Even if a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening / closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336. The 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path constituent unit 336 regardless of the ball entry timing ( See FIG. 22). As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and the attention force to the sphere flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 as a sphere entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be improved.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced before the sphere reaches the third flow path component 336, it is unlikely that the sphere will block the line of sight, and the slide displacement member 370 is displaced. Can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path constituent portion 335 is arranged close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is arranged closer to the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight. Is likely to gather on a sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335. That is, by paying attention to the sphere flowing down the second flow path constituent unit 335 (for example, by displaying "Attention to the flowing sphere!" On the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. Can be easily avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336 is configured to be separated at the center on the left and right, so that if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a on one side on the left or right side, the ball enters. By paying attention to the rear side of the third flow path constituent portion 336 on the non-existing side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the flowing ball (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving the attention to the spheres. At the same time, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of jackpot B1 or jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. The MPU 201 has an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the ball into the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 second is executed at intervals of 1.0 second, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

The initial opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) are used. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 1.0 second in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. This is an opening time setting for allowing a plurality of balls to enter in a row on one of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as "entering with a continuous ball").

In this control example, the firing interval of the balls is 0.6 seconds, so even if the flow interval of the balls does not change from that at the time of firing, the opening / closing plate 65b opens once in 1.0 seconds. In the meantime, two balls may enter the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, the next ball passes through each flow path constituent unit 334 before the two balls pass through each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336. Entry into ~ 336 can be regulated.

In the case of the jackpot B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. Further, in the case of the jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot B1, the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the jackpot B2, the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. Pass through.

At this time, the appearance of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 differs depending on whether the number of spheres arranged in the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is one or two (or more). When there is one ball arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls as in the case of the jackpots A1 and A2. The person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the sphere passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball. Therefore, the visibility of the sphere on the downstream side may decrease. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336. ..

In the case of jackpot C1, jackpot C2 or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. The MPU 201 has an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to make it an open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The opening / closing plate 65b is allowed to operate for a long time within the operating time T1.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In this control example, since the opening / closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a in a continuous ball. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, the next sphere is moved before the two spheres pass through the flow path constituents 334 to 336. It may also occur that the ball enters the flow path constituents 334 to 336. Therefore, as compared with the second operation pattern, in the third operation pattern, the visibility of the spheres arranged on the downstream side of each flow path component 334 to 336 is improved by the spheres arranged on the upstream side. A situation of decline is likely to occur.

In the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. Further, in the case of the jackpot C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the jackpot C2, the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is normal. It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is such that the opening / closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Since the time required for reaching is controlled from the structure, the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball biting can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 differs depending on whether the number of spheres arranged in the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is one or two. When there is one ball arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls as in the case of the jackpots A1 and A2. The person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the sphere passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two balls arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, so that the downstream ball is arranged in the line of sight of the player. The visibility of the sphere on the side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336. ..

In the third operation pattern, there is no limit to the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a can be entered in the first round game R. The arrangement of spheres tends to be disordered. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 tends to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no limit to the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a can be entered has the effect of allowing the round game R to proceed at an early stage. That is, a specified number of balls as a round end condition (the passage of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls). It is easy to fill the prize at an early stage, and it is possible to avoid delaying the jackpot game.

In particular, in the jackpot of the special symbol 2, the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X with a 100% probability. Therefore, if the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a, the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low in the first place.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, it is possible to realize the progress of the jackpot game in a short time by giving priority to avoiding the delay of the jackpot game while intentionally allowing the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate in visibility. By trying to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means is an electromagnetic solenoid so as to keep the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. The 165c is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the winning opening. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to open 65a, so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates for a long time. Since the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front side position after the second round, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see FIG. 17).

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R ends.

After that, as in the second round, the round game R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the opening / closing plate 65b Is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this control example, the case where the short-open displacement operation of the opening / closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

As described above, according to this control example, the mode of entering the ball into the opening / closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening pattern (first operating pattern to the third operating pattern) of the opening / closing plate 65b, and each flow. The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the road forming unit 334 to 336 and the third flow path forming unit 336 can be made different. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the third flow path constituent unit 336 to devise the launch mode of the ball.

For example, the decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in the flow path constituents 334 to 336, and therefore, if necessary (for example, a second operation pattern or a second operation pattern or By intentionally widening the firing interval of the ball (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In the first operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is widened, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be delayed. That is, the player can be made to select the method of playing the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which the avoidance of the extension of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a slight period (for example, 1.0 second) is allowed after the start of the round game R so that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Is also good. In this case, the situation where the ball is arranged in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (the timing when 0.8 seconds have passed from the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y) is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being blocked by the sphere.

On the other hand, if the period until the ball is launched is left open, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can be made to select the method of playing the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which the avoidance of the extension of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, according to the present embodiment, the flow path constituents 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are symmetrically configured, and a ball can be inserted from either the left or right side through the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned firing mode for widening the firing interval of the ball and the firing mode for leaving a period until the ball is launched are maintained in the ball entry on the left side, and the ball is launched in any launch mode for the ball entry on the right side. Even if the game is to fire, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, as a launch mode in which the launch of the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is divided into left and right, at least the first ball is launched to the right, and some (for example, the second) ball is launched. Can be fired to the left and the remaining balls can be fired to the right.

In this case, by paying attention to the spheres flowing down the left flow path instead of paying attention to the spheres flowing down the right flow path as the flow path constituents 334 to 336, it is possible to prevent the line of sight from being blocked by other spheres. While doing so, it is possible to visually recognize whether or not the sphere flowing down the left flow path passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are constantly fired toward the right side portion of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid extending the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent the round game R from being delayed.

It should be noted that the purpose of launching the ball to the left and right is not to make one ball enter the left flow path. In particular, it suffices if the number of spheres arranged in each of the left flow path constituents 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of spheres passes through the left flow path, and other periods. In the case, it is sufficient to hit the ball so as to arbitrarily enter the ball into the left and right flow paths.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the path where the ball enters a small number of paths from the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of the nails (see FIG. 2)). In this case as well, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which balls heading for the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of them spills to the left and right outside of the specific winning opening 65a. Although the nail arrangement is asymmetrical in FIG. 2, the nail arrangement may be symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

FIG. 26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the back side is visually visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the bottom wall portion 511 and the outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The back case 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that is projected toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. It is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 513b in which fastening screws to be fastened to the above can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 arranged on the inner right portion of the rear case 510, and a second operation unit 700 arranged on the inner lower portion of the rear case 510. A third operating unit 800, which is arranged on the inner upper part of the rear case 510, is provided. In addition, on the inner left part of the back case 510, a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED and the substrate are arranged so as to cover the substrate from the front side and formed of a light-transmitting material, and light diffusion processing is performed throughout. The diffusion decorative plate LB1 to be formed is arranged.

Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is at the right position of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is at the lower position of the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is at the upper position of the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the case 510. First, an outline of the operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. In FIG. 28, each operation unit 600 to 800 in the effect standby state is shown, and in FIG. 29, a state in which the first operation unit 600 is changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the overhang state is shown. FIG. 30 shows a state in which the second operation unit 700 is changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the overhanging state.

In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is shown in a state in which the surface of the lining member 787 facing the front side is different from that of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIG. 29.

In FIGS. 28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Inside this, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be clearly seen, but on the outside of the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member. , The view is easily obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, various winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, in a state where the center frame 86 is arranged outside as shown in FIG. 28, the visibility of each operation unit 600 to 800 in the front view tends to decrease.

The frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operation unit 500, but its role is the same. Further, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, and the center frame. On the inner frame side of the 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is overhanging so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the actual upper part of the center frame 86 (upper part of the outer frame) is the third operation. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 on the left and right.

31 and 32 show a state in which the third operation unit 800 is changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the overhanging state. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side and the individual united state of the third operating unit 800 is illustrated. In FIG. 32, the second decorative member 880 faces the front side and a series of the third operating units 800. The coalesced state is illustrated.

The displacement in which the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 can be switched occurs in a displacement mode in which the linear displacement and the rotational displacement are combined. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 collide with each other to cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the overhanging state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in an overhanging state (or a state in which the decorative members are downwardly displaced to an extent sufficient to avoid collision of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the effect standby state). Assuming that the displacement of 870 and 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) executes the reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). It is controlled, but details will be described later.

In FIG. 33, the third operating unit 800 in the overhanging state and the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state in which the displacement is slightly downward from the overhanging state are shown, and in FIG. 34, the first operating unit from the state of FIG. 33 is shown. The state in which the 600 is displaced to the intermediate effect state is illustrated, and in FIG. 35, the state in which the third operation unit 800 is displaced to the effect standby state and the first operation unit 600 is displaced to the overhang state from the state of FIG. 33 is shown. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement locus of the third operation unit 800 and the displacement locus of the first operation unit 600 or the displacement locus of the second operation unit 700 partially overlap in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 31), if the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes state from the effect standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state can be executably controlled on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the third operation. The first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can be moved by controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the effect standby state to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state. It is possible to avoid overlapping in front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 can be improved (the front-rear positions can be allowed to overlap).

Further, in the present embodiment, the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the overhang state can be executably controlled on condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state. By setting the arrangement of the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) when the third operating unit 800 is in the overhanging state, the second operating unit 700 is in front of the other operating units 600 and 800. It is possible to avoid overlapping visually. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging each of the operating units 600 to 800 (it is possible to allow the front and rear positions to overlap).

In particular, as the visual state of the second operating unit 700, there are a plurality of cases where the second operating unit 700 is visually recognized in an overhanging state closer to the opening 511a and a case where the second operating unit 700 is visually recognized in a state of being placed close to the third operating unit 800 although it slightly recedes from the opening 511a. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as an effect device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first effect surface 661a facing diagonally to the left in the effect standby state and a first effect thereof. It includes a second effect surface 661b formed on the back surface side of the surface 661a, and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b. The production surfaces 661a to 661c are optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

In the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first production surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the front surface is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with respect to the arrow FB), the third effect surface is the third. The first in the player's eyes to visually recognize the second decorative rotating member 660 from the inside of the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 in an oblique direction passing through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81. The visibility of the effect surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is extended to the front of the third symbol display device 81 so as to the player who visually recognizes the inside of the center frame 86. Face to face. In this case, since the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the second effect surface 661b is directed directly in front of the player, the visibility of the second effect surface 661b from the player's point of view of viewing the second decorative rotating member 660. Can be improved.

As described above, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured so that the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player can be switched according to the arrangement, and the visibility of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player can be improved. For the purpose of improvement, the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

In other words, it is designed not only to change the posture in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) but also to change the angle intended for the relationship with the line of sight of the player. That is, the more the center frame 86 is arranged on the center side of the frame, the more the player's line of sight is in the front-rear direction and it is easier to face each other. Since the player's line of sight tends to be slanted as the position is closer to the frame of the center frame 86, the visibility can be improved by slanting the production surface so as to face the line of sight.

With the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is interlocked and displaced. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 34) of the first operation unit 600, the rear case 510 By arranging it in the upper right corner, it is hidden so that it cannot be seen by the player.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 28), the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the center frame 86 overlaps the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front-rear view. By arranging it inside the frame, it is configured so that the player can see it.

In this state, the outer right end portion of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front surface of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that makes the player feel as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is expanded.

More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operation unit 600, and in the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member The left edge of the first effect surface 661a of the 660 and the right end RE1 of the region in which the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized substantially coincide with each other.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to exceed the right end RE1 of the region to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration on the front surface of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the right end RE1 of the area. It can be visually recognized by the player as if it were expanded beyond. As a result, it is possible to realize an unexpected effect.

Examples of matching the above display with the decoration include an example in which a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the decoration on the front surface of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is made to have the same polka dot pattern. A certain number is written on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the same typeface as the typeface of the numbers (for example, the numbers for notifying the success or failure of the lottery) that are variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An example of doing so is illustrated.

As an example of associating the above-mentioned display with the decoration, for example, 6 colors out of the 7 colors constituting the rainbow color are displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the front surface of the overhanging decoration portion 652b remains. An example of coloring with one color and a wooden stick arranged so as to align the right end with the right end RE1 of the area are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example is exemplified in which the first operating unit 600 is reminiscent of ignition in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600.

The production mode of the overhanging decoration portion 652b is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types of production modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhanging decoration portion 652b. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of unit 652b will be described later.

Further, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types, so that the display exceeds the right end RE1 of the area. It is possible to avoid that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the display area is enlarged is restricted.

Further, the object to be associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to the display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decoration portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member of the second operation unit 700 (for example, the lining member 787). , The decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the decoration formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first covering portion 875, the second covering). It may be related to the decoration of the setting part 885).

FIG. 36 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and at the same time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is the second decorative rotating member 660. By relative displacement with reference to, the player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

FIG. 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, and a rotating member 620 that is rotatably supported by the fixed means 610. A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. A first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably arranged at the other end of the supported member 640, and a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650. A decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610 is provided.

The fixed means 610 is arranged so as to form a space between the base member 611 arranged to face the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 in the front-rear direction and the base member 611 arranged on the front side of the base member 611, and the base member 611. The front lid member 612, which is fastened and fixed to the vehicle, is provided.

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion 614 thereof. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Be prepared.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are mixed, and details and actions thereof will be described later.

The rotating member 620 is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 formed in the shape of a long plate and the main body 621, and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. Cylindrical portion 622, a transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the middle portion of the main body portion 621 as a long hole extending in a linear direction, and an axial direction of the tubular portion 622 at the other end (upper end portion) of the main body portion 621. A circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to the above, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624. Be prepared.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the tubular portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm is in contact with the side wall of the main body 621 and the other arm is in contact with the projecting piece of the front lid member 612, and the direction in which the rotating member 620 is raised (front surface). It is configured to generate an urging force (in the clockwise direction).

In the shaft support of the tubular portion 622, the fastening screw is screwed into the female screw portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615 in a state where the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the tubular portion 622. NS. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

The transmission elongated hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, the details will be described later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front lid member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding toward the back side through a through hole 613a of the front lid member 612, and the drive gear 632 thereof. A transmission gear 633 that is pivotally supported by the tubular portion 613b of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam that is pivotally supported by the tubular portion 613c of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634 and.

With the tubular portions 613b and 613c inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, the fastening screw is screwed into the female screw portion formed at the tip of the tubular portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front lid member 612 is formed with an arcuate hole 613d penetrating along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c, and the arcuate hole 613d is on the front side at the eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634. A cylindrical portion 634a projecting in a cylindrical shape is inserted into the cylinder.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member including a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position including the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and the cylindrical portion 634a. It is provided with a setting portion 634b.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arcuate hole 613d, and is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side thereof. Here, the width and length of the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides on the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 which is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can grasp the posture of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body portion 641, a cylindrical portion 642 projecting from the back surface side of the main body portion 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into a circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, and a cylindrical portion 642 thereof. A cylindrical portion 643 projecting in parallel with the cylindrical portion 642, and an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be meshable with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 643. , A bottomed cylindrical portion 645 formed in a large-diameter cylindrical shape having a perforated bottom portion on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end portion on which the bottomed tubular portion 645 is arranged. It is provided with an extension support portion 646 extending to the front side of the portion.

With the above configuration, the driving force can be transmitted between the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by the meshing with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

With the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, the fastening screw is screwed into the female screw portion formed at the tip of the tubular portion 642, 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported by the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

In the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the back side of the bottom portion is arranged close to the front side edge portion of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can be meshed on the front side of the bottom portion. It is provided with an opening 645a formed in a peripheral surface portion so as to be such that, and an insertion hole 645b formed through a circular shape centered on a tubular center and capable of inserting a cylindrical support portion 651a. The details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, which will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming an orthogonal rotation axis, a front side rotating member 652 pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, and a front side rotating member 652 thereof. The illuminated substrate 653, which is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side, and the rear rotating member 654, which is fastened and fixed to the rear side coaxially with the front rotating member 652. A wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space as a wiring thread, and a fastening screw that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side. It includes a front decorative portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and an axially perpendicular rotating member 657 that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by a cylindrical portion formed by a wiring receiving member 655 and a main body member 651.

The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a tubular shape on the back surface side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip portion, and the female screw thereof. A notch 651c is provided on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b so as to reduce the wall portion.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the notch portion 651c has a function as an opening for securing an inlet for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a has, in order from the base end side, the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed tubular portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1 and the front lid. It is inserted into the guide slot 616 of the member 612, and the fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is screwed into the female screw portion 651b at the tip thereof to fasten and fix the member.

That is, the above-mentioned cylindrical support portion 651a, front rotating member 652, rear rotating member 654, bottomed tubular portion 645, collar C1 and dish-shaped lid portion C2 are coaxially supported by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction and guided. It is configured to be displaceable along the elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of the circumferential portion, and the opening C2a is arranged to face the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state, so that the path of the electric wiring can be passed. To form.

In this electrical wiring, a part of the wiring passes through the inside of the axis perpendicular rotation member 657, is guided to the inside of the second decorative rotation member 660, and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the illumination board 662. Further, other wiring is formed in a gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (upper side, that is, on the side opposite to the upper and lower sides of the half-cylinder shape portion 655a and facing the main body member 651. The terminal is connected to the connector of the illuminated substrate 653 by being guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b through the gap).

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumferential portion of the rear end portion, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to be meshable with each other. The gear teeth 654a are formed along a part of the circumference, not over the entire circumference, as a sufficient arrangement for the operation described later.

The front rotating member 652 includes a gear tooth 652a formed as a bevel gear and an overhanging decorative portion 652b projecting outward in diameter. An illuminated substrate 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and an effect of lighting or blinking the overhanging decorative portion 652b by light from a light emitting means arranged on the illuminated substrate 653 is executed. It is possible.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axially perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and is rotatably supported by the gear of the front rotating member 652. It is provided with a gear tooth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can be meshed with the tooth 652a.

With this configuration, the axially perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axially perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked with each other, but the details of the operation will be described later. The gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed along a part of the circumference, not over the entire circumference, as a sufficient arrangement for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axially perpendicular rotating member 657, an illuminated substrate 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. A wiring fastening plate 663 that is disposed between the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 and fastened and fixed to the tip portions of the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a.

In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 662 is also rotationally displaced with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661, which will be described later. Therefore, when guided by the connector of the illuminated substrate 662, the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663 having a through hole for temporarily fastening the wiring causes the wiring to be twisted or disordered. We are trying to avoid being placed in.

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illuminated substrate 662, it is inevitable that the electrical wiring will be twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so that an excessive load is applied to the electrical wiring or electricity is applied. It is possible to avoid the situation where the wiring is broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed from a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is rotatably configured by a rotating shaft (rotating shaft formed by the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. NS.

In the shaft right-angled rotating member 657, the wiring retaining plate 663 functions as a retaining plate and is supported by the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a so as not to fall off. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axially perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second decorative rotating member 660 comes off from the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a.

The illumination substrate 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 coincide with each other. On the side surface of the illuminated substrate 662 in the thickness direction, the first effect surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED which is arranged on the front side and the optical axis faces in the thickness direction, and is arranged on the back side and the optical axis faces in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second effect surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction. Is done.

As described above, the light emitting means arranged on the illuminated substrate 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c, but the LED illuminating the third effect surface 661c is on the back side (second effect surface 661b). By being arranged on the illuminating side), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated in the state where the second effect surface 661b is arranged on the front side (the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED is made to emit light, the second effect surface 661b can be illuminated by the light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where the LED is arranged behind the illumination substrate 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the illumination substrate 662. Therefore, the light illuminating the third production surface 661c causes the second production surface 661b. Can also be illuminated. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effect modes that illuminate the second effect surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second effect surface 661b during the light emission effect.

The decorative fixing member 670 includes an illuminated substrate 671 in which decorative characters and figures are visibly formed from a light-transmitting resin material and irradiates light diagonally to the left and front from the back side thereof. .. The arrangement of the decorative fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decorative fixing member 670 is always a line of sight inclined diagonally to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the illumination substrate 671 to the left side, the light can be irradiated to the side where the player's eyes are easily arranged.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion raised on the back surface side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612. This front-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

40 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of the arrow XLII of FIG. 40. It is a side view of the 1st operation unit 600. The base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screw are not shown in order to facilitate understanding of the shape.

In the effect standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission slot 623. As a result, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding on the transmission elongated hole 623. That is, at the start of displacement, the assist of inertia cannot be obtained as compared with the middle of displacement, and the driving force required to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to increase. Therefore, the displacement resistance is reduced as in the present embodiment. By configuring the above, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

Further, the same is true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the overhanging state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission elongated hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position in the effect standby state and the position in the overhanging state) is the displacement direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (ie, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (eg, parallel). As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement of the rotating member 620 from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In the present embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth portion 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rear with respect to the intermediate gear 644. The rotation angle of the side rotating member 654 is the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be changed depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the shaft orthogonal rotating member 657 are in mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft. It is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a are the same (gear ratio is 1), so that the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined. It is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state. Further, FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the overhanging state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the overhanging state. The base member 611 and the fastening screw are not shown in order to facilitate understanding of the shape.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state. Is set to.

In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the narrow third effect surface 661c is directed toward the front side. In the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the second effect surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 is connected to a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end portion and a lower end portion of the linear portion 616a, and is on a curved line (substantially arcuate shape). The curved portion 616b formed in the above is provided.

In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state is the curved portion. It is configured to have a curved displacement along 616b.

The first operation unit 600 is configured so as to be able to change the state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620. ..

Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement resistance generated between the guide slot 616 and the guide slot 616 due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 may increase. However, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 620 It is suppressed by being configured so that the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 is along the displacement direction.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state (FIG. 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed so as to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the overhanging state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide slot 616 is also formed so as to extend diagonally upward to the right. Has been done.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, the displacement resistance of the portion (and the axis O1) that displaces the inside of the guide slot 616 can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616, including other effects, will be described. FIG. 47 is a schematic view schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b) are the rotating members. It is a schematic diagram which shows the magnitude relation of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the 620 is rotated in the tilting direction in a mode of constant angular velocity. The positive and negative values are shown as a downward displacement amount and a negative displacement amount as an upward displacement amount, and in FIG. 48B, the numerical value shown in FIG. 48A is shown as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support position of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is shown as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 at 10-degree intervals, and the tension of the first operating unit 600 is shown. The rotating member 620 in the out position is shown by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is shown as an angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the tubular portion 622. There is.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as an elongated hole for guiding the end portion of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is arranged. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is a displacement caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 with the rotation of the rotating member 620. In the following, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the main driving side of the supported member 640, and the end portion of the supported member 640 in which the axis O1 is arranged is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 depends on the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. It occurs as a result of adding up the vertical displacement of the driven member 640 that accompanies it.

In the production standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in the vertical posture, the speed component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction (the arrangement of the rotating arm is 45 degrees from vertical to left-right). Range). That is, as the displacement in the vertical direction, the conditions for reducing the displacement are doubled.

Both of these are reversed in the overhanging state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the velocity is low at the start of the downward displacement, and the velocity is likely to be high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilt displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, when the guide elongated hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall vigorously. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the first operation unit 600 is stopped in an intermediate effect state (intermediate position of tilt displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a mode in which the curved portion 616b is combined below the linear portion 616a is adopted. As a result, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling vigorously beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the effect standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate effect state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is on the left side of the linear portion 616a. Arranged (see FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 tilts and displaces without changing its direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 reciprocates in the vertical direction.

As a result, the displacement of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction can be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is a linear portion. While being arranged at the 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in a displacement mode as if the supported member 640 is rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, the slide displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up due to the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that the entire supported member 640 can be moved from the start of the displacement. Compared with the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction, the load required for displacement can be suppressed to a low level. Therefore, the load required at the start of operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be lowered. As a result, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is suppressed to be small, the displacement of the driving portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently secured due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the supported member 640 The rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driving portion of the above is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the posture change of the supported member 640 and the direction of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being inverted).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning), and the second decorative rotating member 660 The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

Further, even in a situation where the displacement of the driving portion of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently secured, the displacement direction of the driving portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. Moreover, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 is lowered. can do. As a result, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

The action caused by the curved portion 616b will be described. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the range of the angle width of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG. 48.

First, as a premise, it is not necessary to adopt a curved portion in the guide slot 616. That is, the guide elongated hole 616 may be composed of only a linear portion regardless of whether or not a portion that bends in order to increase the displacement resistance is adopted in the intermediate effect state as described above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by intentionally adopting the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be described below.

Whether guided by the linear portion 616a or the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward. The downward displacement is the same.

The difference is that in the case of being guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is in a direction opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (rightward). ) Is formed so that the curved portion 616b is displaced, and in the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is oriented along the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (to the left). The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced (to the left).

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the supported member 640 on the driving side becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is swung to the left and right, so that the supported member is supported. It is possible to secure a large displacement speed on the driven side of the 640.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive at the end of the tilt displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced from a specific initial position to the terminal position by an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the velocities in the vertical direction are the same. If the displacement is slow at the beginning of the displacement, the displacement speed increases at the end of the displacement.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown as a comparison with FIG. 47, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilt displacement start side of the rotating member 620. It becomes the maximum at the displacement end (displacement lower end) of the supported member 640. In other words, the vertical displacement of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period as compared with the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide slot 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees to reach the lower end of the displacement. The quantity UE1 becomes large.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, and when the effect of stopping the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement is performed, the first operation unit 600 It adversely affects the production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b for the guide elongated hole 616, the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620 is set in the range where the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large. The displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side is made uniform.

In this case, homogenization is used not only to mean that the velocities are brought to be the same over the entire range of displacement, but also to suppress the magnitude of the velocities. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases on the entry start side of the curved portion 616b and enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is configured to gradually decrease after the start.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. Can be avoided.

Further, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required for a unit time, the rotating member 620 moves upward (rises up). Since the amount of displacement that lifts the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving in the case of (operation) can be reduced, the load on the driving motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic view showing a change in the angle θ [degrees] with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be equated with the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 centered on the circular through hole 624 and the supported member 640, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In the present embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear of the gear tooth 652a and the axially perpendicular rotating member 657. The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis perpendicular rotation member 657 are the same, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in the angle θ is 45 degrees from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and the intermediate effect of the first operation unit 600. The angle from the state to the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is tilted to the left by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is tilted to the right by 45 degrees), so that the angle θ changes. According to this, each time the state is switched between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third effect surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The production surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by the design of the guide slot 616 for defining the posture of the supported member 640. That is, in the present embodiment, the guide slot 616 is designed so as to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even when only the sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is arranged as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The arrangement and posture can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 from that state can be determined. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620, the arrangement and the posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of.

Here, the amount of change in the angle θ is not proportional to the amount of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and orientation of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not necessary to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. Further, as a result, even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, it is possible to prevent the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 from becoming constant. This will be described below.

The change in the angle θ is substantially the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhanging state is generally larger than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (about 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). Large (about 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is placed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhang state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect. It falls below the level of angle change to the state (decreases to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by configuring the value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation of the rotating member 620 per unit angle to change depending on the magnitude, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 also changes. Can be configured in. That is, in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, and the posture can be easily maintained, while in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotation The rotation angle of the member 660 tends to be large, and the surfaces facing the player (effect surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

From the above configuration, it is possible to form slow and fast displacement movements of the second decorative rotating member 660. In the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above, the arrangement is changed and the posture is changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed at the center of the tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a. Rotational displacement around the rotation axis and rotation are executed at the same time.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement centered on the tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 changes from the linear portion 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved portion 616b. It becomes noticeably larger at the timing of approach.

That is, in the tilt displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the supported member 640 is slightly moved up and down (bounce back) from the arrangement on the driven side in the intermediate effect state. Even so, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state where the third effect surface 661c is directed to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed increases, and the posture changes in the rotation direction. It is noticeably visible. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

In the present embodiment, the second effect surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (displacement lower end) of the rotating member 620, and is arranged in close proximity to the decorative fixing member 670. It is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing upward from the state where the rotating member 620 is arranged at the lower end of the displacement because it is visually recognized integrally (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side is made uniform by forming the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, so that the rotating member 620 It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive in the state of being arranged at the lower end of the displacement, and to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed in this way, the arrangement of the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643). Is configured to come closest to the support fastening portion 615 as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from being violent due to the weight of the supported member 640 supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660, and the rotating member 620 of the rotating member 620. The rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back (upper left) about the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620. It is configured to preferably interfere with the displacement of. That is, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is inclined in the upper left direction in the lateral direction, and the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in this direction can be suppressed, so that the supported member is supported. It is possible to prevent the member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640, and the case where the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the displacement end. Is different from the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driven side.

The former is assumed to be displaced downward to the left along the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driving side (rotation direction of the rotating member 620) if there is no guidance. However, in the present embodiment, the guide slot is formed. By being guided by the guide hole 616, it is slightly swung in the left-right direction along the guide slot 616 and is displaced downward.

On the other hand, since the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, the displacement direction is not along the guide elongated hole 616 but along the lateral direction of the guided elongated hole 616. As a result, the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and the bounce of the supported member 640 can be prevented.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. The rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction when the state of the first operating unit 600 changes from the overhanging state to the effect standby state.

The load (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 is mainly the first decoration arranged on the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the supported member 640. It is used for ascending and displacing the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 and for rotating the second decorative rotating member 660.

That is, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the smaller the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, at the time when the rotating member 620 starts the rotational displacement from the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660. It is designed so that the value of the angle θ is the lowest. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

At the end of the rising displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( It is arranged in a vertical orientation).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the ascending displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is rotated. The moving member 620 can be generated as a load in a manner twisted about the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can locally withstand a slight elastic displacement by distributing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in the front view, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 is damaged so as to break. .. In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front lid member 612, and the front lid member 612 is configured to withstand the load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 by elastically deforming. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating member 620 from being damaged.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be described. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and its rotational angle corresponds to the above-mentioned angle θ. Therefore, even when the arrangement change of the supported member 640 on the driven side is small as in the change from the effect standby state to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates if the angle θ changes. ..

The change in the angle θ from the production standby state to the overhanging state is about 135 degrees, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotated at about 45 degrees. Here, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the production standby state, it feels as if it collides with other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which is the reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a manner of rotating clockwise, the other operating unit 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) can be used. It is possible to avoid collision.

In other words, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with reference to the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with reference to the supported member 640 in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the supported member 640 is arranged from the overhanging state to the effect standby state. When it changes to, the overhanging decorative portion 652b overhangs to the upper left side of the supported member 640, collides with another operating unit 800, or partially hides the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. There is a possibility that it will have an adverse effect on the production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with reference to the driven side of the supported member 640. When the 640 projects to the third symbol display device 81 side, it projects in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 displaces from the third symbol display device 81 to the retracting side, it retracts in conjunction with it. Therefore, the arrangement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 from the player's point of view can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the posture change of the supported member 640. That is, it is 45 degrees as a difference between the change width of the angle θ of about 135 degrees and the posture change angle of the supported member 640 of about 90 degrees.

Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided by the angles a1 and a2 below the horizon and the angles b1 and b2 above the horizon, the angle θ and the posture of the supported member 640 The difference between the change and the change is determined as ((a1 + b1)-(a2 + b2))-(b1-b2) = (a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, it is covered. Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular velocity of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, it seems to the player that the overhanging decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 is driven at a constant angular velocity by a driving means different from the driving motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620. Can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 is such that there is a section where there is a slide movement and there is a section where there is a rotational movement from the player's point of view. It can be shown, and the displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This action is realized by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by separating a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction and a section in which the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction. be able to. That is, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the displacement of the supported member 640. Affected by the dominant side.

Therefore, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as being rotationally displaced in the section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction, and is stretched in the section where the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction. The appearance decoration portion 652b can be visually recognized as if it is slide-displaced.

As described above, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotatable and displaceable so as to constitute an effect standby state, an intermediate effect state, and an overhanging state, and is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end has been described. However, the drive direction may be switched so as to displace in the opposite direction at a position in the middle of the displacement range.

For example, after the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of descending, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to make the stop position accurate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) changes in an increasing tendency in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state as compared with the effect standby state. As described above, the magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660.

Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the amount distributed to the second decorative rotating member 660 within the driving force increases, so that the rotating member 620 is relatively. The amount distributed to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, so that the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set low in advance. Even if this is not done, the rotating member 620 can be easily stopped in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be described. The second operation unit 700 is an operation unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is a field of view of the player who sees the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). An effect standby state (see FIG. 28) that retracts below the opening 511a to secure the above position, and an overhanging state (see FIG. 30) that is placed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and attracts attention. The state is mainly switched between the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state of.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, the members around the elevating / reversing effect device 770 are mainly shown in a disassembled state, and the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is shown in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operation unit 700 is located between the right front plate member 710, which is fastened and fixed to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, and the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510. A rotating arm member 720 that is arranged and is rotatable around a cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, and a drive transmitting device 730 that is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the rotating arm member 720. The elevating plate member 740, in which the tip of the rotating arm member 720 is connected so as to be guideable and can be displaced up and down, and the rear left side to be fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750, a set of front support members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, and a set of front support members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702. The blind decorative member 768 is provided, and the elevating plate member 740 and the front support member 760 are provided with an elevating / reversing effect device 770 that is configured to be displaceable in a manner in which an elevating displacement and a front-rear displacement are combined.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each configuration of the drive transmission device 730, and a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the back side at the left edge portion and forms a gap between the rear case 510. A plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a mode toward the front side toward the upper side on the front side of the left side portion. A front upper inclined portion 714 which is inclined and formed so as to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevating and reversing effect device 770, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the back side of the rear case 510 is screwed are formed. A plurality of fastened portions 718 are provided.

In the detection sensor 713, a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged at intervals so that the detection grooves are arranged at positions where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 has a position of the detected unit 735 in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, a position of the detected unit 735 in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700, and an extension of the second operation unit 700. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected portion 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured so that the output can be switched depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, or the overhanging state, and the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) is configured so that the state of the second operating unit 700 can be grasped.

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 511b projecting from the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a long plate shape in the shape of a front view. A support cylinder portion 722 that is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the rear at the main body portion 721 and the bent portion of the main body portion 721, and the inner peripheral side shape is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical projecting portion 511b to be inserted. And, at the right end of the main body 721, a long hole 723 formed in a long hole shape along the elongated direction, and at the left end of the main body 721, the front (the projecting direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a). A cylindrical fastened portion 724 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the direction (parallel to the direction) and has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and is rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastened portion 724 and the support cylinder portion 722. In the ascending direction (left side) between the cylindrical fastened portion 725, which is projected in a cylindrical shape and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side, and the rear case 510, which is wound around the support cylinder portion 722. It is provided with a torsion spring SP2 that gives an urging force in the direction of lifting the cylinder.

The left side portion of the main body portion 721 is formed with a step so that the arrangement is shifted to the front side as compared with the base end side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and the support plate is formed in the gap portion formed on the back side by the step. 701 is arranged.

The support plate 701 is a plate-shaped portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and includes an arc-shaped elongated hole portion 701a that is bored so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened portion 725. A fastening screw that is inserted into the elongated hole 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched between them is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported by the cylindrical fastened portion 725 via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. It is supported by 701 so that it cannot be dropped out.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, the left side portion of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from being displaced from the back case 510 to the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation arm member 720 from tilting toward the front side due to the load applied to the left side of the rotation arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotation arm member 720 is stably supported. be able to.

The right side portion of the main body portion 721 is arranged in the gap between the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line extending in the elongated direction through the center of the width passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 faces the long direction of the long hole portion 723, the rotation direction component of the rotation arm member 720 of the load becomes 0.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and is a drive motor 731 that is fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731. A drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733 are provided.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 711a that project cylindrically on the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw to be inserted into a shaft hole of a transmission gear 733 or a gear cam member 734 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a so as not to fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 extends from the detected portion 735, which is formed so as to be inserted into the arcuate hole 711b and protrudes toward the front side in an arc shape centered on the rotation shaft portion, so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. 736, and a cylindrical projecting portion 736a projecting from the tip end portion of the extending portion 736 to the back surface side in a cylindrical shape are provided.

The detected portion 735 is formed so as to be dispositionable in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the posture of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the output from the detection sensor 713 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). Is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical projecting portion 736a is formed so as to be insertable into the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the elongated hole portion 723. Will be done.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw to be inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing the fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 736a so as not to fall off.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that elevates and displaces with the rotation of the rotating arm member 720, and is located on the left end side of the guided member 741 that is guided in the vertical direction and on the lower end side of the guided member 741. A long horizontally long member 742 is provided on the left and right sides to be fastened and fixed.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702 fixed to the back case 510 in a posture in which the elongated direction is aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted, and can be displaced in the vertical direction along the metal rod 702. When the tip of the ridge portion protruding from the left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the back side comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, the axial rotation of the guided member 741 is restricted. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally long member 742 that is fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

The horizontally long member 742 is a long hole portion 743 formed in a long oval shape on the left and right with a vertical width that allows a cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 to be inserted, and an upper side of the long hole portion 743. A cylindrical portion 744 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the front side, and a pair of guide portions 745 that are arranged below the bottom portion at positions equidistant to the left and right with respect to the cylindrical portion 744. Be prepared.

A fastening screw that is inserted into the elongated hole 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched between them is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, so that the elevating plate member 740 is moved to the rotating arm via the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by the member 720 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion tubular portion 773 of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is inserted and supports the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in a state of being displaceable in the front-rear direction. That is, the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is arranged on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that the elevating plate member 740 can be displaced back and forth with reference to the elevating plate member 740.

The coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tubular portion 773. The urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts in the direction of separating the elevating plate member 740 and the elevating / reversing effect device 770.

The guide portion 745 is composed of a pair of left and right guide portions, and is a rotary cylinder rotatably supported by a long plate portion 745a in the front-rear direction and a pair of front-rear shaft portions projecting from the plate portion 745a to the left-right outside. A unit 745b and the like are provided.

The rotary cylinder portion 745b rotates when the above-mentioned elevating / reversing effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction and functions as a portion for guiding the displacement in the front-rear direction, which will be described in detail later.

Similar to the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side toward the upper side on the front side of the right side portion, and the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevating and reversing effect device 770. It is provided with a front upper inclined portion 751 formed so as to be able to guide the rear case 510, and a plurality of fastened portions 752 formed with a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the back side of the back case 510 is inserted.

The blindfold decorative member 768 includes a three-dimensional decorative portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate on which an LED is fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. , The three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front support members 760 are arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right inside of the fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which the fastening screw is inserted and the fixing plate portion 761 so that the back surface of the plate faces upward. It is provided with a receiving inclined portion 762 which is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side.

The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw portion. It is a plate part.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper inclined portion 714, 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751, and the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is guided to this guide path, so that the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is moved in the front-rear direction. It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. Hereinafter, this vertical displacement will be described.

52 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 on the LIIa-LIIA line of FIG. 28, and FIG. 52 (b) is the second operating unit 700 on the LIIb-LIIB line of FIG. 28. And is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. In FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 is shown.

FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 in the line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 33, and FIG. 53 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. And is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. In FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown.

54 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 on the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 30, and FIG. 54 (b) is a second operating unit 700 on the LIVb-LIVA line of FIG. And is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. In FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated.

The elevating displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The driving force transmission at the time of the elevating displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 28, 30 and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the start of driving force transmission from the effect standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the length of the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance generated at the start of rotation of the gear cam member 734. The same thing holds true even in the overhanging state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), since the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is orthogonal to the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the gear cam member 734 receives from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotational direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, it is possible to easily stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the elevating / reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is arranged on the back side under the center frame 86, and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Along with this, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement includes a configuration in which the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is guided to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 and the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the elevating / reversing effect device 770. 2 The horizontal plate 774c is reduced by the configuration in which the elevating plate member 740 is guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b.

That is, the pair of rotary cylinder portions 774e are arranged at symmetrical positions of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is arranged on the left side (not shown in FIG. 52), FIG. 56. (See) is designed to line up parallel to the tilt angle, and the rotating tubular portion 774e rolls to the center of the tubular portion 774d to displace along the receiving tilted portion 762 and the front upper tilted portion 714,751. The displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

Further, by arranging the rotary cylinder portion 745b aligned in the front-rear direction so that the rotary cylinder portion 745b on the front side is arranged slightly on the upper side, the tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed, thereby rotating. It is avoided that the tubular portion 774e applies an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751.

That is, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotational axis position) of the effect device 780 is designed to be located slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 always tilts forward due to gravity. Being urged in the direction. Due to the influence of this urging force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced so that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotary cylinder portion 745b on the front side, which is arranged close to the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b when the front side is lowered, is arranged slightly upward, and is arranged close to the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c when the rear side is raised. The rotary cylinder portion 745b on the rear side is arranged slightly below. Therefore, the forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, according to this configuration, since the rotary cylinder portion 745b on the front side has a gap between it and the second horizontal plate 774c, it stably causes rolling with the first horizontal plate 774b. Since the rotary cylinder portion 745b on the rear side has a gap between it and the first horizontal plate 774b, rolling with the second horizontal plate 774c can be stably generated. As a result, the rotating cylinder portion 745b can be normally rolled, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-mentioned shape guidance. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the displacement in the front-rear direction can be reduced in the case of the ascending displacement in which the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is displaced to the front side as compared with the case of the descending displacement.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into a vertical displacement and a front-rear displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the displacement in the ascending direction becomes relatively large due to the necessity of countering gravity, but the displacement in the front-rear direction in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required when the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is displaced in an ascending manner.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so as to have a natural length in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 53) of the second operation unit 700. That is, when the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is arranged below the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 causes the displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in the front-rear direction due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. On the other hand, when the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is arranged above the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the front-rear displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770.

This makes it easier to maintain the arrangement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the stop timing is slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operating unit 700 can be displaced so as to be closer to the intermediate effect state side by the urging force of the coil spring CS2.

Further, for example, in the same stop control, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operation unit 700 is lowered by its own weight, and the lowering by its own weight is due to the urging force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the second operation unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state side to maintain the arrangement.

Further, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is used. Since the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the coil spring CS2 passes downward in the intermediate effect state, it is possible to easily prevent the coil spring CS2 from being displaced further downward than in the intermediate effect state. Then, even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 is applied so that the second operation unit 700 can be moved to the intermediate effect state side.

Here, the operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 by being displaced in the front-rear direction with the elevating displacement will be described. As a premise, there is known a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which the center frame 86 displaces inside and outside the frame bordered by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which the player evacuates from the player's field of view.

Most of these movable accessories are designed with an emphasis on the appearance when they are placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, the player pays attention to them. In many cases, the appearance was not considered under the assumption that it would not be done.

However, recently, the front-rear distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of view where the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is viewed through the inside of the center frame 86. Since the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), if the movable accessory in the state of being retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 does not look good, the player It may reduce the interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52). After forming decorative surfaces on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) in A line that spreads out (inclines downward toward the rear), that is, a displacement direction along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of view so that each decorative surface easily fits in the player's field of view. It is configured.

As a result, each decorative surface of the lining member 787 can be easily put into the player's field of view. Details of each decorative surface of the lining member 787 will be described later, but the front side surface (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1), which is visible to the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), is shown in the figure. In 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper side surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2) that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), and in FIG. 52, the first sub The decorative surface 787a2) and the decoration (figure, pattern, character, pattern, etc.) formed on the surface are formed as decorations related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 are formed as the first decoration related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 are related to each other. And the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as different decorations from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper side surface is arranged in the front-rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side of the center frame 86 in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the state of paying attention to the ball flowing down the game area formed on the outside of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and the state of paying attention to the display effect developed by the third symbol display device 81 should be switched. It is easy for the player to get into the field of view when moving his eyes.

Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance", "big hit", etc.) that can be visually recognized by the player through the lining member 787 in the overhanging state can be displayed on the lining member 787 even in the production standby state. It can be made visible to the player through the side surface.

As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the arrangement in the effect standby state so that it can be easily visually recognized, and the lining member 787 arranged inconspicuously can continuously attract the attention of the player.

Further, as will be described later, since the lining member 787 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player side, the content of the decorative surface that can be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state is different. Cases can occur.

For example, when the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is arranged in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the overhanging member 787 in the overhanging state (when it is overlooked or the operation speed is excessively high), the front If the content of the decorative surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface is hidden by the game board 13 in the production standby state, so that the player is deployed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. There is no choice but to pay attention to the liquid crystal display, and the attention to the lining member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper side as in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the up / down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state to cover the decorative surface in the overhanging state. It is possible to grasp the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "chance", "big hit", etc.) that was visible to the player through the setting member 787.

As a result, for the player who overlooked the appearance of the lining member 787 in the overhanging state, the content notified by the state of the lining member 787 is displayed on the visible decorative surface of the lining member 787 even in the production standby state. It can be continuously notified. As a result, the attention of the lining member 787 can be maintained high regardless of each state such as the effect standby state or the overhanging state.

In the present embodiment, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 enters forward from the rear end surface of the game area from the state of being arranged on the back side of the rear end surface of the game area. It will be described that it is configured as such a displacement.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front surface of the lining member 787 and the back surface of the plate of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is on the lining member 787 side. A flow path forming portion 86a is provided so as to project from the above.

The flow path forming portion 86a is centered after a sphere that has jumped into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge portion of the center frame 86. The rear part of the guide flow path for guiding the ball flowing down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 toward the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game area by swinging it backward and then flowing it forward again. (See FIG. 9). That is, the flow path forming portion 86a arranges the rear end surface BE1 of the game region on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Since the ball that has flowed down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning opening 64, the attention to the flow path forming portion 86a is high, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. , The line of sight of the player tends to gather at the flow path forming portion 86a. Since the effect device 780 is arranged directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), it is easy to configure a state in which the effect device 780 enters the player's field of view in the effect standby state. Can be done.

In the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the lining member 787 is arranged on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52 (a)), and in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700, the lining member 787 The front portion is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53A), and in the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700, the front portion of the lining member 787 is arranged on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the lining member 787 is displaced upward and displaced toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front-rear position as the front-rear position of the game area. Therefore, it can be made to appear to the player that the lining member 787 rides on the center frame 86 and moves to the front side (approaching the player side).

In the second operation unit 700, where the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction due to the vertical displacement, the front-rear position of the front end surface thereof is the second decoration in the overhang state of the first operation unit 600. It is configured to match (match) the front-rear position of the second effect surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

As a result, the front-rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in the overhanging state in a front view. Will match, and it will be easier to see these integrally.

On the other hand, the arrangement of the effect device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower than the arrangement in the overhang state in the intermediate effect state and the effect standby state, so that the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is compared with the overhang state. The 661 and the effect device 780 can be separated (independently) to make them easier to see.

The elevating / reversing effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 that is connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 that is displaceable with reference to the main body member 771. Next, the details of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an disassembled rear perspective view of the elevating / reversing effect device 770. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 formed elongated in the left-right direction and an insertion tubular portion 773 projecting from the left and right center positions of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side in a cylindrical shape. , A pair of guide extension portions 774 extending from the left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side, and a connecting portion extending vertically are integrally formed with the left and right center positions of the lower elongated portion 772. The upper long portion 775 formed elongated in the left-right direction and the linear motion plate member 784 of the effect device 780 arranged on the back side from the left and right side portions of the upper long portion 775 can be guided in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the center of the left and right of the upper elongated portion 775 to support the drive transmission device, a lower elongated portion 772, and an upper elongated portion 772. A light emitting effect means 778, which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775, is provided.

The insertion tubular portion 773 is a portion to be inserted into the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a slidable dimensional relationship on the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress the tilt displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

The guide extension portion 774 is more than a vertical plate 774a whose width faces in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b which is connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction faces the left-right direction, and the first horizontal plate 774b. The second horizontal plate 774c, which is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and the vertical plate 774a project from the left-right outer surface toward the left-right outer side. It includes a pair of upper and lower tubular portions 774d to be provided, and a rotary tubular portion 774e rotatably supported by the tubular portion 774d.

The width and length of the second horizontal plate 774c are lengthened in such a manner that the second horizontal plate 774c extends inward to the left and right with respect to the widthwise end portion of the first horizontal plate 774b. The expansion portion in the width direction is arranged so as to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction in the assembled state, and abuts against each other to suppress the tilt displacement of the guide extension portion 774 tilting forward. That is, by securing the width and length so that the second horizontal plate 774c is arranged so as to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, the main body member 771 tilts forward with reference to the elevating plate member 740. Can be suppressed.

The pair of tubular portions 774d is not arranged in the vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is arranged so as to be displaced to the front side as compared with the lower tubular portion 774d. This deviation is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of tubular portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52 (a)). That is, by arranging the pair of tubular portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portion 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating tubular portions 774e are simultaneously applied to the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. Can be touched. As a result, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylinders 774e can be stably rolled, and it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a local load.

The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect a plurality of tubular portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a manner in which a pair of left and right are arranged vertically and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side, and a pair of left and right tubular portions 776a. It is provided with a plurality of dropout prevention plate portions 776b.

The fall-out prevention plate portion 776b is provided with an insertion hole formed at a position corresponding to a plurality of tubular portions 776a, and a fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole from the back side is screwed into the tubular portion 776a. It is a portion to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off. The details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and an insertion hole 777b thereof. Fasten to the back side with a cylindrical protrusion 777c that is cylindrically projected on the front side under the insertion hole 777b, and a pair of insertion holes 777d that are pierced so that fastening screws can be inserted at both upper and lower ends. It includes a wiring fastening member 777e to be fixed.

The cylindrical projecting portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and the fastening screw is screwed in while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b to support the upside-down inverted member 781 so as not to fall off. It is a part.

A fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775 can be inserted into the insertion hole 777d, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into the upper elongated portion 775 by the fastening screw. It is fastened and fixed to.

The wiring fastening member 777e is a portion for holding and fastening the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777 and the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming the above, it is possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777.

The light emitting effect means 778 includes two left and right long plate-shaped illuminated substrates 778a on which light emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and light transmission arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 778a. It includes a light diffusing member 778b, which is a plate member formed of a sex resin material and is formed with a light diffusing process.

The upper illuminated substrate 778a includes a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the posture of the upside-down member 781 of the effect device 780 by arranging the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d in the detection groove. Will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back surface side, and is inserted from the back surface side into an insertion hole formed in the lower elongated portion 772 at a corresponding position in the fastened portion. By screwing in the fastening screw, the fastening screw is fastened and fixed so that the fastening screw is inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusing member 778b is formed with insertion holes 778c for inserting the fastening screws on both the left and right sides, and the fastening screws inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c are the female screws of the upper long portion 775. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusing member 778b is fastened and fixed.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, which may be conspicuous without countermeasures. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the lining member 787 is always on the front side of the insertion hole 778c. Since the arrangement is such that the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the design is such that the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the effect. In other words, by designing the lining member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the fastening screw in the insertion direction.

The effect device 780 is a device in which an outer shape portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 so as to be displaceable, and the upside-down inverted member 781 axially supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. And the drive motor 782 in which the drive gear 782a for transmitting the driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the upside-down member 781 is fixed to the drive shaft, and the ends on one side of each of the both ends in the long direction of the upside-down member 781. A pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported, and a pair of linear motion plate members 784 whose other end portions of the intermediate arm member 783 are pivotally supported and guided to a guide portion 776 in the left-right direction. A pair of shaft rotating members 785 that are arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and are configured to be rotatable (reversed) by a rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotating member 785 are mounted on the linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 that are pivotally supported jointly with the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed so as not to fall off in a state where the phase is fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the shaft rotating member 785, and the same. It is provided with a covering member 787 that is arranged before and after the end plate member 785d and is formed with a left-right length that covers the left-right side portions of the upper long portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b projecting in a gear shape on the back side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c projecting cylindrically from both ends in the longitudinal direction to the back surface side and a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction to the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. It is provided with an arc-shaped projecting portion 781d.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center, and a cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side. The upside down member 781 is pivotally supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the rotation, so that the upside-down member 781 rotates. That is, the upside-down member 781 can be rotationally driven by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end portion where the one-side support hole 783a of the intermediate arm member 783 is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c that is displaced as the vertically inverted member 781 is rotationally displaced.

The arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is formed so as to be dispositionable in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emitting effect means 778. That is, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d can be arranged on either of the upper and lower pair of detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the upside-down member 781 can be changed into two postures in which the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d and a posture between them (a pair of detection sensors 778d). It is possible to determine by (a posture in which the arcuate projecting portion 781d is not arranged on both sides of the detection groove).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a that is bored at one end and pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and one side. A cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b in which the inner peripheral side is formed through the other end on the opposite side of the support hole 783a, and a bevel-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. ), The bevel tooth portion 783c, and the like.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw to be inserted from the back side into the one-side support hole 783a is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the upside-down inverted member 781 so as not to fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical projecting portion 784a that is formed in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783. An arcuate plate portion 784b projecting in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and an oval shape extending in parallel in the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a are formed. In the intermediate portion between the pair of elongated hole portions 784c to be formed, the pair of support plate portions 784d which are arranged in parallel in pairs at the top and bottom and project to the back side at the position between the elongated hole portions 784c, and the support plate portion 784d. A pair of ridges 784e that are projected on the sides facing each other and are formed as ridges that extend in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape that is opened to the back side at the end of the support plate 784d and is arranged on the inner peripheral side. A ring-shaped arrangement hole 784g formed through a pair of fastened portions 784f on which a female screw is formed, a cylindrical projecting portion 784a and a support plate portion 784d, and a shaft support member 786. A ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding the metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , Equipped with.

The cylindrical projecting portion 784a is formed with an outer peripheral diameter slightly shorter than the inner peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a projecting length slightly longer than the axial length of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. It is said that a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the fastening screw inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female screw of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot fall off into the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. It is supported by.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape having an inner peripheral diameter slightly longer than the outer peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arcuate plate portion 784b is closely arranged so as to face the other side cylindrical portion 783b in the radial direction in the assembled state, and the inclined displacement of the other side cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis is limited. As a result, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 centered on the other side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening through which the tubular portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and is fastened by being inserted into the insertion hole of the dropout prevention plate portion 776b through the female screw formed in the tubular portion 776a from the back side. By screwing the screw, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off.

In the supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 can be slidably displaced along the forming direction of the elongated hole portion 784c. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress the vertical displacement, and the ridge portion 784e defines the arrangement of the metal rod 785a in the left-right direction. It functions as a ridge, but the details will be described later.

The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference of the shaft rotating member 785 with the umbrella tooth member 785c, which will be described in detail later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member that is arranged in a pair on the left and right and is pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784, and is a metal rod 785a formed in a substantially columnar shape from a metal material and the length of the metal rod 785a. A recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the central position in the direction, and a member arranged at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and an umbrella tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783. An umbrella tooth member 785c on which an intermeshing umbrella tooth (an umbrella gear) is formed, an end plate member 785d arranged at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and an end plate member 785d thereof. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a so as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed inside which is a portion protruding from the left and right inner portions of the end plate member 785d. A rotation position stabilizing portion 785f, into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed, is provided.

The metal rod 785a is arranged between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the ridge portion 784e is inserted into the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured to have a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the ridge portion 784e, and is also configured to have a dimensional relationship that regulates displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the ridge portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the ridge portion 784e, and the diameter of the groove depth portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e.

Thereby, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back surface side of the linear motion plate member 784 in such a manner that the axial rotation is possible and the displacement in the left-right direction is suppressed.

The umbrella tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the umbrella tooth member 785c partially enters the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 engages the umbrella tooth portion 783c with the umbrella tooth member 785c from the opposite side (rear side) of the linear motion plate member 784. It is assembled to.

In the assembled state, the umbrella tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, so that the umbrella tooth member 785c cannot fall off to the front side. The displacement to the back side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

The tubular portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral side shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross-sectional shape) as the tip end portion of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral side shape and the metal rod 785a are formed. It is fitted and fixed by being formed in a dimensional relationship with the tip of the metal fitting.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing using an adhesive or the like may be used, or a female screw is formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a, and a fastening screw to be inserted into the end plate member 785d is screwed into the female screw. The method of fastening and fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted in the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is slidably contacted on the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, whereby the rotation center of the end plate member 785d is formed. Can be easily aligned with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the umbrella tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotation position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the arranged metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in the shape of a square plate, and has an insertion hole 786a in which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding of the linear motion plate member 784. The magnet Mg can be held between the ring holding half portion 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the half portion 784h and the magnet holding half portion 784i of the linear motion plate member 784. A magnet holding semicircle 786c formed in a square box shape is provided.

When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 786a from the back side is screwed into the fastened portion 784f and the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786 are assembled, the back side of the metal rod 785a is inserted into the plate portion of the shaft support member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The lining member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape in which the left and right insides are opened as a set in the front and rear, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotating member 785, and is different on the opposite surface. A decoration consisting of meaningfully readable figures, patterns, letters or patterns is formed.

That is, the lining member 787 includes a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface to be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface thereof. On the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side that can be seen by the player when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is arranged on the front side and is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), and on the back surface thereof. It includes a second sub-decorative surface 787b2 to be formed. The second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side that can be visually recognized by the player when the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) is reached with the second main decorative surface 787b1 arranged on the front side.

The lining member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and formed in a substantially box shape with the left and right inside open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). A plurality of extending portions 787c extending toward each of the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d recessed so as to retract to the left and right outside in a portion between the extending portions 787c are provided. ..

The extension portion 787c is formed so that the ends thereof are in contact with each other or are arranged close to each other in the close arrangement state (see FIG. 26) of the covering member 787. As a result, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion arranged in the center of the light diffusing member 778b of the light emitting effect means 778 and the upper left and right center upper side of the upper elongated portion 775 in the close arrangement state of the lining member 787 (see FIG. 26). It is a portion for visually opening the arc plate portion and the like, and is formed as a recess in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The lining member 787 is in a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 is directed to the front side and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is directed upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52) and the second main decorative surface 787 is directed to the front side in accordance with the operation of the effect device 780. The state can be switched between a state in which the decorative surface 787b1 faces the front side and a state in which the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30). First, a mechanism constituting a displacement for switching the state of the lining member 787 will be described.

57 (a) and 57 (b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. In FIG. 57 (a), a vertically arranged state (also referred to as an upright vertical arrangement state) of the vertically inverted member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line is shown, and FIG. 57 (b) is shown. ) Shows a state in which the upside-down member 781 is rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the cylindrical projecting portion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a). In FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 are not shown for ease of understanding.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). Further, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the vertically inverted member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. NS.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured so that the vertically inverted member 781 is switched between the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state, and the sound lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. The device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the effect device 780.

As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), when the vertically inverted member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this attitude change corresponds to (proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the lateral displacement amount of the other side cylindrical portion 783b is the lateral displacement amount of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. Corresponds to.

Here, the order in which the rotational displacement and the lateral displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same degree at the same time, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is larger and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is larger.

First, to give an overview, the configuration of the upside-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 is a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the vertically inverted member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the vertically inverted member 781 is displayed on the front surface. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so as to translate along the moving axis HL1 passing through the central portion of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c visually. The pair of left and right linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in opposite directions along the moving axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57 (a) to the rotation of about 24 degrees. The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width end portion). It is illustrated as.

Further, due to the state change from FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b), the posture change centered on the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in the front view. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle as the arrangement interval of the adjacent teeth of the umbrella tooth portion 783c.

Since the umbrella tooth member 785c is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the load transmission (tooth transmission) between the umbrella tooth portion 783c and the umbrella tooth member 785c is at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction, that is, , Occurs on the moving axis HL1 in front view.

FIG. 58 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 in the LVIIIa-LVIIIa line of FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 58 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line of FIG. 57 (b).

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (upward in FIG. 58 (b)). Displace to). In addition, in FIG. 58B, in order to facilitate understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown so as to overlap each other, and the overlapping width is the umbrella tooth portion 783c. Is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth member 785c with the gear tooth.

The umbrella tooth portion 783c meshes with the umbrella tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, so that the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the upside-down inverted member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), the right axial rotating member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left axial rotating member 785 is forward. Rotate in the direction of rotation.

While the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees, the toothed portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is rotated 90 degrees around the cylindrical portion 783b on the other side, and the toothed portion 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 is rotated accordingly. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the umbrella tooth member 785c rotates about the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the rotation angle around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the umbrella tooth portion 783c.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can occur due to the pressure due to the displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (a) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) is less than the thickness of the gear tooth in the circumferential direction, and the bevel tooth member. It is less than the amount that reliably rotates the gear teeth of 785c. That is, the amount of displacement until the representative tooth in contact rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (according to the fact that the gear teeth of the umbrella tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation at an angle of 30 degrees). Amount) is smaller than.

The gear teeth of the umbrella tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the umbrella tooth member 785c, but in the present embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the umbrella tooth member 785c are formed of a resin material, pressing is performed. Since the accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the umbrella tooth member 785c, the posture of the umbrella tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotational direction is changed from the state of FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b). ) Is maintained.

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the umbrella tooth member 785c is caused by the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f of the shaft rotating member 785 from the magnet Mg with respect to the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the upside down member 781. (See FIG. 54), which is generated by counteracting the adsorption force generated.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotation position stabilizing portion 785f so as to limit the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The shaft rotating member 785 on the right side receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in the direction of increasing the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 on the right side.

Further, with respect to the shaft rotating member 785 on the left side, the arrangement of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the case of the right side, while the arrangement of the magnet Mg is on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotation position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the backflip direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in the direction of increasing the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 on the left side.

In the present embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the umbrella tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a) until the other side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction. It is designed to be able to generate loads exceeding.

As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the umbrella tooth member 785c are elastically deformed so as to absorb the displacement amount of the umbrella tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58 (b). When the displacement is continued beyond the state shown in FIG. 57 (b), the umbrella tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f are brought together. When the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the umbrella tooth member 785c released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery portion increases the momentum of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotation direction, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously improved. This improvement in rotation speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

As a result, the operation of the lining member 787 can be slowed or slowed without changing the driving speed of the drive motor 782. Therefore, the effect of the lining member 787 is produced while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782. The effect can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the umbrella tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. ..

The rotation position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attractive force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower portions, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the lining member 787 faces the front side, one of the rotation position stabilizing portions 785f. Is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52 (b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (FIG. 52 (b)). ), The upper) rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is the axial rotating member at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30). It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the 785. Therefore, in the displacement from the close arrangement state, the action that the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is delayed by the magnetic force can be generated regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, between the state shown in FIG. 58 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 58 (b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the upside-down member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in the front view beyond FIG. 57 (b), the degree of linear motion displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to the present embodiment, since the slider crank mechanism is adopted as described above, the same operation occurs. That is, in the vicinity of the vertically arranged state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the vertical direction, so that the lateral displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, the more the vertically inverted member 781 is tilted so as to approach the left-right direction, the smaller the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is in the left-right direction and the larger the displacement in the up-down direction. It is small and the amount of rotation is large. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotational operation of the vertically inverted member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 first increases, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases. The size increases, and the degree of lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear displacement and the rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extending portion 787c of the lining member 787 is formed at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. It is possible to avoid collision. Next, the change in the appearance of the lining member 787 will be described.

59 (a) to 59 (c) are front views of the effect device 780. In FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c), the reversing operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 59 (a) shows an effect device 780 in an upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781, and FIG. 59 (b) shows an effect device when the upside down member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is shown, and in FIG. 59 (c), the effect device 780 in the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 is shown.

The upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A), so that the state changes to the inverted vertical arrangement state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the lining member 787 is inverted 180 degrees with reference to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (a)). As a result, the decorative surface that can be visually recognized by the player can be switched (see FIG. 59 (c)).

The upside-down inverted member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) from the inverted vertical arrangement state to return to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57 (a)). Therefore, in the reversing operation, each time the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven by reversing the direction so as to rotate and displace the vertically reversing member 781 by 180 degrees, the state shown in FIG. 59 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 59 (c) ) Can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in).

As described above, while the upside-down inverted member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), the shaft rotating member 785 is displaced 180 degrees by meshing with the umbrella tooth portion 783c. do. Here, from the rotation direction of the umbrella tooth portion 783c, the shaft rotation member 785 on the right side rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the shaft rotation member 785 on the left side rotates in the forward rotation direction. That is, the pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right side covering member 787 faces the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the left side covering member 787 faces the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59 (b)). ).

As a result, during the rotational displacement of the lining member 787, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the lining member 787 on the left side and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the first sub-decorative surface 787a2) of the lining member 787 on the right side. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) from being visually recognized together.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be intentionally deviated from the left and right, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured so as not to be easily recognized by the player. The amount of information given to the player by the lining member 787 can be reduced.

This makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the lining member 787 during rotational displacement. Further, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right lining members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement is stopped, the game is played until the rotation of the lining member 787 is stopped. It is also possible to achieve the effect that it is easy to maintain the line of sight of the person on the lining member 787.

The rotational displacement is executed in the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement is stopped, and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right lining members 787 are the first main decorative surfaces 787a1 (or the first). In the state where the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has risen to the vicinity of the upper and lower centers of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 It is unlikely that attention will be focused on (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2).

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the field of view to the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is the third operation. It will be blocked by the unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) and the effect device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or The second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is easily in the player's field of view.

As described above, in the second operation unit 700, it is possible to prevent the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) from being visually recognized during the rotational displacement in the overhanging state, or on the player side. It is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the production standby state without paying attention by preventing the surface from facing.

As a result, the appearance of the second operating unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so that the effect performance for the cost of arranging the second operating unit 700 (occupancy of the place, burden of hiding well) becomes excessively low. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a state.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the lining member 787, the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54 (b)) to stabilize the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 and the lining member 787. Can be achieved.

In the present embodiment, since the metal member attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, it is possible to reduce the member cost and improve the maintainability as compared with the case of designing a dedicated metal member. ..

As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the lining member 787 is accompanied by a linear displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the effect device 780 capable of executing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are arranged by executing the rotational displacement. 750, the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be executed by securing the space in the left-right direction.

Therefore, in the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the lining member 787, it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state. It is controlled to be feasible on the premise of. As a result, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be normally generated.

The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the vertically inverted member 781, and in this state, they are arranged so as to face each other in the front-rear direction with the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. Therefore, if the lining member 787 is rotationally displaced by a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction from this arrangement, the extension portion 787c will collide with the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally, and is a configuration necessary for the production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lining member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction in advance before the rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear displacement of the length L1, the extension portion 787c can be retracted from the front-rear position of the connecting portion between the upper length portion 775 and the lower length portion 772, and the extension portion 787c and the upper length portion 775 can be retracted. It is possible to avoid a problem that the connecting portion with the lower long portion 772 collides with the lower long portion 772.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) at the length L1 while the lining member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs at the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the lining member 787 can be suppressed to a small size.

As a result, the attention of the lining member 787 can be suppressed to a low level and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous as compared with the case where the arrangement of the lining member 787 changes significantly during rotation. Since the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed ignoring the appearance during rotational displacement, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The timing at which the lining member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771, the structure of the effect device 780 is the same, but the magnet Mg is used. By changing the magnet to a magnet having a large attractive force, it is possible to avoid a collision between the above-mentioned connecting portion and the extending portion 787c as in the present embodiment.

As illustrated by the imaginary line in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is always arranged so as to be hidden by the lining member 787. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visually recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered by the fastening screw.

In the present embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, patterns, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787. The arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical according to the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, the LED cannot be arranged on the illuminated substrate 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easily visible in the dark when producing light emission.

Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c so as to avoid brightly shining and conspicuous parts, and as a result of doing so, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

Of course, it is permissible to make the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c symmetrical. In particular, when the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 are the same on the left and right covering members 787, there is no disadvantage due to the symmetrical arrangement of the insertion holes 778c, and the illuminated substrate. The design of the 778a can be facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the present embodiment, the lining member 787 is linearly displaced to the left and right during the reversing operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and the extension portion 787c is located near the center of the light diffusing member 778b. Even in a state where it is not surrounded by, the mechanical parts such as the upside-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visually recognized.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit in the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b arranged on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is on the front side. It is designed to fit in the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 arranged in. Further, the upside down member 781 is designed to fit in the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 arranged on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement locus fits in the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the effect device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusing member 778b to make it invisible, so that the effect of the appearance of the effect device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. Can be avoided.

It will be described back to FIG. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the effect standby state, and is supported by the tip ends of a pair of left and right elevating arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. The unit is configured so that it can be displaced up and down as the elevating arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. In addition, in FIGS. 60 and 61, the portion constituting the displacement of the third operation unit 800 is shown, and the decorative members 870 and 880 as the decorative portion arranged on the outside are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 is a fixed cylinder in which the held member 810 held by the elevating arm member 801 and the cylindrical portion 821 are fastened and fixed to the central portion of the held member 810. The member 820, the inner rotating member 830 axially supported by the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted on the inner peripheral side, and the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the main body 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted on the inner peripheral side. It is housed in an outer rotating member 840 that is pivotally supported, a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 that are rotatably connected to a cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840 (five in this embodiment), and a held member 810. It is provided with a drive transmission device 860 for transmitting a driving force for displaced the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850, which has a plurality of gear members.

The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 is recessed in the central portion to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, and is formed with an insertion hole for inserting a fixing screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting an electric wiring. The detection sensor 813, which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove directed to the side where the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 can be received, and the motor holding portion 814 that holds the drive motor 861. A plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 815 projecting on the front side as cylindrical portions that support the transmission gear 863 so as not to fall off, and a double cylindrical portion that projecting the load response gear 865 on the front side as a double cylindrical portion that supports the load response gear 865 so as not to fall off. A plurality of double-cylindrical projecting portions 816 that are projecting are provided.

The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 formed in the central portion in the front-rear direction. The circular hole 818 is designed so that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 project inward from the inner peripheral edge portion thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 is fastened and fixed to the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end portion of the cylindrical portion 821, and the circular plate portion 822, and a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the front side. A disk-shaped illuminated substrate 823 to be arranged and a light-transmitting resin material formed of an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) and light-transmitting resin material that can cover the illuminated substrate 823 from the front side. A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and slidable with the cylindrical portion 821 are provided.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the tip end on the back side, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylinder fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw to fix the cylindrical portion 821. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 so as not to rotate.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the cylinder fixing portion 812 is laid to the front side through the penetrating portion and arranged behind the illuminated substrate 823. Is connected to the connector.

As LEDs, the illuminated substrate 823 includes inner light emitting portions 823a arranged at the vertices of the pentagon and central positions equidistant from those vertices, and outer light emitting portions 823b arranged at 15 locations equidistant on the circumference. And. The inner light emitting unit 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting unit 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the outer side (diameter direction) in the radial direction.

The outer light emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b irradiates the plated portion 871a of the first decorative member 870 which is arranged in close contact with each other on the circumference at equal intervals. The member 870 is irradiated with the light from the three LEDs.

The outer light emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the illuminated substrate 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting portion 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Since the first decorative member 870 is arranged at equal intervals on the circle, the light from the same number of LEDs (three in the present embodiment) is always emitted from each first decorative member 870 regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotation direction. Can be irradiated.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the amount of light of the light LD1 that is applied to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured such that the inner diameter side portion is slidable to the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while the outer diameter side portion is slidable to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. Is formed in.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a tubular portion that protrudes rearward from the inner diameter side end portion of the flange-shaped portion in a cylindrical shape. Since the diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, it is slidably fitted in the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 in between, the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable around the fixed cylindrical member 820 are prevented from coming into direct contact with each other. Further, the sliding member 825 is arranged on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and similarly on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 are damaged or deformed by the load generated at the time of sliding failure (when the displacement resistance is unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 has a cylindrical main body portion 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end portion, and a position in which the circumference of the main body portion 831 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832. 833, and a plurality of rotating members 834 that are rotatably supported on the radial outer side of the linear motion member 833.

The main body portion 831 has a plurality of sliding protrusions extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange-shaped portion 831a as a base end at an angle position (5 points) intermediate between the above-mentioned circular flange-shaped portion 831a and the adjacent metal rods 832. It is provided with a strip portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c formed in recesses at ends on opposite sides of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The sliding ridge portion 831b is a portion configured to be slidable with the inner peripheral side curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, in order to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce the contact friction. The tip of the protrusion is formed in a semicircular cross section.

The arrangement of the sliding ridge portion 831b is set at an angle position in the middle of the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above, but in other words, on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840. It is considered to be a position (a position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in the out-of-diameter direction along the metal rod 832, and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported is displaced in the out-diameter direction. Even if it receives, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding ridge portion 831b, so that the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 is received. Can be kept low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion in which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central annular gear 864 is inserted and arranged, and the transmission protrusion 864a is arranged in the recessed portion 831c to prevent relative rotation with each other. The rotation angle of the central annular gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 is arranged at intervals so as to be aligned in the linear motion displacement direction, and is provided with a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 833a and 833b that are arranged in a cylindrical shape toward the rear, and the cylindrical projecting portions 833a. , 833b, a cylindrical cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on a side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and a tip portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. It is provided with a recessed groove 833d to be recessed.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the overhanging portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. When the rotating member 834 is fitted externally, it functions as a groove for displacement regulation to prevent the rotating member 834 from falling off in the out-of-diameter direction, which will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in the shape of a bevel gear, and a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 834b projecting in a cylindrical shape in parallel with the linear motion direction. The umbrella tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 circumference (about 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical projecting portion 834b has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are screwed into the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874 and 884 of the decorative members 870 and 880. It functions to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, but the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 is a plurality of cylindrical main body portions 841 and a plurality of outer rotating members 840 extending outward in the radial direction at positions obtained by dividing the circumference of the main body portion 841 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction (five in the present embodiment). 842, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and the diameter of the main body 841 in an arrangement that allows entry into the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. A detected portion 844 extending outward is provided.

The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a, and the base end of the intermediate arm member 850. By screwing the fastening screw into the female screw with the cylindrical portion 842a inserted through the side rod portion 851, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged so as to be meshed with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and thus function as a portion for switching the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a member formed in a long length, and has a base end side rod portion 851 whose one end side is pivotally supported by a cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a base end side rod portion 851 thereof. A thickening portion 852 that is thickened to the front side on the end side, and a tip side rod portion 853 that extends parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base end side rod portion 851 from the front side end portion of the thickening portion 852. , A rotation transmission portion 854 formed by having gear teeth at the end portion of the tip end side rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission portion 854 is a portion interlocking with the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834, and has a supported hole 854a formed in a dimensional relationship so as to be rotatable with each other with the cylindrical projecting portion 833a inserted. A guide hole 854b, which is a long hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and guides with a cylindrical projecting portion 833b inserted, and a bevel gear centered on the supported hole 854a. It is provided with a bevel tooth portion 854c which is formed in a shape and forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 is driven by being pivotally supported and fixed to a drive motor 861 fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a cylindrical projecting portion 815. A plurality of transmission gears 863 meshed with each other so that driving force can be transmitted via the gear 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 that are staggered and are pivotally supported by the double cylinder protrusion 816, and are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylinder protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865. It includes a torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the load applied to the load response gear 865 in the rotational direction.

The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and is recessed so as to be able to enter and arrange in the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a projecting from the bottom plate portion to the front side in an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation portion 831c, and a coaxial double ring-shaped bottom plate arranged on the inner diameter side and the outer diameter side of the transmission protrusion 864a. A support annular portion 864b projecting from the portion to the front side is provided.

In the assembled state, when the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed portion 831c, the rear end portion of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is dimensionally related to the intermediate fit in the gap between the support annular portions 864b. Alternatively, they are fitted due to the dimensional relationship of the tightening fit. As a result, the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be integrally rotated.

The arrangement of the recessed portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

If the intervals are equal, it can be assembled by matching the arrangement of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed portion 831c without considering the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, so that the assembly can be performed quickly. It becomes possible to do. When the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (same at intervals of 72 degrees) as in the present embodiment, the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are arranged. It is considered that there is little effect of shifting the gears during assembly, so it is effective to set them at equal intervals.

If the intervals are unequal, the number of man-hours required for assembling after adjusting the posture of the central annular gear 864 to the inner rotating member 830 during the assembling work increases by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c The arrangement can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 with the central annular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so as to be meshable with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. Due to the engagement of the torque limiter 866 with the load response gear 865, the load response gear is caused by the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840. It is configured to switch between a state in which rotation of 865 is allowed and a state in which rotation is restricted (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect the connection and release the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In the present embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) that transmits a driving force in one direction is configured as a set in which the transmission direction is reversed, and the driving transmission can be switched by the torque limiter 866 with good responsiveness in both directions. It is configured as follows.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 62 and 63, the decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is shown, and the portion for forming the displacement is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is fastened and fixed to the above-mentioned inner rotating member 830 and the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830, and is one of the cylindrical projecting portions 834b. It includes a first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the opposite side surface of the first decorative member 870. ..

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton portion 871 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first skeleton portion 875 formed so as to cover one side of the first skeleton portion 871. , Equipped with.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first lining portion 875 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and figures and patterns and character patterns (hereinafter, also referred to as "patterns") are drawn on the surface thereof. When the surface faces the front side, the player is made to visually recognize the pattern or the like.

In the present embodiment, independent patterns or the like are drawn on a plurality of (five) first lining portions 875. Therefore, by changing the first lining part 875 that emits strong light by the light emission control by the illumination substrate 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first lining part 875, the pattern that attracts the attention of the player may be different. Can be made.

For example, from the player's point of view, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that makes the third symbol display device 81 pay attention to which first lining portion 875 stops, and at the same time, the inner rotating member 830. If the rotation is controlled, the first lining portion 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed according to the rotation, so that the player can change the rotation until the rotation is stopped. The line of sight can be focused on the first lining unit 875.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton portion 881 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second skeleton portion 885 formed so as to cover the other side of the second skeleton portion 881. , Equipped with.

The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second lining portion 885 so as not to fall off.

The second lining portion 885 is made of metal by screwing and fixing a metal screw at a position (proximity position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second lining portion 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, the unity of the second lining portion 885 in the united state (particularly, the one-unit state, see FIG. 32) can be ensured.

A figure or pattern or a character pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pattern, etc.") is drawn on the surface of the second covering portion 885, and when the surface faces the front side, the pattern or the like is played. Make people visually recognize.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of (5 in the present embodiment) second embossed portions 885 have a plurality of (at least 2 and maximum 5) second embossed portions 885 as a set. Each of the second lining parts 885 is made into a circle so that when the five second lining parts 885 form a combined state, they are visually recognized as a "circular body". It is decorated to form a part of the body.

The pattern or the like drawn on the second lining portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the content grasped from the second lining portion 885 in the one-association state is the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a pattern that does not make a big difference even if the arrangement of is different. That is, the design does not have clear top, bottom, left, and right as a pattern, and the change in outer shape is not noticeable even when rotated (in the present embodiment, a circular shape).

Therefore, if the plurality of second lining portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, it is possible to improve the effect performance when the second lining portion 885 is visually recognized by the player. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the second lining portion 885 side is firmly integrated by the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that the merging is performed when the second lining portion 885 is arranged on the front side. It is possible to improve the production performance in the state.

In each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second lining portion 885 is reversed in the front-rear direction due to the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screws attracted by each magnet Mg2 are simply replaced with the metal screws screwed and fixed to the second lining portion 885 adjacent to the opposite side, and the five second linings are used. Since the portions 885 are arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when integrated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the magnet is not housed in the first lining portion 875. As a result, the strength of the integration on the first lining portion 875 side is slightly weakened, but it is avoided that the effect performance is deteriorated due to this.

That is, since independent patterns and the like are drawn on the first lining portion 875, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly deviated, the game is played. There is no possibility that the pattern or the like to be visually recognized by a person cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the effect performance of the effect using the pattern or the like drawn on the first lining portion 875.

Further, since the strength of the integration on the first lining portion 875 side is weakened, the vibration caused by the ascending / descending displacement (stopping from) and the rotational displacement (stopping from) as the integrated rotation operation or the switching rotation operation. ), The arrangement of the combined first lining portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first lining portion 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be realized by the conventional machine composed of a single circular member instead of the divided body. Therefore, the first lining portion 875 can be displaced. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the lining portion 875.

From the above circumstances, in the combined state in which a plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as an individual united state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 is on the front side. The state of facing is also referred to as a united state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual united state and the united state will be described.

64 (a), 64 (b), 65 (a) and 65 (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and are views 66 (a) and 66 (b). ), FIG. 67 (a) and FIG. 67 (b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 that is displaced by the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840. Is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, it is shown in chronological order in the rear view and the front view, and shows how the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual united state (FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a)). ..

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is described as the virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of the virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. The rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual united state (FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a)) is shown at an angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 66) from the individually united state (this rotation operation is also referred to as “switching rotation operation” below), it is intermediate. Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotating member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840. In the present embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in arrangement by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the above-mentioned configuration between the members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projecting portion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. The arrangement change of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the arrangement change of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmission unit 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830, and at the same time, is displaced in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the rotation supported by the rotation transmission unit 854. Similarly, the member 834 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time, is displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with a displacement in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes the displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotary member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the linear motion member 833 and the decorative members 870 and 880 to be fastened and fixed to the linear motion member 833 and the decorative members 870 and 880 are not fixed even at the radial end position. Since the displacement to can be maintained, the effect of the effect during the switching rotation operation can be obtained as compared with the case where the displacement is completed only by the linear motion displacement in the radial direction (for example, the reversal operation described above in the second operation unit 700). Can be kept high.

On the other hand, in the reversal operation described above in the second operation unit 700, a rotational operation with high acceleration is generated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the umbrella tooth portion 783c and the umbrella tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58). , The arrangement of the lining member 787 at the end of the lateral displacement in the linear motion direction (see FIG. 59 (b)) is designed to weaken the impression of being fixed.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the lining member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the lining member 787 is improved, and the change width of the left-right position is small at the end of the lateral displacement in the left-right direction ( Even in a situation where (a period near the dead point of the slider crank) continues, the effect of the operation of the lining member 787 is maintained high by increasing the rotation speed of the lining member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is conceivable that a radial load is likely to occur from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 may be displaced. In the embodiment, the radial loads of the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) about the rotation axis, so that the loads cancel each other out. As a result, the deviation of the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 can be suppressed, so that the switching rotation operation can be easily executed normally.

As described above, the radial displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) in the rotational operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs with the rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid a collision with the surrounding decorative member, in the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, it is detected that the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state to determine the posture of the elevating arm member 801. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

Further, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, which are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmitting portion 854, are also similarly radially oriented around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. It is displaced, and at the same time, it is displaced in the circumferential direction.

Due to the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 850, the umbrella tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) and the umbrella tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 (see FIG. 60) mesh with each other, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member 834 rotate. The decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 are rotationally displaced about the metal rod 832.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. Further, the rotation direction is increased so that the angle θ32 is separated from the virtual position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the rotation member 834 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ), It is set in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the outside diameter side of the virtual position line 832F.

Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotated state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (180 in the present embodiment). When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) due to the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the umbrella tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 rotates half a circumference (180 degrees rotation). ) Is configured to.

That is, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates about the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the rotation angle about the supported hole 854a of the umbrella tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike what was described as the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) is the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 centered on the metal rod 832. It does not cause an action that delays the rotation of the magnet.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and the decorative member 880 is displaced in the outer diameter direction along the metal rod 832 as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates. As a result, the suction force may be lost due to the formation of a gap between the second decorative members 880 provided adjacent to the second decorative member 880.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement centered on the metal rod 832 is started, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation is performed with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 centered on the metal rod 832. There is no delaying effect.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the drive motor 861 can be miniaturized.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be started quickly and ended at an early stage, the degree of attention of the player to the rotational displacement centered on the metal rod 832 can be lowered.

The quickness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is also maintained by configuring the decorative members 870 and 880 so that the rotational angle of the decorative members 870 and 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 is not constant.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state where the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced in diameter and can perform the integral rotation operation is 45 degrees. In the case of, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66 (b)), and the angle θ32 when the virtual position line 832F is rotated at an angle of 45 degrees is 27 degrees (FIG. 67 (a)). reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed so that the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from the state where the integral rotation operation is possible is smaller than that during the rotation. Thereby, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be suppressed at the start of rotation of the inner rotating member 830.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used for the rotation of the inner rotating member 830, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, and the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required for the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880 at the start of rotation of the inner rotating member 830 from the possible state can be reduced, the load applied to the drive motor 861 at the start of rotation of the inner rotating member 830 is excessive. It is possible to avoid becoming large.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 centered on the metal rod 832 occurs while being displaced in the circumferential direction in the front view, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during the rotational displacement can be suppressed low. can. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the side surface portions of the decorative members 870 and 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first lining portion 875 and the second lining portion 885) are visible, and the decorative members 870 and 880 can be seen. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the side surface of the.

At the time of the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the front view. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extension arm portion 842 provided adjacent to the extension arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which it is pivotally supported is arranged. Therefore, without countermeasures, the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with the peripheral portion.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the structure of the intermediate arm member 850 is shifted back and forth for each part to avoid a collision. That is, by arranging the tip end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the base end side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the base end side rod portion 851 and the tip end side are arranged. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

Further, by arranging the base end side rod portion 851 on the front side of the extension arm portion 842 and the tip end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the extension arm portion 842, the switching rotation operation can be performed. At that time, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842, and the collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction in which the intermediate arm member 850 is allowed to rotate (front view counterclockwise direction in the individually united state, see FIG. 66). ) Was explained. In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866 to receive resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction described above (front view clockwise direction in the individually united state), or in a direction allowing rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (front view counterclockwise in the individually united state). If the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted by rotation in the (rotational direction) (for example, reaches a united state from an individual united state) and then continues to rotate in the same direction, the outside A load exceeding the permissible value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the posture maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are released. And rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the rotation direction, the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction of continuing the regulation of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850. , The inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the united state. Also called "integral rotation operation").

The integral rotation operation occurs in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in the present embodiment, it occurs in a united state in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are arranged close to each other.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the diameter expansion direction, it is not necessary to consider the collision with the surrounding decorative members. The integral rotation operation can be executed in the state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation is executably controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) causes the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to switch and rotate with displacement in the diameter-expanding direction. It is possible to perform an integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radial displacement, and any operation can be executed in both drive directions, but the priority is given to the operation. Yes, it is not possible to perform any action immediately in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the states shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and if the rotation is continued as it is, it is integrated. The rotation operation can be executed, and the integrated rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in the front view. Immediately, the integral rotation operation can be executed by the counterclockwise rotation in the front view. Cannot be executed.

Further, for example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted. Then, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) in the front view, the switching rotation operation is executed again, and immediately, the integrated rotation operation is executed in the clockwise direction in the front view. Can not.

As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed with respect to the rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacements of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 change.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated or allowed for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861. It is possible to control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction based on the determination result. Hereinafter, an example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an arrangement of the elevating arm member 801, a drive mode of the drive motor 861, and an example of the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800.

At the time of the reversal effect, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and at the time of the normal effect, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with the surrounding decorative members in the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again in the event of a sudden power failure, or when the power is turned on in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state. After grasping the state of the movable portion from the output of the detection sensor 813, it is controlled to execute the control at the time of normal production. As a result, even if the state of the moving part cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870 and 880 accidentally collide with the surrounding decorative members. ..

As the drive direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view (a drive mode in which the integrated rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual united state (see FIG. 66 (a))). The reverse rotation in 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual united state).

First, the drive control during the normal production before the reversal production will be described. At the time of this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in an individual united state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation.

Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, a collision with the surrounding decorative member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the overhanging state at an arbitrary timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is vertically displaced by the vertical movement of the elevating arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated at the same time as the elevating displacement. It is also controlled so that it can cause movement.

As a matter of course, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be integrally rotated in a state where the arrangement of the elevating arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be rotated. The elevating arm member 801 may be elevated while the integral rotation operation is stopped.

Since the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the switching of this output is determined. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the posture of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and can arbitrarily set the outer rotating member 840 by setting a plurality of types of driving times from the initial position. It can be controlled to stop in the posture of.

Next, the drive control at the time of the reversal effect will be described. First, at the time of the reversal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operation unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue forward rotation until the detected unit 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected unit 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the reverse rotation. By driving the reverse rotation, the third operation unit 800 executes the switching rotation operation, but during this period, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. NS.

When the drive motor 861 is continuously driven in the same rotation direction, the united state is reached, and the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is executed. After the start of the integrated rotation operation, the outer rotating member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so that the detected unit 844 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only the reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, a collision with the surrounding decorative member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the overhanging state at an arbitrary timing.

Since the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can determine the posture of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reversing effect to the normal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue the reverse rotation until the detected unit 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected unit 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward rotation. By driving the forward rotation, the third operation unit 800 executes the switching rotation operation, but during this period, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. NS.

Next, the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is executed. After the start of the integrated rotation operation, the outer rotating member 840 starts rotating, so that the detected unit 844 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the transition to the normal production is performed again. The limitation on the drive control at the time of the normal effect is the same as the limitation on the drive control described at the time of the normal effect, which is arranged before the above-mentioned reversal effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 determines the switching of the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and the rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. It can also be used for determining the standard. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be executed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 in the opposite direction from the state in which the integral rotation operation is continued or the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individual united state, the switching rotation operation can be executed to switch to the united state.

Therefore, in the operation effect, when controlling to switch to the unified state at the timing of the jackpot notification, it is possible to avoid the player from predicting the presence or absence of the jackpot notification from the posture of the first decorative member 870.

Further, the decoration in the one-association state is designed so that the content grasped by the player does not differ greatly depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880, as described above. That is, even if the arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotation direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents grasped by the player as a united state at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the one-union state are different depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the one-union state can be omitted, so that the first decorative member in the individual united state can be omitted. Regardless of the posture of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize both the switching rotation operation and the integrally rotation operation in both the forward rotation and the reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, a wide variety of production modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861 as compared with the case where the operation modes are fixed in the forward rotation and the reverse rotation.

FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 on the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end portion where the cylinder fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end portion where the illuminated substrate 823 is arranged. The electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through the electrical wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the illumination substrate 823 are configured to be able to control light emission.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a of the illuminated substrate 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side on the central portion side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that is visible to the player at the central portion of the circle in which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged on the circumference in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b of the illumination substrate 823 is irradiated inside the decorative members 870 and 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are irradiated. It acts to illuminate from the inside.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual united state in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 69) and a united state in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the light LD1 can switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual united state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the optical LD1 is switched to the front side by reflecting to the front side at the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 that has been plated. As a result, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated toward the first lining portion 875, and the brightness of the first lining portion 875 at the time of irradiation of the light LD1 can be satisfactorily increased.

Here, in the present embodiment, the illumination substrate 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around the illuminated substrate 823. Therefore, the irradiation direction of the optical LD1 and the decorative members 870 and 880 The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, during rotation, the light LD1 may be irradiated to the central portion of the plating portion 871a, or the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated to a position deviated from the central portion of the plating portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first lining portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light at a constant brightness. It may be difficult to perform the effect of making it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the plating portion 871a capable of reflecting the light LD1 is a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illuminated substrate 823. It is designed so that the center thereof is arranged in the vicinity of the center portion of the first lining portion 875 in a front view.

Since the optical LD1 is arranged so that the optical axis is directed in the outer diameter direction of the circle in which the outer light emitting portion 823b is arranged, the optical LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating portion 871a and is the center of the radius of curvature thereof. It will proceed toward the side and illuminate the vicinity of the center of each first lining portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a with respect to the outer light emitting portion 823b, a plurality of light LD1s can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first lining portion 875. As a result, light can be stably irradiated to the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first lining portion 875, so that the first lining portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during the integrated rotation operation. be able to.

Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion where the plating treatment is performed in the same manner as the plating treatment on the plating portion 871a, and the outer plating portion 871b arranged outside the first lining portion 875 in a front view is provided. Be prepared. The optical LD1 is reflected by the outer plating portion 871b as well as the plating portion 871a, but since the outer plating portion 871b is arranged rearward as compared with the arrangement of the plating portion 871a, the outer plating portion 871b The degree of light can be weakened.

As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the intensity of the light visually recognized outside the first lining portion 875 is too strong, the player feels dazzling, and the visibility inside the frame of the first lining portion 875 is lowered. be able to.

The illumination substrate 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but since it is not completely closed at the joint, all the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b is inside. Is not irradiated to.

First, the internal structure can be visually recognized in FIG. 69 between the member edge portion 875a of the first lining portion 875 and the member edge portion 885a of the second lining portion 885 arranged to face the member edge portion 875a. A certain degree of gap VA1 is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b projects to the outside of the frame of the first lining portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

Further, between the member outer end portion 875b of the first lining portion 875 arranged to face the metal rod 832 and the member outer end portion 885b of the second lining portion 885, the member interferes with the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed that exceeds the area required to avoid the above.

First, the gap VA2 makes it possible to secure a sufficient length of the metal rod 832 by avoiding a collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, and the metal rod 832 rotates the linear motion member 833 and the gap VA2. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring a function of guiding the linear motion displacement of the member 834.

The gap VA2 is secondly a fastening screw that is inserted into the skeleton portion 871,881 and is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the rotating member 834 to bring the decorative members 870 and 880 into the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for fastening screws for fastening and fixing.

Further, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for advancing the light passing through the transparent portion of the skeleton portion 871,881. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through the equidistant positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visually recognized as light.

Therefore, by executing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same manner. As a result, while it is not necessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b (for example, while all lighting is continued), the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 is emitted. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emitting mode.

In the one-association state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeleton portion 881 is formed of a translucent resin material, so that the reflection action of the light LD1 by the second skeleton portion 881 is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the frame of the second concealed portion 885 with light (weak light) away from the optical axis in the optical LD1, so how to illuminate the second concealed portion 885. The degree of can be weakened. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the optical LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 can be improved.

The frame of the second covering portion 885 is formed of a colored (in the present embodiment, an arbitrary color is set as the color of the circular body) and light-transmitting resin material, and a light diffusion process is formed inside. The light diffusing decorative portion 885c to be formed is arranged along the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light incident on the light diffusing decorative portion 885c in the light LD1 is refracted and acts to cause the entire light diffusing decorative portion 885c to emit surface light.

By this surface emission, it is possible to make the light visually recognized through the light diffusing decorative part 885c arranged in the circumferential direction uniform, and each light diffusing decorative part of the five second decorative members 880. The effect that the 885c is integrally visible to the player can be produced.

Here, as described above, it is possible to improve the effect performance when the player visually recognizes the second concealed portion 885 if the plurality of second concealed portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing that the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, when the second lining portion 885 is arranged on the front side, it is possible to improve the effect performance in the combined state.

The member outer end portion 885b of the second lining portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 that is close to (contacts) with the member outer end portion 875b of the first lining portion 875 is , The metal rod 832 is projected toward the first decorative member 870 with reference to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

As a result, when the third operation unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the one-association state (see FIG. 32), the first lining portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is in the player's field of view. The degree of entry can be reduced, and the influence on the production can be reduced.

As a result, when the frame portion of the first lining portion 875 and the frame portion of the second lining portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second lining portion 885 is arranged on the front side. Occasionally, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first lining portion 875 from entering the field of view.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is in the overhanging state independently in the one-association state (see FIG. 32), it is compared with the case where the other operating units 600 and 700 are both in the overhanging state (FIG. 32). 33, see F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight to see the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction to pass through. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side surface of the third operation unit 800 is visually recognized, and the effect of the effect is likely to be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the one-association state, the end surface 885b1 of the second lining portion 885 is arranged closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation is performed in an oblique direction. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visually recognized, most of the side surface can be visually recognized as a portion of the second lining portion 885, and the degree to which the first lining portion 875 is visually recognized can be reduced. As a result, in the one-association state, the second lining portion 885 can be made easier to see than the first lining portion 875, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual united state and the one-unit state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830 to rotate the inner rotating member 830, while the outer rotating member 840 is a torque limiter. The rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding ridge portion 831b, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 becomes large, and the torque limiter 866 There is no choice but to increase the permissible value of load transmission, and it is easy to hinder the miniaturization of the torque limiter 866.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are only the front end portion that comes into contact with the sliding member 825 and the rear end portion that is supported by the central annular gear 864. , The other parts are configured to leave a gap. As a result, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, it is considered necessary to have a stopper for suppressing the displacement to the front side with respect to the central annular gear 864. The sliding member 825 functions as this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load in the direction of pushing forward from the inner rotating member 830, but the sliding member 825 has a front surface of the sliding member 825 that is in contact with the short-diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822. Touch.

The short-diameter annular portion 822a is arranged on the back surface side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter similar to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section on the back surface at the outermost diameter portion. The ridge portion 822b projecting to the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the ridge portion 822b comes into contact with the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a and the sliding member 825 come into contact with each other. Can be done. As a result, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotational direction can be reduced.

Since no fastening screw is used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that is expected when the weight of the fastening screw increases is reduced accordingly. Can be done.

The fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. In the description of this fixation, FIGS. 62 and 63 will be referred to as appropriate.

To fix the first decorative member 870 to the rotating member 834, a fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 is a female screw of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the first lining portion 875. After the first skeleton portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by screwing into the first skeleton portion 871, the overhanging portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is formed. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidingly fitted) and screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

To fix the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834, a fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 is a female screw of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the second covering portion 885. After the second skeleton portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881 by screwing into the second skeleton portion 881, the overhanging portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeleton portion 881 is formed. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidingly fitted) and screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decorative member are attached with the linear displacement or the rotational displacement of the rotating member 834. The member 880 can be configured to be linearly displaced or rotationally displaced.

In the process of fixing, the overhanging portion 873,883 enters the recessed groove 833d of the linear motion member 833, so that the skeleton portion 871,881 is arranged on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the long direction). ) Is specified, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton portions 871,881 from falling off from the linear motion member 833.

Since the skeleton portions 871,881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the long direction) is similarly defined, and the rotating member 834 is rotated. It is possible to prevent the member 834 from falling off from the linear motion member 833.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the assembly of the rotary member 834 to the linear motion member 833, the skeleton portion 871,881 in which the portion defining the arrangement of the rotary member 834 on the linear motion member 833 is fixed to the rotary member 834. Since the portion defining the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the man-hours for assembling and disassembling can be reduced.

That is, for example, at the time of disassembly, if the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the skeleton portion 871,881 to the rotating member 834 is removed, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton portion 871,881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released. Not only that, but also for the rotating member 834, the regulation of the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 can be released. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. 70 (a) to 70 (d) and 71 (a) to 71 (d) show an operation unit 500 schematically explaining an example of a combination operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 in chronological order. It is a front schematic diagram of. In the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

In FIGS. 70 and 71, the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, the decorative surfaces 787a1,787a2, 787b1,787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and the covering portions 875,885 of the third operation unit 800. The decoration in is schematically illustrated so as to be identifiable by letters and the like.

That is, the first effect surface 661a has the characters "normal" in vertical writing, the second effect surface 661b has the characters "activate" in horizontal writing, and the third effect surface 661c has the characters "activated" in the longitudinal direction. Along the lines, the "!" Symbols are shown.

Further, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the characters "war start", the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 has the characters "pinch is a chance", and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the characters "attack". The characters "Patience !?" are illustrated on the second sub-decorative surface 787b2.

Further, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first concealed portion 875, and the second concealed portion 885 has five integrated “◯”. The symbol is illustrated.

In FIG. 70A, each of the operation units 600 to 800 is arranged in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 as a surface that cannot be seen from the front but can be seen from the player's point of view is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 70B, the first operation unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the overhang state.

By executing the integral rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the first lining portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be replaced one after another. Further, by setting the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate effect state during the continuous rotation operation or after the stop, the third effect surface 661c is projected inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 You can make the movement lively.

For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 by controlling the effect so that the jackpot expectation of the lottery increases. can.

When the integral rotation operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. Can be visually recognized integrally.

As a result, the attention to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be improved, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed by the third symbol display device. By returning the third operation unit 800 to the effect standby state while starting at 81, the line of sight of the player can be smoothly guided to the third symbol display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. For example, an LED that irradiates the first decorative member 870 to be noticed by irradiating the light LD1 by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged so that the first decorative member 870 can be irradiated with light. It is possible to draw attention to an arbitrary first decorative member 870 by turning on the light and turning off the other LEDs.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched according to the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870. ..

When switching the lighting pattern of the LED according to the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870, the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle by sequentially switching the LEDs to be lit in the rotation direction. You may make the player visually recognize it as if it were. Further, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration to be irradiated with light is utilized by utilizing the fact that each of the first decorative members 870 reaches the position where the light is irradiated from the LED in order by the integral rotation operation. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70A, the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 both have a vertically elongated decoration and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, since the front side surface of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction like the first effect surface 661a in the effect standby state, the effect of being integrally visually recognized is enhanced.

On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) is reached, the lower end portion of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced so as to be separated from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. 70 (b), and the first operation is performed. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a decoration formed in a horizontally long shape, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operation unit 700 having a decoration similarly formed in a horizontally long shape is provided. It can be visually recognized integrally with the lining member 787 of the above.

Although the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown in FIG. 35, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), if the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state, the lining member 787 and the second operation unit 700 are shown. 2 The vertical distance from the decorative rotating member 660 is further shortened, and the effect of being integrally visible can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging at a visible position, and the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is made visible as if it is enlarged to the right of the right end RE1 of the area. 2 Even if the arrangement of the production surface 661b is closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a cramped impression.

Further, as a result, similarly to the second main decorative surface 787b1, the second effect surface 661b can be visually recognized by the player as if it is arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second main decoration can be made visible. It is possible to enhance the effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are integrally visible.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with the contents related to the decoration of the second effect surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second It is possible to enhance the effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second effect surface 661b, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are integrally visible.

In FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is in the overhang state. The reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is shown in FIG. 70 (d). In the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is located on the left and right outer sides of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700. Since it is not arranged in, the reversing operation of the lining member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be executed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the overhanging state.

In the reversing operation of the lining member 787, the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2, which are different on the left and right, are directed to the front side. In addition, the contents may be identifiable by the player by combining different sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2.

According to FIG. 70 (d), the player can identify the content of "pinch !?", and by stopping the drive of the second operation unit 700 in this state, attention is paid to the subsequent movement of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be focused on the second operation unit 700.

For example, when notifying that the lottery is out of order, it is controlled to return from the state of FIG. 70 (d) to FIG. 70 (c), and when the lottery result is not yet notified or the lottery is a big hit. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operation unit 700 by continuing the inversion from the state shown in FIG. 70 (d) and performing control so as to bring the state shown in FIG. 71 (a).

In FIG. 71 (a), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the overhanging state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state. Above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decorative surface 787b2 as a surface that cannot be seen from the front but can be seen from the player's point of view is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each are both horizontally written, so that the player can see them integrally. Easy to make. In addition, since the content has a series of meanings of "invoking an attack", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In the first operation unit 600, in the effect standby state (see FIG. 70A), the first effect surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each are written vertically. Since there is, it is easy for the player to see it integrally. In addition, since the content has a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize the contents integrally.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 are integrated with the side surfaces of different members (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). It is configured. Thereby, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71 (b) to 71 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the effect standby state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the overhang state. The arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is different between the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 71 (c) because the third operation unit 800 executes the integral rotation operation. On the other hand, regardless of which state the switching rotation operation is executed, the player can visually recognize the same united state (see FIG. 71 (d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, it is set to notify the success or failure of the jackpot by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol change. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not the jackpot is successful or not from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the game of winning or failing the jackpot The expectation of the person can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operation unit 800 can be maintained in a high state.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is visually recognized independently and a case where the decoration is visually recognized integrally in combination. Therefore, the decorations formed on the respective operation units 600 to 800 are not completed only by the respective operation units 600 to 800, but are designed as decorations related to each other among the respective operation units 600 to 800.

The drive control of each operation unit 600 to 800 is affected by the arrangement of each other depending on whether or not it can be executed. That is, if the drive of each operation unit 600 to 800 is executed at an inappropriate timing, the member operations may collide and break down. Therefore, the drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units. Is controlled.

For example, the change of the first operation unit 600 to the overhanging state may be controlled so that the state of the second operation unit 700 may be arbitrary and the third operation unit 800 is executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state. NS.

As for the change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate effect state, the state of the second operation unit 700 may be arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation is not a switching rotation operation. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

The state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrary, and the change of the second operation unit 700 to the overhang state is controlled so that the third operation unit 800 is executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state.

As for the change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state, the state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation is not a switching rotation operation. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the overhanging state and rotation is not executed or only the integrated rotation operation occurs, the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state. It is executed when it is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state.

The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the overhanging state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the effect standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the effect standby state. Will be done.

As described above, the drive control of each operation unit 600 to 800 is not possible at an arbitrary timing, and is controlled so as to be executed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units.

Next, the details of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. In the detailed description of the sorting device 300, FIGS. 1 to 25 will be referred to as appropriate. First, an example of decoration applied to the pre-design member 162 will be described.

FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. In FIG. 72, a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed on the front design member 162 as a difference from the content shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, the front plate is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the center side range of the front plate is larger than the peripheral range. A window portion 162d is formed as a range having high light transmission.

In the present embodiment, the light-transmitting seal member SL1 whose central range is cut out according to the shape of the window portion 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front-rear thickness of the window portion 162d is thinner than the front-rear thickness in the range where the seal member SL1 is attached around the window portion 162d, and the degree of light transmission through the front design member 162 is made different. Therefore, the light transmission of the window portion 162d can be increased.

The first purpose of the window portion 162d is to improve the visibility of the sorting device 300 in consideration of the line of sight passing through the plate portion of the front design member 162 when the player looks at the sorting device 300. It is formed, and in particular, it is formed for the second purpose of resolving the dissatisfaction from the player that the flow mode of the ball flowing down inside the distribution device 300 cannot be grasped. That is, the window portion 162d is formed in a shape and size in consideration of the shape of the sorting device 300.

The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmission than the peripheral range is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be arranged on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or a plurality of groove patterns may be formed so as to perform the same function as the light guide plate. The appearance of the member 162 may be changed, a pattern or a pattern may be drawn directly on the front design member 162, or a range corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening. good.

Further, the shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a band shape extending to the left and right with the same vertical width, or a shape in which the portion extending to the left and right is omitted so that the left and right width is equal to the left and right width of the range overhanging upward. It may have a pentagonal shape such as a home base), or it may have a shape that follows the shape of the front plate edge portion of the front design member 162.

Further, the window portion 162d is formed as a single range, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a range having high light transmission may be formed by a combination of a plurality of locations partitioned by a grid-like portion or a ladder-like portion, or the range may be divided in a manner in which a plurality of small windows are arranged. The range may be partitioned in such a manner that the windows are arranged in a disorderly manner. Further, the shape of the window portion may be variably configured.

Further, the surface shape of the seal member SL1 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a surface shape in which a large number of irregularities are formed, such as a surface shape formed by embossing, a large number of groove shapes or ridges may be formed on the surface, or a smooth surface may be formed.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but it is sufficient as long as it can secure higher light transmission than the surroundings (corresponding to the formation range of the seal member SL1), and the above-mentioned seal In addition to the same shape as the surface shape of the member SL1, various aspects can be adopted.

FIG. 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. In FIG. 73, a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed on the front design member 162 as a difference from the content shown in FIG. 21 above.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape, and is formed by connecting the main window portion 162d1 which is short in the vertical direction and long in the horizontal direction and above the central portion in the left and right of the main window portion 162d1. A unit 162d2 is provided.

In the present embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub window portion 162d2 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and are maintained in a state of high light transmission. The shape of each part will be described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed so that the outer edge shape in the front view is sufficient to ensure the visibility of the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336 are formed to have a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the ball passage, and the second flow path constituent portion 335 is inclined. It has a V-shape that rises and inclines toward the left and right outwards.

As a result, the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 can be housed inside the main window portion 162d1 in a front view, so that the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 335 and the third flow path component can be accommodated inside the main window portion 162d1. It is possible to improve the visibility of the sphere flowing down the flow path constituent portion 336.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path constituent portion 334 (see FIG. 17) formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. That is, the entire outer wall of the first flow path constituent portion 334 cannot be seen through the main window portion 162d1, and in particular, the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is lowered.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a is improved as compared with the case where the design is premised on being visually recognized by the player as in the case where the shape is required to have a good appearance. can do.

The sub-window portion 162d2 is designed so that the outer edge shape in the front view is sufficient to ensure the visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape covering the seal member 313.

As a result, the player grasps the state of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light emitting means 351 whose lighting timing is controlled based on the flow mode of the sphere, in addition to the visibility of the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336. Since it can be easily configured, it is possible to provide a comfortable game to the player.

74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of arrow XXIII of FIG. 16, and FIG. 75 is a cross section of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the LXXV-LXXV line of FIG. 73. It is a figure. In FIGS. 74 and 75, a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162 as a difference from the contents shown in FIGS. 23 and 18 above.

As shown in FIG. 74, when visually recognizing the distribution device 300 in a directional view (angled directional view), a part of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the front position is an opening / closing plate. Visible below 65b.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protrusion 376 is hidden behind the opening / closing plate 65b in the direction view of FIG. 74. Therefore, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 as long as the upper protrusion 376 can be seen. can do.

The field of view toward the upper projecting portion 376 is also good because the inner side surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines toward the left and right outward toward the front side. Is secured in.

That is, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface for preventing the ball flowing down the second flow path constituent portion 335 from jumping up, and the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to form the upper protruding portion 376. It avoids unnecessarily obstructing the view to.

Further, the fact that the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage that the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front. When the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 in the downward viewing direction (angled directional view) as shown in FIG. 74 can be increased, so that the upper surface portion 314 can be increased. While it has the advantage that it is easy to improve the effect of directing light to be visually recognized through the light diffusion processed surface 314c, the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 is large, so that the player can move the ball flowing under it. It has the disadvantage that it may be hidden from view.

In other words, the fact that the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front may be advantageous for the light effect, but may be disadvantageous for the visibility of the flowing ball. ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inner side surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines toward the left and right outwards, the sphere enters from the second flow path constituent portion 335 to the third flow path constituent portion 336. The projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be reduced at the location, and the visibility of the sphere flowing under the upper surface portion 314 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 74, when visually recognizing the sorting device 300 in a directional view (angled directional view), the seal member 313 is not visible inside the sub-window portion 162d2. In order to visually recognize the state of the member 313, the player is forced to adjust the position of the eyes and the line-of-sight angle so that the seal member 313 can be seen, which may hinder a comfortable game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting means 351 that directs the light to the seal member 313 passes through the seal member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2, and is therefore irradiated from the light emitting means 351. A part of the light reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 after passing through the sealing member 313. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit by looking at the sub-window portion 162d2.

Since the seal member 313 is not light-diffused, the action of stopping the progress of the light from the light emitting means 351 is weak, and the light can sufficiently reach the sub-window portion 162d2. As a result, when the light emitting means 351 is lit, the red light, which is the color of the seal member 313, reaches the sub-window portion 162d2, so that the sub-window portion 162d2 can be made to shine red.

As a result, the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the sub-window portion 162d2 before the light arrives can be easily understood, so that the player can easily grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 is lit. The seal member 313 (or the wall portion on which the seal member 313 is arranged) may be provided with a light diffusion process. In this case, the seal member 313 can be made to emit light uniformly.

As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position (height position) that does not overlap with the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged above the range in which the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336 can be arranged.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a rides.

Further, between the fixed member 161 and the pre-design member 162, as described above, the pre-design member 141 (see FIG. 7) obstructs the flow of the sphere, so that the flow range of the sphere is the pre-design member. It is moved to the left and right outside of the left and right width of 141. Therefore, it is possible to avoid overlapping the straight line LL1 with the sphere flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162.

Therefore, a ball flowing down the front side (for example, the game area) of the base plate 60 on the straight line LL1, a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, and a distribution device 300 (for example, the third flow path component 336). By arranging a sphere flowing down the), it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is reflected and refracted by the sphere. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 can stably reach the sub-window portion 162d2 regardless of the flow mode of the sphere.

In addition, in the arrangement of the seal member 313 in the present embodiment, it may be beneficial for the player that the seal member 313 can be kept in a state in which it is difficult to see the seal member 313 unless the player changes his / her line of sight.

For example, in the configuration in which the seal member 313 is always in the field of view, the light enters the player's eyes each time the light emitting means 351 emits light, so that the light emitting means 351 can be seen as in the present embodiment where some players feel dazzling. By arranging it difficultly, the glare felt by the player can be weakened.

In the present embodiment, the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the range intersecting the straight line LL1, the light diffusing process may be formed on the fixed member 161 so that the light does not easily reach the sub-window portion 162d2.

In this case, unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 so that the seal member 313 can be seen directly, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 is lit toward the seal member 313. Can be done. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether or not the ball has entered the probability variation detection sensor SE11 as a game preference, the purpose can be achieved if the line of sight shown in FIG. 74 is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the game burden of such a player.

In the present embodiment, the case where the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed from a smooth surface shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the sub-window portion 162d2 may be light-diffused, or a bubble portion may be provided inside so that light can be easily diffused.

In this case, the area of the light visually recognized through the sub-window portion 162d2 can be increased by diffusing the light that has reached the sub-window portion 162d2. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the sub-window portion 162d2 is illuminated.

Up to this point, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 that directs the light to the seal member 313, that is, the LED arranged on the straight line LL1 has been described. Next, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, the light emitted from a plurality of LEDs arranged at four locations on the left and right at the lowest stage will be described.

FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, the lower member 380, and the detection sensor SE1 of the distribution device 300 in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. In FIG. 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In the following description, among the light emitting means 351, the LEDs arranged on the left and right inside in the lowermost stage will be referred to as the inner light emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the left and right outer sides in the lowermost stage will be referred to as the outer light emitting means 351d. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is arranged inside the light diffusion processed surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emitting effect is executed in which the light diffusion processed surface 332e formed in a range extending to the left and right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is a long space on the left and right that is continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which is a branching point BP1 (see FIG. 75, where the flow of the sphere branches between the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. ) Is executed on the back side.

Therefore, when the sphere flows through the branch portion BP1 in the situation where the inner light emitting means 351c is lit, the portion where the sphere flowing on the front side of the light diffusing processed surface 332e that emits light in a range extending to the left and right is visually recognized as a shadow. Therefore, the player can easily grasp how the ball has flowed by visually recognizing the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light emitting means 351c passes through the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 75). Further, although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner projecting portions 318, the arrangement is such that light near the optical axis can pass through, and the projecting ends of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are viewed in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction. It is curved and formed.

Therefore, a part of the light emitted from the inner light emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shape of the front-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-right inner protrusion 318, so that the light travels diagonally forward and downward. The light can reach the light diffusing surface 340 (see FIG. 75).

Since the light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed in the entire range of the lower surface of the third flow path constituent portion 336 (see FIG. 14), the light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed by allowing light to reach the light diffusion processed surface 340 to form the third flow path configuration. The visibility of the space under the lower bottom surface of the portion 336 can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish between the sphere that flows down the inside of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the out sphere that passes through the out port 71 (see FIG. 75) and flows down the lower side of the third flow path constituent portion 336. can do.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is outside (upper side) of the light diffusion processed surface 332e and inside the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b. Be placed. Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light emitting means 351d, a light emitting effect is executed in which the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emission effect is a long space on the left and right that is continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which is a branching point BP1 (see FIG. 75, where the flow of the sphere branches between the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. ) Is executed on the upper side and the front side.

Therefore, when a sphere flows through the branch portion BP1 in a situation where the outer light emitting means 351d is lit, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b emit light on the upper side and the front side of the sphere, and flow through the branch portion BP1. Since the sphere is hidden by the light diffusion processed surface 333b (see FIG. 17), it becomes difficult for the player to grasp how the sphere flowed through the branching point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed vertically, and the light diffusion processed surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is arranged on the upper side thereof (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to the action of making the branch portion BP1 difficult to see in the front-rear direction, the light diffusion processed surface 314c also has a line of sight (see FIG. 74) at an angle such that the light diffusion processed surface 333b is viewed from above. The light emission makes it difficult to see the branch point BP1.

Further, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed vertically, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 is arranged below the light diffusion processed surface 334, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is below the second flow path component 335. It is formed up to the back surface of the side (see FIG. 14). Therefore, apart from the action of making the branch portion BP1 difficult to see in the front-rear direction, the lower side surface of the second flow path constituent portion 335 is made to emit light, and when the sphere flows down the second flow path constituent portion 335, the sphere is emitted. By creating a shadow by blocking the light (light diffused by the light diffusing surface 340), it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is arranged on the front side of the branch portion BP1 (see FIGS. 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 333b, a situation in which light is hidden by a sphere may occur. However, in the present embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction). ) Is arranged outside (upper side) of the range in which the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 76), so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light is blocked by the sphere arranged at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, the light diffusion processed surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by causing the outer light emitting means 351d to emit light regardless of the flow mode of the sphere in the sorting device 300. When the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, a sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 17) arranged in front of the light diffusing surface 333b blocks the light, so that a shadow is created. It becomes easy to grasp the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the flow path component 335.

In the present embodiment, a configuration for smoothing the flow of the sphere is adopted as a device for avoiding the situation where the light is blocked by the sphere arranged at the branching point BP1. The configuration will be described.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position (see FIG. 20), the ball that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down flows directly below and passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. In the state of being arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 18), the ball guide portion 371b flows down to the left and right outside along the inclination and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the slide displacement member 370 is placed in the front position and the ball flows down, the through-hole edge portion 382a of the plate-shaped portion 382 that supports the left and right outer ends of the slide displacement member 370 is located on the left and right outer sides of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is arranged so as to connect the edge portion and the left and right inner edge portions of the normal detection sensor SE12, and is formed as an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward to the left and right outside. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the upper surface of the through-hole edge portion 382a is configured to easily flow outward in the left-right direction.

As a result, it is easy to avoid a situation in which a ball that has started to flow outward to the left and right along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b flows backward or bounces inward in the left-right direction after being bridged to the through hole edge portion 382a. And the flow of the sphere can be smoothed.

The light diffusion processed surface 319a is arranged inside the front-rear width of the branch portion BP1. Therefore, the situation where the sphere is arranged on the back side of the light diffusing processed surface 319a cannot occur, so that the light is hidden by the sphere regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusing processed surface 319a. Hard to occur.

As described above, the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are not only arranged so as to be laterally displaced to the left and right, but also the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b which are arranged at different front and rear positions on the front side thereof. By intentionally designing with a difference in the arrangement relationship of the light emitting means 351c and 351d with the optical axis, and making the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a and 333b to which the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d reach are different. The front and rear positions where the light reaches and is diffused and visually recognized can be different.

In the above description, the case where the inner light emitting means 351c is made to emit light and the case where the outer light emitting means 351d is made to emit light are described separately, and the description is made on the premise that the light emitting means 351c and 351d on the opposite side are turned off. The actual light emission control of each of the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not one side at a time, and control modes such as both lighting and both extinguishing may occur. Hereinafter, the pattern of light emission control and the appearance of the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 at that time will be described.

77 (a) to 77 (d) are front perspective views of the middle member 330 of the sorting device 300. In FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (d), the streaks as the shape lines of the light diffusion processed surface are omitted for ease of understanding, and the light emitting means 351c and 351d are turned on and off, respectively. The case where the combination is different is shown, and the range shining brightly by the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d is shown in a shaded pattern.

That is, in FIG. 77 (a), both the light emitting means 351c and 351d are turned off, and in FIG. 77 (b), the inner light emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light emitting means 351d is turned off. The inner lighting state is shown, and in FIG. 77 (c), the outer lighting state in which the inner light emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on is shown, and in FIG. 77 (d), the light emitting means 351c and 351d are shown. Both lighting states that are both lit are shown.

In both off states, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b are not illuminated, and the visibility of the back side thereof is ensured, but the impression without sharpness is played. Give to the person. In particular, it is difficult to distinguish between a sphere flowing above the third flow path constituent portion 336 and an out sphere flowing down the inner side (lower side) of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

In the internally lit state, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the light diffusion processed surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path component 336 is illuminated so that the sphere flowing on the upper side of the third flow path component 336 is illuminated. The visibility is maintained high, and the visibility of the out sphere flowing down the inner side (lower side) of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is lowered.

Further, since the light diffusion processed surface 332e is illuminated on the back surface side of the branch portion BP1, the visibility of the flow of the sphere at the branch portion BP1 can be improved. Moreover, since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b arranged on the front side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e are maintained in an unlit state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the branch portion BP1 is blindfolded by light.

That is, in the internally lit state, the range from the third flow path constituent portion 336 to the branch portion BP1 is illuminated by light, and the line of sight for viewing the branch portion BP1 also passes through the front frame-shaped portion 333. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the flow mode of the ball in BP1. In addition, since the light is illuminated at a point that should be noted when grasping the flow mode of the ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the point of interest, and it is possible to reduce the player's playing stress. can.

A light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame-shaped portion 333 over the entire range (see FIG. 13), and it is difficult to see the back through the front frame-shaped portion 333 from the player's point of view. It is configured to be.

When visually recognizing the back through the front frame-shaped portion 333, in the front-rear direction view, the back is visually recognized through the two side surfaces of the front frame-shaped portion 333 which are arranged facing each other in the front-rear direction. It is even more difficult to see the back side because there are many boards that need to be seen through.

The same thing is done when trying to see through the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 with a line of sight that is inclined from the left and right inside to the diagonally left and right outside (the line of sight that is inclined from the front left and right center position toward the normal detection sensor SE12). The same can be said for the player who plays.

That is, in the present embodiment, where the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed over the inside of the rectangular tubular shape, the rear side surface of the front side frame-shaped portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (partition plates) are on the inclined line of sight. The portion 338 and the side surface (side surface) which is arranged to face each other are arranged. Therefore, it is even more difficult to visually recognize the back side because there are many boards that need to be seen through.

As described above, according to the front frame-shaped portion 333, it is possible to make it difficult to see through the rear side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 not only in the front-rear direction view but also in the oblique direction view.

In the outside lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so that the spheres that have flowed to the left and right outside at the branching point BP1 are hidden by the light. Visibility is low.

On the other hand, since the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed on the back side (lower side) of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 is improved. Can be done. That is, in the outside lighting state, the visibility of the ball flowing on the front side is improved, which has the effect of improving the attention of the player, but the visibility of the branching point BP1 itself is lowered.

In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are illuminated in a wide range. The situation illuminated by light is a combination of an inside lighting state and an outside lighting state, and both effects can be produced, but they do not only support each other with advantageous effects.

For example, since the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the sphere flowing to the left and right outside of the branch portion BP1 is hidden by the light is inherited from the outside lighting state. Therefore, for the purpose of enhancing the visibility of the branch portion BP1, it is optimal to maintain the inside lighting state.

Various modes are exemplified as the control mode for turning on and off the light emitting means 351c and 351d. For example, in a big hit game, in a round game in which a ball may enter the probability variation detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76), the branch point BP1 is controlled so as to configure an internal lighting state so that the player can easily pay attention to it. However, in other round games, it may be controlled to brighten the whole by configuring the outside lighting state or both lighting states.

Further, for example, control may be performed in such a manner that both lighting states and both turning off states are alternately switched regardless of the type of round game.

Further, the timing of turning on the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not limited to the round game, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c and 351d may be controlled to light up after the reach is upright while the symbol is changing, or it is detected that a ball has entered the winning openings 63, 64, 140, 65a and the through gate 67. Then, the light emitting means may be controlled to light 351c and 351d.

Returning from FIG. 73 to FIG. 75, the configuration for optimizing the flow of the ball in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail again. As shown in FIG. 73, the upper side surface of the extension portion 162b arranged on the left and right outer sides of the opening / closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state or the closed state, a sphere that is deviated to the left / right outside of the opening / closing plate 65b and rests on the upper side surface of the extension portion 162b is left / right outside (opening / closing plate). Since it can flow to the side opposite to the side where the 65b is arranged), it is possible to prevent the ball on the extension portion 162b from flowing down through the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, the flow mode of most of the balls flowing down to the out port 71 can be set to the flow mode in which the inner rail 61 rolls, so that a situation in which the ball jumps up (highly bounces) near the out port 71 can occur. It can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path constituent portion 336 arranged behind the main window portion 162d1 from being hidden by the bounced sphere and the visibility from being lowered.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper side surface of the opening / closing plate 65b in the opened / closed state is formed in a flat shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path constituent portion 335 is inclined downward toward the left and right center side (partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, the closer to the left and right center side, the longer the vertical distance between the opening / closing plate 65b and the second flow path constituent portion 335. It is possible to easily distinguish the sphere flowing toward the third flow path constituent portion 336.

As shown in FIG. 74, the opening / closing plate 65b is shaped so that the ball on the upper side surface flows into the specific winning opening 65a without omission, but various shapes are devised so that the flow of the ball is not delayed. Has been done.

For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion for abutting with a sphere flowing rearward from the upper side surface of the left and right end portions of the opening / closing plate 65b and guiding the sphere inward to the left and right. .. The guide plate portion 163a2 is not formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction, but in a plate shape extending in a downwardly inclined direction inward to the left and right in accordance with the vertical displacement of the sphere flowing from the opening / closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

That is, when the front end portion of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface so as to be arranged rearward toward the left and right inside, the opening / closing plate 65b is more than the vicinity of the left and right outer end portions where the ball riding on the opening / closing plate 65b abuts. The left and right inner portions where the ball delivered to the receiving member 163, which has a lower floor surface than the floor surface, abuts, extend in a direction of inclination so that the position is on the lower side.

As a result, the contact position of the sphere (contact height with respect to the total length of the sphere) of the sphere that abuts on the guide plate portion 163a2 can be stabilized, and the sphere can be guided smoothly. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed from the relative relationship between the opening / closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that the sphere can be brought into contact with the sphere at the center height position in the entire length of the sphere. NS.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end portion of the upper side surface (rotation base end side portion) of the opening / closing plate 65b and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to reverse in the middle. That is, at the left-right center position where the height position of the lower surface portion 163a is the highest, the height position of the opening / closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface portion 163a is inclined downward toward the left-right side, and the left-right width. It is configured to be upside down at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside of the direction.

In the present embodiment, the switching position EP1 has a property as a position for switching the flow mode of the sphere between the opening / closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and the left and right inner side surfaces (partition plate portion 338) of the front side frame-shaped portion 333. It is designed as a position on the same plane as the side surface (side surface arranged opposite to the side surface) (position directly above the front frame-shaped portion 333 in FIG. 74).

In the left-right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left-right switching positions EP1), the rolling of the ball from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the rolling surfaces of the balls. On the other hand, the rolling of the ball from the receiving member 163 to the opening / closing plate 65b can occur with less resistance.

For example, even if a ball that bounces backward near the center position on the left and right of the opening / closing plate 65b collides with the receiving member 163 (inner rear surface) and bounces forward again, after the ball bounce has settled and begins to roll, It is possible to prevent the ball from riding on the receiving member 163 from the opening / closing plate 65b.

The sphere that rolls from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 side does not ride on the receiving member 163, but when the sphere starts to come into contact with the lower surface portion 163a, the sphere is left and right outside along the left-right inclination of the lower surface portion 163a. Will be swept away.

It should be noted that the fall of the ball to the vicinity of the center position of the left and right of the opening / closing plate 65b is unlikely to occur because the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) regulates the fall of the ball, so that the ball bounce is also unlikely to occur. I can say. However, ball bounce may occur due to collision between balls.

In the left-right outer range of the switching position EP1 (the range of the left-right outer side (the side where the ball passing hole 163b is arranged) from the pair of left-right switching positions EP1), from the receiving member 163 due to the relationship of the vertical position of the rolling surface of the sphere. While the rolling of the ball to the opening / closing plate 65b is suppressed, the rolling of the ball from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 can occur with less resistance. For example, even if a ball rolling on the lower surface portion 163a has a forward velocity due to a collision with another ball, vibration of a gaming machine, or the like, the ball is prevented from flowing back to the opening / closing plate 65b side. be able to.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, by limiting the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, the backflow of the ball in the vicinity of the ball passing hole 163b By avoiding the above and smoothing the flow of the ball, the situation where the ball stays is avoided.

In addition, the backward rolling of the sphere from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is not a rolling mode in which the flow is switched to the left-right direction after the backward flow is completed, but the pair of switching positions EP1. The rolling mode is along an oblique linear direction connecting the range between the balls and the ball passing hole 163b.

In other words, the flow is not along a path that intersects at right angles, such as in the front-back direction and the left-right direction, but along the hypotenuse that connects the other ends of the front-back straight line and the left-right straight line, one end of which is arranged at the same position. Therefore, the rolling path of the sphere can be shortened (in a right triangle, the length of the hypotenuse is shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides).

Further, as compared with the case where the sphere easily flows backward over the left and right positions of the opening / closing plate 65b, the sphere is configured to easily flow forward in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 as in the present embodiment. Therefore, even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the flow of the balls is stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the range on the left and right outer sides of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), and is a space on the front side in the range on the left and right center sides of the pair of switching positions EP1. It is provided with an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate shape that ascends and inclines so as to open a space.

The upper surface portion 163f is a device for reducing the possibility that the sphere is clogged in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 due to the higher position of the lower surface portion 163a. The vertical width can be secured.

As a result, ball clogging in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 can be prevented, and when the opening / closing plate 65b is closed and displaced while the ball is on the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball is caught between the opening / closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163. Can be avoided.

The symmetric projecting portion 161f is oriented so that the direction extending to the left and right is along the inclination angle of the second flow path constituent unit 335 (the direction in which the second flow path constituent portion 335 is inclined by 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal), and the second flow path constituent portion 335 is rolled. It is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with the sphere at the center height position in the total length of the sphere (a position 5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path constituent portion 335).

As a result, when the formation thickness of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is minimized for the purpose of ensuring the visibility of the branching portion BP1, the sphere comes into contact with the symmetrical projecting portion 161f at a position deviating from the center height of the sphere. As a result, the rolling of the ball can be made smoother as compared with the case where the load in the direction of lifting the ball or the load in the direction of pressing the ball against the floor is generated from the symmetrical projecting portion 161f on the ball.

If it is allowed that the visibility of the branching point BP1 is lowered, the thickness of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed to be about the total length of the sphere so that it is symmetrical at a position deviating from the center height of the sphere. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the projecting portion 161f comes into contact with the ball.

Next, the slide displacement member 370 and its peripheral structure will be described in detail again. FIG. 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380. In FIG. 78, the middle member 330 is transparently seen by an imaginary line for easy understanding, and the slide displacement member 370 arranged under the middle member 330 is seen through.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that slides and displaces in the front-rear direction at the branch portion BP1, but its front end portion does not come into contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337 that is arranged to face each other even at the front side position (see FIG. 78). The gap is maintained. The gap is formed as a gap having a size short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

As a result, while achieving the purpose of preventing the ball from entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the front end portion of the slide displacement member 370 is scraped or deformed due to contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337. can do.

Further, the front end portion of the slide displacement member 370, that is, the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 is formed to be inclined so as to be displaced rearward toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being pinched and staying between the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337.

That is, even when a sphere is sandwiched between the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337, the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so that the ball is relative to the sphere. Since the generated load has a directional component directed to the left and right outside, the sphere can be pushed out to the left and right. As a result, ball clogging can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a device for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will be described. Since the player's interests can change depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is required to have reproducibility (stability) and smoothness.

79 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380 in the LXXIXa-LXXIXa line of FIG. 78, and FIG. 79 (b) is the middle member in the LXXIXb-LXXIXb line of FIG. 78. It is sectional drawing of 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380, and FIG. 79 (c) is the sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380 in the LXXIXc-LXXIXc line of FIG. 78. In the description of FIG. 79, FIGS. 13 and 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper projecting portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface located on the lower side toward the left and right outer sides, and a sphere flows along this inclination. obtain. In the present embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the sphere rolling on the inclined surface, it is configured to suppress the posture change of the slide displacement member 370 that changes the inclination of the inclined surface.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, not only the left and right end portions but also the lower protrusion portion 373 is abutted and supported by the plate-shaped portion 382 of the lower member 380. As a result, each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b divided into left and right by the recessed portion 372 can be supported on both the left and right sides (supported by both sides), so that the posture change of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed. can.

In other words, even if the load given by the balls to the pair of left and right ball guides 371b is different (even if the number of balls is unbalanced), each ball guide 371b is supported by both left and right ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the tilt of the ball guide portion 371b and the slide displacement member 370 to the left and right (displacement in the rotation direction about the axis extending in the front-rear direction).

Further, the edge portion of the recessed portion 372 is restricted from being displaced upward by disposing the partition plate portion 338 on the upper side. That is, it is possible to suppress the lifting operation of the slide displacement member 370 and the tilt displacement in the backward tilting direction.

This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the slide displacement member 370 in an appropriate state, suppresses the displacement resistance of the displacement in the front-rear direction, and prevents the slide displacement member 370 from malfunctioning.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-shaped portion formed by projecting to the front side on the protrusion base end side of the upper protrusion portion 376, and is inclined so that the upper side surface on which the ball can roll is lowered toward the left and right outside. Formed as a surface.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the ridge portion 383 is configured to be a point contact. That is, in the present embodiment, a pair of hemispherical projecting portions 372a are projected from the recessed portion 372 toward the projecting portion 383 side, and when the gap is filled, the hemispherical projecting portion 372a and the projecting portion are formed. It is configured to make point contact with 383.

Here, as described above, since the ball guide portion 371b is formed as an inclined surface whose upper side surface on which the ball can roll is inclined in the left-right direction, the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is up and down. The slide displacement member 370 is decomposed into a directional component and a left-right direction component, and the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the left-right direction (a direction intersecting the front-rear direction which is the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370) due to the left-right direction component.

At this time, it is preferable to reduce the lateral gap between the recessed portion 372 and the ridge portion 383 of the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction because the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b is likely to be stable, but contact friction is likely to occur. , Functional problems may occur.

For example, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction while the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b, if the contact friction becomes excessively large, the front-rear displacement becomes poor (for example, no displacement occurs). there's a possibility that.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the contact between the hemispherical projecting portion 372a and the projecting portion 383 is configured to be a point contact, the area where the frictional force is generated can be reduced, and the contact friction can be reduced. Can be kept small. As a result, even when the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide displacement member 370 can be satisfactorily displaced in the front-rear direction.

In particular, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction when the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b, the ball can enter the probability variation detection sensor SE11 from the state where the ball cannot enter the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Since it is a displacement operation for switching the state to a normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by performing this displacement operation satisfactorily.

Moreover, by increasing the displacement speed of this displacement operation, it is possible to generate an action of changing the rotation of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

80 (a) and 80 (b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and the ball riding on the upper side surface of the ball guide portion 371b. FIG. 80 (a) shows a state in which the ball is mounted on the slide displacement member 370 at the front side position, and FIG. 80 (b) shows a state in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the rear side position. In FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), an example of the direction of rotation of the sphere is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the direction of rotation of the sphere that has rolled backward and reached the slide displacement member 370 is the forward rotation direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced back and forth to the rear position while the sphere is on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied to the sphere by the slide displacement member 370 is applied. Acts so that the rotation direction (guidance direction) of the sphere is the opposite direction (backflip direction).

As a result, the rotation of the sphere can be suppressed, so that the sphere can be easily affected by the action of gravity, and the sphere can be easily dropped directly below. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the ball can easily flow down to the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

The front-rear length projecting portion 317 has a function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch portion BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the front-rear length projecting portion 317 is not limited to the function of guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the ball can be moved regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 arranged on the upstream side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. It is configured as a shape portion that can be appropriately guided.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position, the sphere in contact with the front-rear long protrusion 317 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, since the curve at the end of the front-rear length projecting portion 317 has a substantially arc shape in which the width in the front-rear direction is longer than the width in the vertical direction (see FIG. 18), the front of the contacted sphere is in front of the curve. The downward component gives a larger load than the directional component. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball in contact with the front-rear long projecting portion 317 bounces back and forth in the front-rear direction and flows back through the third flow path constituent portion 336.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position, the flow direction of the sphere is left to the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In the present embodiment, since the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves toward the left and right outside, the sphere is guided to the left and right outside along this curvature.

Here, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position and the ball flowing in the front-rear direction collides with the slide displacement member 370 with the momentum, the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward by the load at the time of the collision. Therefore, it is possible that the ball can pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the sphere is corrected downward by abutting the front-rear long protrusion 317 before the sphere collides with the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Therefore, since the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the load from the sphere is mainly downward, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

Further, since the load given by the sphere in the direction of displacement the slide displacement member 370 to the rear is reduced, the urging force (electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position is provided. The urging force of the return spring) can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force for driving the plunger can be reduced against the urging force. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while the ball is arranged at the branching point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the ball.

The left and right inner protrusions 318 come into contact with the sphere on the front side of the front displacement end position of the upper protrusion 376, and the momentum of the sphere is directed downward on the left and right sides. Moreover, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-rear long protrusion 317. As a result, the velocity of the sphere in the front-rear direction is reduced, so that the arrangement is stabilized by the inertia due to its own weight, and it is possible to make it difficult for the sphere to regurgitate with a load given by the slide displacement member 370.

Further, the contact between the ball and the upper projecting portion 376 occurs in a state where the ball is lower than the height position at which the ball abuts on the front-rear long projecting portion 317, but the ball can abut on the upper projecting portion 376. In the lowered state (see FIG. 80 (a)), the portion that comes into contact with the sphere is the sphere guide portion 371b, which is arranged at a position lower than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path constituent portion 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced to the front side by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the upper projecting portion 376, a considerable amount of energy is required to ride on the lower bottom surface 336a from the upper side surface of the ball guide portion 371b. , The degree of backflow of the sphere can be reduced.

Further, the upper projecting portion 376 is not in a collision mode in which the front end portion on the partition plate portion 338 side is formed in an acute angle shape and the plane collides head-on with the sphere in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). That is, the load applied to the ball from the upper protrusion 376 is large in the left-right direction and small in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the ball in contact with the upper protrusion 376 can be smoothly flowed in the left-right outer direction, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while the ball is arranged at the branch portion BP1. In this control mode, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a ball is caught between the upper protrusion 376 and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337, causing a malfunction.

It will be described back to FIG. 78, FIG. 79 (b) and FIG. 79 (c). Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to project toward the branch portion BP1 side (front side), the slide displacement member 370 may be displaced in the forward tilting direction due to the weight of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width length of the portion formed on the rear side of the upper protrusion portion 376, that is, the portion in which the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are formed on both the left and right sides in the front-rear direction. It is sufficiently secured and is configured to be able to come into contact with the lower bottom portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 over its front-rear width. Thereby, the tilt displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper and lower ridges 374 are formed long in the front-rear direction, one point is the load applied to the rear frame-shaped portion 332 when a load for tilting and displacementing the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction is applied. You can avoid focusing on. Thereby, the deformation of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed (the rigidity is increased).

Further, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the projecting portion (hereinafter, also referred to as the projecting portion 378a) on which the recessed portion 378 is formed is formed. It comes into contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In other words, the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 is set as a position where the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a abuts on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338. For this purpose, a light diffusion processed surface is not formed on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, and a flat surface is formed so as to face the projecting portion 378a in the front-rear direction so as to be in contact with each other. As a result, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position can be stabilized.

Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is arranged inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted via the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the front meat portion of the protruding portion 378a. It is hung on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the partition plate portion 338.

As described above, since the position where the driving force is transmitted is the left and right central portion of the slide displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the slide displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. That is, it is possible to easily prevent the slide displacement member 370 from being displaced in the rotational direction about the vertical axis at the time of displacement in the front-rear direction.

Further, since the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotation direction centered on the vertical axis. ..

Here, when the posture maintenance and the posture return of the slide displacement member 370 are executed by the contact between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion 372a Is small, a load is locally applied, and the durability of the hemispherical projecting portion 372a may deteriorate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the pre-stage in which the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the posture shift in the rotation direction about the vertical axis is shifted to the slide displacement member 370. However, due to the transmission of the driving force, the posture deviation of the slide displacement member 370 can be eliminated in the process in which the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, which is appropriate. Can be modified to posture.

The partition plate portion 338 with respect to the projecting portion 378a has a function of aligning the slide displacement member 370 by abutting against the protrusion portion 378a and also as a portion that receives a load applied to the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction. Has.

That is, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position, when a load is generated in the direction of changing the posture of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide is slid. When the projecting portion 378a is about to be displaced (displaced in the forward tilting direction) within the gap allowed for the displacement member 370, the projecting portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, the displacement of the protrusion 378a is suppressed by applying resistance in the opposite direction to the protrusion 378a from the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, so that the posture change of the slide displacement member 370 is suppressed. can do.

Next, the parts for which the details of the operating units 600, 700, and 800 have been insufficiently explained will be described again. First, as a detailed explanation of the first operation unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be described.

81 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81 (b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81 (c) is the direction of the arrow LXXXIc of FIG. 81 (a). It is a side view of the rotating member 620 in view.

82 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. In FIGS. 82 and 83, a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide slot 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) to 81 (c), the rotating member 620 is designed to have an asymmetrical shape in relation to the load applied to the rotating member 620 when the operation is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 will be described.

The main body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat side surfaces that receive a load when stopped. The first side surface 621a, the second side surface 621b, and the third side surface 621c are formed in order from the cylindrical portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilt displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is a surface on the base end side projecting portion 617a projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side in a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the base end side projecting portion 617a). By restricting the displacement of the first side surface 621a to the base end side projecting portion 617a, the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range). ).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with the tip side projecting portion 617b projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side in a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the tip-side protrusion 617b). The displacement of the second side surface 621b is restricted by the tip-side projecting portion 617b, so that the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range). ..

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with a rectangular box portion 618 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape on the front side of the front lid member 612. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, so that the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

As described above, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, each side surface 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 abuts on the corresponding front lid member 612 portion, and the displacement is regulated. In particular, a plurality of contact points are formed at the displacement end on the rising side of the rotating member 620.

The purpose of forming a plurality of contact points in this way is to disperse the load in the rotational direction received at the time of contact at a plurality of points, and to disperse the load in the front-rear direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 at a plurality of points. This has the purpose of suppressing deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-rear direction.

As the load in the front-rear direction that can occur in the rotating member 620, for example, a load in the forward tilting direction due to receiving the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660 and a twist due to inertia when the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped. A directional load (a load in the rotational direction about the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620) and the like are exemplified.

In particular, the load in the forward tilting direction is a load in the forward tilting direction with the tubular portion 622 as a fulcrum. The load generated at the contact position is small. The second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions separated from the cylindrical portion 622 for one purpose of reducing the load generated at the contact position.

The main body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d formed in a recessed direction in the direction of retracting from the drive motor 631 in order to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and a range including the recessed portion 621d. A thickened portion 621e is provided as a rotating portion centered on the tubular portion 622, which is thickened to include a range of contact with the base end side projecting portion 617a.

Since the rotation base end side of the rotating member 620 has a narrow width due to the formation of the recessed portion 621d, it is conceivable that breakage may occur due to an impact load without countermeasures, but the thickened portion 621e Is formed, the influence of the recessed portion 621d on the strength surface can be offset. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620.

Further, since the thickening portion 621e is formed in a range including a portion where the thickening portion 621e can come into contact with the proximal end side projecting portion 617a, an impact load that can occur between the rotating member 620 and the proximal end side projecting portion 617a can occur. The durability of the rotating member 620 can be improved.

FIG. 84 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 85 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. In FIGS. 84 and 85, a state in which the widthwise end portion of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 is shown.

The extension portion 634b is formed with a width length (circumferential length) that is three times or more longer than the width length of the detection sensor KS1 in the rear view. Here, forming the width and length of the extension portion 634b sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of being used for detection.

That is, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip portion of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the front side of the supported member 640. Where a load in the forward tilting direction can be applied to the rotating member 620, the rotating member 620 may bend and deform in the front-rear direction without countermeasures, resulting in malfunction.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620, an extended portion 634b arranged to face the back surface of the fixed means 610 is formed in a wide shape to form a cylinder. A load applied from the extending portion 634b to the fixed means 610 via the portion 634a in the forward tilting direction of the rotating member 620 can be received in a wide angle range of the arcuate hole 613d (the area where the load is generated is large). Can be secured). As a result, the load received per unit area can be reduced, so that the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620 can be suppressed while avoiding damage to the extending portion 634b.

In the present embodiment, a structurally advantageous effect can be obtained by ensuring a long width and length of the extension portion 634b, while the end portion of the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. Even in the control mode in which the driving of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped in the state (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 reaches the end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40) due to a load such as inertia. The structure is devised to reach it.

For example, first, the inertial force of each member is generated in the direction of displacing the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force due to the rotational displacement in which the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are rotated clockwise around the axis O1. , The rotation member 620 is displaced to the terminal position on the initial position side (the direction in which the rotation member 620 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 arranged so as to integrally operate the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a constituting the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644 (the present embodiment). Then, the same as the center of the overhanging decorative portion 652b) is arranged at a position separated from the vertical position of the axis O1 as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a to the left and right.

Therefore, the self-weight generated in the front rotating member 652 is generated in the direction of rotating the gear teeth 654a. In the present embodiment, the gear teeth 654a are loaded in the direction of rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the rear due to the weight of the front rotating member 652.

By transmitting this load to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 in this order, a load in the direction of rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the rear is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear tooth portion 625. That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, a load in the rotational direction due to the own weight of the front rotating member 652 occurs in the direction of displacement the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load generated on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, the load that rotates the rotating member 620 even after the energization of the drive motor 631 is cut off is applied. Configured to occur.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, the drive motor 631 is energized in a state where the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotating member 620 has not reached the displacement end position. Even if the cutting is controlled, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is continued by the above-mentioned load, and the rotating member 620 can reach the displacement end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side.

86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b) and 88 show the guide slot 616, the dish-shaped lid C2, the detection sensor KS1 and the extension of the transmission gear cam 634. It is a rear view of 634b.

In FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b) and 88, the rotational operation of the transmission gear cam 634 started from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is in chronological order. Illustrated in.

Note that FIG. 86 (a) corresponds to the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, FIG. 86 (b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 85, and FIG. 87 (a) shows the first operation. Corresponding to the intermediate effect state of the unit 600, FIG. 87 (b) corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 83, and FIG. 88 corresponds to the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600.

The arrangement of the electric wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. The electrical wiring 618d whose end is fixed to the connector 618c arranged on the substrate housed in the rectangular box portion 618 is arranged so as to enter the second decorative rotating member 660 through the opening C2a.

The electrical wiring 618d is arranged so as to bypass the lower side of the partition portion 619 projecting from the front lid member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electrical wiring 618b has a length considering the movement locus of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 provided with the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so as to bend by its own weight.

The partition portion 619 includes a columnar portion 619a formed at both upper and lower ends and a plate-shaped portion 619b projecting in a long plate shape so as to connect between the columnar portions 619a. The columnar portion 619a and the plate upper portion 619b abut on the front side surface of the base member 611.

A female screw is formed inside the columnar portion 619a, and the fastening screw passing through the opening formed in the base member 611 in the arrangement corresponding to the columnar portion 619a is screwed into the base member 611 and the front lid. The member 612 is fastened and fixed. That is, the partition portion 619 can not only limit the arrangement position of the electric wiring 618d but also secure the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front lid member 612.

Next, paying particular attention to the movement of the opening C2a, a device for arranging the electric wiring 618d will be described. First, the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 86A will be described. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced downward in the time series of FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b), and 88.

In the operation from the effect standby state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86 (b)), the dish-shaped lid While the vertical arrangement of the portion C2 does not change significantly, the arrangement of the openings C2a is rotationally displaced counterclockwise when viewed from the rear.

As a result, before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starts full-scale downward displacement, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a can be moved in the direction away from the partition portion 619, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced downward. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring 618d from being sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 in the process of doing so.

In particular, at the timing when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87 (b)), the opening C2a is in a posture of facing the side (lower side) for retracting the electric wiring 618d from the partition portion 619. ing.

As a result, it is possible to avoid the situation where the electric wiring 618d is sandwiched between the partition portion 619 and the partition portion 619. Therefore, even if the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is designed to be arranged close to the partition portion 619, the electric wiring 618d is disconnected. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as.

As shown in FIGS. 86A to 88, the posture of the opening C2a is continuously rotationally displaced counterclockwise when viewed from the rear during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and the electrical wiring 618d is intentionally configured to have a downward slack. As a result, it is possible to avoid unnecessary slack (for example, fluttering due to slack in the front-rear direction) at the displacement end position while ensuring the length of the electric wiring 618d itself.

Further, the length of the electric wiring 618d is designed so as not to come into contact with the extension portion 634b during the operation of the first operation unit 600. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the electric wiring 618d comes into contact with the extension portion 634b and receives a load without providing a partition between the extension portion 634b and the electric wiring 618d.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88), the extension portion 634b is arranged away from the connector 618c (connector 618c with reference to the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634). Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the electric wiring 618d, a large range for arranging the electric wiring 618d can be secured while avoiding contact with the extension portion 634b, so that the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electric wiring 618d is improved. be able to.

Next, the ascending displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 88 will be described. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is upwardly displaced in the time series of FIGS. 88, 87 (b), 87 (a), 86 (b), and 86 (a).

In the ascending displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2, the opening C2a does not face the partition 619 side from the lower end position of the displacement (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid C2 comes closest to the partition 619, and is on the lower side. Facing. As a result, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be upwardly displaced while ensuring the downward slack of the electric wiring 618d.

The direction of the opening C2a is such that even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 passes through the lower end of the partition portion 619, the opening C2a faces downward while gradually rotating (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is the partition portion 619. The state of being arranged along the longitudinal direction) is maintained (see FIG. 87 (a)).

Then, in a state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a posture facing the partition portion 619 side (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is provided. It is arranged so as to enter (accommodate) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric wiring 618d is sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 to cause a disconnection, and the electric wiring 618d is caused by the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the.

In other words, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is restricted by changing the arrangement of the opening C2a according to the arrangement relationship between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 Since it is avoided that the electric wiring 618d is arranged between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 when the interval between the two is narrowed, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the electric wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electric wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be designed to be arranged closer to each other, so that the electric wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are arranged. The degree of freedom can be improved.

Further, the limitation of the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d is realized not by using another member such as a binding band but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used for fastening and fixing the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, but this is also used to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d.

As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated member for bundling the electrical wiring 618d such as a binding band. Further, unlike the binding band, the direction of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electric wiring 618d can be arranged on an appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, so that the electric wiring 618d can be stretched or bent. It is possible to easily avoid the situation.

In the present embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening having a central angle of about 110. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, the degree of freedom of the shape adopted as a portion (connection terminal or the like) of the electric wiring 618d through which the opening C2a passes can be improved.

Next, the arrangement structure of the electric wiring 618d arranged on the front side of the opening C2a will be described. FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660.

In FIG. 89, only the parts necessary for explanation are shown, and the other parts are omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, the illuminated substrate 662 and the wiring fastening plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown by solid lines, and a box is shown for easy understanding. The shape member 661 is illustrated by an imaginary line so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Further, in FIG. 89, an arrangement example of the electric wiring 618d is shown, and a dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electric wiring 618d is inserted is shown. In the electrical wiring 618d, the wiring connected to the terminal of the illuminated board 653 (see FIG. 41) and the wiring connected to the terminal of the illuminated board 662 are branched between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655. The state of doing is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring fastening plate 663 is a disk-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a, and is formed in a long hole shape through which the electric wiring 618d can be inserted. It is provided with a wiring insertion slot 663a and a pair of insertion holes 663b formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted on both sides of the insertion slot 663a.

Since the diameter of the wiring fastening plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a, the axially perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) is prevented from falling off from the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a. It can be prevented by the wiring fastening plate 663.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring fastening plate 663 is screwed into the female screw formed in the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring fastening plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

As described above, the wiring fastening plate 663 has a function of preventing the shaft right-angled rotating member 657 from falling off and a function of integrally fixing the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a. In addition to this, the wiring fastening plate 663 has a function of temporarily fastening the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electric wiring 618d passes through the inside of the wiring insertion slot 663a of the wiring fastening plate 663 and is temporarily held in such a manner that the displacement is suppressed by being sandwiched. In the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not an operation of one rotation or more, but a rotation operation of less than half a rotation (rotation operation of about 135 degrees) is executed in the reciprocating direction. Therefore, it is configured so that the second decorative rotating member 660 does not rotate a plurality of times and the electric wiring 618d is not twisted.

The load applied to the electrical wiring 618d (load in the twisting direction) when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates is considered to be large in the vicinity of the wiring insertion slot 663a where twisting is likely to occur. Since the wiring insertion slot 663a is formed in a long hole shape and the electrical wiring 618d is sandwiched between the wiring insertion slot 663a and temporarily held, the displacement of the electrical wiring 618d in the slot shape is allowed. ing.

Therefore, even if the electric wiring 618d is overloaded in the twisting direction, the load can be released by displacing the electric wiring 618d in the wiring insertion slot 663a. Thereby, the durability of the electric wiring 618d can be improved.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotation operation of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 88, the electric wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 includes the main body member 651. Twisting in the direction of rotation occurs. That is, a twist in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear occurs with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction.

As the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 is also displaced counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, so that the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d due to twisting can be reduced ( The durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates while being displaced in the vertical direction along the guide elongated hole 616. Here, in the time series from FIG. 86A to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state in which the slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is large to a state in which the slack is small.

Correspondingly, the rotation operation of the illumination board 662 is such that the terminal on the illumination board 662 side of the electric wiring 618d is arranged on the back side (main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89). It is configured as an operation of changing the state to the state of being arranged on the front side (the wiring receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state change can be such that the electric wiring 618d is pulled to the front side.

That is, in the time series from FIG. 86 (a) to FIG. 88, the electric wiring 618d is in a state in which the electric wiring 618d in the main body member 651 has a large slack (a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side is arranged on the back side). ) To a state where the slack is small (a state in which the terminals on the illumination board 662 side are arranged on the front side).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the slack is reversed (balanced) between the relationship between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. Thereby, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d due to the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be reduced.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d of the portion arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d of the portion arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be described. do.

In the time-series operations shown in FIGS. 86A to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, while the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 are connected to each other. The electrical wiring 618d of the portion arranged between them is twisted in the rotation direction of the illuminated substrate 662 (counterclockwise in the bottom view (direction view of the insertion hole 663b from the illuminated substrate 662 side) in FIG. 89). That is, they are twisted in opposite directions.

In the present embodiment, the twist of the electric wiring 618d in the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is designed to be minimized, and the twist of the electric wiring 618d is maximized in the overhanging state. There is.

As a result, even if the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a has a large slack, the problem is unlikely to occur (in the production standby state, see FIG. 86A), the electrical wiring 618d is intentionally loosened. In a state where it is preferable to reduce the slack of the electric wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (overhanging state, see FIG. 88) while reducing the generated load, the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the electric power are used. It is possible to maximize the twisting of the decorative substrate 662 due to the rotational operation and suppress the slack of the electric wiring 618d (suppress the displacement of the electric wiring 618d).

As described above, as a means for improving the durability of the electric wiring 618d, there is a state in which twisting is minimized to cause sufficient slack, and slack is reduced by twisting to reduce the slack and the surrounding member (for example, the extension portion 634b) and electricity. It is configured to switch between a state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d and a state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d.

As another embodiment, in the time-series operations shown in FIGS. 86A to 88, the rotation direction of the illumination substrate 662 is reversed (bottom view in FIG. 89 (insertion hole 663b from the illumination substrate 662 side). It may be configured clockwise) in the direction of viewing. In this case, the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d due to the rotational operation of the lighting substrate 662 are the same, so that the twisting of the electric wiring 618d is performed. This deformation can be offset.

Next, the features of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operation unit 600 will be described. 90 (a), 90 (b), 91 (a), 91 (b) and 92 are front surfaces schematically showing a guide slot 616, a rectangular box portion 618 and an overhanging decorative portion 652b. It is a schematic diagram.

In FIGS. 90 (a), 90 (b), 91 (a), 91 (b) and 92, the outer shapes of the guide slot 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are schematically illustrated for easy understanding. Therefore, in a state where the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 are omitted, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is shown in chronological order.

In FIG. 90 (a), the arrangement corresponding to the effect standby state (see FIG. 40) of the first operation unit 600 is shown, and in FIG. 90 (b), the widthwise end portion of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is shown. The arrangement corresponding to the state (see FIG. 84) arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 is shown, and in FIG. 91 (a), the arrangement corresponding to the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 43) of the first operation unit 600 is shown. Illustrated, in FIG. 91B, an arrangement corresponding to a state (see FIG. 82) in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide slot 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range is illustrated, and in FIG. 92, , The arrangement corresponding to the overhanging state (see FIG. 45) of the first operating unit 600 is shown.

In the effect standby state (see FIG. 90A), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged to the right so as to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 in the top view. As a result, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be arranged outside the player's field of view (see FIG. 28). Further, in the present embodiment, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the effect standby state, the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73, so that the overhanging decorative portion 652b Visibility can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displaced downward to the right so as to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 in the top view, the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 652b are rectangular. It will collide with the shape box portion 618 and cause a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is changed prior to the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b or with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b ( 90 (b) and 91 (a)). Since this posture change occurs as a rotational movement in the direction of retracting from the rectangular box portion 618 (the diagonally upper left direction in the front view, the rotational direction centered on the axis O1), the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 Collision can be easily avoided.

In the present embodiment, due to this change in posture, after the overhanging decorative portion 652b is retracted from the upper position of the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91 (a)), the full-scale dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the overhanging decoration are provided. The downward displacement of the portion 652b is started.

The downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b occurs with the downward displacement of the axis O1. In the downward displacement, the axis O1 approaches the rectangular box portion 618 along the shape of the guide slot 616 (to the right). ) (See FIG. 91 (b)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b may collide with the rectangular box portion 618.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 is provided with a recessed portion 618a formed in a recessed shape along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 on the left side surface. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is recessed at a position where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end portion of the guided elongated hole 616. As described above, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is examined for one purpose of avoiding the collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

Further, since the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b continues to change with the downward displacement of the axis O1, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be displaced in the direction of retracting from the rectangular box portion 618. In the present embodiment, in the displacement from FIG. 91 (a) to FIG. 91 (b), the displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) to the left of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the displacement dimension XR1 to the right of the axis O1. It is designed to be above (equal or exceed). As a result, it is possible to avoid a collision between the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618.

In the states shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (b), the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement due to the change in the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are opposite to each other and cancel each other out. The lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b was kept small.

On the other hand, in the states shown in FIGS. 91 (b) to 92, the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement due to the change in the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are in the same left-right direction. By superimposing the above, the amount of displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the left-right direction becomes large.

As a result, although the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is always rotated around the axis O1, the player can see the overhanging decorative portion 652b from FIG. 90 (a). Up to FIG. 91 (b), the displacement is small in the horizontal direction (narrow displacement locus), and the displacement is vertical. From FIG. 91 (b) to FIG. 92, the displacement is large in the horizontal direction. I can show you.

Therefore, a difference can be provided between the structure (member shape) that guides the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure that is assumed by the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b as seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect.

That is, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be shown to the player as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b protrudes from the right side to the left side of the rectangular box portion 618. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an unexpected displacement of popping out in the left-right direction in the range of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), which is narrow and the displacement in the left-right direction cannot be sufficiently secured. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For convenience, the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b have been compared, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since the axis O1 is a part of the rotation axis of the configuration of the first operation unit 600, the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 configured to be rotatable around this rotation axis and the left-right displacement of the axis O1 The meaning is the same. Therefore, the above description may be understood as a comparison between the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 on the line XCIII-XCIII of FIG. 85. FIG. 93 shows a cross-sectional view on a plane through which the axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644 pass. As shown in FIG. 93, the rear rotating member 654 is arranged in the bottomed tubular portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is arranged in the main body portion 641 from the back side, and an opening 645a is formed and communicated with the intermediate gear 644. At the location, the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are in mesh with each other.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring fastening plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axially perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring fastening plate 663. Therefore, the wiring fastening plate 663 can regulate the axial displacement of the axially perpendicular rotating member 657.

In the present embodiment, the axial right-angled rotating member 657 has a slight gap between the step portion formed in the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a on the axial base end side (upper side in FIG. 93) and the wiring fastening plate 663. It is placed open. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the shaft right-angled rotating member 657 from falling off and to stabilize the arrangement of the shaft right-angled rotating member 657 in the central axis direction of the tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring fastening plate 663 is screwed into the female screw formed in the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring fastening plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

As shown in FIG. 93, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged on the rear side as compared with the second decorative rotating member 660, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged as compared with the second decorative rotating member 660. (See FIG. 2) and they are arranged close to each other in the front-back direction. In other words, it is arranged close to the opening 511a (see FIG. 26) in which the third symbol display device 81 is arranged in the front-rear direction.

As a result, as compared with the case where the third symbol display device 81 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are arranged apart from each other, the overhanging decorative portion 652b overlaps with the right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged (see FIG. 29), and it is possible to easily cause an action of making the player look (illusion) as if the display area is enlarged to the right side.

In particular, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are visually recognized at the same time (see, for example, FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged away from the third symbol display device 81 on the front side. Therefore, since it is easy to visually recognize the display independently of the display of the third symbol display device, on the contrary, the player uses the overhanging decorative portion 652b arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 from the front side as a part of the display. It is possible to emphasize the action of making the appearance (illusion).

In other words, by preparing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the other configurations (corresponding to the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b) can be discriminated. We are trying to reduce the degree. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion formed of a hard resin, and its shape cannot be changed in the middle, but the light emitting mode (color and brightness) of a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the illuminated substrate 653. The appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling so as to change the size).

Therefore, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the illumination substrate 653 so as to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 The overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the right end RE1 of the display area of the above (see FIG. 29), and makes it easy for the player to have an action of making the player look (illusion) that the display area is enlarged to the right. be able to.

Next, the detailed description of the second operation unit 700 will be described again. FIG. 94 is a front view of the second operating unit 700 in the overhanging state, and FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in the XCV-XCV line of FIG.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 is configured such that the elevating displacement and the anteroposterior displacement occur in synchronization with each other (sliding displacement in the anteroposterior direction tilted diagonally), but in the anteroposterior direction. It is devised so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the displacement is not excessively noticeable.

For example, in the slide displacement of the second operation unit 700, the obliquely tilted displacement in the front-rear direction does not consist of a single displacement, but is a combination of the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the front-rear direction. It is configured.

That is, first, the elevating plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal rod 702 at the left end portion so as to be displaced up and down in the long direction (vertical direction) of the metal rod 702. At the left end, a left rear plate member 750 and a blindfold decorative member 768 are also arranged in front of and behind the elevating plate member 740 to prevent the elevating plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 740 can be limited to the vertical direction.

The right side portion of the elevating plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720. The right end of the elevating plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly fixed via the effect device 780 (front upper inclined portion 714, 751). And is supported by the receiving inclination portion 762) (see FIG. 54). As a result, the right end portion of the elevating plate member 740 is prevented from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction, and the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 740 can be restricted in the vertical direction.

Then, the effect device 780 supported by the elevating plate member 740 is guided to the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In this way, in order to realize the slide displacement in the front-rear direction tilted diagonally, the displacement guidance of the elevating plate member 740 and the effect device 780 as the constituent members is configured separately in the gravity direction and the horizontal direction, respectively. Has been done.

As a result, it is possible to facilitate the configuration in which the displacement resistance is maintained low as compared with the configuration in which the displacement resistance is guided in the front-rear direction tilted diagonally.

The overhanging state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIGS. 94 and 95 is a controllable state to perform a displacement (see FIG. 57) that switches the state of the lining member 787. That is, in the present embodiment, other states of the overhanging state (for example, the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 33)) are overturned. The second operation unit 700 is controlled so as not to cause a displacement for switching the state of the setting member 787.

By controlling in this way, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are placed at positions that overlap with the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the lining member 787 when the displacement for switching the state of the lining member 787 is executed. Even if it is configured to be arranged, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the lining member 787 collides with the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 can be improved.

The device of the configuration of the effect device 780 with respect to the displacement for switching the state of the lining member 787 will be described. First, the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates a driving force for displacement that switches the state of the lining member 787 is located at the left-right center position of the effect device 780 (the center of the insertion tubular portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744). It is placed at the position where the center is placed directly above).

As a result, not only the posture of the effect device 780 can be prevented from tilting to the left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also the left-right balance of the driving force generated from the drive motor 782 can be stabilized.

Further, in the overhanging state (see FIG. 95) of the second operation unit 700 capable of executing the displacement for switching the state of the lining member 787, the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 that supports the elevating plate member 740. The left-right position of is equal to the left-right center position of the effect device 780, or is set to the right side position.

As described above, the support of the right side portion of the elevating plate member 740 is composed only of the rotating arm member 720 in which the cylindrical fastened portion 724 as the support position can be displaced in the left-right direction, and in particular, the effect device 780 is arranged. When it is assumed that the posture is likely to fluctuate, that is, when the displacement for switching the state of the lining member 787 is executed, the arrangement of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 is equal to the left-right center position of the effect device 780 or the right position. By setting, it is possible to stabilize the arrangement and posture of the effect device 780.

The control for executing the displacement for switching the state of the lining member 787 is performed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state, but after the state of the lining member 787 is switched, the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state. It is possible to control the state of the two-operation unit 700 to change to the effect standby state or the intermediate effect state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the lining member 787 from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and to put the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is temporarily stretched. As the output state, the displacement for switching the state of the lining member 787 is executed, and then the second operation unit 700 is controlled to be downwardly displaced so as to change to the intermediate effect state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusing member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction so as to overlap the inner end portion of the set of front support members 760 in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rotary cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support member 760 can be hidden so as not to be seen by the player, so that the player can grasp the arrangement and shape of the rotary cylinder portion 774e. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is aware that the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Further, the light diffusing member 778b is visually recognized by overlapping the fixed arrangement of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a in the left and right rows in a front view in the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 94). The arrangement of the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a in this state is arranged along the lower edge portion of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view over the left and right lengths of the lower edge portion.

On the back side of the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a, a substrate on which the LED is fixed is arranged on the front side, respectively, and the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a are arranged by the light emitted from the corresponding LED. It is possible to execute the light emission effect of. By this light emission effect, it is possible to make the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 appear to be separated by light, or to brighten the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 with light. It can be directed to.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light diffusing member 778b has a function as a member for hiding the rotary cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and a function as a member for jointly performing a light emitting effect with the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. It can be configured to combine.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontally long member 742 is a cover that is behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and is covered with a space on the front side in a range (the range on the left side) that is outside the rear of the light diffusing member 778b. The installation cover 742a is provided.

The covering cover 742a is a blindfolding member formed over the vertical width of the horizontally long member 742, and is arranged so that electrical wiring can be passed through a gap between the horizontally long member 742 and the horizontally long member 742. That is, the electrical wiring for energizing the effect device 780 is guided from the rear of the blindfold decorative member 768 to the effect device 780 side through the gap between the concealed cover 742a and the horizontally long member 742, and is guided to the effect device 780 side. It is connected to the illumination board 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), and the like.

At this time, not only the overturning cover 742a but also the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are folded and arranged in front of the electric wiring, so that the player's line of sight is easily blocked and the electric wiring is provided. It can be easily prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

In other words, the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, are arranged in front of the path of the electric wiring in order to function as a blindfold of the electric wiring. The size of the covering cover 742a required for blindfolding can be suppressed to the minimum size.

Since the arrangement of the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a is fixed, the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a does not overlap the horizontally long member 742 in the front-rear direction in the effect standby state (see FIG. 31) or the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), and can be used as a blindfold for electrical wiring. Not available.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the forming range of the horizontally long member 742 is set to the outer range of the light diffusing member 778b in the front view. As a result, the horizontally long member 742 and the light diffusing member 778 can achieve the blindfolding of the electric wiring, so that the electric wiring can be achieved regardless of the state of the second operation unit 700 (effect standby state, intermediate effect state, overhang state). Can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. 96 shows a horizontal arrangement state of the vertically inverted member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG. 97 shows an inverted vertical arrangement state of the vertically inverted member 781. (See FIG. 59 (c)) is illustrated.

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but include a curved forming portion 783d that is formed to be curved upward from the lower side surface in the vertically arranged state of the vertically inverted member 781. The curved forming portion 783d is formed to be curved so as to project in a direction retracted from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid a collision between the intermediate arm member 783 and the drive gear 782a in the vertically arranged state of the vertically inverted member 781.

FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the elevating / reversing effect device 770. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the lining member is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line in order to allow the inside to be visible through the lining member 787.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnet Mg is arranged near both the left and right ends of the magnet Mg, not on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are arranged close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act to directly unite the lining members 787 with each other, but acts independently on the pair of lining members 787.

Thereby, for example, when the operation of one of the lining members 787 becomes defective, it is possible to prevent the operation of the other lining member 787 from becoming defective accordingly.

Further, for example, at the start of displacement in which the pair of covering members 787 start to separate from each other in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction of the left-right displacement. That is, when the upside down member 781 starts the rotation operation from the upright vertical arrangement state, the timing at which the magnetic force acts can be delayed.

As a result, at the start of displacement when the pair of lining members 787 start to separate from each other in the left-right direction, the change in the load applied to the lining member 787 by the magnet Mg can be suppressed. Compared to the case where it is necessary to remove the attraction of the magnet, the lining member 787 vibrates or is not displaced due to a sudden change in magnetic force at the start of displacement when the pair of lining members 787 start to separate from each other in the left-right direction. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which stability is achieved and malfunction occurs.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on the left and right sides opposite to each other, and this effect will be described. The rotation position stabilizing portion 785f to which the metal screw that comes into contact with the magnet Mg and is loaded with the magnetic force is fixed is arranged on the same side in the front-rear direction. See 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated on the magnet Mg in relation to the metal screw is the same in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides.

More specifically, for example, when the vertically inverted member 781 changes from an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (a)) to an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (c)), the left side of the front view is covered. Since the member 787 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the magnet Mg is in the forward direction as a reaction of the attractive force due to the forward displacement of the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (arranged on the upper side). While a load is generated, the covering member 787 on the right side of the front view rotates in the backward rotation direction, so that the magnet is displaced forward due to the forward displacement of the metal screw arranged (located on the lower side) in close proximity to the magnet Mg. A forward load is generated in Mg as a reaction of the adsorption force.

Further, for example, when the upside-down inverted member 781 changes from the inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (c)) to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (a)), the overturning member 787 on the left side in the front view. Since the magnet rotates in the backflip direction, a load in the backward direction is applied to the magnet Mg as a reaction of the attractive force due to the rearward displacement of the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side). On the other hand, since the covering member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the forward rotation direction, the magnet Mg becomes the magnet Mg due to the rearward displacement of the metal screw arranged in close proximity to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side). Causes a posterior load as a reaction of the suction force.

In this way, the directions of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating member 787 and the main body member 771 and the linear motion plate member 784 that maintain the posture and support the lining member 787 are on both the left and right sides. It is configured to be in the same direction in the front and back.

Here, when a load is generated in the opposite directions in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides (for example, by arranging the magnet Mg on the left side in the lower position, the arrangement of the magnet Mg on both the left and right sides is set in the lower position, and the shaft rotating member 785 on the left side (When the design is changed so that the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical arrangement state), the magnet Mg and the metal screw move up and down due to the load generated when they are peeled off from the suction state. The mode of displacement given to the reversing effect device 770 is a mode in which the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is rotated by a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, the vertical reversal effect device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotary shaft extending in the vertical direction. In particular, as in the present embodiment, the umbrella tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed in the process of removing the attraction of the magnet Mg, and after the attraction of the magnet Mg is removed, the elastic recovery of the umbrella tooth member 785c is utilized. In a configuration in which the lining member 787 is vigorously rotated, it is assumed that the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotation direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

Further, it becomes difficult to release the load from the elevating / reversing effect device 770, which may damage the elevating / reversing effect device 770 or reduce the durability of the elevating / reversing effect device 770. Therefore, for the purpose of stabilizing the displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 for a long period of time, it is considered that countermeasures are required.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lining member 787 that rotates when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from the attracted state, the main body member 771 that maintains the posture and supports the lining member 787, and the direct Since the direction of the load generated between the moving plate member 784 and the moving plate member 784 is configured to be the same in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides, the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from the attracted state causes an up-and-down reversal effect. The mode of displacement given to the device 770 can be a mode in which the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it can be easily canceled by the displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 (displacement having a component in the front-rear direction), and the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is damaged by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from the attracted state. Can be avoided.

In the second operation unit 700, the direction of the slide displacement of the effect device 780 (the direction having the vertical component and the front-rear component, that is, the direction in the plane orthogonal to the left-right direction) and the lining member 787 are arranged close to each other. The displacement start direction (left-right direction) from the state (vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781) is orthogonal to each other.

Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid that one displacement is caused by the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when the slide displacement of the effect device 780 is executed, it is easy to avoid a situation in which the lining members 787 are unintentionally started to be displaced from the state where they are arranged close to each other (displacement in the direction away from each other). be able to.

Next, the detailed description of the third operation unit 800 will be described again. First, the details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. FIG. 99 (a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 99 (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion is switched at the thickened portion 852.

As shown in FIG. 99A, the thickening portion 852 is arranged to face the tip end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and is arranged to face the tip end side rod portion 853 with the base end side reinforcing portion 852a. A recessed portion 852b formed by lightening from the front side along the axial direction is provided.

The base end side reinforcing portion 852a is lightened in the same manner as the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative lightening amount is small and the deformation resistance is large. As a result, even if the rotating arm member 850 comes into contact with the tip side rod portion 853 formed on the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to be large, the amount of deformation is prevented from becoming excessive. can do.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852. As a result, the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 can be ensured, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

Curved-shaped portions 852c, which are concavely formed in a curved shape, are formed on both side surfaces of the thickened portion 852 in the lateral direction. The curved shape portion 852c can smoothly accept the curved shape portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed at the end portion of the tip side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 in the combined state. Formed from a unique shape.

In the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 rotate and are arranged close to each other in the individual united state (see FIG. 66A) and the united state is set. Since it will be reversed, which side surface of the intermediate arm member 850 in the lateral direction is arranged close to the curved shape portion 854d differs depending on which united state is configured.

Under this premise, since the curved shape portion 852c is formed on both side surfaces, the curved shape portion 854d can be smoothly received in any of the combined states. As a result, the state change to the united state can be smoothly executed.

Further, by designing the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d to be in contact with each other on the surface, a locally excessive load is applied between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the combined state. Can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

The third operation unit 800 is configured to be vertically displaceable by the elevating arm member 801. The direction of the elevating displacement and the displacement start of the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. The direction is not always orthogonal to each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66A, since the virtual position line 832F recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834 is set as a different direction at 72 degree intervals, it is different from the displacement start direction of all the rotating members 834. , The direction of the vertical displacement cannot be orthogonal to each other.

Therefore, there is a possibility that a rotation operation (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) may occur unintentionally due to the load or inertia generated when the third operation unit 800 is vertically displaced. We will explain how to deal with this malfunction.

FIG. 100 is a schematic view of the third operation unit 800 schematically showing the displacement between the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIG. 100, among the virtual position lines 832F of the metal rod 832, the angle between the virtual position line 832F extending downward in the individually united state, the virtual position line 832F, and the long direction of the intermediate arm member 850 is 0.5 degrees. The virtual position line 832F, which is rotated counterclockwise in the front view until it changes, is shown in the figure.

That is, in FIG. 100, the state where the angle θ51 is 45 degrees and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees is shown.

As shown in FIG. 100, at the start of the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 slides the rotating member 834 along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotating operation of the rotating member 834. Is configured to be able to.

The amount of change in the angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 means the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which the tooth portions 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) rotate. ..

Here, backlash (gap) is indispensable for erecting the meshing of gear teeth, and the quality of rotation responsiveness changes depending on the setting of the size of this gap. Various modes can be selected for the backlash setting, but in the present embodiment, the backlash is set at 0.5 degrees.

That is, until the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is only filled and the tooth rotation is not started. On the other hand, the rotating tip side portion of the intermediate arm member 850 slides outward in the radial direction of the third operation unit 800 along the virtual position line 832F.

That is, at the start of the switching rotation operation from the united state (individual united state), the rotation operation of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and the slide movement mainly along the metal rod 832 occurs.

FIG. 101 is a front schematic view of the third operation unit 800. In the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 will be referred to as appropriate. In FIG. 101, the third operating unit 800 in the one-association state is shown, and the torque limiter 866 and the magnet Mg2 that generate a resistance force against the displacement of the third operating unit 800 are shown.

Here, the rotating member 834 is configured so that the rotating member 834 does not rotate to the extent that the inner rotating member 830 slightly rotates with respect to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, a rotating operation of about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)). ing.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, the magnet Mg2 is adopted to maintain the united state of the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative member 880, and even if the configuration is such that the attractive force is generated in the circumferential direction. Since the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the combined state can be limited to the linear displacement, it is possible to easily maintain the combined by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the united state, the first decorative member is in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the magnetic force. Since the 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced, it is considered that the magnetic force is likely to disappear. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement at the start of displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is the displacement along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (metal rod 832). Since it is a displacement in the sliding direction along the above), it is easy to maintain the united state due to the magnetic force.

As a result, even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (for example, about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load, the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decoration. It is possible to easily maintain the united state of the member 880.

As shown in FIG. 101, the torque limiter 866 disconnects when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied in the forward rotation, so that the switching rotation DR1 occurs so as to reduce the resistance (idle). It is configured so that the idling rotation AR1 is generated so that the resistance is reduced (idling) in the rotation in the opposite direction. The torque limiter 866 is composed of a set in which the forward and reverse rotations are opposite to each other.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the torque limiter 866 on the left side generates resistance until the applied load reaches the permissible value in the clockwise rotation in the front view, and the switching rotation DR1 idles when the permissible value is exceeded. On the other hand, in the direction of rotation counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the idling rotation AR1 of idling is configured to occur.

Further, the torque limiter 866 on the right side is configured to cause idling rotation AR1 that slips in the front-view clockwise rotation direction, while the applied load becomes an allowable value in the front-view counterclockwise rotation direction. It is configured so that a switching rotation DR1 occurs in which resistance is generated until it reaches the limit, and when it exceeds the permissible value, it idles.

As described above, the set of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, so that the switching rotation operation can be executed in both directions as described above.

Further, in a state where a load exceeding the allowable value in the rotation direction is not generated, resistance in both forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) assembled to the torque limiter 866. It is possible to suppress the rotational operation of the outer rotating member 840 that may occur due to an unintended load (inertial force of vertical displacement and impact force when opening and closing the door). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by the set of torque limiters 866.

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side in the width direction of the second lining portion 885, and is arranged concentrically in a state where the five second lining portions 885 are united in an annular shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second lining portion 885 which is arranged adjacent to each other.

With this configuration, when the magnets Mg2 are arranged on both sides in the width direction of the specific second lining portion 885 (that is, the second lining is arranged close to each other on both sides of the specific second lining portion 885). Both of the lining portions 885 are separated from the specific second lining portion 885 in the combined state as compared with the case where both of the lining portions 885 receive the urging force in the direction approaching the specific second lining portion 885 from the magnet Mg2). It is possible to prevent the gap between the second lining portions 885 from becoming large at the position, and to make the gaps between all the adjacent second lining portions 885 uniform.

Further, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the united state is configured as a sliding movement outward in the radial direction, and the uniting due to the magnetic force is performed by the time the rotational operation centering on the metal rod 832 is started. When the magnet Mg2 is separated to the extent that it is released (see FIG. 100), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in the direction of shortening the circumference of the concentric circles in which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (direction toward the center of the concentric circles). It is a resistance force for the sliding movement of the second decorative member 880 to the outside in the radial direction.

Further, since this resistance force is generated with the same magnitude from each direction obtained by dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, the load received by the third operating unit 800 from the magnet Mg2 can be balanced. That is, it is possible to make it easier to stabilize the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 as compared with the case where the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly.

Since the shape of the second decorative member 880 is the same for all five members and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, the front-rear positions of the magnets Mg2 are the same. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying a load having a front-rear direction component to the second decorative member 880 due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2. Is generated in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the second decorative member 880 vibrates in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. In FIG. 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individual united state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is illustrated, and in order to facilitate understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the outer rotating member arranged on the rear side is shown. The 840 is visible.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the present embodiment, at least one portion for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in one direction (clockwise in the front view in FIG. 102) can be secured. Many regulate the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in two places. A configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described.

First, there is a contact protruding portion 845 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The abutting protrusion 845 is formed from a shape that tapers outward in the radial direction at an intermediate angle position of the adjacent extension arm portions 842, and the inside is lightened in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body portion 841. ing.

The contact protruding portion 845 is arranged to face the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the intermediate arm member 850, and is arranged so as to be in contact with the curved shape portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850. , The intermediate arm member 850 is configured to prevent over-rotation.

In the thickened portion 852, the deformation resistance of elastic deformation is weakened by the recessed portion 852b (see FIG. 99 (a)). Similarly, the contact protrusion 845 is lightened. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved shape portion 852c of the thickening portion 852 and the contact protrusion portion 845 collide with each other, the load generated at that time is applied to the contact protrusion portion. Since it can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the 845 and the thickened portion 852, it is possible to avoid damage to the contact protruding portion 845 and the thickened portion 852.

The abutting protrusion 845 is not arranged at all positions as an intermediate angular position of the extended arm portion 842, but is omitted at the angular position where the detected portion 844 is formed. As a result, the arrangement of the contact protruding portion 845 and the detected portion 844 in the axial view is shifted, and the drawing direction of the molding die of the outer rotating member 840 can be set in the axial direction of the main body portion 841. .. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design of the molding die.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the formation of the contact protrusion 845 is omitted as a compensation for facilitating the design of the molding die, but in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted. As the second configuration, the base end side reinforcing portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852.

The base end side reinforcing portion 852a is arranged to face the tip side rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99 (a)) in the rotation direction of the adjacent rotating members 850, and can come into contact with the tip end side rod portion 853 when it over-rotates. By arranging in, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to prevent over-rotation.

The base end side reinforcing portion 852a is lightened in the same manner as the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative lightening amount is small and the deformation resistance is large. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of deformation from becoming excessive even if the rotating arm member 850 comes into contact with the rotating tip side, which is the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to be large.

The curved shape portion 852c is designed so as to be able to come into contact with the curved shape portion 854d on a surface, and an excessive load is locally generated between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the combined state. Can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

In this way, the displacement of the rotating arm member 850 is such that when the contact protruding portion 845 is arranged to face each other, in addition to the contact with the contact protruding portion 845, the adjacent rotating arm members 850 The curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d can be brought into contact with each other, or the base end side reinforcing portion 852a and the tip end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be brought into contact with each other. , Over-rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is regulated.

On the other hand, even if the arrangement of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted, the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d of the adjacent rotating arm members 850 may be brought into contact with each other, or the adjacent rotating arm members may be brought into contact with each other. The over-rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be regulated by a configuration in which the base end side reinforcing portion 852a of the 850 and the tip end side rod portion 853 can be brought into contact with each other.

The structure of these abutments is such that five rotating arm members 850 are related to each other (circulated arrangement). Therefore, at first glance, the formation of the contact protrusion 845 at one place is omitted, and there are few configurations that regulate the rotation only for the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the omitted place, so that the load at the time of contact is concentrated. However, in reality, the load at the time of contact can be dispersed by the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the durability of the single rotating arm member 850 (rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the contact protrusion 845 is omitted) from being extremely lowered.

Further, the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 extending in a circular plate shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on a plane along the back side end portion of the contact protruding portion 845 is also formed by the contact protrusion. Similar to the portion 845, it is omitted at a position where it overlaps with the detected portion 844 in the axial direction.

The omission of the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as a compensation for facilitating the design of the molding die, similarly to the omission of the formation of the contact protrusion 845 described above. The effect of the portion 846 is realized by the adjacent rotating arm member 850 (a configuration that supports the annular plate-shaped portion 846) even in a portion where the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as the correction of the deviation of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850. That is, when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced outward in the radial direction from the combined state (see FIG. 64 (a)) (see FIG. 65 (a)) and returns to the combined state, the tip of the rotating arm member 850 Even if the position of the rod is unintentionally displaced back and forth, the side surface of the base end side rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99B) is arranged to face the annular plate-shaped portion 846 so that it can be brought into contact with the rod portion 851. Therefore, the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the contact.

When the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted, this action cannot be achieved because the contact with the annular plate-shaped portion 846 does not occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the back side surface of the tip side rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side side surface of the extended arm portion 842, the tip end arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged. Even if the position is displaced back and forth, the back side surface of the tip side rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side side surface of the extended arm portion 842 so that it can be brought into contact with the extension arm portion 842. The front-back position of the arm member 850 can be corrected.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to cause the same action as that of the annular plate-shaped portion 846. As a result, the effect of modifying the front-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 can be produced in the entire rotating arm member 850 while partially omitting the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846.

FIG. 103 (a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 103 (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. In FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the relative arrangement of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 in the one-association state is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 103 (a) is a state in which the virtual position line 832F is rotated from the state of FIG. 65 (b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed). Corresponding to, the state shown in FIG. 103 (b) is a state in which the virtual position line 832F is rotated from the state of FIG. 67 (b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (switching rotation operation is performed). Corresponds to the completed state).

Comparing the one-unit state and the individual united state (see FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a)), the side of the intermediate arm member 850 in the lateral direction close to the outer rotating member 840 is reversed, so that the contact is made. There is a difference that the curved shape portion 852c that abuts on the projecting portion 845 is on the opposite side and the curved shape portion 852c that abuts on the curved shape portion 854d is reversed.

For the purpose of coping with this difference, the abutting protrusion 845 has a line-symmetrical shape in front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body 841, and the pair of curved shape portions 852c and the curved shape portion 854d , The shape is axisymmetric in front view with reference to the longitudinal direction line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the rotation base end and the supported hole 854a).

Further, the curved shape of the contact protrusion 845 and the curved shape of the curved shape portion 854d are designed as the same curved shape according to the shape of the curved shape portion 852c. As a result, the united state can be configured with the same engaging relationship in both the individual united state and the united state.

Further, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to be sandwiched between the contact protruding portion 845 and the curved shape portion 854d from both sides. As a result, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 can be suppressed from being displaced in any rotation direction, so that the state of the intermediate arm member 850 can be easily maintained and the united state can be maintained. It can be made easier.

104 and 105 are front views of the third operating unit 800. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter positions (a state intermediate between the individual united state and the one-association state), and FIG. 105 shows the one-association state.

FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 on the CVI-CVI line of FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 on the CVII-CVII line of FIG. 104. As a configuration of the third operation unit 800, the front-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be arbitrarily set.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal rod 832, the player can visually recognize the metal rod 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so that the visibility of the metal rod 832 can be lowered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the metal rod 832 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

With this arrangement, the metal rod 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. As a result, it is possible to prevent the intermediate arm member 850 as a functional member instead of the decorative member from being conspicuous, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the third operation unit 800.

In the exposed state (see FIG. 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as an effect member that reflects light due to the gloss of the surface. The effect can be improved. That is, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflective member for light production.

When the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal rod 832, the light entering the player's eyes may be blocked by the intermediate arm member 850, but in the present embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is the metal rod. Since it is arranged on the back side of the 832, it is possible to prevent the light from being blocked by the intermediate arm member 850 and the appearance from being deteriorated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state during the switching rotation operation (see FIGS. 104 and 107) in which the metal rod 832 is exposed, the light can be reflected through the metal rod 832. , The range in which the light effect is executed can be expanded. That is, it is arranged not only in the rear range of the translucent decorative member 824 on which the illuminated substrate 823 (see FIG. 60) is arranged, but also so as to project outward in the radial direction of the translucent decorative member 824 in the front view. Even in the range ER1 (see FIG. 104) where the metal rod 832 is exposed and visually recognized, the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player.

As a portion that receives light, the bulging portion 824a includes a light diffusing shape portion 824b (see FIGS. 106 and 107) in which the light diffusing shape is formed in an annular shape on the inner peripheral surface. The light emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a can irradiate the light diffusion shape portion 824b, and the light diffusion shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in an annular shape.

As a result, the light diffusion shape portion 824b is visually recognized brightly in an annular shape not only in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 but also in the switching rotation operation in which the annular arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is released. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the effect of using the annular shape of the third operation unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 is not only a bulging portion 824a that is visible in the combined state, but also an extending portion that extends radially outward from the bulging portion 824a in a front view. It is equipped with 824c.

The extended portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880 in the combined state and has a low function as a decorative portion, but has an effect of blindfolding the mechanical portion during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. 104. ..

That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107, the extension portion 824c is difficult to use for the production, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extending arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see FIG. 61). It is formed in a size that can shield the mechanical part and blindfold it.

Since the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulging portion 824a but also to the front side of the extending portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in the area where the mechanical portion is shielded and blindfolded. The effect can be improved.

An example of drive control of the third operation unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the elevating displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to the drive control of the elevating arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to the drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

According to the present embodiment, the elevating displacement and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 are configured to be feasible independently. However, for example, due to the inertial load at the time of the elevating displacement of the third operating unit 800, In conjunction with this, there is a possibility that rotational displacement will occur in the third operating unit 800. In this case, the posture of the third operating unit 800 is changed, or the united state of the third operating unit 800 is released (the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced outward in the radial direction against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2). As a result, the effect of the effect may be reduced.

In order to avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operation unit 800 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 (particularly, the integral rotation operation) may be controlled to be executed at the same time.

As a result, the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 at the time of vertical displacement can be shown to the player as an effect operation, so that the effect of the effect can be prevented from being lowered. Further, during the continuation of the integral rotation operation, the load continues to be applied in the direction of displacement the decorative members 870 and 880 in the radial direction (see FIG. 101), so that the united state of the third operation unit 800 is released. It can be avoided.

Further, even if the control for executing the elevating displacement and the rotational displacement at the same time is not performed, the posture of the third operation unit 800 is set to the posture in which the rotating arm member 850 is difficult to be displaced due to the elevating displacement in advance. It may be controlled to adjust the posture of the unit 800 in the rotation direction.

The change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68) means that in the present embodiment, the rotation mode of the inner rotating member 830 is executed by the integral rotation operation. means. Therefore, on the premise of this, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operation unit 800 are associated and designed.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state in which the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid a situation in which this premise may be broken.

In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 is controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby suppressing the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. The posture of 840 is maintained.

Therefore, for example, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotary member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during the execution of the switching rotation motion, and the motion resistance between the inner rotary member 830 and the outer rotary member 840 increases. If the resistance exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may interlock with each other, making it impossible to properly execute the switching rotation operation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced.

For example, the displacement direction of the rotation tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 from the combined state is the direction along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. That is, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, it is possible to make it difficult to generate resistance to the rotation of the metal rod 832, and the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, and the rotating member 834 can be made less likely to occur. And the resistance generated between the intermediate arm member 850 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be suppressed to a small value.

In the state where the translation member 833 and the rotation member 834 are arranged at the radial outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (for example, the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is a metal rod. Since it follows the rotation direction of the 832, it is easy to configure a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, particularly when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation becomes defective.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a control mode is adopted in which the drive is continued at a sufficient speed until the united state is reached after the switching rotation operation is started, and the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 are radially outer-terminated. In the state of being arranged at the position (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to inertia so as to rotate around the metal rod 832.

Due to the influence of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the umbrella tooth portion 834a and the umbrella tooth portion 854c rotate in teeth, so that the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 is moved. It passes through the radial outer termination position and rotates inward in the radial direction (see FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b)).

In a state of being out of the radial outer end position, the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 is likely to be displaced in the direction along the metal rod 832, and the resistance of the metal rod 832 to the rotational movement can be easily suppressed to a small value.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by the relationship between the members and the design of the drive control. There is.

Since the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained during the switching rotation operation and the arrangement of the detected unit 844 does not change, the end timing of the switching rotation operation is determined by the change in the detection mode of the detected unit 844 by the detection sensor 813. It cannot be determined.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached can be realized by setting in advance a sufficient drive time necessary for the switching rotation operation and controlling to stop the drive at that drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the displacement amount may differ even if the driving time is the same, and before the united state is reached. There is a possibility that the drive will stop. In this case, the effect of the effect may be low.

On the other hand, instead of the control mode in which the drive motor 861 is stopped at the timing when the united state is reached, the detection mode of the detected unit 844 by the detection sensor 813 is changed, so that the switching rotation operation is completed and the integrated rotation operation is performed. It may be determined that the start has started (see FIG. 68), and the drive motor 861 may be controlled to be stopped after this determination. By this control, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped in a state where the decorative members 870 and 880 have not reached the combined state after the switching rotation operation is executed.

As described above, as the drive control, the switching rotation operation is executed in the overhanging state of the third operation unit 800, but the integrated rotation operation can be executed regardless of the state of the third operation unit 800. Is.

As the drive control, the switching rotation operation can be executed regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 in the rotation direction. Therefore, as described above in FIG. 68, it is expected that the player will be notified of the jackpot. It can be avoided. That is, the state is not limited to the state in which the detected unit 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66A), and the detected unit 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. The switching rotation operation can also be executed from.

On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is executed in the state where the detected unit 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detected unit 844 becomes the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 after the switching rotation operation is completed. Since the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change until it enters, it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation may be executed in a driving period preset as a driving period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, or the detected unit 844 may execute the switching rotation operation of the detection sensor 813. The drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until it enters the detection groove.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to the integrated rotation operation, and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that the switching rotation operation is already completed and the decorative member 870, It can be determined that the 880 is in the coalesced state.

On the other hand, although the drive motor 861 is driven from the switching rotation operation to the integrated rotation operation for a sufficient time for the detected unit 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. If the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, it can be determined that the third operation unit 800 has a malfunction based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

Further, in the latter case, the switching rotation operation is executed from an arbitrary rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 is detected in a state where the one-association state (see FIG. 32) is maintained. The drive is continued until the unit 844 enters.

In the one-unit state of the third operating unit 800, as described above, the appearance is unlikely to be different even if the rotation arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 is continued until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the one-association state, it is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, in the case of controlling the return from the inversion effect shown in FIG. 68 to the normal effect, since the detected unit 844 is already arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor is detected after the switching rotation operation is completed. The period until the output of 813 changes can be minimized. In other words, since a short drive period such that the detected unit 844 arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 retracts from the detection groove is sufficient, the length required for the control to return from the inversion effect to the normal effect. Can be minimized.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800 that starts the switching rotation operation for switching from the normal effect to the reverse effect is improved, and the return operation is usually prolonged. However, we are trying to shorten the switching rotation operation from the reverse effect as the return operation to the normal effect.

That is, a part of the return operation for returning the difference in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 (rotational displacement until the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) can be seen even if the rotational arrangement is different. By performing this in a united state in which the appearance is hard to change, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the effect of the third operation unit 800 during the return operation.

Further, by performing a part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the period required for the switching rotation operation as the remaining return operation.

Among the respective operation units 600, 700, 800, the configuration commonly adopted in the plurality of operation units 600, 700, 800 will be cross-sectionally explained including the reason for the difference in the adoption mode.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, the configurations of the detection sensors KS1,713,778d, 813 commonly used in each operation unit 600, 700, 800 are confirmed, and the adoption mode (number of sensors, The reason for the difference in the shape of the piece to be detected, etc.) will be explained.

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operation unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operation unit 600, and the extension portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The detection device included in the first operation unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). For a plurality of displacement members such as the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotating member 660, if the posture of the rotating member 620 is determined, the arrangement and posture of the other displacement members are determined. Therefore, it is possible to determine the arrangement and orientation of a plurality of displacement members based on the detection result of one detection sensor KS1. As a result, the number of detection devices arranged can be reduced.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operation unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second operation unit 700, and the detected unit 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which correspond to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700, respectively. do.

The detection sensor 713 that determines the effect standby state is required to determine the return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 that determines the overhang state is required to determine the arrival at the end position of the ascending displacement, and also for the reversing operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 and the determination of the positional deviation due to the influence of an unintended load. Is needed. The detection sensor 713 for determining the intermediate effect state is required for determining the arrival at the vertical position in the intermediate effect state, and is also required for determining the position shift due to the influence of an unintended load. Hereinafter, the reversing operation and the influence of an unintended load will be described in order.

First, the reversing operation will be described. In the second operation unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 that occurs in conjunction with the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, the reversal operation of the vertical reversal effect device 770 (see FIG. 59) is possible.

Since the up-and-down reversing effect device 770 may be displaced in the vertical direction due to the reversing operation, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for determining the effect standby state) is adopted, the overhanging state or It is not possible to determine the vertical displacement in the intermediate effect state, and there is a possibility that an appropriate effect operation cannot be executed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, it can be determined that the vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction by reversing the vertical reversal effect device 770 in the overhanging state, and the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be properly adjusted based on this determination result. By rotating the drive motor 731 in the direction of correction (so that it is in the overhanging state), the arrangement of the up / down reversal effect device 770 can be maintained properly.

In the present embodiment, the reversing operation is permitted only when the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state (when the gear cam member 734 is on the end side of the operation). It is easy to rotate the member 734 toward the end of operation.

Next, the effect of an unintended load will be described. In the second operation unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 740 that occurs in conjunction with the rotating arm member 720 that rotates due to the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, the front-rear position corresponding to the vertical position of the elevating plate member 740. A front-rear displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 with reference to the elevating plate member 740 for displacement to the above occurs (see FIGS. 52 to 54).

Therefore, as the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction due to the load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the vertical positions of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 change accordingly, and the gear cam The posture of the member 734 may change. Examples of the load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine include an impact load when the player hits the gaming machine, a load when opening and closing the front frame 14, and the like.

Since the vertical reversal effect device 770 may be displaced in the vertical direction due to the load in the front-rear width direction, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for determining the effect standby state) is adopted, tension is applied. It is not possible to determine the vertical positional displacement in the output state or the intermediate effect state, and there is a possibility that the up / down reversal effect device 770 cannot be maintained in an appropriate arrangement.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-rear width direction is applied to the game machine in the intermediate effect state and the vertical positions of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with the change. , It can be determined that the vertical reversal effect device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and based on this determination result, the drive motor 731 is rotated in the direction of appropriately correcting the posture of the gear cam member 734 (so as to be in the intermediate effect state). As a result, the arrangement of the up / down reversal effect device 770 can be maintained properly.

When it is determined that the detected portion 735 has been removed from the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load from the state in which the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is arranged on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state, this implementation is performed. In the embodiment, it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected unit 735 has come off, but the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven in the direction in which the effect device 780 is first moved downward. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 collide with each other.

In the present embodiment, when the detected unit 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state again by this drive, the displacement of the detected unit 735 due to an unintended load causes the effect device 780 to be displaced upward. It is possible to offset the effect caused by an unintended load by knowing that it was occurring on the side to cause the load and stopping the drive at that point.

Further, when the detected unit 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state by this drive, the detected unit 735 due to an unintended load is generated. It was found that the displacement of the effect device 780 occurred on the side where the effect device 780 was displaced downward, and when the detected unit 735 entered the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state by continuing the drive so as to displace the effect device 780 again. By stopping the drive, the effect caused by an unintended load can be offset.

The detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have the structural purpose as described in the extension portion 634b, and therefore has a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713. It is formed as a shaped part. As a result, the resolution for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be increased.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down member 781 of the second operation unit 700, and the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d can enter the detection groove. The second operation unit 700 has two detection devices for detecting the posture of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56), and the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781, respectively. And correspond to.

The second operation unit 700 is arranged in pairs on the left and right in an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (a)) and an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (c)) of the vertically inverted member 781. The covering members 787 are brought into close proximity to each other.

For example, when only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that inverts the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781) is adopted, the posture deviation of the upside down member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state is Since the determination can be made, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the united state of the lining member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the posture deviation of the upside-down member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, the combined state of the upside-down member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state is in a state due to an unintended load, poor control, or the like. Even if the change occurs, the change in the state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the state in which the combined state is released continues, which is not preferable in terms of production.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d corresponding to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 and the upside-down vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 is provided. Therefore, regardless of whether it is in the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state, it is possible to determine by the detection sensor 778d that a state change has occurred from the combined state, and based on the determination result, the united state is established. By driving and controlling the drive motor 782 to the return side, the lining member 787 can be returned to the combined state. Thereby, the effect of the second operation unit 700 can be improved.

The arcuate projecting portion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have the structural purpose as described in the extension portion 634b, and therefore has a width appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. It is formed as a plate-like part of. As a result, the resolution for detecting the posture of the upside-down member 781 can be increased.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operation unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operation unit 800, and the detected portion 844 can enter the detection groove (FIG. 60). reference). The third operation unit 800 has one detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detection device stops the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. It is used (also used) for determining the rotation (switching rotation operation) of the inner rotating member 830 in this state.

The detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have the structural purpose as described in the extension portion 634b, and therefore has a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. It is formed as a shaped part. As a result, the resolution for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be increased.

Since the detection sensor 813 is arranged for the purpose of detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 and the number is as small as one, it is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs such that the combined state is released when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detected portion 844 is not arranged on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 determines it. Can't.

Therefore, rather than the control of determining the deviation from the united state and then returning to the united state, the direction in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are returned to the united state at regular time intervals (individual united state (FIG. 66 (a)). )), The drive motor is in the direction of rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in the front view, and the drive motor is in the direction of rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 103 (b)). It is considered preferable to control the 861 so as to rotate it for a certain period of time (for example, a short time).

By this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870 and 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at regular time intervals. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from being maintained for a long period of time while being released from the combined state.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the actions of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be described. As described above, in the second operating unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the posture of the covering member 787, and in the third operating unit 800, the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. As you can see, similar technologies are used, but the design concept of the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg and Mg2 is different, so this will be explained here.

The second operation unit 700 is designed so that the directions of the magnetic forces generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right are aligned in the front-rear direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to the plane orthogonal to the metal rod 785a as the rotation axis of the rotation operation of the lining member 787.

In this case, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as the resistance of the slide displacement in which the lining members 787 are separated from each other can be reduced as compared with the case where the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a. As a result, the operating resistance of the lining member 787 at the start of operation can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the third operation unit 800, the directions of the lines of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 arranged on the decorative member 880 and the metal screw Nj2 are five as the rotation axes of the rotational operation of the decorative member 880. It is designed to be arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged (a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, since it is possible to reduce the degree to which the decorative members 870 and 880 are loaded in the rotational operation direction by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2, it is easy to avoid a malfunction in which the decorative members 870 and 880 wobble in the rotational operation direction due to the magnetic force. be able to.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, an effect of visually recognizing the display on the display device such as the third symbol display device 81 and the operation units 600, 700, 800 in an integrated manner will be described.

In the first operation unit 600, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to be visible so as to overlap with the right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, the display area and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are united by displaying the display corresponding to the position where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged near the right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make it easier to see as a display effect of.

In the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is arranged at the same height between the inner lower edge portion of the center frame 86 and the lower edge portion of the opening 511a (FIGS. 26 and 52). reference). Therefore, for example, the display area and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 can be separated by displaying the display corresponding to the position where the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is arranged near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. It can be easily visually recognized as a cohesive display effect.

In the third operation unit 800, each of the first lining portions 875 that can be visually recognized by the player in the individually united state is decorated differently, and in the overhanging state, the third is so as to surround the surroundings with a front view. The display area of the symbol display device 81 is arranged. Therefore, for example, in the range close to the first lining portion 875 in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the display corresponding to the position where the first lining portion 875 is arranged is displayed to display the display area and the first. The lining portion 875 can be easily visually recognized as a set display effect.

Further, if the third operation unit 800 is driven and controlled so as to rotate integrally, it is possible to execute a roulette-like operation effect in which each of the first lining portions 875 rotates. By moving the display so as to run parallel to the first lining unit 875 in a range close to the first lining unit 875 in the display area of the symbol display device 81, the display area and the first lining unit 875 can be moved. It can be easily visually recognized as a cohesive display effect.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal shape of the flow path constituent units 334 to 336 is fixed has been described, but in the distribution device 2300 of the second embodiment, the first flow path constituent unit 2334 having a variable internal shape has been described. To be equipped. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the first flow path configuration unit 2334 is described as an alternative portion of the first flow path configuration unit 334 in the first embodiment, the configuration arranged on the right side will be illustrated and described, but it will be arranged on the left side. The configuration can also be the first flow path configuration unit 2334. Further, the left and right may have different configurations such that only one of the left and right is the first flow path constituent unit 2334 and the other is the first flow path constituent portion 334.

FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 according to the second embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVI-XVI line of FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the first flow path component 2334 of the distribution device 2300 slides back and forth along a through hole 2410 bored in the front-rear direction at the lower part of the curved protrusion 334b and the through hole 2410. It includes a slide member 2420 that is guided so as to be displaceable, and a solenoid 2430 that is arranged inside the rear frame-shaped portion 332 so that a driving force that slides and displaces the slide member 2420 can be generated.

In FIG. 108, the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420 in the non-excited state of the solenoid 2430 is shown by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the slide member 2420 is slid and displaced to the rearward arrangement RP by the driving force of the solenoid 2430.

In the present embodiment, in the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 projects inward (upper side) from the lower surface 2334c on which the ball can roll, which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path, and is on the rear side. In the arrangement RP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is configured so as not to project (immerse) inward (upper side) from the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, in the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the sphere comes into contact with the upper side surface of the slide member 2420, and in the rear side arrangement RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 and the sphere do not come into contact with each other.

The upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if a slide displacement of the slide member 2420 occurs while the sphere is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the influence on the flow mode of the sphere can be suppressed to a small extent.

Since the flow direction of the sphere rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is diagonally forward and downward, and the direction of slide displacement of the slide member 2420 is the front-rear direction, the direction of slide displacement of the slide member 2420 is along the flow direction of the sphere. Therefore, the slide displacement of the slide member 2420 affects the strength of the rotation of the sphere.

Since the sphere rolls forward with the bottom surface 2334c, rotation in the direction of forward rotation occurs in the traveling direction (forward). When the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the front side arrangement FP to the rear side arrangement RP by energizing the solenoid 2430 from the non-excited state (see FIG. 108), the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is rolled. A rearward load (friction force) is generated on the lower end of the moving ball. Therefore, the rotation of the sphere in the forward rotation direction is accelerated, the degree of rotation of the sphere can be increased, and the rolling speed of the sphere can be increased.

On the other hand, when the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the rear-arranged RP to the front-arranged FP by changing from the energized state of the solenoid 2430 to the non-excited state (see FIG. 108), the bottom surface 2334b A forward load (friction force) is generated on the lower end of the ball that is rolling on the slide member 2420 via the upper side surface. Therefore, the rotation of the sphere in the forward rotation direction is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the sphere can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the sphere can be decelerated.

Further, since the vertical position of the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP is on the upper side than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, the load in the direction of pushing the ball upward is added to the frictional force from the slide member 2420. Occurs. Therefore, the speed of the ball rolling downward in the vertical direction can be reduced, so that the flow speed of the ball can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by executing the control that causes the slide displacement of the slide member 2420 when the sphere is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, the sphere that flows down inside the distribution device 2300 flows down. The speed can be changed. Thereby, the time from when the sphere passes through the sphere passage hole 163b to when it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74) can be variably controlled.

In the present embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is arranged behind the second flow path component 335, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the ball is being affected by the slide member 2420. be able to.

That is, since the slide member 2420 and the ball are brought into contact with each other before the ball is introduced into the second flow path component 335, which is easy for the player to see and attract attention, rotation is added to the ball. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how the player moves or displaces the ball in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the second flow path constituent unit 335.

In the present embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced when the sphere is arranged on the upper side of the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, while the upper side of the bottom surface 2334c before and after the displacement of the slide member 2420 (when stopped). No contact load with the slide member 2420 is applied to the ball passing through.

Therefore, the flow mode (rotation, change in rotation, flow speed) of the sphere arranged on the upper side of the bottom surface 2334c during the operation of the slide member 2420 and the sphere arranged on the upper side of the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped. , Flow speed change, etc.) can be made different.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described, but in the distribution device 3300 of the third embodiment, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is arranged as a normal detection sensor. By moving to the rear side of SE12, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

An example of changing the arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 will be described on the right side of the center of the left and right, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be arbitrarily designed. For example, on the left side, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side as in the first embodiment, and the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300. The probabilistic change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300 so that they are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction as described in detail below on the left side. May be configured to be symmetrical.

109 (a) and 109 (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 according to the third embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) is de-excited and the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front position. In FIG. 109 (b), the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized. The state in which the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position is shown in the figure.

Further, in FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b), the guide path of the sphere after flowing through the third flow path component 336 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In this way, the guide path of the sphere is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b), the middle member 3330 of the sorting device 3300 has a rear frame-shaped portion 3332 that divides the ball guide path to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. However, it is configured so that the ball can be accepted and opened from the left side.

The slide displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidable at the front position and the rear position. The rear position of the slide displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109 (b)) is the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 and the rear frame-shaped portion 3332 as a path inlet for guiding the ball to the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is set as a position where the rear inner surface of the open portion 3332 g formed in the above is aligned on the left and right (or the right end portion of the front side surface 376a is slightly arranged on the front side).

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this way, if the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the sphere that has passed through the third flow path constituent portion 336 is placed on the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370. If the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position while being swept to the right while abutting and passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, the sphere that has passed through the third flow path component 336 will be the slide displacement member 3370. It can be configured to flow to the right side while abutting on the front side surface 376a and pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

That is, both the flow path of the sphere passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the sphere passing through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 both flow to the right after passing through the third flow path component 336. Consists of. The only difference is the front-back position that flows to the right.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 from the player's point of view of viewing the third flow path component 336 from the front side.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending in a rod shape from the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 to the front side, and an upper front projecting portion 3376b integrally formed with the upper projecting portion 376. It includes an upper lateral protrusion 3376c integrally formed with the upper protrusion 376.

The upper side surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the center of the sphere flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336. It is configured to penetrate the front side surface of the third flow path and can be accommodated on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path constituent portion 336 so that it does not come into contact with the sphere and the slide displacement member 3370. Is arranged at the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged over the front-rear side gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this way, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position, the lower left and right portions of the sphere can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, and the sphere is slid-displaced. It can be bridged to member 3370.

As a result, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball flows down toward the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easy to avoid erroneous guidance of the flowing ball.

Further, the arrangement of the sphere that has passed through the third flow path constituent portion 336 is arranged so as to ride on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c formed flush with the upper surface of the sphere guide portion 371b, so that the sphere and the sphere guide portion are arranged. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the 371b collides head-on in the front-rear direction. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c causes the ball and the ball guide portion 371b to collide head-on and the ball flows backward forward, or the ball is sandwiched between the front side surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the operation becomes poor.

The upper front projecting portion 3376b has the same shape as the front-rear elongated projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18) described in the first embodiment, but has the same relative position in the front position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment. It is a shape portion integrally formed with the upper protrusion portion 376 in the positional relationship of.

The upper lateral protrusion 3376c has the same shape as the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) described in the first embodiment, but has the same relative position in the front position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment. It is a shaped portion integrally formed with the upper front projecting portion 3376b in the positional relationship of.

As a result, the action of the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c on the abutting ball is as an action on the ball flowing down in the vicinity of the upper projecting portion 376 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370. Occurs.

In other words, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged in the rear position, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged in a fixed manner as in the case where the front and rear long protrusions 317 and the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) are arranged, the protrusions are provided. It is possible to eliminate the action of the portions 3376b and 3376c to force the ball that has reached the front position of the upper protrusion portion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described, but in the distribution device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the arrangement of the normal detection sensor SE12 is the probability variation detection sensor. By moving to the rear side of SE11, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

110 (a) and 110 (b) show a third flow path configuration unit 336 schematically showing a configuration on the downstream side of the third flow path configuration unit 336 in the fourth embodiment, a probability variation detection sensor SE11, and a normal detection. It is a schematic top view of the sensor SE12 and the slide displacement member 4370.

FIG. 111A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 in the CXIa-CXIa line of FIG. b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 in the CXIb-CXIb line of FIG. 110 (b). In FIG. 111 (b), the upper contact portion 4373 is not shown for the sake of clarity.

The slide displacement member 4370 is configured so that one of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 cannot be passed by the sphere and the other is opened to allow the sphere to pass, and above the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It includes a front slide member 4371 that slides left and right, and a rear slide member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide and displace in opposite directions to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when the state changes from the front open state shown in FIGS. 110 (a) and 111 (a) to the rear open state shown in FIGS. 110 (b) and 111 (b), the front slide member 4371 is moved to the left. The rear slide member 4375 is configured to slide to the right.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 arranged so as to cover above the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and an upper contact portion 4373 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 17). , And are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 are integrally slid and displaced.

The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336, and is formed as an inclined plane having the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111 (b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111B), the inclination of the upper side surface 4372a allows a sphere that rolls on the upper side surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111 (a)), the sphere that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a comes into contact with the upper contact portion 4373 and receives a load, so that the ball flows downward (lower right).

Therefore, when the front open state and the rear open state change, the front slide member 4371 comes into contact with the sphere at different points, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the sphere in different directions. Will be done.

The rear slide member 4375 is formed with a slide plate 4376 which is normally arranged so as to cover above the detection sensor SE12 and an upper contact portion 4377 which is formed in a shape similar to the shape of the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 17). And, and are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally slid and displaced.

The upper side surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed from the shape opposite to that of the upper side surface 4372a (see FIG. 111 (a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111A), the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a allows the sphere arranged on the upper side surface 4376a to flow toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111 (b)), the sphere that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper side surface 6372a abuts on the upper contact portion 4377 and receives a load, so that the ball is swept downward.

Therefore, when the front open state and the rear open state change, the rear slide member 4375 comes into contact with the sphere at different points, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the sphere in different directions. It is composed.

With this configuration, the sphere after passing above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 may return to the top of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is possible to improve the attention to the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituent portion 336.

As a mode of returning to the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, for example, it is assumed that the solenoid is driven so as to change the state from the rear open state to the front open state at the timing when the ball passes rearward through the upper side surface 4372a. NS. In this case, the sphere normally rides on the upper side surface 4376a before passing through the detection sensor SE12, flows back toward the front side along the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a, and returns to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 side.

In this way, when the timing at which the sphere passes through the third flow path component 336 and the drive timing of the slide displacement member 4370 match, the sphere is configured to be able to return to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 side. Therefore, after passing through the third flow path component 336, as compared with the gaming machine configured so that the ball passing above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 on the downstream side does not pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is possible to improve the attention to the drive timing of the sphere and the slide displacement member 4370.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path of the sphere is common up to the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the branch portion BP1 is arranged behind the third flow path constituent portion 336 has been described, but the fifth embodiment has been described. In the distribution device 5300 of the form, the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the upstream side of the third flow path constituent portion 336, and the flow path of the sphere changes on the upstream side of the third flow path constituent portion 336. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

112 (a) and 112 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. In FIG. 112 (a), the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged at the right side position, and the state in which the sphere is guided to the probability change detection sensor SE11 by the slide displacement member 5370 is shown. In FIG. 112 (b), the slide displacement member 5370 is The state in which the sphere is usually guided to the detection sensor SE12 by the slide displacement member 5370, which is arranged at the left side position, is shown in the figure.

Further, in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), the guide path of the sphere after flowing through the first flow path component 334 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In this way, the guide path of the sphere is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

The slide displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and is projected upward from the thin plate portion 5371 forming the rolling surface of the sphere and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371. It is provided with an upper protrusion 5376.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed to be thin enough so that a ball that has passed through the first flow path constituent portion 334 can ride on it. Since the left side surface 5376a facing the sphere of the upper projecting portion 5376 is formed in an arc shape having a concave flow path side, the flowing sphere can be smoothly flowed backward.

According to the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the flow path of the sphere is formed to be long like the distribution device 5300, and the visibility of the sphere flowing down the front side is higher than that of the sphere flowing down the rear side. Since the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the front side where the visibility of the ball is improved while adopting the configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to discriminate the flow mode (flow path) of the ball.

In the present embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged at the right side position, the path entrance to the detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure is such that a ball can enter. On the other hand, the sphere flowing down the upstream side of the path inlet to the normal detection sensor SE11 is flowing toward the front side while flowing down the first flow path component 334.

Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow path constituent unit 334, it is difficult for a velocity to be generated in the opposite direction to the rear side, so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is omitted to intentionally provide a member for closing the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11, and the member cost is reduced.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338 and the flow paths do not merge with each other has been described, but in the distribution device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, the third flow path component on the right side is described. A merging flow path 6341 extending to the right from the downstream side of the curved protrusion 334b on the left side is connected to 336. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVII-XVII line of FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, the flow path on the right side of the distribution device 6300 is formed from the flow path constituents 334 to 336 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the flow path on the left side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from a merging flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a place where a space for one sphere is left on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b, and this merging flow is formed. Road 6341 is connected to a third flow path component 336 as a flow path on the right side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sphere flowing down the right flow path and the sphere flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 to which the flow path is connected, so that the spheres can collide with each other.

The merging flow path 6341 is provided with a raised floor portion 6342 at the lower end of the flow path. The raised floor portion 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path constituent portion 336. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in height position between the sphere that flows into the connection point JP1 from the merging flow path 6341 and the sphere that flows down the right flow path and flows down the third flow path component 336. It is possible to reduce the degree of backflow that occurs when they collide with each other.

The contact between the balls at the connection point JP1 can delay the flow of the balls as compared with the case where the contact between the balls does not occur. Thereby, the time until the spheres that have passed through the sphere passage hole 163b (see FIG. 16) reach the branch point BP1 can be changed depending on whether the spheres come into contact with each other or not.

Since the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set by a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b regardless of the ball entering mode, the slide displacement member is changed by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1. There is a possibility that the sphere can reach the branch point BP1 when the 370s are arranged differently.

The premise of contact between spheres is that merging of spheres occurs, and that there are spheres flowing down the merging flow path 6341. When the player wants to cause contact between the balls, the player may play by adjusting the firing intensity so that the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passage holes 163b (see FIG. 74). If you want to avoid the contact, you can play by adjusting the firing intensity so that the ball enters only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (right side).

According to the present embodiment, the adjustment of the firing intensity of the ball is related to the presence or absence of contact of the ball at the connection point JP1 and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the ball reaches the branch point BP1. , Directly affects the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to adjust the firing intensity of the ball.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a continuous ball of spheres. That is, the two balls that are in contact with each other at the connection point JP1 can flow down to the branch point BP1 in a state of being arranged close to each other.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path to the branch point BP1 is only the flow path composed of the flow path constituent units 334 to 336 has been described, but in the distribution device 7300 of the seventh embodiment, the first The sphere is configured to be able to flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 114 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 in the CXV-CXV line of FIG. 114. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball formed as an opening at a substantially central position on the left and right in addition to the ball passing hole 163b as a path through which the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a can pass. It is provided with a passage hole 7163b.

The ball passing hole 7163b is the same as the detection sensor SE1 used for detecting the entry of balls into the variable winning device 65 and detecting the timing of changing the state of the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state by determining the specified number of winning balls. It is formed as a ball passage opening of the detection sensor SE71 having the function of.

On the downstream side of the ball passage hole 7163b, a cylindrical flow path 7164 extending in a direction of downward inclination toward the rear with a rectangular tubular cross section is arranged. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow a sphere to flow down inside, and its end extends to the upper front side of the branching point BP1. That is, the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 7163b flows down the inside of the cylindrical flow path 7164 and is configured to be reachable to the branch point BP1.

The time length required for the sphere to pass through the tubular flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the time length required for the sphere to pass through the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336, and the first flow path constituent portion is set. It is set to be equivalent to the time required for the ball to pass through the 334.

Therefore, for example, when the distribution device 7300 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25) described above, it passes through the ball passage hole 163b and passes through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 as described above. The sphere can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to the front position, whereas the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 7163b and has flowed down the cylindrical flow path 7164 is the slide displacement member 370. May reach the branch point BP1 while the is located at the rear position.

In particular, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening / closing plate 65b has changed to the open state easily reaches the branch portion BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position.

That is, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the probability change is detected depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the ball passage hole 163b or the ball passage hole 7163b. It can be configured to change whether or not the sphere passes through the sensor SE11. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the flow mode of the ball inside the specific winning opening 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, when viewed in a general directional view during a game, the cylindrical flow path 7164 reduces the visibility of the branch portion BP1, the slide displacement member 370, and the flow path constituents 334 to 336. The arrangement of the cylindrical flow path 7164 is devised so that it can be avoided.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the branch point BP1 is maintained high, and the number of flow paths through which the ball is guided to the branch point BP1 is increased, so that the ball reaches the branch point BP1. The type of time required can be increased, and the player's attention to the specific winning opening 65a can be improved.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operation unit 600 is connected to the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one place, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position and the displacement direction of the axis O1. However, in the first operation unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide elongated holes 8616 are connected at a plurality of places (two places), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting positions and the displacement direction. The displacement direction of O1 is switched. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a front schematic view schematically showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide slot 8616 bends to the left and right twice on the lower side of the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide elongated hole 8616 is a first curved portion 8616b formed on a curved line (substantially arcuate shape) by being connected to the linear portion 616a and the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a, and the first curved portion thereof. It is provided with a second curved portion 8616c which is connected to the lower end portion of the 8616b and is formed on a curved line (substantially arcuate shape) whose center of the radius of curvature is opposite to that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the axis O1 Since the displacement direction is switched, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In addition, when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the first curved portion 8616b, that is, at the connecting portion between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched. Therefore, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In this way, since the intermediate positions where the axis O1 can be easily stopped can be configured at a plurality of positions, the axis O1 is stopped in the middle and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see FIG. 43) which is stopped in the middle is stopped. The types (variations) of postures can be increased.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide slot 616 of the first operation unit 600 is composed of a single path has been described, but in the first operation unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 is a straight line. It includes a first path composed of the shaped portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 117 is a front schematic view schematically showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 includes the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b as in the guide elongated hole 616 of the first embodiment, and also has the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. It includes an angle maintaining portion 9616c extending inclined to the right from the connecting portion, and a connecting portion 9616d extending from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b side and being connected to an intermediate position of the curved portion 616b. ..

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is used when the rotating member 620 is rotated to the tilting side from a state in which the axis O1 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see FIGS. 43 and 44). It is formed in the same direction as the displacement locus of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while the angle θ is maintained.

In this way, since the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the posture of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the rotation direction is such that the third effect surface 661c is in front of the surface. The facing posture (see FIG. 43) is maintained.

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced, the box-shaped member 661 that rotates in conjunction with the rotating member 620 rotating in the tilting direction. As a rotation mode, the third effect surface 661c can maintain a front-facing posture over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintenance portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 displaces the connecting portion 9616d, the change of the angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is allowed, so that the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620. ..

On the other hand, even when the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the size of the angle θ when the axis O1 is arranged on the curved portion 616b and the angle when the axis O1 is arranged on the connecting portion 9616d. Since it is different from the size of θ, the midway posture of the box-shaped member 661 interlocked with the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be changed by making the path on which the axis O1 is displaced different on the left and right.

Further, regardless of whether the path where the axis O1 is displaced is left or right, the angle θ when the axis O1 is arranged at the upper end of the displaceable range and the angle θ when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end are one type, so that the axis is the same. The posture of the box-shaped member 661 when O1 is arranged at the upper end or the lower end of the displaceable range can be maintained (see FIGS. 40 and 45).

In other words, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the arrangement of the axis O1 in the state where the axis O1 is arranged between the ends of the displaceable range (intermediate position) (FIG. 43 and FIG. 44), and the displacement speed of the supported member 640 and the rotation speed of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be generated in a plurality of types. can.

The guide slot 9616 is only composed of a plurality of paths, and does not have a mechanism for limiting the path in which the axis O1 can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of malfunction due to a defect in the mechanism for restricting the route, and to reduce the product cost by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled in the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be described below. First, a case where the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced in the tilting direction will be described.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (linear portion 616a and curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is used so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 does not stop in the middle. Drive control.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of the displacement along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the linear portion 616a, and is displaced as it is to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616.

Secondly, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (angle maintaining portion 9616c and connecting portion 9616d), the rotating member 620 is at the stage where the axis O1 is arranged at the connecting portion of the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. The drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is driven and controlled so as to stop or decelerate in the middle, and then the drive motor 631 is driven and controlled again in the same direction.

In this case, since the inertia of the displacement along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the linear portion 616a is reduced, the displacement resistance is small when selecting whether the axis O1 displaces the left path or the right path. The side is chosen.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the size of the angle θ is maintained, so that the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that rotates in mesh with the rotating member 620 or the intermediate gear 644 It is not necessary to transmit the driving force to the member on the downstream side. That is, since the displacement resistance is reduced by that amount, the axis O1 can be brought into the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the drive control in the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, the drive motor 631 is controlled to select the path in which the axis O1 is displaced depending on whether the drive motor 631 is stopped or not stopped in the middle. be able to.

In the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in the diagonally upper right direction, so that it is unlikely that the axis O1 is displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d. , The axis O1 can be displaced ascending along the curved portion 616b.

In the present embodiment, the connecting portion between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at an intermediate position of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b. It is formed as an upper left inclined surface arranged on the upper right side of the arranged axis O1.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced upward (bounce back) along the circle centered on the circular through hole 624 in a state where the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball once flows down to the front side by the sorting device 300 and then flows down to the rear side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is possible to secure the time required for the ball to flow down by forming a deceleration convex portion for decelerating the ball and bending the path a plurality of times without forming a portion that flows down to the front side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the flow of the ball is blocked by contact. Any shape that can be used will do. For example, it may be formed in an inclined plane shape, or it may be formed so that a large number of fine protrusions are projected from the plane so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding sphere.

In the first embodiment, when the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the distribution device 300, the case where the ball flows down the flow path constituents 334 to 336 in order has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left and right central portions of the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball may be formed so as to be able to directly flow into the third flow path constituent portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when the balls enter one by one, the balls do not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a, the balls can pass through the opening. Is also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path component 335. Further, in this case, the order of the first flow path constituent unit 334 and the second flow path constituent unit 335 may be reversed. That is, when entering the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the flow in the left-right direction, or immediately after the flow in the front-rear direction (flow toward the front side). There may be a branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

In the first embodiment, the flow path direction and inclination of each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336 have been described as a feature of the distribution device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of the daily “nekase”.

Nekase means that the pachinko machine 10 is not installed in a vertical position, but is installed in a state of being tilted in the front-rear direction. Normally, the pachinko machine is installed in a posture in which it falls backward about once (quarters and five squares). Considering the installation angle of about 1 degree as compared with the above description of the distribution device 300 alone (in a state without skein), the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front-rear direction The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the distribution device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path component 334 is tilted downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path component 336 is lowered by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although it is designed to be inclined, when the installation angle is also examined, both the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 also form a flow path that is inclined downward by 6 degrees. .. On the other hand, since the second flow path constituent portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is not easily affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, with respect to the flow of the sphere in the distribution device 300, the acceleration of the sphere in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 is the same, and the acceleration is slightly increased in the second flow path component 335. It becomes smaller. Therefore, since the flow speed of the ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335. Further, since the first flow path configuration unit 334 is still shorter than the third flow path configuration unit 336, the first flow path configuration unit 334 is shorter than the third flow path configuration unit 336. Can be passed between.

As described above, the flow of the sphere inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the slingshot of the pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each of the flow path constituents 334 and 336 is made smaller than the angle of the skein (about 1 degree), the flow direction of the sphere in the flow path constituents 334 and 336 changes depending on the quality of the skein (angle setting). It is necessary to set the tilt angle as a larger angle than the angle of the skein because it will be (reversed).

Further, in the configuration in which the flow of the sphere inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction and the flow path is visible, the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the flow path is slightly different. There is a possibility that the degree of sneaking of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped. If you dare to grasp the degree of sneaking, you can make the flow path of the sorting device 300 easy to see.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member around the front side of each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336 so that the degree of "sneaking" is not grasped from the slight difference in the flow speed of the sphere. It is arranged so as to surround 162, and is arranged so as to cover the variable winning device 65 on the upper side, and is configured to deteriorate visibility on the light diffusion processed surface 340 on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is deteriorated except for the normal player's line of sight (a range of about 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). As a result, it is possible to avoid grasping the degree of "sneaking" of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow velocities of the spheres flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336.

In the first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is larger than the inclination of the third flow path component 336 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the relationship of this inclination may be reversed, or the same inclination may be configured.

Further, although each of the flow path constituent units 334 to 336 has been described as having a linear flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a meandering flow path shape or a stepwise bending flow path shape.

Further, the flow path is configured to be bent at a right angle at the connection points of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, a crune may be adopted as each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336.

In the first embodiment, the case where the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path component 336 is designed to be 0.3 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path constituent unit 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even when the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path component 336 is moved to the downstream side thereof. Can function as a blindfold for a sphere flowing down the third flow path constituent unit 336.

In the first embodiment, the case where the flow time of the sphere is secured by securing the path lengths of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, ridges formed in a long direction intersecting the flow direction of the game ball from both inner walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370 are provided, and the ridges are made to collide with the game ball. It may be configured to decelerate the ball. As a result, it is possible to secure the flow time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The ridges for deceleration may be evenly arranged in the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335 do not form a ridge, and the ridge is formed only in the third flow path component 336, so that the third flow path component 336 The sphere can be configured to slowly flow down the third flow path component 336 while allowing the sphere to reach the sphere quickly.

Further, the projecting direction of the ridges may be a direction in which the protrusions are alternately projected from the left-right direction to the inside of the path along the flow path of the sphere, or are projected upward from the lower side at a predetermined interval. It may be in the same direction.

In the case of projecting from the left-right direction, since the load applied to the sphere from the ridge has a component in the left-right direction, it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the sphere is not erroneously guided by the normal detection sensor SE12 due to this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, the load from the ridge is directed toward the partition plate portion 338 side instead of the normal detection sensor SE12 side by projecting from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inside. By doing so, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from being accidentally guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of projecting from the lower side to the upper side, the projectile itself may function as a blindfold for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position in consideration of the player's line of sight. ..

The ridge may be formed so as to be movable. In this case, the flow of the ball may be stopped in the out state, and the flow of the ball may be restarted in the case of the sinking state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded by a ball flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be arranged in front of the sorting device 300, and the decorative member may blindfold the flow path constituents 334 to 336. This decorative member may be driven or may be operated by the weight of a sphere.

Further, when the ball is blindfolded, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the front side. For example, when a mirror is arranged on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized by utilizing the reflection of the mirror, a sphere is arranged between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If it is done, the blindfold function can be generated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be arranged behind the game area such as the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning opening 63 may be blindfolded. It may be a thing.

In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path constituents 334 to 336 are formed from a flow path that is linear and can guide the spheres one by one has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, it may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur, or a ball may easily stay in a place where the flow path width is large or small and the flow path width is large. It may be configured.

In the first embodiment, the case where the effect of the blindfold is generated by the ball toward the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging balls that have entered the other winning openings 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect on the front side). The slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and the balls arranged in the discharge path.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (front side) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes balls is arranged on the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls that flow to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls flow. The sphere may flow toward the second flow path component 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be displaced by the weight of the sphere, may be driven by a drive device to operate constantly from the opening and closing of the opening / closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a constant pattern from the power-on of the pachinko machine. It may be controlled as follows.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of incoming ball changes, the ball may be controlled to flow toward the second flow path component 335 side. For example, when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a and there is a ball (excess winning) exceeding the count number (10 pieces / round), the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path component 335 side. You may. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess prize balls paid out, and the player can grasp the additional profit to be obtained at an early stage. In this case, the structure of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or omitted.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if there is a ball entering when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full tank), The sphere may be configured to flow toward the second flow path component 335 side. In this case, by visually recognizing the ball flowing on the side of the second flow path constituent portion 335, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the structure of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or omitted.

When the displacement operation is performed by the weight of the sphere, the predetermined operation may be repeated every time the sphere arrives, or the operation may be configured to be different depending on the number of spheres to be reached. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path component 335 side, and when two or more balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a, it does not flow. The sphere may flow toward the second flow path component 335 side. The reverse is also possible.

Further, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensor SE1 arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, when the flow time of the ball from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-mentioned distribution mechanism, several balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are allowed to flow down to the second flow path component 335 side, and the subsequent balls are the second. It may be configured so that it discharges without passing through the flow path component 335. As a result, it is not necessary to wait for the ball of the count number to flow down the flow path constituents 334 to 336, so that the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution device 300 is arranged under the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is flown toward the front side near the lower end of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path constituents 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or viewed from the front. It may be configured to be arranged on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for visually recognizing the sphere flowing down the sorting device 300 can be set to the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player by the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can confirm the display and obtain the profit of either magnitude. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not it was acquired.

Further, the case where the sphere rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in the front view with respect to the sphere rolling on the third flow path component 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the spheres that roll on the inner rail 61 do not shift vertically in front view with reference to the spheres that roll on the third flow path component 336, and are configured so that they can be visually recognized as overlapping. Is also good. In this case, not only the sphere that has entered the distribution device 300 but also the sphere that rolls on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the sphere that flows down the third flow path component 336.

In the first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, a case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a cannot reach has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position after 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be entered into the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows so as to follow the front flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed will normally enter the through hole of the detection sensor SE12.

Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the front-flowing ball, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the front-flowing ball switches (downward) toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 to the trailing ball. Being hidden makes it invisible. Moreover, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, it is considered that the player thinks that the ball has not entered the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, the display effect of the time saving state and the probability change state is similarly maintained so that the player's expectation is maintained. It is possible to improve the effect of the display effect on various gaming machines.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not normally flow to the detection sensor SE12 side only by the load due to the collision has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 is configured so that the velocity and rotation of the sphere until being guided by the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured by a plurality of types (for example, a crune). (Increase the degree of freedom in the flow direction of the sphere by arranging or widening the path width), depending on the speed and rotation of the sphere, only the load due to the collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 It may be configured so that it can be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of each of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be projected from the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation pattern Y in consideration of the possibility of being hidden by a sphere has been described as the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370, but the operation timing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at a timing hidden by a sphere may be interwoven.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed depending on the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width and length of the guide slot 616 to form the outer phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using the magnetic force or the urging force of the coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 is configured to be bent at an intermediate position, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent a plurality of times. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of positions where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the magnitude of the change amount of the angle θ during the rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so that a range in which the size of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be partially formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the guide elongated hole 616 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide elongated holes 616 through which the axis O1 can move are formed, and the axis O1 can be moved by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that can be switched by contacting the rotating member 620). The guide slot 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the first effect surface 661a is directed to the front diagonally left side in a state where the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the effect surface may be configured to face diagonally forward to the right while being arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or may be arranged on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81. The production surface may be configured to face diagonally upward (lower) forward.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is configured to be arranged on the base end side of the displacement, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the member that is linearly displaced may be arranged on the base end side of the displacement. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the linearly moving member preferably functions to secure the rotation angles of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For example, when the laterally sliding member is fixed to the driving side of the supported member 640, the angle affecting the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1 or the like). Limited to. On the other hand, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below the horizontal (angle b1 and the like) can be used. Regardless of this preferred effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and the three side surfaces intersecting at right angles are decorated, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and may be configured so that stop control is possible with each side surface facing the front side.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged. In this case, the display that can be easily integrated with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 can be easily switched.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can intersect at a right angle has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the first embodiment, the case where the second operation unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is arranged near the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the magnet is configured to generate an attractive force with the magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, and this attractive force is generated. May be more likely to occur in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, it may be formed from a bent shape such as a wavy shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, also when the coil spring CS2 is used, the urging force is not limited to the one in which the urging force is generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and the urging force may be generated in response to the extensional displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the umbrella tooth portion 783c and the umbrella tooth member 785c until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, a permissible value may be provided for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft rod and the support cylinder that supports the shaft rod.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lining member 787 rises from the bottom and enters the front side from the rear end portion of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a mode in which it overhangs to the front side by a downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be crossed from the bottom to the front, or may be projected from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14) to the front side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not aligned and visually recognized due to the rotation of the lining member 787 in the opposite direction has been described, but the discriminating power is lowered, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, instead of rotating the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 while facing the front side, the mode may rotate while facing the left and right outside. Further, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation may be configured to be rotated by shifting the rotation angle.

In the first embodiment, the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member are commonly used in the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 by utilizing the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850). It is configured to rotate (reverse) the 834, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 in a single stroke, and a projecting piece projecting from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member depends on the design of the groove. The rotation timing of 834 can be specified.

In the first embodiment, a case will be described in which control is performed so that it is determined that the switching rotation operation is switched to the integrated rotation operation by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from the state in which the detected unit 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detected unit 844 is not arranged on the detection sensor 813, by detecting that the detected unit 844 has entered the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation is performed. It may be determined that the operation has been switched to the integrated rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are configured to be different in some places has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that causes viscous resistance may be provided. In the case of the oil damper, resistance always continues to be generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, so that the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operation mode is switched to the integrated rotation operation. It is possible to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integrated rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal rod 832 may reflect the light. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. When the 833 is arranged on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, the optical LD1 can be reflected by exposing the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. Is.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path component 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction, or may be configured to incline downward to the left-right inward. You may. Compared to the latter, the former can reduce the momentum of the sphere toward the second flow path component 335.

Further, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path component 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the front-rear direction, or may be inclined downward toward the rear. It may be configured as. Compared to the latter, the former can reduce the momentum of the sphere to the third flow path component 336.

Further, the case where the rolling surface (bottom surface) is inclined downward in the left-right direction with respect to the third flow path constituent portion 336 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path constituent unit 336 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction. In this case, since the degree to which the ball is urged toward the partition plate portion 338 is reduced, the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or rubbing with the ball can be kept low.

In the first embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d is arranged outside the locus of the sphere passing through the branch portion has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d may be configured to pass inside the locus of the sphere passing through the branch portion (configured by lowering the arrangement position). In this case, when the outer light emitting means 351d is lit, the sphere passing through the branch portion overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d, so that the light can be configured to be reflected to the back side. The state where the light diffusion processed surface 333b is not reached (dark state) can be set.

That is, the lighting of the outer light emitting means 351d remains continuous, and the flow mode of the sphere at the branching point and the light diffusing processed surface illuminated by the light diffused from the light diffusing processed surface 333b (and the light diffusing processed surface 333b). It can be associated with the light and darkness of 314c, 340). Since each light diffusion processed surface 314c, 333b, 340 has a larger area (projected area) from the player's point of view than the sphere, the player can easily grasp the flow mode of the sphere at the branch point. ..

In the first embodiment, the timing of controlling the lighting of the light emitting means 351 during the jackpot game has been described, but the timing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emission may be controlled due to the detection of winning in the winning openings 63, 64, 140, etc., or the light emission may be controlled due to the input operation of the frame button 22. However, it may be emitted due to the occurrence of winnings exceeding the specified number (the number of winnings that regulates the end of the round game of the jackpot game, the maximum number of holdings of fluctuations based on the winning balls of the winning openings 64 and 140). It may be controlled.

In the first embodiment, when the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, so that the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is confirmed. Therefore, the case where the quality of the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined at the manufacturing stage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor for detecting the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, although it did not appear at the manufacturing stage, when the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is displaced due to repeated operation or the influence of some external force, the occurrence of the displacement is caused by the operation of the slide displacement member 370. It can be judged by the defect.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the flow direction of the sphere at the branching point BP1 is a linear displacement in the front-rear direction, but the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotary motion (for example, a roulette type) may be used, or a shape portion (for example, a funnel-shaped crune) that makes the flow of the sphere irregular may be arranged so that the sphere can flow in a plurality of directions. good.

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is adopted as a device for switching whether the sphere passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but the device is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning opening (winning openings 64, 140), may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, or other winning openings. Alternatively, it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the winning area.

In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution device 300 is arranged in the lower corner of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distribution device 300 may be arranged at the upper corner of the game area (for example, above the center frame 86) or at the left and right corners (left and right outside of the left and right edges of the center frame 86). It may be arranged in the central side part of the game area. For example, when it is arranged in the upper corner of the game area, the line of sight of the player looking at the distribution device 300 is inclined diagonally upward with respect to the horizontal plane. The downstream sphere can be configured to hide the upstream sphere.

Further, the structures of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 may be configured to be inclined in the opposite directions, and the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged in the vicinity of the fixed member 161.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the window portion 162d is designed from the shape of the flow path constituent portions 335 and 336 in the front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313 has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the shape may be such that the slide displacement member 370 (only) can be visually recognized from the player's point of view (diagonally downward view), or the shape may be such that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Further, the shape may be such that one of the front position and the rear position of the slide displacement member 370 is visible and the other is invisible.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of balls entering one flow path can be reduced (dispersing the incoming balls) by forming a pair of left and right flow path constituents 334 to 336 so as not to merge. The slide displacement member 370 can switch any path of the sphere that has passed through the respective flow paths, while causing an action that can easily avoid the ball clogging.

In this respect, the shape of the window portion 162d is such that only one of the pair of left and right slide displacement members 370 (for example, the ball guide portion 371b and the upper protrusion portion 376) can be visually recognized and the other cannot be visually recognized. It may be in shape. In this case, since the player can predict the flow path of the ball on the side that cannot be visually recognized, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b is set to the rear direction (forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336). The case where the player can be made to appear as if the ball is temporarily stopped by suppressing the rotation of the ball in the forward rotation direction by sliding and suppressing the amount of rotation in the state immediately before the ball falls has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured as the forward direction (the direction opposite to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336).

That is, the ball guide portion 371b is displaced forward so that the ball guide portion 371b enters the lower side of the third flow path constituent portion 336, whereby the probability variation detection sensor SE11 can be opened. The upper projecting portion 376 is formed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is arranged so as to project toward the branch portion BP1 when the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced so that the ball does not ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the upper protrusion 376 is displaced in the reverse direction at the same timing as the displacement of the ball guide portion 371b, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 It is only necessary to secure a passage for the ball to.

In this case, since the rotation of the ball guide portion 371b in the forward rotation direction can be accelerated by sliding with the ball when the ball is displaced, the amount of rotation in the state immediately before the ball falls can be increased to increase the rotation amount of the ball. Can be made to appear to the player as if it had fallen immediately (smoothly).

In the first embodiment, in the control of the rotating member 620, the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 in consideration of the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the energization of the drive motor 631 is cut off. Therefore, the control mode is set to cut off the energization of the drive motor 631, but the control mode is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 is reduced, the drive motor 631 is slightly rotated for a short time, and then stopped. Is also good. As a result, the rotating member 620 can be reliably reached to the displacement end position (position in the effect standby state).

In the first embodiment, the case where the groove of the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operating unit 700 is formed of a straight inclined groove has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, by forming a groove having a partial curve such that it curves forward on the lower end side, the displacement of the effect device 780 is combined with the vertical slide displacement, the front-back slide displacement, and the posture displacement in the front-back direction. It can be a displacement mode.

As the shape of the groove of the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762, various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a dogleg shape (or an inverted dogleg shape) when viewed in the left-right direction, or it may be a shape curved in an S shape.

In the first embodiment, regarding the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, the start timing of the reversing operation is delayed by the magnetic force, so that the members (for example, the main body member 771 and the lining member 787, the drive motor 782 and the lining member) are delayed. Although the case of displacement so as to avoid the collision of 787) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a design method may be used in which collisions between the members are avoided by setting the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785.

In the first embodiment, the second operation unit 700 will be described in a case where the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 is arranged at a left-right position that coincides with the left-right center of the effect device 780 in the overhanging state as the upper end position. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 to the right of the center of the left and right of the effect device 780, the metal rod 702 that supports the left side of the elevating plate member 740 and the right side of the elevating plate member 740 are supported. It is possible to secure a long support position distance from the rotating arm member 720. As a result, the elevating plate member 740 can be stably supported.

In the third operation unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a portion in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are invariant in shape and are visible to the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870 and 880 are in the individually united state or in the united state. In the one-association state, the bulging portion 824a, the first lining portion 875, and the second lining portion 885 are mutually visible by making the bulging portion 824a a part (central portion) visible to the player. The case of designing the shape so as to suppress the sense of incongruity has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a display device (seg display device or liquid crystal display device) may be arranged in a positional relationship in which the display unit is arranged in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the bulging portion 824a is changed by changing the irradiation mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light emitting portion 823a, the display mode of the display unit shows the object visually recognized by the bulging portion 824a. Since it can be changed by switching, the degree of freedom of production can be improved.

Further, for example, for either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880, the shape of the lining portion 875, 885 is redesigned so as to extend to the center side of the circular shape in the combined state. The bulging portion 824a may be covered with the extended portion. In this case, since the bulging portion 824a can be hidden from being seen by the player in either the individual united state or the one-association state, the bulging portion 824a, the first lining portion 875, and the second lining are laid. The degree of limitation of the degree of freedom in design of the part 885 can be lowered.

In the first embodiment, the case where a plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are attracted by a magnetic force with respect to the third operation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the united state may be maintained by a load due to the uneven engagement, or the united state may be maintained by the urging force of the spring member.

In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operation unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but the switching rotation operation is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, by adopting an operation mode that gives momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or higher than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an operation mode for gaining momentum, for example, rotation control may be performed in the opposite direction as a preparatory operation (preliminary operation). In this case, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be rebounded, and a load can be generated in the direction in which the intermediate arm member 850 is released radially outward from the arrangement in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the adsorption due to the magnetic force.

In the first embodiment, as a device for suppressing wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, a case where the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to be displaced in the radial direction before the reversing operation has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the action line of the magnetic force can be drawn on the plane on which the metal rod 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, the diameters of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state are arranged. Even if the reversal operation occurs before the directional displacement, the magnetic force generated between the plurality of (5) decorative members 870 and 880 is generated on the same plane, so that the wobbling that occurs in the third operation unit 800 during the switching rotation operation is suppressed. can do.

In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured such that the decorative members 870 and 880 are inverted by 180 degrees, but the operation is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to coalesce again in a 120-degree reversal operation. In this case, before and after the switching rotation operation, the sides of the decorative members 870 and 880 that are visually recognized are the same, but the viewing angles of the lining portions 875 and 885 are different (for example, 60 to the right before the operation). It is possible to execute an operation effect of 60 degrees to the left after the operation.

Further, with respect to the structure of the plurality of intermediate arm members 850, for example, by configuring the lengths to be non-common and the formation range and shape of the umbrella tooth portion 854c to be non-common, 180 in the switching rotation operation. The decorative members 870 and 880 that reconstruct the united state by the reversing operation of the degree and the decorative members 870 and 880 that reconstruct the united state by the reversing operation of 120 degrees may be configured to coexist. For example, of the five decorative members 870 and 880, one decorative member 870 and 880 is configured to be inverted by 120 degrees by the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to be inverted by the switching rotation operation. It may be configured to be inverted by 180 degrees.

The angle of the reversing operation in the switching rotation operation can be arbitrarily set. The above-mentioned 180 degrees or 120 degrees may be used, 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle from 0 degrees to 360 degrees can be set.

In the first embodiment, the case where the torque limiter 866 is arranged in a pair on the left and right, above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, and in a left-right asymmetric position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left side, the right side, or the lower side of the outer rotating member 840, which may be arranged symmetrically, or the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 may be arranged. It may be arranged on the opposite side (opposite side) across the shaft.

In the first embodiment, the case where a plurality of (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured in a common shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the supported hole 854a and the guide hole 854b in which the linear motion member 833 that slides and displaces along the metal rod 832 is arranged is different, and the start timing of the slide displacement along the metal rod 832 is set to the linear motion member. You may make a difference between 833s.

For example, by changing the design so that the supported hole 854a is formed as a long hole or a hole having a large diameter and correspondingly changing the shape of the guide hole 854b, the intermediate arm member 850 is mixed, so that the linear motion in the switching rotation operation is performed. A difference can be provided in the displacement start timing of the member 833.

As a result, the decorative members 870 and 880 have different displacement timings in the radial direction from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 connected to the linear motion member 833. Therefore, the attracting portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shearing direction (diameter direction).

In this case, since the load for removing the suction can be reduced, the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be stabilized.

It is not necessary to make the displacement mode that causes the displacement in the shear direction (diameter direction) at the suction portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 to occur every time. For example, a displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction occurs when the switching rotation operation is executed from the combined state (outward route), but does not occur when the switching rotation operation leads to the combined state (return route). You may.

For example, the design of the intermediate arm member 850 is changed from the combined state (the state where the rotating tip is arranged on the rotating shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to the state where the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter positions. The displacement mode in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and the displacement mode in which the intermediate arm portion i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter positions to the combined state are different. By configuring the above, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that causes a displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) at the attraction portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1,713,778d, 813 has been described for each of the operating units 600, 700, 800, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be configured so as to arrange the extension portion 634b at a position where it can be detected, or two instead of three detection sensors 713. The following or four or more detection sensors 713 may be adopted. As the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1, a position where the extended portion 634b can be detected in the intermediate effect state or the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600 is exemplified.

Further, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be adopted, and instead of one detection sensor 813, a plurality of detection sensors 813 are arranged at positions where the detected unit 844 can be detected. It may be configured as follows. As for the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, by arranging the five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individually united state of the third operation unit 800 is five types (rotation). It can be determined in 5 modes that differ depending on the direction).

In the second embodiment, the case where the rolling of the sphere is continued regardless of the arrangement of the slide member 2420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to be the same length as the diameter of the sphere. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP, the ball can be configured to be sandwiched between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314, so that the deceleration action of the ball is strengthened. , The sphere can be easily retained.

In the second embodiment, it is not described that a ridge is formed inside the first flow path constituent portion 2334, but a ridge for decelerating the ball is provided in the first flow path constituent portion 2334. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the height of the ridges is brought into contact with either the ball riding on the slide member 2420 at the front position FP or the ball riding the slide member 2420 on the bottom surface 2334c at the time of the rear placement BP. , The height may be set so as not to come into contact with the other. In this case, the deceleration action due to the ridges can be generated in either the state of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP or the state of the rear side arrangement BP.

In the third embodiment, the case where the thin plate portion 371, the upper front projecting portion 3376b, and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c are integrally formed of the slide displacement member 3370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is arranged at the front side position and the rear side position, the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c as separate members appear and disappear in the vertical direction and abut the balls. And a state in which they do not come into contact with each other may be configured.

The front-rear arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited at all, but it is better to use the probability variation detection sensor SE11 on the rear side as in the present embodiment, which is an error in the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is possible to easily avoid winning a prize.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 and the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, these may be configured as separate members and may be configured to synchronize (interlock) with each other at the same timing. In addition, it may be configured so that it slides and displaces in the front-rear direction.

In the fourth embodiment, when the slide members 4371 and 4375 are slidably displaced at the timing when the ball passes rearward on the upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned to the front side due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, it is possible to configure so that only the ball on the slide plate 4372 is guided by the additional ball entry detection sensor when the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state. The profit that the player can obtain by entering the ball into the additional ball entry detection sensor (for example, the right obtained by entering the ball into the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is greater than the right to obtain multiple jackpots or the higher rank. The greater the acquisition of the right to shift to the probable change state, etc.), the more attention can be paid to the sphere that has passed through the third flow path component 336.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the flow path from the raised floor portion 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, in the vicinity of the raised floor portion 6342, it may be configured as a curved flow path in which the connection portion JP1 side faces rearward. As a result, both the sphere that enters the connection point JP1 from the raised floor portion 6342 and the sphere that enters the connection point JP1 from the second flow path component 335 can both have a velocity component in the rear direction, and these can be made to have a velocity component in the rear direction. It is possible to prevent backflow from occurring due to the collision.

The connection portion JP1 may be configured to be arranged at the center position on the left and right sides of the distribution device 6300. Further, the structures of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 may be configured to be inclined in the opposite directions, and the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged in the vicinity of the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the balls flow down to the front side after gathering at the connection point JP1, and it is possible to improve the attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300.

In the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 is configured as a long hole having a branch, and the axis O1 is configured to switch where in the guide slot 9616 depending on how a load is applied to the axis O1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the linear portion 616a is always configured as the elongated hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d are configured as the elongated holes. And the case where the elongated hole is closed may be configured to switch alternately. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced by an erroneous path, it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, the guide slot 9616 having a branch may be configured to include a switching valve that limits the displacement path of the axis O1 by blocking any path. In this case, while the shape of the guide slot 9616 is fixed, the displacement path of the axis O1 can be restricted by the switching valve, so that it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced by an erroneous path. It is possible to prevent the member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Hereinafter, control examples of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 87, as a first control example, a control example when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, FIG. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 120 is a front view region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 121 is a schematic view schematically showing the structure of the provided variable winning device 65, and FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 118) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 119) having entry ports 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) that launches a ball into the front region (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a in the front region of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) that guides the vehicle to is installed. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 118) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 21) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 119) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 119) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off. That is, in this control example, the firing means for firing the ball into the game area formed on the game board 13 and the firing in which the firing intensity is changed based on the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51. It has a strength variable means. As a result, the player can execute the ball firing action using the firing means and the firing intensity variable action of varying the firing intensity of the ball simply by operating the operation handle 51. Therefore, among the game areas formed on the game board 13, the operation of firing a ball toward a specific game area can be executed with one hand, and the game can be executed without imposing an excessive burden on the player. be able to.

In this control example, the firing intensity is configured to be variable based on the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, but the firing intensity is not limited to this, and for example, the player can select the firing intensity. A launch intensity selection button may be provided so that the launch means launches a ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation result (selection result) of the launch intensity selection button.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 119, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general inserts. The ball mouth 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back surface side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 118). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entry port 63, the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game is played. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 118) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 119.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 118) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 119) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 119) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game region) of the game board 13 made of transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a first symbol display device 37 including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters (wins) the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640. That is, the first symbol display device 37 has a first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and a ball at the second ball entry port 640. This is a display means for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball is entered. In this control example, since the pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is used, the first symbol display device 37 uses two types of special symbol lottery (1st special symbol). The result of the special symbol lottery) is displayed. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having only one type of special symbol (first special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 responds to one type of special symbol. A display area may be provided.

Further, the first symbol display device 37 uses an LED to indicate which of the current gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, probabilistic state) of the pachinko machine 10 is by a lighting state, or a special symbol (first symbol). Whether or not the symbol) is changing (during dynamic display to stop and display the combination of symbols to show the lottery result) is indicated by the lighting state, and the stopped symbol corresponds to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Whether it is a symbol or a symbol corresponding to an unfavorable jackpot or a missed symbol is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lit state that the fluctuation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this control example, various gaming states are notified by a combination of emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration is sufficient as long as the player can identify various gaming states. For example, various gaming states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which the light emitting means is turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of a special symbol) is performed when a ball is entered (winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, a winning or not judgment (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot game in which the player is in a privileged gaming state is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state where the ball can be easily won, and by making the specific winning opening 65a win the ball, many winning balls are awarded for a short period of time. The game that can be acquired at is executed. This jackpot game is executed (when) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and is executed for an opening period (for example, 1 second) of a predetermined time (specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65). A predetermined period (a period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult for a ball to enter 65a), a round game period in which an open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. From the period (for example, 0.5 seconds), the interval period in which the closed state is set, and the ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. The jackpot game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the ball is set at the timing when the specific winning opening 65a is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing in any direction, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. Further, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the jackpot game this time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the end of the last round game, so that after the jackpot game is completed. Since it is possible to prepare for launching the ball in an arbitrary direction for the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, a plurality of types of jackpot games can be executed, and the number of round games executed during the jackpot game (number of rounds) according to the type of jackpot won. ) And the game state set after the jackpot game is completed are configured to be different. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the presence or absence of the jackpot winning by the lottery of the special symbol, but also in the winning jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning.

In addition, regarding the length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the game status set at the time of winning the jackpot and the winning Different lengths may be set according to the type of jackpot. For example, when a jackpot is won in which a game content different from the game content at the time of winning the jackpot is set as the game content executed after the jackpot game is completed. Is set so that the ending period of the jackpot game (for example, 10 seconds) is longer than the ending period of other jackpot games (for example, 2 seconds), and the player is asked to play during the ending period. It is preferable to configure the effect to guide the game contents to be executed after the big hit game in advance. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in which the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game is the same, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot is set to that of another jackpot game. It is preferable to set it so that it is shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). As a result, the player can be made to play the game efficiently.

Further, without using a configuration for actually discriminating between the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game is completed, for example, based on the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the game state to be set after the jackpot game is completed may be defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance according to the defined contents.

Although a specific description will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, two states (a high probability state of the special symbol and a low probability state of the special symbol) in which the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is different, and the following will be described. Two states (a high-probability state of a normal symbol and a low-probability state of a normal symbol) having different probabilities of winning in a lottery of a normal symbol are combined, and three types of game states can be set. Specifically, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol), the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol), and the probabilistic state (high of the special symbol). Probability state, high probability state of normal symbol) can be set. Since both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are configured so that the winning is easier in the high probability state than in the low probability state, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is used. Of the multiple game states that can be set, the probability change state becomes the game state in which it is easier to win a big hit in the special symbol lottery than the other game states, and the probability change state and the time saving state are more normal than the other game states. It will be in a game state where it is easy to win in the symbol lottery.

In addition, when a winner is won in the ordinary symbol lottery, a winning game (a game per ordinary symbol) that facilitates execution of the special symbol lottery is executed. Specifically, the electric accessory 640 attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened, and a game per game is executed in which a state in which a ball can be easily entered into the second ball entry port 640 is provided. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the probability variation state and the time saving state, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the gaming state is easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the other gaming states. Further, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the low probability of the normal symbol is set as the period (dynamic display period) from the execution of the special symbol lottery to the stop display of the lottery result. It is configured so that a shorter period can be set more easily than when the state is set. Therefore, when the odd state and the time saving state, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter period of time than the other gaming states, so that a new special symbol can be executed. It will be in a gaming state where it is easy to execute the lottery.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and only when the ball passes through the specific region during the jackpot game. It is configured so that a high probability state of a special symbol can be set after the jackpot game is completed. Then, depending on the winning jackpot type, a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during the jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (disadvantageous jackpot game). And are configured to be feasible. Hereinafter, the advantageous jackpot game, that is, the jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during the jackpot game is referred to as a probabilistic jackpot game, and the jackpot in which the probabilistic jackpot game is executed is referred to as a probabilistic jackpot. Further, a disadvantageous jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which the ball does not easily pass through a specific area during the jackpot game is called a normal jackpot game, and a jackpot in which a normal jackpot game is executed is called a normal jackpot.

In this control example, if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, it is determined that the player is out of the game, and the player is not given a privilege. However, the lottery is not limited to this, for example, the jackpot lottery. In some cases where it is determined that the lottery result is not the above-mentioned jackpot, the player is given less privilege than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the privilege of opening the variable winning device 65 for only one round). It may be configured so that the winning game is executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the jackpot type. The design corresponding to is shown.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 119. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general entry ports 63a are provided so that 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display of a special symbol executed by the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays a variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display a normal symbol (second symbol) triggered by passing is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230 (a)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9". These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of this control example, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 122 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbol sz is formed by using a different kind of character (fish or the like) for each identification information imitating a number. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot game occurs after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol sequence Z1 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The columns Z2 and the lower symbol column Z3 are configured such that the symbol columns are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) fz that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is also formed between the main symbols sz. In FIG. 122 (b), a blank symbol (sub symbol) fz is displayed using a symbol imitating a triangle.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the oblique direction. With each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stopped and displayed, the third symbol (main symbol sz) is aligned on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in this control example, the same combination of main symbols). If stopped, the jackpot video will be displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 122 (a), in this control example, since each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the third symbol display device. Until all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol string (in this control example, the middle symbol string V2) is stopped and displayed.

In this control example, among the above-mentioned three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3), a specific symbol row (symbol row Z2), that is, a symbol row in which the variation display is stopped and displayed at the end among the plurality of symbol rows. On the other hand, the number of main symbols is larger than that of other symbol rows. Specifically, the number of main symbols with a specific number (for example, the number "4") is larger than that of other symbol sequences. As a result, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in the reach state, the jackpot symbol passing on the effective line (imitation of the specific number) is compared with the case where the identification information imitating a specific number is in the reach state. Since the number of identification information) can be increased, it is possible to visually predict that the player is expected to win a big hit.

The mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating by making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may try to do so. Further, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again during the period during which the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (b). As shown in FIG. 122 (b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the front view. This small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1), or the fourth symbol (special figure 2) for showing the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2). The special figure 2 fourth symbol) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

Further, the small display area Dm2 is an area in which identification information for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) is displayed. The fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the normal figure) for showing the lottery status of the figure) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle mark and a cross mark, and the fourth symbol is shown in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. Is displayed in a variable manner (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 122 (b)) to show the situation in which the special symbol is fluctuating, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (FIG. (Refer to the small display area Dm2 of 122 (b)), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol and a plurality of colors. By using the display mode indicating that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode in which the numbers and colors are changed, and the display mode indicating the specific symbol or color is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It may be configured to indicate.

Further, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is set to the main display area Dm. An example is shown in which the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which the fourth symbol of the normal symbol is displayed is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm on the upper left side. However, the position and size of the fourth symbol display area may be changed according to the effect mode of the variation effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the area in which the variation effect is executed from being limited by the fourth symbol display area and the fourth symbol display area in the normal diagram, and the effect from being lowered. .. In this case, the fourth symbol display area and the fourth symbol display area of the normal diagram are deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80 is removed. It may be configured to execute the variation display of the fourth symbol.

As shown in FIG. 122A, sub-display areas Ds are formed below the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (held storage) are displayed. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is to execute a new special symbol lottery when the first symbol display device 37 is performing variable display or when a winning game is being executed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 in a state where the ball cannot be inserted, the number of times the ball enters is held up to four times for each entrance. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls stored for the ball entering the first entry port 64 is four, and is stored for the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640. Since the maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the sub-display area Ds is partitioned into the executing area Ds1a and the waiting area Ds1b. The waiting area Ds1b is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 corresponding to the upper limit number (8) that can be reserved and stored. It is displayed in order from the left. Then, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is acquired, the reserved symbol is displayed on the pedestal having the lowest number on which the reserved symbol is not displayed among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8.

In the example shown in FIG. 122 (b), four reserved balls of the first special symbol are held and stored, and the reserved balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved) are stored in the waiting area Ds1b. Four reserved symbols (hz1 to hz4) in a display mode (white circles) corresponding to the sphere) are displayed on the first pedestal hr1 to the fourth pedestal hr4.

The executing area Ds1a is a display area in which the reserved symbol displayed in response to the currently executing special symbol fluctuation is shifted and displayed, and the executing pending symbol hz0 is displayed on the executing pedestal hr0. NS. That is, when a new special symbol change is started, the reserved symbol hz1 displayed on the pedestal hr1 of the waiting region Ds1b is shifted to the pedestal hr0 of the executing region Ds1a and displayed. With this configuration, for example, when a notice effect (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol) indicating the expectation of winning a big hit is executed for the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily determine that the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol on which the advance notice effect is executed is being executed.

In addition, by making it possible to display the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change during execution, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol is also executed for the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change during execution. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the marking mode of the reserved symbol is changed for a longer period of time than when the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol change during execution is not displayed.

In this control example, depending on the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, the displayed reserved symbol indicates the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved symbol). It is configured so that the player can identify whether it is a reserved symbol indicating a reserved ball of the second special symbol (special diagram 2 reserved symbol), and the special diagram 1 reserved symbol is marked with a white circle (FIG. 122). (B)), the special figure 2 reserved symbol is displayed by a black circle (see FIG. 124 (a)). As a result, the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol, so that the ball can be entered into the first entry slot 64 based on the display content of the reserved symbol. It is possible to facilitate the determination of whether or not to continue the game.

As shown in FIG. 122 (b), in this control example, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special symbol is displayed, and the pedestal with the youngest number (the pedestal with the youngest number is It is configured to execute a special symbol lottery using a reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed on the pedestal hr1). That is, the reserved symbols are displayed in the order in which they are used in the special symbol lottery, but the reserved symbols are not limited to this, for example, the reserved symbols are displayed in the order in which the reserved balls are acquired, and the special symbols are displayed for each reserved symbol. It may be configured to include digestion order information to indicate the order used in the lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which reserved ball corresponds to which reserved ball acquired at which timing.

Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), a maximum of eight reserved symbols can be displayed side by side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display area of the special figure 1 reserved symbol is not limited to this. And the display area of the special figure 2 reserved symbol may be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, for example, when a gaming state (normal state) in which it is difficult to obtain the special figure 2 hold is set, the display area of the special figure 1 hold symbol is displayed more conspicuously than the display area of the special figure 2 hold symbol. However, when the game state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the special figure 2 hold is easily acquired is set, the display area of the special figure 2 hold symbol is displayed more conspicuously than the display area of the special figure 1 hold symbol. It may be configured to do so.

In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical to the left and right, and the right-handed game and the left-handed game are performed. Since it is configured so that the same game result is given in some cases, it is not displayed, but for example, depending on the set game state, the right-handed game is more than the left-handed game. If the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting a case where the game method is more advantageous and a case where the left-handed game is more advantageous than the right-handed game, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed. , The guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) may be displayed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be launched by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

To explain in more detail, as a guidance display area, a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game, and letting the player perform a left-handed game. It is preferable to configure the display mode of "left-handed" to guide the player, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, for example, a probabilistic state. , It is displayed during the time saving state and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" may be configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is preferable to configure so that the display mode of is displayed. In addition, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in each of the control examples described above may be configured to be appropriately displayable.

<About the production content of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 131, characteristic effect contents among various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example will be described. do. First, with reference to FIG. 123 (a), the display screen when the reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed when the reach state is reached in the normal state (normal state). In this control example, the third symbol that is variablely displayed is stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and is a big hit at any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122 (a)). When the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating the winning, the reach state is reached, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the upper symbol row Z1 as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot winning. The effective line in which the lower symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is set as the reach effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be variablely displayed. Then, after the reach state is reached, one low speed (main symbol (third symbol imitating a number)) that the player can visually recognize each identification information (third symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2 shifts. The time required for this is changed at a speed of about 0.5 seconds).

As described above, in this control example, the middle symbol string has 10 main symbols (1 main symbol with the numbers "1" to "3", "5" to "9", and "4". Since there are two main symbols with the number (2), if the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a fluctuating manner at a low speed, the time required to make one round is 5 seconds (0.5 ×). 10). Then, the middle symbol row Z2, which is variablely displayed at a low speed, is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to be variable to a different production mode (reach mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), which third symbol (in FIG. 123 (a), the identification information imitating "9" (third symbol imitating a crab)) is in the reach state. Even in the case of, the identification information (third symbol imitating an octopus) that imitates the number "1" is the first in the middle symbol string Z2 (see FIG. 122 (a)) that is variablely displayed during reach. It is configured to execute a low-speed fluctuation display so that it can be visually recognized.

In addition, in this control example, the effect mode of the variation effect is changed according to the variation mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state, for example, after the reach state is reached. Different production modes (reach mode) at the timing when the symbol sequence Z2 makes one lap (5 seconds after the low-speed fluctuation display is executed) and at the timing when the symbol sequence Z2 makes two laps (10 seconds after the low-speed fluctuation display is executed). It is configured so that it can be changed to. Therefore, as in this control example, by unifying the identification information of the middle symbol string Z2 that is first visible after the reach state is reached, a different effect mode (reach mode) is given to the player at what timing. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it is variable to.

In this control example, the timing of changing to a different production mode (reach mode) is set to the timing of one round or two rounds of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach state is reached, but the timing is not limited to this. For example, from the timing when the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information whose reach is stopped) passes through the reach effective line, which is a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached, and the identification information which is a combination indicating a jackpot. It may be configured so that the misaligned identification information can be changed to a different effect mode (reach mode) at the timing of passing through the reach effective line. In this way, the game is configured so that the specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information whose reach is stopped can be changed to a different production mode (reach mode) based on passing through the reach effective line. It is possible to give a person a relationship between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a combination that is a big hit and the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to a different effect mode (reach mode). Specifically, when the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information whose reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached, passes through the reach effective line, the effect mode (reach mode) is changed. When it is configured to be variable, the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed for the player in a combination that is a big hit and the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is variable to a different production mode (reach mode) are overlapped. Therefore, when the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information whose reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating a big hit, approaches the reach effective line, the player is given a great expectation and pays close attention to the fluctuation effect. Can be made to.

Here, in this control example, as described above, a specific identification state (third symbol imitating the number "1") can be visually recognized first regardless of which third symbol reaches the reach state. Since the middle symbol string Z2 is configured to be displayed in a low-speed fluctuation so as to be, for example, the combination of the third symbol to be finally stopped and displayed is shifted by one type from the combination of the third symbol which is a big hit. In the case of a combination (out of one reach frame) (when the final stop display mode is determined in advance), from the reach state until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed (the final stop display mode is the stop display). There is a new problem that the period (until it is done) differs depending on the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state.

Specifically, when the third symbol imitating the number "1" is in the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in low speed fluctuation display. Therefore, in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 when the reach is out of one frame as the final stop display mode, 5.5 seconds (1st lap) and 10.5 seconds (2nd lap) after the reach state is reached. In short, when the third symbol imitating the number "6" is in the reach state, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in low speed fluctuation display. As the final stop display mode, it takes 8 seconds (1st lap) and 13 seconds (2nd lap) after the reach state is reached in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 when the reach is out of one frame.

Therefore, in order to establish the reach state with the third symbol of a different type in the fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation time is set, the timing of the reach state is set by back calculation from the stop display timing of the third symbol. It was necessary to execute the process. That is, there is a problem that the non-uniform reach effect that changes according to the type of the third symbol in which the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach state is in the reach state is executed, and the effect is reduced. rice field.

On the other hand, in this control example, with the execution of the lottery of the special symbol, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is determined by the main control device 110 by the lottery, and the determined variation. The time is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a fluctuation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the variation display effect of the effect period corresponding to the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, synchronizes with the variation display of the first symbol, and synchronizes with the variation display effect of the third symbol. Is configured to execute. The fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic fluctuation time and an addition time command indicating the fluctuation time to be added, and the fluctuation included in the addition time command. It is configured to change the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state based on the length of time. More specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined, the command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and the command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the addition time. NS. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 37 seconds is determined, the command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and the command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the addition time. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify that the variation type is 7 seconds longer than the basic time according to the notification content of the addition time command. As a result, the type of the third symbol to be in the reach state can be set only by checking the content of the addition time command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 (b) to 126, the contents of the effect related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 123 (b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the winning normal symbol variation in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed during the execution of the winning normal symbol variation in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the normal symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. .. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric accessory 640 that is opened in the game per normal figure is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Is executed to notify the player that the is formed (indicated by six lines in the figure). In the situation shown in FIG. 123 (b), since the winning normal symbol change is being executed, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is a display imitating the closed electric accessory 640. It is an aspect. With this configuration, the player will soon be able to play the game per game. It is possible to predict that, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in FIG. 123 (b), the execution of the winning normal symbol change is taken as an example, but a part of the normal symbol change in which the lottery result is out of order (for example, the out-of-order change) is explained. A small display area Dm3 is formed with a probability of 1/100 of the above, and an effect of displaying an icon imitating an electric accessory 640 (gase effect) is executed. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears by the time the normal symbol fluctuation (disengagement fluctuation) being executed is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, even if the player is not won in the normal symbol lottery, the effect display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed. It is possible to play a game while expecting it to be played. Further, in FIG. 123 (b), an example of an effect suggesting the start of a game per normal figure by displaying an icon imitating an electric accessory 640 in the small display area Dm3 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , A comment suggesting the start of the game per icon may be displayed in a part of the sub-display area Ds or the main display area Dm.

Further, the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm may be used to suggest the start of the game per normal figure. In this case, only when the special symbol variation is executed while the normal symbol variation is executed, the effect suggesting that the game per normal symbol is executed is executed. Therefore, for example, the special symbol lottery The result of the normal symbol lottery is suggested in advance to the player who passes the ball through the through gate 67, which is easier to enter the ball than the first ball entrance 64, which is the execution trigger, and executes only the normal symbol lottery. There is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege (execution of an effect that suggests the result of the ordinary symbol lottery in advance) to a player who is performing a normal game in which both the special symbol variation and the ordinary symbol variation are executed. Similarly, the effect using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example is set as an execution condition that the special symbol variation is executed or the game of firing the ball is continuously executed. You may.

In addition, depending on the content of the game being played, the expectation of the suggestion effect suggesting the start of the game per normal figure may be different. For example, when the game is played normally. , When a suggestion effect suggesting the start of a game per game is executed, the game per game is executed at a rate of almost 100%, and only the normal symbol lottery is executed without executing the special symbol lottery (a game in which only the normal symbol lottery is executed. If you are playing a stop-and-go game, that is, if you are not playing a normal game, even if a suggestion effect that suggests the start of the game is executed, only about 10% of the game will hit the game. It may be configured so that the game is not executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the stop-and-shoot game to grasp the start timing of the game per normal figure based on the suggested effect to be executed, and to impose a penalty. Can be done.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, a maximum of 4 lottery rights for ordinary symbols can be held, and when a new lottery right (general figure hold) is acquired, the acquired lottery right is used. The result of the ordinary symbol lottery that was used can be determined in advance. Then, a command (information) indicating the pre-determination result can be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the stage before the normal symbol change that wins the suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the game per normal symbol is executed, that is, the stage where the pre-determination result is won and the normal symbol hold is acquired. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the game per game will be executed soon. In this case, it is preferable to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode that is difficult for the player to understand, rather than the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 123 (b). The result, or the pre-determination result for the acquired special figure hold, is configured to execute the suggestion effect in the same effect mode as the effect suggesting, and the executed suggestion effect creates a situation advantageous to the player. It may be configured to notify the player only of the upcoming visit.

In this way, it is possible to understand the production mode of the suggestion effect to show the player that the game per normal figure is executed so that the timing at which the game per normal figure is actually executed and the execution timing of the suggestion effect deviate from each other. By making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggestion effect is a game per normal figure, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the suggestion effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124 (a), the content of the effect when the game per normal figure (game per long opening) is executed during the normal state will be described. FIG. 124 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content displayed when the game per normal drawing (game per long opening) is executed in the normal state (during the normal state). In this control example, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the normal symbol is executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, when the right-handed game is executed, about 1/2 of the launched balls pass through the through gate 67 in both cases when the left-handed game is executed. ing. In addition, a maximum of four lottery rights for ordinary symbols (holding regular symbols) can be stored.

That is, while the game is being continued in the normal state, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the winning symbol is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Further, when the player wins the game in the normal state, the game per game (per long opening) in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 119, since the electric accessory 640 is provided below the first entry port 64, the ball launched only by continuing the game aiming at the first entry port 64 is the second. It is configured so that the ball can enter the ball entry port 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot enter the ball into the second entry port 640 in the game per normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol that occurs with a low probability. There is.

When a winner is won in the normal symbol lottery in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), a combination indicating that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win in the small display area Dm2 (two in the figure). The identification information (design) is stopped and displayed by the circle), and the game per game is executed. Then, the comment "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the open electric chew (electric accessory 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery can be executed in parallel (overlapping), the variation display and the small display of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol variation are executed. The variation display of the fourth symbol executed in the area Dm1 is continuously executed even during the game per normal figure.

Further, in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, the number of the reserved memory (special figure 2 reserved ball) of the second special symbol acquired based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 is shown. The special figure 2 reserved symbol (indicated by a black circle in the figure) indicates the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reserved ball) of the first special symbol acquired (indicated by a white circle in the figure). It is displayed with priority over (on the left side of the waiting area Ds1b). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 124 (a), it is a state after four or more balls have been put into the second ball opening 640 during the game per normal figure, and the special figure 2 hold is the maximum number. It shows the state after acquiring a certain four pieces.

In this control example, since the lottery of the second special symbol is prioritized over the lottery of the first special symbol, the special figure 2 reserved ball acquired later is acquired first. Special figure 1 The special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the reserved ball. With this configuration, when the game per normal figure is executed in the normal state and a plurality of special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired, the second special symbol lottery can be executed consecutively with priority. Therefore, it is possible to execute a dedicated effect by setting one period in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as an advantageous period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Can be done.

In this control example, the acquired special figure 1 reserved ball and special figure 2 reserved ball are displayed side by side (up to 8 are displayed) in the standby area Ds1b. When the special figure 1 reserved ball display area for displaying only the reserved balls and the special figure 2 reserved ball display area for displaying only the reserved balls are used, the special symbol lottery is preferentially executed. If the reserved ball of the second special symbol is not acquired, the reserved ball of the special figure 1 is displayed so as to stand out from the display area of the reserved ball of the special figure 2, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired. In this case, it is preferable to switch and display the special figure 2 reserved ball display area more conspicuously than the special figure 1 reserved ball display area. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the lottery of the first special symbol is executed next or the lottery of the second special symbol is executed.

The display screen shown in FIG. 124 (a) is continuously displayed until either the end timing of the game per normal figure in the normal state or the start timing of the second special symbol change in the normal state is reached. It is configured to. That is, even during the game per normal figure, when the second special symbol change is started, the chance zone effect described later is executed with reference to FIG. 124 (b). On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation is not started even when the end timing of the game per normal symbol is reached, for example, while the first special symbol variation in which a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is selected is being executed. When the game per game (5 seconds) is executed, the characters "Waiting for chance zone" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and when the currently executing first special symbol change is completed, the first 2 A standby screen for notifying the player that the special symbol change is started is displayed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), when the game per normal symbol is executed during the first special symbol change, the main display area Dm corresponds to the first special symbol change during execution. While continuously displaying the third symbol variation effect (displayed by three arrows in the figure) executed in, in a part of the main display area Dm (small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right in the figure). In this case, the display area used to display that the game per game has been executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol change during execution. For example, when the first special symbol variation during execution is a big hit, the small display area Dm3 is formed smaller than the example shown in FIG. 124 (a). Alternatively, it may be configured so as not to form the small display area Dm3. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating the jackpot winning from being lowered due to the formation of the small display area Dm3. In addition, when the game per normal symbol is started without forming the small display area Dm3, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed is the jackpot variation. Therefore, even in a state in which it is not notified that the game per normal figure has been executed in the small display area Dm3, the player can be made to pay close attention to the operating status of the electric accessory 640. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to configure so that the same effect mode as the jackpot fluctuation is executed even in a part of the case where the special symbol fluctuation during execution is not the jackpot fluctuation (outside fluctuation). ..

On the other hand, when the special symbol variation during execution (first special symbol variation) is an out-of-range variation or when the special symbol variation is not executed, the small display area Dm3 is larger than the example shown in FIG. 124 (a). It may be formed to be large, or it may be configured to display that the game is executed per normal drawing by using the entire surface of the main display area Dm.

That is, information that is advantageous to the player when it is necessary to display a plurality of information (lottery results and winning game status) in duplicate within the limited area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. It is sufficient that the display is preferentially displayed, and it may be displayed in various display modes based on the technical idea. In this case, the information that is advantageous may differ depending on the player. For example, some players may use information indicating that they have won a big hit in the special symbol lottery as advantageous information, and they may appear more than the result of the special symbol lottery. There are also players who use low-rate production as advantageous information. Therefore, the advantage degree selection that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage degree of the operation means that can be operated by the player and various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation on the operation means. It is preferable to provide means and to set a display mode corresponding to various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the degree of advantage selected by the degree of advantage selection means. As a result, various information can be displayed in a display mode that does not cause discomfort to the player.

Next, the contents of the effect in the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 (b) to 126. FIG. 124 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 124 (b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in the normal state, the comment of "entering the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set in the period until all the special figure 2 hold acquired during the normal state is exhausted, and basically after the first second special symbol lottery (variation) is started. It is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 until the final second special symbol lottery (variation) is completed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the current advantageous period is in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, when a big hit is won in the chance zone, the characters "probability change GET high probability medium" are displayed as a guidance display mode to show that the probability change state can be acquired with a high probability. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability of winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same, but the probability of winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery is higher than in the case of winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery. , The probability change state is more easily set after the jackpot game is completed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the period of the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery is executed is more probable than the period other than the chance zone in the normal state. Since the period is easy to perform, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the characters "probability change GET high probability medium" are displayed as a guide display mode for showing that the probability change state can be acquired with high probability.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this chance zone, a pseudo-variation effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of special symbol changes have been executed during one special symbol change (second special symbol change) is performed. It is configured to run. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124 (a)) indicating the number of reserved special symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is hidden, and the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm is hidden. The number of special figure 1 reserved (“2” indicating that the number of special figure 1 reserved is 2 in the figure) is the number of special figure 2 reserved in the small display area Ds12 (in the figure, the number of special figure 2 reserved is "3") indicating that there are three is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 124 (b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is larger than the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 124 (a)) of the sub-display area Ds. Since it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special figures during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation effect is executed during the chance zone, it is possible to make it think that the special symbol lottery (variation) is actually executed a plurality of times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In this control example, a part of the main display area Dm (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) is used to display the number of reserved special figures. In the zone, the number of reserved special figures may not be notified to the player, or the special figure may be set in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). The figure may be configured to notify the number of pending numbers. Further, it suffices to make it difficult for the player to identify the number of special figure reservations. You may switch to the display mode in which the color is variable. With this configuration, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current number of reserved special figures from being easily identified. Therefore, the same effect as that of this control example can be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), a character 1801 imitating a rabbit indicating that the second special symbol is currently changing is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. As described above, since the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlapping), the period during which the game per normal symbol is executed is the period of the first special symbol. There are cases where it overlaps with the fluctuation period (see FIG. 124 (a)) and cases where it does not overlap. If the game per normal symbol is executed more than during the change period of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the execution of the first special symbol change is completed, and the first special symbol is drawn. If it does not overlap with the fluctuation period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the game per game (during the game per game). That is, the execution timing of the second special symbol lottery differs depending on the change status of the first special symbol when the game per normal symbol is executed, and the currently executed special symbol change is the first special symbol. There arises a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the variation is a variation or a second special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the second special symbol change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so that the currently executed special symbol change is the first. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 (a) and 126, the contents of the pseudo-variation effect (special variation effect) among the variation effects executed in the chance zone will be described. FIG. 125 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the special variation effect, and FIG. 125 (b) shows the special figure 2 holding ball. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the acquired state, and FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram in which the special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen when the 3rd symbol restarts in the special variation effect executed in the state which is not done.

Here, the contents of the special variation effect (pseudo variation effect) will be described. This special variation effect is a variation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) during the fluctuation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and the player is given a plurality of special effects. It is a pseudo-variation effect that makes you think that the symbol variation has been executed. First, the reach effect is executed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variation effect, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. (Displayed with ") to temporarily stop the third symbol (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line). At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half of the special variation effect, the character "sorry" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player has a chance. It is configured so that the second special symbol lottery of 1 executed in the zone seems to have been missed. That is, in the first half period of the special variation effect, the special first half effect is executed in which the reach effect that is expected to win the big hit is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the effect result indicating that the effect is out of order.

After that, in the latter half period (about 30 seconds) of the special variation effect, the variation effect (special second half effect) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured so that the effect mode is different depending on the number of acquired special figure 2 hold balls. For example, in the state where the special figure 2 hold ball is secured, FIG. 125 (b) As shown in FIG. 126, when the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation in the chance zone and the special figure 2 holding ball is not secured, the chance zone is as shown in FIG. 126. The special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed after the end of. That is, in this control example, as the special variation effect, the type of the special symbol variation to be executed after the execution of the second special symbol variation is completed is determined based on the number of reserved special symbols, and the effect corresponding to the determination result is determined. The production mode of the special latter half effect is set in the mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly think that a plurality of special symbol changes have been executed during one second special symbol change.

Further, in this control example, when the special second half effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol change in the chance zone (see FIG. 125 (b)), the acquired special figure 2 hold number. The number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the latter half of the period is configured to be different. Although detailed description is omitted, when neither the special figure 2 reserved ball nor the special figure 1 reserved ball is secured when the special variation effect is executed, the first figure shown in FIG. 125 (a) is shown. 3 Without executing the temporary stop display of the symbol, one variation effect (variation effect in which the third symbol is never temporarily stopped and displayed) is executed using the entire variation period of the second special symbol variation. It is configured as follows. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation effect is executed only when the number of special symbol reservations is secured. Therefore, it is said that the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times during one second special symbol variation. It can make you think strongly.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a production mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol executed during the latter half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired. It is configured to be done. Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five times or more, the player can expect that the second special symbol change during execution is a big hit. As described above, in this control example, since it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the third symbol is temporarily stopped and the case where the stop is displayed, the number of temporary stops is accurately determined. hard. Therefore, it seems that the temporary stop display count and the stop display count are mixed and the temporary stop display is displayed 5 times or more, or a part of the temporary stop display is assumed to be the stop display, and the temporary stop display is actually displayed 5 times or more. In spite of this, it is possible to make the player think that the temporary stop display number has not reached 5 times, and it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the effect result.

It should be noted that other configurations may be used as the effect mode of the special variation effect, for example, in order to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times of the third symbol temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol variation. The display mode indicating the number of temporary stop display times may be configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol whose temporary stop is displayed during one second special symbol change may be displayed. At least a part of the effect mode of the special variation effect (for example, the background color, the effect of the third symbol, etc.) may be configured to be changed stepwise according to the number of times. Further, it may be configured to display a display mode (for example, the first time and the second time) indicating the number of times the temporary stop is temporarily displayed at the timing of redisplaying the temporarily stopped third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the special variation effect is executed without securing the special figure 2 holding ball, the characters "chance zone end" are subordinated as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended. An effect in which the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds and executed in the main display area Dm becomes a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol changes in the horizontal direction). Since the aspect is executed as a special second half effect, after making the player think that the chance zone has ended, the effect result of the special variation effect, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Become. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, the above-mentioned special variation effect is executed in a part of the second special symbol variation in the normal state, and in other cases, the second special symbol variation is performed once. On the other hand, it is configured so that one fluctuation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special variation effect from being executed unnecessarily for a long time when a plurality of (maximum of 4) special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired in the game per normal figure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot ending period in this control example will be described. FIG. 127 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, and FIG. 127 (b) is the ending of the probabilistic jackpot game. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the period, and FIG. 127 (c) shows the display mode displayed in the latter half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game. FIG. 127 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the latter half of the ending period of the probability variation jackpot game. ..

In this control example, when the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won during the normal state is a jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game) in which a probability variation state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is easily set, the player The jackpot ending period is set longer than in the case of a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to set a probability variation state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Specifically, in the probabilistic jackpot game, the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds, and in the normal jackpot game, the jackpot ending period is set to 15 seconds. With this configuration, the player is notified during the ending period (before the probabilistic state is set) that the game content changes significantly through the jackpot game (transition from the normal state to the probabilistic state). It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the content of the game to be executed after the jackpot game is completed can be notified to the player using a long ending period.

Further, in this control example, as described above, even when the probability variation jackpot game is executed, the ball winning the variable winning device 65 must be flowed down to the specific region (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120). It is configured so that the probability change state is not set. Therefore, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the probability variation jackpot game, the probability variation state is not set after the probability variation jackpot game ends, and the time is shortened as in the normal jackpot game. A state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

In this case, if the notification effect indicating that the probability change state is set is executed during the ending period of the probability change jackpot game, the effect content of the notification effect and the actually set game state will be different, and the player will be informed. There was a problem of giving a feeling of dissatisfaction. Further, when the production mode of the notification effect executed in the ending period (17 seconds) of the probabilistic jackpot game is switched to the production mode of the notification effect executed in the ending period (15 seconds) of the normal jackpot game, There is a problem that the length of the actual ending period and the length of the effect period of the notification effect are different, and the player will execute the notification effect that makes the player feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a unified period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. There is. Then, the production mode of the notification effect executed in the latter half period is configured to be determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, when a normal jackpot game is executed, a time saving state is set for the first half period (8 seconds) as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. The characters "Chance mode 100 times" are displayed to suggest that (see Fig. 127 (a)), and then, for the second half period (7 seconds), if a big hit is won during the time saving state (second special symbol lottery). (If you win a big hit with), a notification effect (see FIG. 127 (c)) in which the characters "Hit and Super Chance GET during chance mode" are displayed is executed as a game guidance mode to show that the probability change state is easy to be set. It is configured as follows.

On the other hand, when the probability change jackpot game is executed, the "super chance mode 100" suggesting that the probability variation state is set for the first half period (10 seconds) as the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. The characters "Times" are displayed (see Fig. 127 (b)), and then, for the latter half of the period (7 seconds), "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card" as a warning mode that is not directly related to the game content. It is configured to execute a notification effect (see FIG. 127 (d)) in which the characters of are displayed.

In this control example, the effect mode of the notification effect executed during the above-mentioned jackpot ending period is configured to be preset at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the process for determining the effect mode of the notification effect every time during the jackpot game in which various control processes are executed, so that the processing load of the control process executed during the jackpot game is reduced. Can be made to.

Here, a case will be described in which the ball cannot flow down to the specific region (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game even though the probability variation jackpot game is executed. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. 127 (b), the process of hiding the characters "super" and the notification effect executed in the latter half of the jackpot ending period (7 seconds) are usually hit. A process of switching to a notification effect (see FIG. 127 (c)) executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period of the game is executed.

More specifically, the display layer (display layer) in which the characters "super" are displayed and the display layer in which the characters "chance mode 100 times" are displayed as the display mode shown in FIG. 127 (a) (display layer). The display layer (display layer) is different from the display layer (display layer), and the characters "super" are displayed based on the determination result of whether or not the ball could be flowed down to a specific gate during the jackpot game. ) Is configured to be switchable. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result of whether or not the ball could flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game by a simple control process. Further, since the effect mode is switched in the latter half period of the jackpot ending period, which is the latter half period, the effect mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is different depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all jackpot types without limitation. Further, in this control example, the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all jackpot types, but the first half period of the jackpot ending period is not limited to this, and all jackpots are It may be configured to have the same length for each type. Further, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. For example, the jackpot type A and the jackpot type B have the same length in the first half of the jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot type B and the jackpot type C may be configured so that the latter half period of the jackpot has the same length.

Further, in this control example, the ending period of a different length is set according to the winning jackpot type, but the ending period is not limited to this, and the ending period is lengthened according to the game result during the jackpot game. It may be configured to be different.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the content of the effect executed in the chance mode will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set 100 times after the jackpot game is completed. Further, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 50 times after the jackpot game is completed. Further, although a detailed description will be described later, it is possible to set a case where the V notification effect for notifying that the ball during the jackpot game has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed and a case where the V notification effect is not executed. It is configured in.

Then, when the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, the player is notified that the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) has been set after the jackpot game is completed. When the effect mode (special chance mode) is set and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, that is, when the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, or the ball When the V notification effect is not executed even though the player has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. Chance mode) is configured to be set.

When the chance mode is set as the effect mode, the characters "in chance mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. The remaining period notification mode for indicating the period until the end is displayed (see FIG. 128 (a)). The example shown in FIG. 128A shows a state in which the 20th special symbol change is executed after the chance mode is set, and the special symbol change is performed 80 times as the remaining period notification mode. The characters "80 times" indicating that the chance mode ends when executed are displayed.

In this way, when the chance mode is set as the effect mode, whether the current game state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state is determined from various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the above, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the current game state is a game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, only when the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the chance mode can be set as the effect mode even if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, so that the jackpot game can be set. Despite notifying that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v, that is, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the chance mode is set after the jackpot game ends, and the game It is possible to prevent a situation in which a person is confused. In addition, when a V notification effect for notifying that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed during the jackpot game, an effect for indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed. Since the super chance mode is set as the mode, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this control example, if the V notification effect is not executed even though the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the chance mode is set as the effect mode after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to be set, but not limited to this, in some cases where the V notification effect is not executed even though the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. , The super chance mode may be set. In this case, for example, at the ending of the jackpot game (after it becomes impossible (difficult) to pass the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game), during the jackpot game this time. It is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v and whether the V notification effect has been executed, and the determination result that the sphere has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v and the V notification effect Is determined that is not executed, and in some cases (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery), a probability change state is set during the ending period of the jackpot game. It is preferable that the display modes shown (FIGS. 127 (b) and 127 (d)) are displayed, and the super chance mode is set as the effect mode after the jackpot game is completed.

With this configuration, even if the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the possibility that the super chance mode is set can be left, so that the player until the jackpot game ends. Can be played with a sense of expectation.

As described above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the effect mode set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is set as the game state and the probability change state is set. If so, it will occur. Then, regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues is displayed. That is, as the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game, the first advantageous gaming state (probability variation state) and the second advantageous gaming state (time saving state) are as advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. , Is configurable, the first advantageous gaming state continues for a predetermined first period (the period after the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol change is executed 50 times), and the second advantageous gaming state is The second period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol change is executed 100 times), which is longer than the first period described above, is configured to continue, and the first advantageous gaming state is set after the jackpot game ends. After that, when the first period elapses, the second advantageous gaming state is set until the second period elapses, and when the second period elapses, the normal state is set. In the configured gaming machine, it is possible to execute the remaining period notification to indicate the remaining period of the period (second period) until the advantageous gaming state ends, regardless of whether or not the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured in.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the period during which the advantageous gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, continues in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, in this control example, in order to suggest to the player whether the current gaming state is the probabilistic state or the time saving state in the state where the remaining period of the second period (the remaining period of the chance mode) is set. The game state suggestion effect of the above is configured to be feasible by using the notification mode (display mode) of the remaining period notification.

Here, with reference to FIG. 128 (b), the content of the game state suggestion effect executed in the chance mode will be described. FIG. 128 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content of the game state suggestion effect executed in the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 128 (b), when the chance mode is set while the probability change state is set and the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed. A variable game state suggestion effect (displayed in a white display mode in FIG. 128B) is executed. Then, a comment of "big hit expectation UP" is displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. With this configuration, the player is notified of the period until the end of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is predicted which of the advantageous gaming states is set. Can provide fun to let. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 128 (b) is obtained when the special symbol variation during execution is a jackpot variation or has been acquired. Special figure 2 When the reserved ball contains information on winning a big hit, and within the period in which the probability change state can be set in the chance mode (after the big hit game is completed, until the special symbol change is executed 50 times). It is configured so that it can be displayed within the period).

With this configuration, various information that is more advantageous to the player (information indicating that the probability variation state is set) in the chance mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues. Since the information regarding the jackpot winning can be displayed using the same display mode, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. Further, even when the time saving state is actually set, it is possible to display a display mode that is easy to be displayed when the probability variation state is set based on the jackpot winning, so that it is higher than the design value. It is possible to make the player think that the probability change state is set by the ratio, and there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

It should be noted that the effect in the chance mode may be executed by using a technical idea different from the technical idea of the present control example described above. For example, in the state where the chance mode is set during the probability change state. , A suggestion effect for suggesting that the currently set gaming state is a time saving state when the jackpot winning or the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball contains the information of winning the jackpot (for example, The display mode of the remaining period notification may be configured to execute a display mode (display mode for displaying Chinese numerals) different from those in FIGS. 128 (a) and 128 (b). As a result, in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot was won during the time saving state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the probabilistic state, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. In addition, since the ratio of the probabilistic state set as the game history can be made to appear lower than the actual rate, the game can be performed while more expecting that the probabilistic state will be set in the next jackpot game.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 128 (a) and 128 (b), in the first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the period (remaining period) for which the chance mode continues is variable. By making it possible to suggest the currently set game state to the player, a game that suggests the currently set game state to the player who is carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode. Although it is configured so that the state suggestion effect can be easily grasped, the game state suggestion effect may be executed by using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode, for example, when a probability change state is set. In the first display mode (for example, the character "chance"), which is easier to display than when the time saving state is set, or when the time saving state is set, it is better than when the probability variation state is set. The second display mode (for example, the character "pinch") that is easily displayed may be configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The game state suggestion effect may be executed by changing the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz).

In the first control example, both the high-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol are configured to end when the number of executions of the special symbol change reaches a predetermined number. As shown in 128 (a) and (b), the display of the remaining period notification that notifies the remaining period in which the chance mode continues (the high probability state of the special symbol or the remaining period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol can continue). The current game state can be suggested by using the aspect, but for example, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit game is executed. , The above-mentioned chance mode configuration may be used. In this case, when a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set as the duration of the chance mode, the remaining period (time saving) until the high probability state of the normal symbol ends. The period until the end of the state) is configured to be notified by the remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has elapsed and the time saving state is set, the normal state is restored. When the probability change state is set, the display mode indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot game is executed, that is, the probability change state is executed. It is possible to execute an effect in which the characters "Congratulations" are displayed as a display mode indicating that the remaining period in which the state continues is the period until the next big hit, and a predetermined notification condition is set during the period when the chance mode is set. May be configured to display the characters "Congratulations" when is satisfied.

That is, there is a remaining period of the chance mode instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128 (a)) that is updated at any time corresponding to the remaining period of the chance mode that is updated every time the special symbol lottery is executed. A display mode that merely indicates that the pattern is being performed, that is, a remaining period notification mode that does not indicate the number of remaining lottery of special symbols that can be executed during the chance mode, such as the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. 128 (a). It may be used, or the remaining period in which the length of the remaining period in the chance mode can be roughly notified by changing the display mode (for example, changing the display color) according to the length of the remaining period in the chance mode. The notification mode may be used. Further, a plurality of remaining period notification modes can be displayed, and by combining the displayed display modes of the plurality of remaining period notification modes, the player can grasp the length of the remaining period of the chance mode. You may.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, the content of the effect executed when the player operates the operating means in the chance mode will be described. In this control example, when a player executes a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the operation content and the operation timing. ing. Although detailed description is omitted, an operation effect of changing the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 and a variation effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are performed. When the player operates the frame button 22 by executing the guidance notification for causing the player to operate the frame button 22 as a part of The operation effect for executing the above, the operation effect for enlivening the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the like are executed. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically performed a game other than the act of firing the ball, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Here, among the above-mentioned operation effects, the contents of various operation effects executed in the chance mode will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, when the advantageous gaming state (time saving state, probability variation state) is set, it corresponds to the number of special symbol changes since the advantageous gaming state is set. It is configured so that different fluctuation times can be selected. Specifically, the period in which the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1st to 20th" after the advantageous gaming state is set is the first period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) is easily selected. Therefore, the period of "21st to 49th" becomes the second period in which a longer fluctuation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) than the first period is easily set, and only the "50th" has a specific fluctuation time (for example). , 20 seconds) is set, and the period of "51st to 100th" is the third period in which the fluctuation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) similar to that of the second period is easily set. It is configured in.

That is, in the predetermined period (first period) after the chance mode is set, that is, in the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol variation is likely to be executed in a short fluctuation time, so that the jackpot is easily executed during this first period. If the player wins, it is possible to easily execute a plurality of jackpot games at short intervals. As a result, the next jackpot game may have been executed as part of the jackpot game that was executed last time. It becomes possible to remind the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Then, in the second period and the third period described above, the special symbol variation with a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set, and the special symbol variation with a longer fluctuation time than the first period is executed. It is configured to be easy. As a result, in the chance mode, it is possible to secure a period for executing the suggestion effect for suggesting whether the game state currently set during one special symbol change is the time saving state or the probabilistic state. can. In addition, during a specific period (50th special symbol change after the advantageous game state is set), a special symbol change for a specific change time (20 seconds) is always executed, and a probability change state is set for the player. It is configured to execute a suggestion effect for 20 seconds to suggest whether or not it is in a state of being.

In this way, by configuring so that different fluctuation times can be selected according to the number of times the special symbol change is executed, it is possible to execute the effect according to the number of times of each change using an appropriate period.

FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode, the normal state is set internally, and the display is displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display contents, and FIG. 129 (b) schematically shows an effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display effect displayed in FIG. 129 (a). It is a schematic diagram shown. In this control example, during the normal fluctuation period in the chance mode, the player can arbitrarily select the background image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the player presses (operates) the frame button 22. By doing so, the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode) are switched and displayed alternately.

As shown in FIG. 129 (a), when the background image can be switched, the icon HR10 imitating the frame button 22 on the lower right side of the main display area Dm is in an operable state (display mode (a). In the figure, it is displayed as an arrow display in the direction in which the button is pressed), and the characters "sea mode" indicating that the sea mode is currently set are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. There is. When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the display is switched from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode" as shown in FIG. 129 (b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the content of the operation effect during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be described. In this control example, the background image is not switched and displayed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from the time reduction state and the probability change state are set to the end of the 20th special symbol fluctuation) (the background image is not switched and displayed). It is configured to be difficult). That is, if the background image is switched and displayed in the high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol fluctuation, it is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Since the display mode changes frequently and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, the background image is configured so as not to be switched and displayed (difficult). However, if all the player's operations on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced.

Therefore, in this control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, another effect is executed instead of the switching display of the background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the characters "special mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the present is during the high-speed fluctuation period. Is notified to the player. During this "special mode", regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a special symbol variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the variation effect of the third symbol is also executed by the variation effect dedicated to the "special mode". Will be done. Then, even during the "special mode", the icon HR10 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, it is displayed in the small display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. 130 (b). A game state suggestion effect in which the display mode of the remaining period notification is changed is executed.

In this way, even when the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect to be executed differs depending on the operation timing, so that the player can perform various operations. It is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to operate the frame button 22 at various timings. Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a) or FIG. 130 (a), the guidance display (icon HR10) for guiding the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 is the same. When the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect to be executed differs depending on the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what kind of operation effect is executed until the frame button 22 is actually operated (pressed), so that the frame button 22 can be operated more enthusiastically. can.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, a plurality of operation effects can be executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, and each operation effect is selected. The ratio is different depending on the set game state. That is, it is possible to predict whether the currently set gaming state is a probabilistic state or a time-saving state based on the appearance rate of each operation effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even when the same operation effect is repeatedly executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, in this control example, the background image is switched and displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied even during the high-speed fluctuation period. Specifically, when the information for winning a big hit is included in the reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved ball) of the second special symbol acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period, the special figure including the information for winning the big hit. 2 The jackpot special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball and the special symbol fluctuation executed before the jackpot special symbol fluctuation (special figure 2 that contains the information to win the jackpot was acquired before the reserved ball Special figure 2 Special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball) and the special variation effect using the variation time are configured to be executable, and the player can execute the special variation effect while satisfying the conditions for executing the special variation effect. When the frame button 22 is pressed, the background image is switched and displayed from the currently displayed background image (for example, the sea mode) to the dedicated special background image (for example, the space mode). That is, when the background image switching display is executed based on the player pressing the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the expectation of winning the jackpot is high and the player is positively active. Can press the frame button 22.

In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background image can be switched and displayed by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22. This special operation (long press) is determined to be executed when the player presses the frame button 22 continuously for 2 seconds, and is an operation rather than a normal operation (press) for the frame button 22. The period until it is determined that has been performed is extended. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the operation more frequently than the normal operation (pressing). Therefore, even if the background image switching display is configured to be executable, it is possible to prevent the background image switching display from being frequently performed. be able to. In this control example, the long press operation is used as a special operation in which the operation time is longer than that of the normal operation. However, the operation is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the frame button 22 as the operation means, a plurality of operation units are used. (For example, a cross key) may be provided to specify a special operation performed by operating a plurality of operation units in a predetermined order.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the content of the effect executed during the "super chance mode" in which the player is notified that the probability change state is set will be described. FIG. 131 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content when the first special symbol change is executed in the “super chance mode”, and FIG. 131 (b) is a “super”. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect content when the 2nd special symbol change is executed in "chance mode".

In this control example, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed. Then, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation state is set with a high probability (the probability variation jackpot game in which the ball can be easily flowed down to the specific gate during the jackpot game is always executed. ). The probabilistic state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

That is, once the probability change state is set, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery by the time the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times) (the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/50). ), It is configured so that the probability change state can be looped with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game so that the player who is executing the game in the probable change state wins the big hit in the second special symbol lottery as soon as possible.

On the other hand, even if the probability change state is set, for example, immediately after winning the probability change jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state and setting the probability change state after the jackpot game ends, that is, In the state where the probability change state is set, the first special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball has not been acquired and the special figure 1 reserved ball has been acquired. In this control example, as described above, when the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation big hit game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas in the case where the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. The probability variation jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, and the normal jackpot game is executed at the remaining 50%. That is, even if the probabilistic state is set, it may not be possible to loop the probabilistic state when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the probability change state, the player can quickly determine that the winning jackpot is the jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the normal jackpot game is executed. In this control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state, the third symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is generated because the player's motivation to play is reduced. A double reach effect, which is a variable effect in which (identification information with an odd number) and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot are simultaneously reached, is executed. It is configured to be easy. More specifically, when a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is always executed (FIG. 131 (a)). reference).

As a result, when a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the reach state. It is possible to prevent the effect from being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from predicting in advance that a normal jackpot will be won during the fluctuation period of the special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the present control example, the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the "super chance mode" as in the above-mentioned "chance mode", and the player can use the small display area Ds11 and Ds12. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is difficult to grasp the number of special figures on hold. Then, on the upper side of the main display area Dm, the characters "in super chance mode" are displayed as a display mode for notifying the player that the current state is in the probable change state.

Here, in the super chance mode, the double reach (the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot) and the third symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot (the third symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot) shown in FIG. 131 (a). When the identification information with the number 2) and the double reach effect, which is a variation effect that puts the reach state at the same time, are executed, it means that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change. Since there is a risk that the player can easily grasp the effect, in this control example, the double reach effect shown in FIG. 131 (a) can be executed even in the variation effect executed in response to the second special symbol variation. It is configured in. That is, in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variation jackpot game is always executed when the jackpot is won, the double reach effect using the third symbol corresponding to the normal hit can be executed. ing.

With this configuration, even if the double reach effect shown in FIG. 127 (a) is executed, it can be determined whether the special symbol variation during execution is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation. It can be made difficult for the player to easily discriminate.

Further, in this control example, when the double reach effect is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol that becomes the reach state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round is selected. As shown in FIG. 131 (b), the effect of changing to the third symbol (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (to the probability variation double reach). It is configured so that promotion production) is executed.

With this configuration, when the special symbol lottery being executed is a big hit, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the probabilistic big hit game will be executed without fail. In addition, even if the double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player is expected to play the game while expecting that the player will be promoted to the probabilistic double reach on the way. Can be done.

In this control example, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the running double reach effect to the probabilistic double reach effect, when the variation mode of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined mode (one lap has passed). Although the variable condition that holds is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol corresponding to the reach state as the third symbol that is variablely displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 (the third symbol that is a combination that becomes a big hit). A variable condition that is established when the symbol) passes the reach valid line may be set, or is established when the operation result for the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is a specific operation result. It may be configured to set a variable condition.

Further, in this control example, the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol that is in the reach state is set. It may be configured to increase the number of symbols. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131 (a), the blank symbol (indicated by a triangular mark in the figure) is deleted, and "3.2.1" is displayed in order from the left as the upper symbol row Z1. It may be configured to execute a triple reach effect in which "1.2.3" is displayed in order from the left as the lower symbol string Z3. Even with this configuration, the triple reach effect can increase the number of reach of the third symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot than the double reach effect, so the probability change jackpot in this special symbol lottery It is possible to visually notify the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical idea may be applied to the variation effect executed in the normal state. For example, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the reach state. When the variable condition is satisfied during the normal single reach production, the type of the third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of the third symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, or the third symbol in the reach state may be switched. It may be configured to increase the number of. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the player is provided with a more advantageous effect result until the variation effect is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in this control example and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 132 (a) is a schematic view showing the flow of the effect when a variation pattern in which the non-reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol, and FIG. 132 (b) shows. It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the effect when the variation pattern in which the reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the 3rd symbol.

A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, but in this control example, as a fluctuation pattern (variation time) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, a fluctuation pattern in which the basic time and the addition time are added is used. It stipulates. Then, the period corresponding to the basic time is set as the common fluctuation pattern, and the period corresponding to the addition time is set as the peculiar fluctuation pattern.

That is, in this control example, as an effect mode of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in order to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol is displayed after the reach state is displayed. The period until the stop display is displayed is configured to be different depending on the type of the third symbol in the reach state. Then, the third symbol corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third symbol to be in the reach state. With this configuration, the third symbol variation effect (third symbol variation effect executed in correspondence with the basic time) that is executed during a predetermined period after the third symbol starts to change is common. Can be transformed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), in the case of the non-reach variation effect, since the addition time is not set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the third symbol The upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at the timing when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the variation effect (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped so that the reach state does not occur on the effective line. The stop display is performed in the display mode, and two seconds later, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode indicating that the lottery result is off. After that, after a stop display period (fixed time) of 1 second, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is confirmed and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b), when the reach variation effect is executed, the basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common variation pattern for 30 seconds, from the reach state to the elapse of 5 seconds. The production mode of is set. That is, the effect mode from the reach state to the one round of the middle symbol row Z2 is set as the common variation pattern. After that, the effect mode (reach pattern, stop symbol) is set according to the addition time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, an effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 133 (a) shows a normal jackpot, FIG. 133 (b) shows the flow of the production of the ending period for the probabilistic jackpot, and FIG. 133 (c) shows the ball during the probabilistic jackpot game. It shows the flow when it does not flow down the specific area (V gate).

As shown in FIG. 133, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot, and the ED period is set to 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the probabilistic jackpot. It is configured. Then, the ending effect divided into the first half period and the second half period is executed, respectively (see FIG. 127).

In this control example, the production mode in the ending period is set at the start timing of the jackpot game, and whether or not a V prize is won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined as the ending period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate). It is configured to discriminate at the start timing of the ED period) and switch the ending display mode based on the discriminant result.

First, with reference to FIG. 133 (a), the content of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game when the normal jackpot game is executed will be described. In this control example, in order to prevent the various processes executed during the jackpot game from becoming complicated and the processing load during the jackpot game from increasing, the round game during the jackpot game (a prize ball can be obtained). The production mode of the effect (ending display effect) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined before the execution of the jackpot game (before the start of the jackpot game or during the opening period of the jackpot game). It is configured in.

When a normal jackpot game is executed, the player is shown that the "chance mode" is set (the time saving state is set) after the jackpot game is completed by the end of the opening period of the jackpot game. The display mode of the ending effect (see FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (c)) is set. Then, in the normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a preset ending effect is executed as the ending effect of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 133 (b) and 133 (c), the contents of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game when the probabilistic jackpot game is executed will be described. When the probabilistic jackpot game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the jackpot game by the end of the opening period of the jackpot game, and the production mode of the ending effect is based on the determination result. To determine. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, the player is allowed to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v. It is determined whether or not to execute the V notification effect in which the guidance notification for guiding the player and the V passage notification for notifying the player that the ball has actually passed the specific area (V gate) 65v are executed. When it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed, a display mode for indicating to the player that the "super chance mode" is set (probability change state is set) after the end of the jackpot game as the ending effect (FIG. 127). (B), (d)) is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V notification effect is not executed, the display mode for indicating to the player that the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game as the ending effect (display mode of FIG. 127 (b)). The display mode in which the display of "super" is deleted and the display mode (see FIG. 127 (c)) are set.

When executing the V notification effect, the comment "Aim for V" and the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 are modeled according to the start of the V round (first round) game. Guidance notification is executed in which the schematic diagram shown above is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the V passage notification is executed in which the comment "V acquisition !!" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) even though the guidance notification is executed, the specific area (for example, 3 seconds) is given to the player. The emphasis guidance notification is executed to further emphasize and guide the passage of the ball to the V gate) 65v. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v by the end of the V round game, the above-mentioned V passage notification is executed, and V without passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v. When the round game is over, the characters "I'm sorry I didn't get V!" Are displayed.

After that, when the ending period of the jackpot game arrives, it is determined whether or not to replace the preset display mode of the ending effect based on the game result of the actual V-round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed at the start of the jackpot game, the display mode indicating that the "super chance mode" is set as the ending effect (FIGS. 127 (b), (FIG. 127), Since d)) is preset, the ending effect is executed without switching the display mode of the ending effect when the ball is passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game. .. On the other hand, if the ball cannot be passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V-round game, the time saving state will be set after the jackpot game is completed. The process of switching to the display mode (replacement process) for indicating that the "mode" is set is executed, and the display mode of "super" is deleted from the display mode after replacement (the display mode of FIG. 127 (b)). The ending effect is executed according to the display mode shown above and FIG. 127 (c)).

Further, when the V notification effect is not executed, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game as in the normal jackpot game, and the various effect displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. , The jackpot game in which it is not possible to grasp that the V-round game is being executed and that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed. Then, regardless of whether or not the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V-round game, the ending effect is executed in the preset display mode. As a result, it is possible to provide a state in which the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game, even though the probability change state is actually set.

Furthermore, if the "chance mode" is set while the probability change state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game (during the probability change jackpot game), so the probability change state is set by the effect during the jackpot game. It can be difficult to know in advance what will be done. In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed, the jackpot game ends even though the probability variation state is actually set. It is configured so that the "chance mode" is set later, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, even though the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v while the V notification effect is being executed. Instead, the V-passage notification is not executed at a predetermined rate, and when the V-passage notification is not executed even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V-gate) 65v, after the jackpot game is completed. It may be configured so that the "chance mode" is set. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the V notification effect so that the V notification effect can be executed even when the normal jackpot game is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for an event in which the V-passage notification is not executed to appear even though the V-notification effect is executed. Therefore, after the jackpot game in which the V-notification effect is executed is completed, It is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort when the "chance mode" is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the flow of the effect mode set after the jackpot game is completed will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, after the jackpot game is completed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in a predetermined first specific period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times). Will be done. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is predetermined after the end of the jackpot game in the second specific period (special symbol variation is executed 50 times). Period until it is done) is set. Then, when the game state set after the jackpot game is completed is the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), the “chance mode” is set as the effect mode (FIG. 134 (b). )reference). In addition, when the game state set after the jackpot game ends is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), depending on the effect content during the jackpot game (whether or not there is a V notification effect). (Accordingly), the production mode set after the jackpot game ends is different, and as shown in FIG. 134 (a), the probability change state may be set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game). When notified, that is, when the display mode of entering the "super chance mode" (see FIG. 127 (b)) is displayed as the ending effect, the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode (FIG. 134 (a). ) Display a), when it is not notified that the probability change state is set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, the display mode of entering the "chance mode" as the ending effect (FIG. 127). When (a) is displayed, the “chance mode” is set as the effect mode (see display b in FIG. 134 (a)).

As shown in the display a of FIG. 134 (a), when the "super chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends, the "super chance mode" continues until the probability change state ends, and the game state changes. When shifting from the time saving state to the time saving state, it is switched to the "chance mode" and displayed. In this case, while the "super chance mode" is set, as shown in FIG. 131 (a), the period (up to 50 times) until the probability change state ends is set in the small display area Ds2 as the remaining period mode. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player continues. In addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 131 (a), it is also possible to execute a pre-notification effect for notifying the player in advance that the time saving state is set 50 times after the probability change state is completed. Well, for example, the remaining period mode (indicated as "49 times" in white in FIG. 131 (a)) indicating the remaining period of the probabilistic state displayed in the small display area Ds2 is equal to or less than the predetermined period (for example, "" When the number of times is 10 times or less), the remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time saving state set later continues is different from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probabilistic state (for example,). It is preferable to configure it so that it is displayed as "50 times" in black. As a result, even after the probability change state is completed, it is possible to notify the player in advance that a game state (time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state is set.

Further, when the "super chance mode" is set, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probabilistic state and the remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time saving state are displayed. Each remaining period mode may be subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol change is executed, or the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probabilistic state and after the probabilistic state is completed. The remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the set time saving state and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probabilistic state are displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probabilistic state is subtracted first, and the remaining period of the probabilistic state becomes 0. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the time saving state may be subtracted. Even in this configuration, it is in advance that the player playing the game in the probabilistic state is set to a game state that is more favorable to the player than the normal state after the probabilistic state is completed. Can be notified to.

Next, the effect in the chance mode will be described with reference to the display b in FIG. 134 (a) and the display b in FIG. 134 (b). In this control example, a chance mode is set as an effect mode when a part of the case where the probability change state is set and when the time saving state is set. Then, in the chance mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 128, the game state suggestion effect for changing the notification mode of the remaining period notification is executed. This game state suggestion effect is set so that the chance mode in the probabilistic state has a higher appearance rate than the chance mode in the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the content of the operation effect in the chance mode will be described. In this control example, the effect mode of the operation effect (the effect executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player) that is executed in the chance mode is changed to the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player. ) Is configured to be variable according to the operation timing, the operation method, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), during the chance mode when the time saving state is set, when the button PUSH "normal press" is executed as the operation method, the special symbol fluctuation is 20. During the high-speed fluctuation period until the execution is performed, the "reach suggestion" that suggests whether or not the fluctuation effect being executed is in the reach state during the third symbol fluctuation, or the currently set gaming state is displayed. The operation effect of "state suggestion" to be suggested is configured to be executable, and after that (the number of special symbol changes is 21st or later), the operation effect of "background mode transition" to shift the background mode is configured to be executable. There is. In addition, as an operation method, when the button long press "long press" is executed, the operation effect of "background mode transition" to shift the background mode during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times. Is executable, and during the period from 21 to 50 special symbol changes (during the second period), the operation effect of "state suggestion" that suggests the currently set game state can be executed. After that (the number of special symbol changes is 51st or later), the game state that was set in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game ends)) is suggested, so "past state suggestion" It is configured so that the operation effect of "" can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), during the chance mode when the probability change state is set, when the button PUSH "normal press" is executed as the operation method, the special symbol change is executed 20 times. "Reach suggestion" that suggests whether or not the variable effect being executed is in the reach state during the high-speed fluctuation period until the third symbol is changed, and "state suggestion" that suggests the currently set gaming state. Or, the operation effect of "Background mode transition" to shift the background mode is configured to be executable, and "Background mode shift" is performed during the period (during the second period) when the number of special symbol changes is 21 to 50 times. , Or the operation effect of "state suggestion" can be executed, and after that (the number of special symbol changes is 51st or later), the operation effect of "background mode transition" can be executed. In addition, as an operation method, when the button is pressed and held for a long time, the operation effect of "background mode transition" for shifting the background mode can be executed regardless of the number of special symbol changes. ..

As described above, in this control example, the "chance mode" can be set as the effect mode in a part of the case where the time saving state is set or the probability change state is set. The duration of the chance mode (time reduction 100 times) is divided into a plurality of periods according to the number of special symbol changes executed during the chance mode, and the player operates each set game state and period. It is configured so that the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the means (frame button 22) is operated is different. As a result, when the chance mode is set, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the content of the operation effect executed by the operation effect. It is possible to execute a game in which the operating means are enthusiastically operated.

As described above, in this control example, the high-speed fluctuation period is set during the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, and even if the "normal press" operation is executed for the frame button 22, the "background mode transition" is performed. The operation effect is configured to be more difficult to execute than other periods, but the high-speed fluctuation period (the period during which it is difficult to shift to the background mode) may be set at other timings, for example, after the jackpot game ends. The period until the end of one special symbol change to be executed is the normal time reduction period, and from the execution of the second special symbol change after the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the 20th special symbol change. The period may be configured to be set as a high-speed fluctuation period.

With this configuration, for example, as a notice mode for notifying that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set during the first special symbol fluctuation period after the jackpot game ends, "The background mode cannot be changed from the next fluctuation. By displaying the comment "Please select the desired background now!" In the sub-display area Ds, the period during which the background mode cannot be changed (high-speed fluctuation period) is suddenly set for the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game cannot be executed in the desired background mode and the motivation for the game is lowered. Furthermore, as a guidance mode for explaining the game content of the "chance mode" to the player by using one special symbol change period after the jackpot game is completed, the "chance mode may be in a probable change state." The comment "Don't give up!" And the comment "Chance when the display mode of the remaining number of times changes!" May also be displayed.

When the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot as in the first control example, the gaming period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set. During the middle (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), the background mode in the "chance mode" can be selected, and when the "chance mode" is set, during a predetermined period (during the high-speed fluctuation period), It may be configured to notify the player that the background mode cannot be changed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in this control example), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured so that a hit game (a game per game) that is in an operating state (open state) for a certain period of time is executed.

The time required to display the fluctuation of the second symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is different according to the set probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the normal symbol, and the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation state). When the normal state) is set, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds, and when the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds. It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to make a large difference between the frequency at which the game per normal symbol is executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the frequency at which the game per normal symbol is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In other words, in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) that can be executed per unit time is increased by shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time as opposed to the low-probability state of the normal symbol. In addition, it is possible to make it easier to win in the general drawing lottery that is executed. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the game per normal symbol when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, but it is easy to execute the game per normal symbol when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Can be done.

In this control example, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be more advantageous to the player in both the set normal symbol fluctuation time and the winning probability than the low probability state of the normal symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of them may be configured to be advantageous to the player. For example, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) of the same time may be set so as to have a difference only in the winning probability. As a result, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute the game per normal symbol during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is longer than that during the time reduction state. In the pachinko machine 10 configured so that the normal state is longer, the normal symbol hit game (normal symbol hit game) is difficult to be executed, and the normal symbol hit game is executed from the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). When the game state shifts to the easy time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol), the long-time normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (the game per normal symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state). ) Is shifted to the time saving state, and even though the time saving state is set, it is possible to suppress that the period during which the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time saving state is set for a long time. ..

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, various devices are arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and a sphere is placed in the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Even if a game of flowing down (left-handed game) or a game of flowing down a ball in the right area (right-handed game) is executed, there is no difference in the game value obtained by the player (it is unlikely to occur). The game board 13 is configured. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to the perpendicular line at the center of the game board 13, and the ball enters the lower region of the variable display unit 80. A first ball opening 64 that can be a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol and a second special symbol that can be a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol when the ball enters the ball, which is provided at a position below the first ball opening 64. The electric accessory 640a, which is attached to the 2 entry port 640 and the 2nd entry opening 640 and is opened in the normal symbol hit game executed when the player wins the normal symbol lottery, and the 2nd entry A variable winning device 65, which is provided at a position below the ball mouth 640 and is opened in a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, is arranged.

The ball launched by the left-handed game flows down the left side region and passes through the through gate 67 provided in the left side region at a rate of 1/2, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 does not pass through the through gate 67 either. The ball is also flowed down toward the first ball entry port 64 provided in the lower region by a nail planted in the game board 13. Here, the ball that has flowed down from between the nails enters the two general entry ports 63. In this control example, about 1/50 of the ball flowing down the left side region is configured to enter any of the two general entry ports 63, and the ball enters the general entry port 63. When a ball is entered, 10 prize balls (privileges) are given.

The first ball opening 64 is configured so that one ball can enter the first ball at a rate of one in 15 balls, and when a ball enters, four balls are paid out as prize balls. It is configured in. In the second entry port 640, when the electric accessory 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 2), almost no ball enters and the electric accessory 640 is open (the state shown in white in FIG. 2). In the state shown in black in FIG. 2), the ball is fired in a left-handed game, and the ball is configured to enter at a rate of 1 ball to about 2 balls flowing down the left area. When a ball enters, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. Further, the variable winning device 65 is configured such that when the jackpot game is not executed, almost no balls enter, and during the jackpot game, balls enter at a ratio of 2 balls to about 3 balls. When a ball enters, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the variable winning device 65 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is a variable winning means that is opened in a big hit game executed when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, and the ball that wins the variable winning device 65 during the big hit game is variable. By passing through a specific area (V gate) provided in the internal area of the winning device 65, a high probability state of the special symbol can be set after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, depending on the type of jackpot won, a jackpot game in which the ball winning the variable winning device 65 easily passes through a specific area (V gate) (probability variable jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass (normal jackpot game). In this control example, a jackpot game in which the ball winning the variable winning device 65 easily passes through a specific area (V gate), that is, a normal game is performed during the jackpot game. For example, a jackpot (game) that allows a ball to easily flow down to a specific area (V gate) is a probabilistic jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which a ball that has won a prize in the variable winning device 65 is difficult to pass through the specific gate, that is, , A jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball to a specific area (V gate) even if a normal game is performed during the jackpot game will be described as a normal jackpot (game).

As described above, even if the probability variation jackpot game is executed, if the ball cannot be passed to the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, there is a high probability that the special symbol will be displayed after the jackpot game is completed. The state (probability change state) is never set. That is, in this control example, at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends is not fixed. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, in the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the round game (V round game) in which the ball is most easily passed to the specific area (V gate) is performed. It is configured to be executed. Therefore, until the end of this V-round game, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game cannot be determined. By configuring so that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined by the game result during the jackpot game in this way, the player can receive various benefits (prize ball, high probability state of special symbol) in the jackpot game. It is possible to play a game to acquire a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the above-described configuration is used, the effect mode of the notification effect (for example, the effect mode of the jackpot ending period) for notifying the player of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set in advance (for example, the jackpot). It is not possible to set it (at the start of the game), and it is necessary to set the effect mode of the notification effect during the jackpot game in which the control process related to the exit of the ball and the control process related to the display are densely executed. There is a problem that the control process becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the probabilistic jackpot game is executed, the probabilistic variation state is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the production mode of the notification effect after the jackpot game ends. It is set, and immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of passing the ball to the specific area (V gate). When the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), the notification effect of the preset effect mode is executed, and the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate). It is configured to switch the production mode of the notification effect only to. In this way, when a normal game is performed during the jackpot game, the effect mode of the notification mode is set in advance assuming a game state that is easy to be set after the jackpot game ends, and an unexpected game state is set. By switching the effect mode of the notification mode only when it is determined that, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the control process for setting the effect mode of the notification effect during the jackpot game.

Further, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probabilistic jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the probabilistic jackpot game, which is advantageous for the player, has a longer ending period than the normal jackpot game. It is configured to be done. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner (during the jackpot game) that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is completed, before the probability variation state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game is completed, even if the notification to that effect is given for a long period of time, the player is only uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, if the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probabilistic jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during the probabilistic jackpot game. In addition, simply executing the process of switching the effect mode of the jackpot ending period to the effect mode executed during the ending period of the normal hit game causes a strange notification effect during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. There was a problem that it was executed. In addition, if a dedicated effect mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) in the probability variation jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (effect data) for that effect mode is prepared. ) Must be stored in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in advance, which causes a problem that the storage capacity increases.

On the other hand, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot). However, when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during the probabilistic jackpot game, only the production mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is compared with the latter half of the ending period of the normal hit game. It is configured to switch to the effect mode set in the above. As a result, there is no need to provide a dedicated production mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during the probabilistic jackpot game, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. Notification effect can be executed.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type. Is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification effect to be executed when the By executing the notification effect during the round period, the notification effect that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period may be configured to be executable, or for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuously executing the round effect executed during the final round period of the jackpot game and then executing the notification effect, the notification effect is configured to be executed for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period. Is also good.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is symmetrically configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the amount of benefits that the player can obtain is It suffices to configure so that there is no significant difference between the case where the left-handed game is performed and the case where the right-handed game is performed. The number of ball entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of balls entering the first entrance 64 is configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. It is more difficult to win the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is easier to win the prize ball than the left-handed game, but it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured to do so. In the case of such a configuration, the player can play the game by any game method in the normal state, that is, while the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is being executed. In a game in which a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 (a game in a time saving state or a probabilistic state), a right-handed game can be considered to be more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game. ..

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled in both the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 and the right area (right area) of the variable display unit 80, and is attached to the left side. The through gate 67 of the region is configured so that 1/2 of the ball flowing down the left region of the game board 13 can pass through. Further, the through gate 67 in the right side region is configured so that 1/2 of the ball flowing down the right side region of the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second symbol, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is performed. If the result is incorrect, the symbol "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is held up to once in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 described above. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is provided at one-third of the maximum number of holding lamps, and is symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this control example, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left side region of the game board 13 by the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only some of the balls flow down. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Below the variable display unit 80 (below the electric accessory 640), a ball launched by a left-handed game and flowing down the left-hand area and a ball launched by a right-handed game and flowing down the right-handed area can win a prize. A variable winning device 65 having an opening width of about 50 mm is provided. By providing the variable winning device 65 having a wide opening width in this way, the ball that has flowed down the left side of the electric accessory 640 by the left-handed game and the ball that has flowed down the right side of the electric accessory 640 by the right-handed game are variable. The winning device 65 can be made to win a prize.

Here, a specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 120 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow path of the ball winning the variable winning device 65. Is. As shown in FIG. 120 (a), a guide member 65d is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and a ball that flows down on the open / close door 65b in an open state and wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a is in the left-right direction. It is configured to flow down to.

Specifically, the ball that flows down the left side region and wins the specific winning opening 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide flow path 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d, and flows down the first opening 65a1. Is guided to. Further, the ball that flows down the right side region and wins the specific winning opening 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide flow path 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2. Will be done.

A ball detection sensor (65s1, 65s2) for detecting a ball that has won a prize in the variable winning device 65 is provided below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, and the ball detection sensor is provided. When a ball is detected, a payout control for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is executed. In this way, the opening (first opening 65a1) through which the ball that has flowed down the left side region and won the winning ball to the variable winning device 65 can pass, and the ball that has flowed down the right side region and won the winning ball to the variable winning device 65 passes through. By providing an opening (second opening 65b1) to be obtained and providing a ball detection sensor for each opening, even if the player plays a left-handed game during a jackpot game, a right-handed game is performed. However, it is possible to execute a game with no difference.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120 (b), the ball flow of the balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a will be described. As shown in FIG. 120 (b), the sphere that has passed through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first sphere detection sensor 65s1 and flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the taxiway 65e. , Either the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 flows down depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

A discharge port 65h1 is provided at the downstream end of the third flow path 65e3, and the ball flowing down the third flow path 65e3 enters the discharge port 65h and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which the ball that has entered the discharge port 65h1 flows down, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that have entered the discharge port 65h1.

The fourth flow path 65e4 is provided with a specific region (V gate) 65v, and a discharge port 65h2 into which a ball that has passed through the specific region (V gate) 65v enters is provided at the downstream end. A detection sensor for detecting a passing ball is provided in the specific area (V gate), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a predetermined period during the jackpot game. The detection result is stored in the box, and when the jackpot game ends, the game state after the jackpot game ends is set with reference to the stored result.

Here, the operation content of the switching valve 65y during the jackpot game will be described. The switching valve 65y is a variable member driven by a V-solenoid 209a (see FIG. 137) (not shown), and when the V-solenoid 209a is not energized (off state), a ball flowing down the second flow path 65e2 is moved. When the closed state (see FIG. 120 (b)) for flowing down to the third flow path 65e3 is maintained and the V solenoid 209a is energized (on state), the sphere flowing down the second flow path 65e2 is brought down to the fourth. It is configured to maintain an open state for flowing down into the flow path 65e4.

The V solenoid 209a is normally in the off state, and is driven and controlled so as to be in the on state only for a predetermined period during the jackpot game. Specifically, of the multiple round games executed during the jackpot game, the player turns on when a specific round game (first round game) is started, and the specific round game (first round) is turned on. The drive is controlled so that the game is turned off when the round game) is completed or when the game time of the specific round game elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds). That is, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game.

With this configuration, the variable winning device 65 can win a ball only when the jackpot game is executed (when the jackpot control is executed), and the variable winning device 65 is won. It is possible to make the sphere flow down to a specific region (V gate) 65v. In addition, the privilege given based on the passage of the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v (setting of the high probability state of the special symbol) is the end timing of the jackpot game (process executed at the end of the jackpot game). Because it is configured to be granted in, even if a fraudulent act of passing the ball to a specific area (V gate) 65v is performed at a timing other than during the jackpot game, the privilege is granted to the player. There is no.

In this control example, in the jackpot control process executed during the jackpot game, switching control for switching the switching valve 65y according to a predetermined rule based on the timing when a specific round game is started is executed. However, it may be configured to execute the switching control based on other triggers. For example, the start of the jackpot game may be used as the trigger for executing the switching control, or the jackpot may be executed. The end of the opening period of the game may be used as an opportunity to execute the switching control, or the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game is measured, and the measurement result becomes a specific number for the switching control. It may be an execution opportunity. Further, when the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 becomes a specific number as an trigger for executing the switching control, the number of balls in the entire jackpot game may be used as the discrimination target, or the number of balls in the round game unit may be used as the discrimination target. May be used as the discrimination target. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing during the jackpot game the state in which the ball can easily pass through the specific region (V gate) is set.

Further, the length of the opening period set when the jackpot game is executed and the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 65b may be configured to be different for each jackpot type. With this configuration, even if the same switching control is executed for the switching valve 65y regardless of the jackpot type, it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific region (V gate). It is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball easily reaches the specific area (V gate) 65v and a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the ball during the period in which is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the configuration of the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 121, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 137). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the flow of the game of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, the flow of the game in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in FIG. 136, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) and a probabilistic state (high probability state of a special symbol, normal) as a gaming state. It is configured so that three types of gaming states can be set: a high-probability state of the symbol (high-probability state of the symbol) and a short-time state (low-probability state of the special symbol, high-probability state of the normal symbol), and the initial state (at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10). In the state of (or the state after the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated (pressed)), the normal state is set.

Then, in the normal state, a game mainly of the first special symbol lottery, which is executed by inserting the ball into the first ball entrance 64, is executed. In the normal state where the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/200, and when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is "big hit A" (selection rate 1/2). And "Big hit B" (selection rate 1/2) are selected. When "Big hit A" is selected, a big hit game (probability variable big hit game) that makes it easy to pass the ball to a specific area (V gate) 65v is executed during the big hit game, and "Big hit B" is selected. Is executed, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is executed.

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed. In this probabilistic state, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) reaches 50 times, or when the jackpot is won, the end condition is satisfied and the game shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the probability change state is set and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 50 times, the game state is changed from the probability change state by the time the 51st special symbol lottery is executed. It shifts to the time saving state. In this control example, the process of shifting the game state from the probability change state to the time saving state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol change corresponding to the 50th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. , The 51st special symbol lottery does not have to be executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set. For example, immediately after the 50th special symbol lottery is executed (at the start of the 50th special symbol change). The game state may be shifted to, or just before the execution of the 51st special symbol lottery (the execution condition of the 51st special symbol lottery is satisfied, but the special symbol lottery is not executed). May be migrated.

Since the probabilistic state is a high-probability state of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640 is more likely to be opened by the game per normal symbol than the normal state, which is the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Is executed. In the probability variation state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to 1/50, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is "big hit C" ( One of the selection rate 3/10), "big hit D" (selection rate 4/10), and "big hit E" (selection rate 3/10) is selected.

"Big hit C" is a jackpot type in which a 4-round probabilistic jackpot game is executed, "Big hit D" is a jackpot type in which a 7-round probabilistic jackpot game is executed, and "Big hit E" is 16 rounds. This is the type of jackpot in which the probabilistic jackpot game is executed. That is, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, in terms of the execution probability of the probabilistic jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141. In this control example, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a 7-round game is always executed and a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, an average of 8.8 rounds (30% for 4 rounds, 40% for 7 rounds, 30% for 16 rounds) is executed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game. If a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a four-round game may be executed. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game can be the smallest in the second special symbol lottery. It will be the case when the big hit is won. Therefore, in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery.

Next, the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) will be described. If "Big hit B" is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, if the number of special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state exceeds 50 times, or if the ball is played during the probability change jackpot game. If it is not possible to pass through the specific region (V gate) 65v, a time saving state is set. This time saving state is configured to disappear when the number of special symbol lottery executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 100 times, or when the jackpot is won by the time it reaches 100 times. .. That is, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends (when the jackpot B is won), the time saving state is set for the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (time saving). The number of times is set to 100 times). On the other hand, when the number of special symbol lottery executed in the probabilistic state exceeds 50 times, the number of time reductions is set to 50 times after the probable change state ends.

During this time saving state, since the game state is such that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as in the above-mentioned probability change state, the electric accessory 640 is easily released, and the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. It becomes a state. In addition, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as that in the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. That is, from the viewpoint of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a jackpot probability lower than that in the probabilistic state, and the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the probabilistic state. That is, from the point of view of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is more disadvantageous to the player than the probabilistic state. In this control example, the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, during the probabilistic state. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery executed is different from the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. For example, the fluctuation time in the probabilistic state is shorter than that in the normal state. The special symbol variation may be configured to be feasible.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 138, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (C3) used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 167). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to entry into the first ball opening 64 composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding first). The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 composed of the fourth area) is provided, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is provided with the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 1 entry port 64, and the second special In the symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entry port 64. Each value of is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Among the various values stored in the hold 1st area of, the information of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol type to which the lottery is executed next is shifted to the special symbol execution area and stored. Special symbol variation based on various values is started.

In this control example, a configuration in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of special symbol may be one type. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type is satisfied. The various values stored in may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the various stored values may be started. With this configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Further, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol) as in this control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be performed. It may be configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is a special symbol. It may be configured to have an execution area. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

Further, in this control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a miss, but the lottery result is not limited to this, for example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss. It may be configured so that a player can win a small hit that can be given less privilege (a privilege different from that at the time of winning the big hit) than when the big hit is won. With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, it is possible to provide an opportunity to give the player a privilege, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and the special symbol lottery is executed. It may be configured to be referred to.

In addition, when it is configured so that a small hit can be won by a special symbol lottery, for example, the transition content of the gaming state based on the big hit winning and the transition content of the gaming state based on the small hit winning are configured to be different. For example, when a big hit is won, the game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the big hit game, and a new game state can be set after the big hit game is completed based on the set big hit type. When the small hit is won, the small hit game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of the small hit winning, and the game state may not be changed even after the small hit game is completed.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a wide variety of games because it is possible to make the transition of the game state and the content of the transition different depending on the winning type (big hit, small hit). can.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to entry (passing of a ball) into the through gate 67 composed of four holding areas (holding first area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol variation based on the value is started.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the first special of the RAM 203 is at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203a in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 140 (a). FIG. 140 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit is defined in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is defined to be different according to the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 4" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is the jackpot determination value. Other values (“5-999”) are specified as deviation determination values. Further, for the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 19" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values ( "20 to 999") is defined as the deviation determination value. That is, since the update range of the first random number table 202a is 1000 pieces of "0 to 999", the probability of being judged as a big hit is 1/200 (5 out of 1000 pieces) in the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being judged as a big hit is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the gaming state, but the probability of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of the gaming state. It may be configured so that three or more kinds of jackpot probabilities are set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol. You may simply make it possible to set three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set different jackpot probabilities for each state.

Further, in this control example, two types of lottery results, "big hit" and "missing", are determined as the lottery result of the special symbol, but in addition to this, as the third lottery result. , "Small hit" may be configured to be determinable as one type of "off". When this "small hit" is won, it is preferable to configure the variable winning device 65 to execute a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a shorter period (for one round) than the "big hit". With this configuration, a small amount of benefits (prize balls) can be given to the player even if the jackpot is not won. In addition, when "small hit" is one type of "off", it is possible to give a prize ball by the small hit game to the player, but since the big hit is not won, the game state is changed ( It is preferable to configure so that the process (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, the privilege given to the player based on the big hit winning and the privilege given to the player based on the small hit winning can be clearly different.

As described above, when the special symbol lottery result is configured so that the "small hit" can be won, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small hit" is specified in the first random number table 202a. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery of the special symbol can be executed by the same process, so that the main control is compared with the case where the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are executed by different processes. The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. Further, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of a big hit and a small hit in duplicate.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64. 1 The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection table 202c to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 141.

FIG. 141 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d is a special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a lottery of the second special symbol. It has a special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2, which is referred to when a jackpot is won.

First, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). FIG. 141 (b) is a schematic view showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1. As described above, the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and is the acquired first hit type counter C2. Different jackpot types are specified according to the value.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the jackpot is based on the range in which the value (update range "0 to 99") of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". As a type, "big hit A" is defined in association with each other. This "big hit A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 and the probability variation jackpot game is executed, and "100" is the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the jackpot game is completed, and the value of the probability variation counter 203i. Is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game (when not V), the probability variation counter 203ja is used after the jackpot game is completed. The value is set to "0". Further, "Big hit A" stipulates that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special hit type counter C2, 50 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit A", so in the first special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A" is determined is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 99" as the jackpot type "big hit B". This "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of big hit rounds is 7 and a normal big hit game is executed. After the big hit game is completed, "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the value of the probability variation counter 203ja. This is a jackpot type in which "0" is set. Further, "Big hit B" stipulates that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 50 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit B", so the lottery for the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B" is determined is 50% (50/100).

That is, the two jackpot types (big hit A, jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds in the jackpot game, but are in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. The ease with which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the above is different, and the "big hit A" causes the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game rather than the "big hit B". It is configured so that an easy jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, "big hit A" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit B".

Next, with reference to FIG. 241 (c), the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 241 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2. The special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 is a data table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241 (c), in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 in the first control example, the jackpot types of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are "big hit C" to "big hit E". Three jackpot types are specified.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the jackpot type is defined as "big hit C". Has been done. This "big hit C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 and the probability variation jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, "100" is the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and the value of the probability variation counter 203i. Is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game (when not V), the probability variation counter 203i will be used after the jackpot game is completed. The value is set to "0". Further, "Big hit C" stipulates that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the special hit type counter C2, 30 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit C", so in the second special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C" is determined is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "30 to 69" as the jackpot type "big hit D". This "big hit D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 and the probability variation jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "100", and the value of the probability variation counter 203i. Is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game (when not V), the probability variation counter 203i will be used after the jackpot game is completed. The value is set to "0". Further, "Big hit D" stipulates that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 40 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit D", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit C" is determined is 40% (40/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (c), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" as the jackpot type "big hit E". This "big hit E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 and the probability variation jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game is completed, "100" is the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and the value of the probability variation counter 203i. Is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game (when not V), the probability variation counter 203i will be used after the jackpot game is completed. The value is set to "0". Further, "Big hit E" stipulates that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the big hit game.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first hit type counter C2, 30 are the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "big hit E", so the lottery for the second special symbol In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit E" is determined is 30% (30/100).

That is, the three jackpot types (big hit C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are all executed probabilistic jackpot games, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is determined. The "big hit E", in which the most round games are executed, is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and the "big hit A" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

As explained above, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variation jackpot game is always executed, so the probability variation jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%, compared to the first special symbol lottery. In terms of the game state set after the jackpot game is completed, it is an advantageous jackpot type. In terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the maximum number that can be obtained is larger in the second special symbol lottery, and the minimum number that can be obtained. Also stipulates that the number of second special symbol lottery will be smaller. In addition, it is stipulated that the number of prize balls that can be obtained on average is larger in the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained under the minimum conditions, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous, and in other respects, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous. In this control example, the jackpot type shown in FIG. 241 is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various types are based on the same technical concept as each jackpot type that can be set in each of the above-mentioned control examples. The jackpot type may be configured to be set.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed in all the jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this. A different number of round games may be playable depending on the selected jackpot type. Further, in this control example, when a big hit is won by a lottery of a special symbol, the time saving state is set for the same period (100 times of the time saving number) after the big hit game is completed in all the big hits. Without limitation, it may be configured so that the time saving state is not set in a part of the jackpot winning (a part of the set jackpot type), or the number of time saving (time saving end condition) is made different depending on the jackpot type. It may be configured as follows. Further, depending on the selected jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot type in which a normal state is set may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. The motion type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode (variation time) such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 167) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 142) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal table 202b1 used in a state where the normal state is set as the game state and a state in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set. The probability variation / time saving table 202b2 used in the above is specified. Details will be described later, but in this control example, since the data table used to select the fluctuation pattern is different according to the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (b) and 143. FIG. 142B is a schematic view showing the contents specified in the normal table 202b1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202b1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and the fluctuation time is longer when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit than when it is out of the game. It is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern of is easily selected, and different fluctuation patterns are stipulated according to the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is executed and the result of the special symbol lottery executed.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (b). FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202b1. Various fluctuation patterns are defined in the normal table 202b1 according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. Specifically, the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19". In this case, a normal (reach) with a fluctuation time of 33 seconds to 42 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the addition time is configured to be set in 0.5 second units in more detail according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. For example, the acquisition is performed. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0", the addition time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the addition time is "3.5 seconds", and when it is "2", the addition time is added. When the time is "4 seconds" and "3", the addition time is "4.5 seconds", when the time is "3", the addition time is "5 seconds", and when it is "4", the addition time is added. When the time is "5.5 seconds" and "5", the addition time is "6 seconds", when the time is "6", the addition time is "6.5 seconds" and "7". When the addition time is "7 seconds" and "8", the addition time is "7.5 seconds", and when the addition time is "9 to 11", the addition time is "8 seconds" and "12". In the case, the addition time is "8.5 seconds", when it is "13", the addition time is "9 seconds", and when it is "14", the addition time is "9.5 seconds", "15". If it is, the addition time is "10 seconds", if it is "16", the addition time is "10.5 seconds", and if it is "17", the addition time is "11 seconds", "18". If it is, the addition time is defined as "11.5 seconds", and if it is "19", the addition time is defined as "12 seconds".

When a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the addition time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, they are included in the basic command. The variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information provided, and the reach symbol (type of the third symbol) is set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, the type of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is first visible to the player when the player is in the reach state, is always the specific third symbol (in this control example, the number 1 is added to the third symbol). Even if it is configured to be a symbol), the reach effect can be executed by various types of the third symbol without changing the period from the execution of the variable effect to the reach state.

Further, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When this super is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 13 seconds to 22 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is set in 0.5 second units in more detail according to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-mentioned normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

Here, in this control example, the effect mode of the reach effect is variably configured according to the information (seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, the number of seconds included in the addition command is ". In the case of "3 seconds to 12 seconds", the normal reach effect (the effect of stopping and displaying after the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates about one lap), and in the case of "13 seconds to 22 seconds", the super reach effect (middle symbol row). The effect of being stopped and displayed after Z2 fluctuates by about two laps) is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, for example, when a variable effect is executed in the same effect mode during the first predetermined period, and then a variable effect in which the effect mode branches is executed, the same effect mode is executed. It is possible to set the period based on the basic command (command containing information indicating the basic time) and set the fluctuation effect after branching based on the addition command (command containing information indicating the addition time). .. Therefore, for example, even if the total fluctuation time is the same, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily differ by simply changing the ratio of the basic time to the fluctuation time and the ratio indicated by the addition time. Variable effects can be set.

In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when the normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when the super reach is executed are made the same, and the fluctuation time set as the addition time is set. It is configured to change the production mode of the reach production according to the length of, but it is not limited to this, and the basic time for normal reach is specified as 30 seconds and the basic time for super reach is specified as 40 seconds. , The addition time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" only for determining the type of the third symbol.

Next, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an addition time of 35 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, the effect of switching the variation effect of the third symbol once in the reach state to another variation effect is executed, so that the player first becomes the player when the reach state is reached. Even if the type of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 that can be visually recognized is always set to a specific third symbol (in this control example, the third symbol with the number 1 added), the player is asked. Since it is possible to change the display order of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 in the middle of the fluctuation corresponding to the third symbol that finally stops without giving a sense of discomfort, as in the normal and super described above, It is not necessary to set the type of the third symbol that is in the reach state by changing the addition time.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the pass / fail judgment result is incorrect, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the fluctuation time is 8 seconds as the fluctuation pattern. The deviation is regulated. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a fluctuation pattern command. Here, when the disengagement is determined, as the variation effect of the third symbol, the variation effect in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the disengagement without being in the reach state is executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the addition time.

Further, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", the reach deviation of the fluctuation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When this reach loss is determined, a combination command indicating any of the basic time of 30 seconds and the addition time of 3 seconds to 22 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is set in 0.5 second units in more detail according to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, and the content is the same as the above-mentioned normal pattern. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. That is, even if the lottery result is out of order, the same variation pattern command as in the case where the lottery result is a win is set. If the lottery result is out of order, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed so that the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is not a combination that is a big hit. On the lamp control device 113 side, the correction process is executed so that the third symbol shifted by one from the setting content of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when the winning is won is set. As a result, when the reach-out effect is executed, it is possible to easily set the effect mode in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed (disengaged stop display) in the vicinity of the third symbol, which is a combination of big hits.

On the other hand, when the type of the special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99". Is defined as a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds and an addition time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command.

Here, in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation in the chance zone is as described above with reference to FIGS. 124 (b) to 126. It is configured so that the production is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the addition time (30 seconds) are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, they are included in the basic command. The fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation) is set based on the information provided, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when the basic command indicating the basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), as shown in FIG. 124 (b). An effect mode of a special variation effect in which the third symbol fluctuates in the vertical direction is set. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (a), an effect mode for displaying the stop display (temporary stop display) of the third symbol is set at the elapsed timing of the basic time. Then, when the addition command indicating the addition time of 0 seconds is received (when the fluctuation pattern is out of the special range), the third symbol is confirmed and displayed as it is, and the fluctuation effect is terminated.

On the other hand, when the addition command indicating the addition time of 30 seconds is received (when the fluctuation pattern is a special reach), the third is temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 125 (b) and 126. A variable effect is set in which the symbol restarts.

Next, the contents of the probability variation / time saving table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation / time saving table 202b2. The probability variation / time reduction table 202b2 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set, and is a type of special symbol and the number of variations (big hit game end). Each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected according to the number of changes in the special symbol afterwards), the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this control example, the high probability state (probability change state or time saving state) of the normal symbol is always set after the jackpot game is completed. Then, the set high-probability state of the normal symbol is configured to continue until the time saving end condition is satisfied. In this control example, as the time saving end condition, the first time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set reaches 100 times, and the high probability of the normal symbol. There is a second time saving end condition that is established when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery executed in the state where the state is set, and when any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the normal symbol It is configured to shift from a high-probability state to a low-probability state of a normal symbol.

During the high probability state (probability variation state, time saving state) of the normal symbol, a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is set so as to be easily selected. Therefore, since the number of special symbol lottery that can be executed per unit time can be increased, an efficient game (special symbol lottery game) can be provided to the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1 to 20 times" after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the type of special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery , It is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern (short fluctuation) having a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is selected regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, in the predetermined period after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times), the special symbol lottery is executed in a shorter fluctuation time than the other periods. It becomes a period (first period). By setting this high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to easily execute the next jackpot game in a short period of time after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can easily execute the next jackpot game in relation to one jackpot game. Can be made to think that has been executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is always selected during this high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to easily set the production period of the production (continuous production) that straddles a plurality of special symbol lottery. ..

In addition, if a big hit is won in a state where a normal state (low probability state of a normal symbol) is set, a reserved ball of the second special symbol is held at the end of the big hit game executed based on the big hit winning. Since there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 reserved ball) has not been acquired, it is easy to execute a special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) using the acquired first special symbol reserved ball (special figure 1 reserved ball). If a jackpot is won in a normal state in which a probability change state or a time saving state (high probability state of a normal symbol) is set, special figure 2 is reserved at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning. Since there is a high probability that the ball has been acquired, the special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) using the special figure 2 reserved ball becomes easy to be executed.

In this way, immediately after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special symbol lottery of any symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 143, it is normal. The same fluctuation pattern is selected for a predetermined period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times) after the high probability state of the symbol is set, regardless of the symbol type. As a result, the same special symbol variation can be executed regardless of which symbol type special symbol lottery is executed, and the production period of the production (continuous production) straddling a plurality of special symbol lottery is set. It can be made easier.

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game are set when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Is configured to reach the second entry port 640 at a rate of 1 ball to 2 balls, so it is only necessary to continuously execute the game of firing the ball during the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the special symbol lottery can be executed without interruption. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the period until the end of the high-speed fluctuation period, that is, the period until the end of the 20th special symbol variation (5 seconds x 20 times) is 100 seconds. Is set in advance as a high-speed fluctuation period, and a continuous effect of 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous effect straddling 20 special symbol lottery. In this case, only when the big hit is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is sufficient to execute the switching process for switching the effect mode of the continuous effect that has already been set, which simplifies the process for executing the effect during the high-speed fluctuation period. can do.

Further, a determination means for determining whether or not to temporarily stop the continuous effect for 100 seconds set during the high-speed fluctuation period is provided. For example, after the execution special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, the next When it is determined that the period until the special symbol change is executed is a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) or more, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol change is interrupted, the continuous effect being executed is temporarily performed. It may be configured to execute the process of stopping. As a result, even if the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the continuous production from proceeding first. In addition, an operating means (for example, a frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is provided, and when a predetermined operation is executed on the operating means, a process of temporarily stopping the continuous effect being executed is executed. It may be configured to do so.

In this control example, the same fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected during the high-speed fluctuation period. It may be configured so that a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time other than seconds is set is selected. In this case, it is preferable that the fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more is more easily set when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit than when the big hit is not won. With this configuration, it is possible to easily lengthen the period from switching the preset production mode of continuous production for 100 seconds until the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed. It is possible to notify the jackpot winning in a production mode in which the person can fully grasp the lottery result, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, for the time (100 seconds) assumed as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) is divided into a plurality of periods, for example, instead of setting the production mode of the continuous production at once. The first continuous effect to be executed during the first high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) is set at the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and the second continuous effect to be executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds). The effect may be configured to be set at the start timing of the second high-speed fluctuation period. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a situation occurs in which an effect mode (an effect mode in the latter half period of continuous effect) that is not executed when a big hit is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance. ..

Further, it is not necessary to execute the continuous effect for the entire period of the high-speed fluctuation period, and the special symbol variation (for example, 20 times in total) executed during the specific first period of the high-speed fluctuation period (for example, the high-speed fluctuation period). Of these, the continuous production may be executed only during the 10th to 20th fluctuation periods).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 143. The type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends) is "21 to 49 times (second period)". When the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is "30 seconds" in the entire range. It is stipulated that (hit) is selected, and if the lottery result is "missing", the fluctuation time is "30 seconds" with respect to the range of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 179". The fluctuation pattern (long deviation) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern (short deviation) with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

In this control example, when the high probability state (probability variation state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed. During the second period in which the special symbol variation is executed 21 times or more after the setting is made, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed as long as the game is continuously played. However, as described above in FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example reaches the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is performed. Since it has a configuration of a game board 13 capable of inserting a ball, for example, when the game is interrupted during a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the first special symbol lottery is executed after the game is restarted. In some cases.

As mentioned above, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, unlike the case where the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that the normal jackpot game will be executed (50% of the jackpot winning). 2 In the game state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed, if the jackpot game in which the normal jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery is won, the player will be selected as the jackpot winner. It will be a disadvantageous lottery result. Further, in this control example, in the variation effect (variation effect using the third symbol) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is also suggested to the player. It is possible to configure, for example, when the main symbol sz with an odd number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot winning, it suggests a jackpot winning in which the probability variation jackpot game is executed, and an even number When the main symbol sz with a number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot winning, it is configured to suggest a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is executed.

Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the variation effect executed during the time saving state, the main symbol sz with an even number is in the reach state (the main combination is a combination indicating the jackpot winning in which the normal jackpot game is executed). When a part of the symbol sz is stopped and displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner) is created, a disadvantageous jackpot is won from a point before the special symbol fluctuation is displayed in a variable manner. There was a problem that it made the player think that it was an even number, and the motivation to play was reduced. Therefore, in this control example, in the game state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, when the jackpot game in which the normal jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery is won, As shown in FIG. 131 (a), a variable effect (double reach) in which both the main symbol sz with an odd number and the main symbol sz with an even number are always in reach. The production) is configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he / she has won a disadvantageous jackpot from a time before the special symbol change is stopped and displayed.

In order to execute this double reach effect, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second period, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected. If the above-mentioned double reach effect is executed only when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery as the variable effect executed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the time when the double reach effect is executed. In this control example, a part of the case where the player loses the prize in the first special symbol lottery (about 80%) and the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. A variation pattern (30 seconds variation time) for executing a double reach effect, with a part of the winning case (about 25%) and a part of the case of losing in the second special symbol lottery (about 5%). ) Is selected.

With this configuration, when the double reach effect is executed during the probability change state or the time saving state, whether the corresponding special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the lottery result is a big hit, and it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation until the production result of the double reach effect is displayed.

Furthermore, since the double reach effect is also executed for the second special symbol lottery in which the probability change jackpot game is always executed when the jackpot is won, the probability variation jackpot game is performed for the entire double reach effect. The effect result indicating that the jackpot is won (the effect result that the main symbol sz with an odd number stops and displays in the combination indicating the jackpot win) is double-reached only for the first special symbol lottery. It can be made easier to create than when executing. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the probabilistic jackpot game when the double reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description will be continued. When the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends) is "50 times (specific period)", It is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern (medium fluctuation) having a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" is selected regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of a special symbol) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this control example, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed. As the probability variation end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the first probability variation end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 50 times and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. There is a second probability change end condition that is satisfied when the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state of being present, and when any of the probability change end conditions is satisfied, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability of the special symbol. It is configured to transition to the state.

That is, according to the game result during the jackpot game, a probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set until the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 50 times after the end of the jackpot game. After that, the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set until the number of executions of the special symbol reaches 50 times, and the number of executions of the special symbol change is 100 times after the jackpot game is completed. There are cases where a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set until it becomes.

The display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a game state suggestion effect for suggesting the currently set game state to the player. For example, a ball is specified during a jackpot game. When the V notification effect for notifying that the area (V gate) 65v has been passed is executed, the notification effect (super chance mode effect) for notifying the player that the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is executed. If the effect mode during the jackpot game is set so that the V notification effect is not executed even when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the current game state is set. A common effect (chance mode effect) that makes it difficult to understand whether is in a probable state is executed.

Then, when the super chance mode effect is executed, the probability change state ends at the 50th special symbol change (specific period), so that the 50th special symbol change is set to "20 seconds". The variation time of "" is used to execute an effect indicating that the probability change state ends and then the chance mode (time reduction) is set. In addition, when the chance mode is executed, an effect suggesting whether or not the probability change state has been set is executed in a specific period.

In this way, using the special symbol change period for showing the lottery result of the special symbol in the specific period, information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (information for guiding the transition of the game state or set in the past). Information other than the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained by fixing the fluctuation time of the selected special symbol fluctuation when executing the information notification effect for notifying the player of the game state that has been played. It is possible to reduce the variation of the effect mode (including the effect time) of the information notification effect for notifying the player.

In this control example, the execution period of the special symbol variation (50th special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot) at which the probability variation state ends is set as a specific period, and the variation time of the special symbol variation is fixed to "20 seconds". However, not limited to this, the execution period of the 45th to 52nd special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot is a specific period (fixed), including before and after the special symbol change that ends the probability change state. The information notification effect may be configured to be feasible by using the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the specific period (the period during which the specified fluctuation time is selected).

Further, the effect mode of the information notification effect may be changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the above-mentioned specific period. For example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, it is in a probable change state. It may be changed to an effect mode that does not notify the information indicating that the game ends, or the game state set in the past (the game set after the end of the previous jackpot game) regardless of the actually set game state. The state) may be changed to an effect mode indicating that the game state is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a time saving state).

In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period may be changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery. For example, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot is not won. Rather, it is preferable that the execution timing of the information notification effect is likely to be delayed. As a result, not only the effect content of the information notification effect but also the execution timing can be interested in the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as in the above-mentioned example, when the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period is changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the information notification effect is executed in advance at the specific timing. When the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (for example, a big hit), the timing at which the information notification effect is executed is changed from the above-mentioned specific timing. Alternatively, one execution timing may be determined from a plurality of execution timings according to the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period without setting the timing at which the information notification effect is executed in advance. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends) is "51 to 100 times (third period). When the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is "30 seconds" in the entire range. It is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern (hit) of is selected, and when the lottery result is "off", the fluctuation time is "0" for the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. It is stipulated that the fluctuation pattern (long deviation) of "30 seconds" is selected, and the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds" (second super fluctuation) is selected for the range of "180 to 198". ..

This third period is a period in which the gaming state is in a reduced working hours state. That is, even if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, it is the period during which the probability change end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is set. During this third period, as in the second period described above, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game method to be executed. Since it is more advantageous for the player to execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state than to execute the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery executed during this third period Is configured to facilitate the selection of fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time saving state, the first special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern in which the long variation time is set. In addition, it is possible to easily acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol lottery from being frequently executed during the time saving state.

In addition, since the double reach effect (see FIG. 131) is configured to be executed during the third period as well as during the second period described above, if a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, it will be missed. It is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for a part of the winning, a part of the case where the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, and a part of the case where the winning is missed.

Next, the contents of various fluctuation patterns defined for the second special symbol lottery when the probability change state or the time saving state is set will be described.

As shown in FIG. 143, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends) is "1 to 20 times (1 to 20 times). In the case of "1st period)", the fluctuation pattern (short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is determined regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of a special symbol) and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. It is specified to be selected. That is, during the first period, the same fluctuation pattern (5-second variation) is selected depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is executed or the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends) is "21 to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) is "win". The value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", and the fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) of the fluctuation time is "10 seconds" is in the range of "150 to 198". , It is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected, and if the lottery result is "off", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 191". A fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is selected for the range of "192 to 198", and a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the range of "192 to 198". It is specified to be selected.

During the second period, which is a high-probability state (probability variation state, time saving state) of the normal symbol in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the fluctuation pattern (30-second fluctuation time) in which the above-mentioned double reach effect is executed is set. A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is selected except for the fluctuation pattern). That is, the second special symbol variation is completed in a short period of time in a state where the ball can be easily entered into the second entry port 640, and the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second entry port 640 while the reserved balls in Special Figure 2 are stored up to the upper limit, which makes the player feel good. You can play a good game.

In this control example, "10 seconds" is specified as a short-time fluctuation time, but this fluctuation time may be specified to be even shorter. In this case, the ball fired at the game board 13 is the first. It is preferable to specify a time (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the interval (about 1.2 seconds) that can reach the 2 entry port 640. With this configuration, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decreasing even though the player is continuously firing balls, and it is set to be non-priority over the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game ends) is "50 times (specific period)", the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired variation type counter. Regardless of the value of CS1, it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern (medium fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" is selected. Since the fluctuation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the fluctuation pattern selected in response to the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends) is "51 to 100 times (third period). When the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the fluctuation time is "10 seconds" with respect to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149". The fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) stipulates that a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the range of "150 to 198", and the lottery result is ". In the case of "off", a fluctuation pattern (short fluctuation) in which the fluctuation time is "5 seconds" is selected with respect to the range in which the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 191", and the range is in the range of "192 to 198". It is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected.

As described above, in the first control example, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b includes the normal table 202b1 and the probability variation / time saving table 202b2, depending on the set gaming state. , The data table to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different. As a result, the type of variation pattern selected according to the set gaming state can be different, and the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player with various variation patterns. Can be improved.

Further, it is configured to select the variation pattern by referring to the same data table (probability variation / time reduction table 202b2) when the probability variation state is set as the game state and when the time reduction state is set. ing. Therefore, it is selected in response to the special symbol lottery to be executed in the state where the "chance mode", which is an effect mode that makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is set or the probability change state is set, is set. Depending on the type of fluctuation pattern to be performed, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the set gaming state. In this control example, the data table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the probabilistic state and the data table referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state are the same. It is not limited to, and may be configured to refer to different data tables.

In this case, a probability variation data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation state and a time saving data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the time saving state are provided, and a small probability ( For example, as the type of fluctuation pattern selected in 5%), it is preferable to provide a specific fluctuation pattern specified in only one data table. As a result, the player can grasp the currently set gaming state based on the type of the selected variation pattern only when the specific variation pattern is selected.

In addition, the probability variation data table and the time saving data table may be configured so that the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected is different. With this configuration, it is fun to let the player predict the currently set gaming state by analyzing the bias of the fluctuation pattern selected for the special symbol lottery executed during the "chance mode". Can be provided.

As described above, in this control example, the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern is configured to be different depending on the game state to be set, but the reference is made according to conditions other than the game state. It may be configured to select the data table to be played. For example, when the time saving state is set after the big hit game is completed, the game state set at the time of the previous big hit winning or the game state set at the time of the previous big hit winning is set. The jackpot type (stop display mode of the special symbol), the display mode of the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and whether or not the ball has passed to the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game. Based on the result of (whether or not the V prize is won) or the like, the data tables referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern in the same time saving state may be configured to be different.

In this case, when setting a command indicating the selected fluctuation pattern (variation pattern command), it is preferable to set a command including information indicating the type of the referenced data table (variation pattern selection table). .. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, it is possible to determine not only the type of the fluctuation pattern set this time but also the background of the setting of the current gaming state. Therefore, based on the received fluctuation pattern command, for example, it is determined that the ball cannot be won a V prize and the time saving state is set even though the probability variation jackpot game is executed, and the dedicated production mode ( For example, "sorry mode") can be set.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 299, the maximum value (that is, 299) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the hit set by, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second hit random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for the low probability time of the normal symbol and the other for the high probability time where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time, and each of them is included. The number of random numbers that will be big hits is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

The contents specified in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 140 (b). FIG. 140 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired second random number counter C4 defines the normal symbol as a value of "0 to 2", and the normal symbol has a high probability. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 149".

That is, in this control example, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (1/100) is set to the low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low-probability state of the normal symbol, and the time-saving state, which is the high-probability state of the normal symbol, during the normal state. Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the game per game, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 when the game per game is executed during the normal state. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to the high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the normal symbol winning game based on the winning of the normal symbol in the time saving state.

Further, in this control example, the fluctuation time of a different length is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation for showing the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state, which is normal. It is configured so that a longer fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the low probability state of the symbol is set than when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In this way, by changing the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation according to the game state, the winning in the normal symbol lottery is won and the second entry slot 640 is reached. It is possible to easily set a game state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the ball can be easily inserted.

Further, in this control example, when a winning prize is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, a plurality of balls are inserted into the second entry port 640. The electric accessory 640 is opened in an operation mode (long open) that enables the game to be executed. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in a normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. Even in the set state, it is possible to leave the possibility that the second special symbol lottery is executed for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 137, the description will be continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. 138. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 139 (a). FIG. 139 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 139 (a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment includes a first random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a jackpot type selection table. It has at least 202d. The first random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d have been described above when the various counters shown in FIG. 138 are described, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. ..

Returning to FIG. 137, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 138, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 167) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 166) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 165) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball number. Counter 203d, 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, probability variation counter 203i, jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot middle flag 203k, probability variation setting flag 203m, It has a probability variation passing counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a probability variation effective flag 203r, a probability variation effective timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

In the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, various counter values acquired based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this control example). It is a storage area for storing.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has various counter values acquired based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting winning) up to the upper limit number (4 in this control example). It is a storage area for storing.

The special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol are stored, and when the special symbol stops fluctuating, the first special symbol holding ball is stored. When various counter values are stored in the storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area are executed. When various counter values are stored in any of 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area and stored.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) when the start winning prize is detected. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), the value of each counter C1 to C3 or CS1 is detected from the counter buffer. Are acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, respectively. Further, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (starting prize), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is used. Store each.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 values) stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above and corresponding to each start winning prize. The data corresponding to the start winning prize of is shifted to this special symbol reservation ball execution area. The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is a storage area in which the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) is stored when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. be. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. Is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (value of the counter C4) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of being digested earlier. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning prize, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (value of counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol is held in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize (value of the random number counter C4 per second) stored in the ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one start winning prize is stored in this normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). ). The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is based on the winning of the second ball entry port 640 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to four times. The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

When each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 has a special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). The data stored in (1) is referred to in the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S301 in FIG. 158), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f allows the ball to pass through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time based on the above. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state (setting status of the time reduction counter 203h, setting of the probability change counter 203i) set after the jackpot game ends. The game state corresponding to the situation) is stored. Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 0, the normal state is stored, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, and the probability variation counter 203i When the value is 0, the time saving state is stored, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value larger than 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is a value larger than 0, the probability variation state is stored.

Further, in the state where the jackpot game is being executed, there is also a hit game state (big hit state) indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game. It is configured to be remembered. In addition, it is configured to store information during the game per game, which indicates that the game per game is being executed.

Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the subordinate state setting area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 166), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is set.

As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the current gaming state.

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is set. After the jackpot game is completed, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set in the time saving counter 203h (see S2103 in FIG. 170). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege during the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time saving counter 203j is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation), and the time saving counter 203h When the value of is 0, the high-probability state of the normal symbol ends and the state shifts to the low-probability state of the normal symbol. May be configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol continues until is executed (until the jackpot is won). In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol and a condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h. Only the condition to be subtracted is set, but the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, for example, when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied. It may be configured to do so. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special out-of-order winning), or when the ordinary symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special drawing), the value of the time saving counter 203h may be subtracted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1, but a plurality of values of the time saving counter 203h are grouped together according to the type of the satisfied end condition (for example, 2). It may be configured to be subtracted, or it may be configured to subtract so that the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203h. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Further, the condition for ending the time saving state may be different depending on the content of the condition for setting the time saving state (big hit type). As a result, not only the player can be made to execute the jackpot game, but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interested, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The probability variation counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the case where the high probability state of the special symbol is set is set. A value is set in the probability variation counter 203i after the jackpot game is completed, based on the fact that the ball has passed the specific region (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (see S2102 in FIG. 170). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, since the high probability state of the special symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege during the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation), and the probability variation counter 203i When the value of is 0, the high-probability state of the special symbol ends and the state shifts to the low-probability state of the special symbol. May be configured so that the high-probability state of the special symbol continues until is executed (until the jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the probability variation counter 203i may be set to "10000".

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203i. Only the condition to be subtracted is set, but the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied. It may be configured to do so. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special out-of-order winning), or when the ordinary symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special drawing), the value of the probability variation counter 203i may be subtracted.

Further, the value set in the probability variation counter 203i may be different based on the winning jackpot type and the passing status of the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v, or the value of the time reduction counter 203h described above may be subtracted. The value of the probability variation counter 203i may be subtractable according to conditions other than the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, or when the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203i is satisfied, the probability variation is changed. A plurality of values of the counter 203i may be subtractable at one time. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp how long the high-probability state of the special symbol will continue, so that the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the high-probability state of the special symbol can be watched without getting tired. Can be done.

Further, in this control example, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) as a condition for terminating the probability variation state, that is, a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203i. Only the condition is set, but the value is not limited to this, and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied. It may be configured as. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special out-of-order winning), or when the normal symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special drawing), the value of the probability variation counter 203i may be subtracted, or the ball may be a specific entry port (for example, the first ball). The value of the probability variation counter 203i may be subtracted based on the ball entering the ball (1 entry port 64, 2 entry entry port 640, etc.).

In addition, in this control example, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted by 1, but a plurality of values of the probability variation counter 203i are grouped together according to the type of termination condition that is satisfied (for example, 2). It may be configured to be subtracted, or it may be configured to subtract so that the value of the probability variation counter 203i becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the probability variation counter 203i. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the probabilistic state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game in the probabilistic state.

Further, the condition for terminating the probabilistic state may be different depending on the content of the condition for setting the probable change state (big hit type). As a result, not only the player can be made to execute the jackpot game, but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interested, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not to start the jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203j is on, it means that it is the timing to start the jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start the jackpot. The jackpot start flag 203j is set to on when the end timing of the variation display indicating the jackpot is reached. Further, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to off when the jackpot start is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203k is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203k becomes a jackpot by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on when the jackpot game (special game state) is started (see S1903 in FIG. 168). Further, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot game (special game state) (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 157), the jackpot hit flag 203k is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is hit (see S201 in FIG. 157).

The probability change setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probabilistic state is determined by inserting the ball into a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the ball (flows down). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) into the specific area (V gate) 65v (passage of the probability change switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the probability change setting flag 203m is turned on. (See S2215 in FIG. 171). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203m is set to off at the end of the jackpot game (see S2105 in FIG. 170). The probability variation setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

If the probability change setting flag 203m is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch has passed, the probability change setting flag 203m May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passage counter 203n, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203m is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed the probability variation switch (flowed down a specific area) in one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round of the jackpot). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the balls that have won the prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passing counter 203n and the discharge number counter 203t described later. The probability variation passage counter 203n is updated by adding one by one when the sphere passes through the probability variation switch (flows down a specific area). Further, after executing the determination process of whether or not the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0". The probability variation pass counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203o is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected. Based on this, it is added and updated one by one. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203o) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203t and the probability variation passing counter 203n) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball brushing period after one round is completed and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that it is a ball brushing period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203q, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter for.

The remaining ball timer 203q is the time required for the balls winning the variable winning device 65 to be ejected when the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the balls that have won the prize in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203q. It is set as the upper limit of. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match. NS. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65.

If the number of prizes and the number of discharges do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if that flag is on, the probability change setting flag 203m is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch. It may be configured not to be set to. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability variation effective flag 203r passes when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after the switching valve 65y switches the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v in an arrangement that cannot be distributed. It is a flag for determining whether or not (entry ball) is valid. When the probability variation effective flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the specific region (V gate) 65v.

The probability change effective timer 203s is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203r is set to ON. The probability change effective timer 203s can determine the period required for the switching valve 65y to normally pass through the probability change switch after the switching valve 65y is switched to the arrangement in which the ball cannot flow down the specific region (V gate) 65v. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball reaching the switching valve 65y to pass through the probability change switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the probabilistic valid timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if it passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to have passed.

As a result, the game ball can be illegally entered into a specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and passed through the probability change switch, or the game ball can be pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch to pass through. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as falsely detecting that the magnetic sensor has passed.

The discharge number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203t is reset to the initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharges.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character for production (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command to output audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command to make the lamp display device 227 emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents specified in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal medium special drawing 2 effect selection table 222b, a probability change intermediate effect selection table 222c, and continuous advance notice execution selection. At least the table 222d, the V notification execution selection table 222e, and the button operation effect selection table 222f are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variation effect (see FIG. 123) in which the third symbol is variablely displayed by side-scrolling in response to the special symbol variation to be executed. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. By visually recognizing the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation this time is a big hit.

In the normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222b, among the second special symbol fluctuations executed while the normal state is set, the effect of the third symbol when the variation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected. It is a data table referred to when selecting an aspect, and corresponds to the values of the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the second special symbol lottery, the number of special figures 2 held, the number of special figures 1 held, and the effect counter 223f. Different production modes (production contents) are specified.

In this control example, if a winning is won by a normal symbol lottery in a state where a normal state is set, a game per normal symbol is executed in which the electric accessory 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Then, the second special symbol lottery can be executed by letting the ball enter the second entrance 640 during the game per game. That is, in a gaming state (normal state) in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (when a winning figure is won), during a predetermined period (during the game period per regular figure). ), It is configured so that the lottery opportunity (special figure 2 reserved ball) of the second special symbol lottery can be easily obtained (the ball can be easily entered into the second entry port 640).

In the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142 (b)), the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is "10 seconds" and the fluctuation time is "40 seconds". When the second special symbol lottery is executed in which the fluctuation pattern of the above is selectable and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time is "40 seconds" is executed, the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b is displayed. The effect mode of the variable effect is set with reference to it.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the contents of the normal middle special drawing 2 effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium special drawing 2 effect selection table 222b. The normal middle special figure 2 effect selection table 222b shows the third symbol when the fluctuation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol fluctuations executed while the normal state is set. It is a data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the variable effect, and is the value of the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the second special symbol lottery, the number of special figures 2 held, the number of special figures 1 held, and the effect counter 223f. Different production modes (production contents) are defined in correspondence with.

As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142 (b)), in this control example, when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, it corresponds to the basic time (10 seconds) and is common. An off-reach effect is executed (see FIG. 125 (a)), and then a pseudo-variable effect (FIG. 125 (b) to 126) is configured to be executed during the addition time (30 seconds).

Specifically, when the lottery result is a big hit and the special figure 2 hold number is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 hold number fluctuates in the range of "0 to 79". "Pseudo 3 effect" is specified as a pattern, and "special pseudo 2 effect" is specified as a variation pattern in the range of "80 to 99". When the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of this is in the range of "0 to 99" and the variation pattern is "pseudo 2 effect" and the number of special figure 2 hold is 1, it is acquired regardless of the number of special figure 1 hold. The value of the effect counter 223f is defined as a variation pattern of "pseudo 1 effect" in the range of "0 to 89", and a variation pattern of "special pseudo 4 effect" in the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, when the lottery result is a big hit and the special figure 2 hold number is 0, the "special end effect" is when the special figure 1 hold number is 1 to 4, and when the special figure 1 hold number is 0. "Pseudo-less production" is set.

When the lottery result is out of order, when the special figure 2 hold number is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 hold number is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is ". When "pseudo 3 effect" is specified and the special figure 2 hold number is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 hold number is in the range of "0 to 99", and the variation pattern is ". When the special figure 2 hold number is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 hold number is in the range of "0 to 99", and the "pseudo 1 effect" is used as a variation pattern. However, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0, "pseudo-less effect" is specified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the effect mode of the pseudo-variation effect of the second special symbol, the presence / absence of the special figure 2 hold number and the special figure 1 hold number is determined, and then executed. It is configured to execute a pseudo-variable effect in an effect mode corresponding to a special symbol lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier to think that the pseudo-variation effect executed during one special symbol variation period is as if it were a variation effect corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Further, since the number of pseudo fluctuations (the number of temporary stops of the third symbol) executed in the pseudo fluctuation effect is configured to correspond to the number of reserved special figures 2 that have already been acquired, it is in the normal state. It is possible to make it think that all the special figure 2 hold acquired during the game per normal figure executed in is used. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation effect in which the jackpot is won is executed, the player thinks that the jackpot was won as a result of acquiring many special figure 2 holds during the game per normal figure executed in the normal state. Can be made. In addition, when the pseudo-variation effect that is won out is executed, the variation effect using the special figure 2 hold is executed next after making it think that all the special figure 2 hold has been exhausted (chance zone). (Because of the continuation), it is possible to provide the player with a unique effect.

Further, in this control example, since the pseudo-variation effect (special pseudo-two effect, pseudo-four effect) that is set only when the jackpot is won is provided, the number of pseudo-variation times executed in the pseudo-variation effect and the special figure It is possible to make the player interested in the number of reservations.

Next, the contents of the effect selection table 222c during probabilistic change will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect selection table 222c during probabilistic change. In the probabilistic change effect selection table 222c, a variation pattern having a basic time of 30 seconds was selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state (time saving state), that is, during the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is a data table that is referred to when setting the variation effect in the case. The probabilistic change effect selection table 222c is referred to when setting the effect mode of the variation effect for the special symbol variation to be executed, and is executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182). FIG. 1 In the effect mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183), the player is in the “super chance mode” which is the effect mode for notifying the player that the player is in the probabilistic state (S5005: Yes in FIG. 183). A special figure executed when the fluctuation time (basic fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be executed is "30 seconds" (S5007: Yes in FIG. 183) or in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182). 2 In the effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184), the player is in the "super chance mode" which is the effect mode for notifying the player that the state is in the probable change state (S5112: Yes in FIG. 184), and this time it is executed. It is referred to when the fluctuation time (basic fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be performed is “30 seconds” (S5114: Yes in FIG. 184).

In this control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the jackpot that can be won only in the first special symbol lottery (the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed) is won. , In order to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the 1st special symbol lottery before the stop display is displayed, when a big hit is won in the 1st special symbol lottery, it is normal. The third symbol (third symbol with an even number) to indicate the jackpot winning in which the jackpot game is executed, and the third symbol (odd number) to indicate the jackpot winning in which the probability variation jackpot game is executed The attached third symbol) and is configured to perform a double reach effect in which both are in a reach state.

Further, when the above-mentioned double reach effect is executed in the probabilistic state, which is a high probability state of the normal symbol, or the time saving state, the player is informed that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery. In order to make it difficult to grasp, the above-mentioned double reach effect is also executed in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variation jackpot game is always executed when the big hit is won. Further, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which are executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, are configured so that the variation pattern with the variation time of "30 seconds" can be selected. This is configured so that the double reach effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds" is selected. In this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, the same fluctuation time (30 seconds) is set and the double reach effect that is the same variation effect is executed. Therefore, depending on the variation effect to be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the symbol type of the special symbol change during execution, and by sharing the effect data used for the variation effect, various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 are performed. It is possible to reduce the amount of production data used for.

As shown in FIG. 146, the effect selection table 222c during probabilistic change has different effect modes depending on the symbol type (type of special symbol), the lottery result (result of the special symbol lottery), and the value of the effect counter 223f. It is stipulated. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot (big hit A), the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49". "Double reach" is specified in the range of "50 to 99" for "probability change single reach", "double reach" is specified when it is a normal jackpot (big hit B), and "non-reach" is specified when it is off. There is.

If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot, the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and "special double reach" is set to " "Probability variation double reach" is defined in the range of "50 to 99", and in the case of deviation, "double reach" is in the range of "0-4" and "double reach" is in the range of "5-10". "Probability variable double reach" is defined as "non-reach" in the range of "11 to 99".

With this configuration, both when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the probabilistic state, "double reach" (normal hit shown in FIG. 131 (a)). Since the reach effect) in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the above are in the reach state) is executed, any of the cases when the "double reach" is executed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the third symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery is being executed.

Further, when the "special double reach" is set, the effect mode of the "double reach" is first set, and then the effect mode is changed to the "probability variable double reach" shown in FIG. 131 (b). Is executed. Therefore, even if the "double reach" is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, the game can be performed while expecting to be promoted to the "probability change double reach" on the way. In this "special double reach", the timing at which the effect mode of the reach effect is changed is the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 makes one or two laps, but the player is not limited to this and the operation button 22 The effect mode may be changed based on the timing of operating.

In addition, when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed in the normal state, when the fluctuation pattern (special deviation) of the fluctuation time "10 seconds (basic time 10 seconds, addition time 0 seconds)" is selected, After the disengagement reach effect shown in FIG. 125A is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the disengagement as it is. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern (special hit) with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds (basic time 10 seconds, addition time 0 seconds)" is selected, a display mode indicating a jackpot winning after a symbol fluctuation of 10 seconds ( For example, at "777"), the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this way, as the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed in the normal state, a special variation pattern in which the variation effect is pseudo-executed a plurality of times during one special symbol variation period and one time. By providing a normal fluctuation pattern that executes one fluctuation effect during the special symbol fluctuation period of the above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing a new second special symbol fluctuation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the chance zone will continue.

In addition, the greater the number of variable effects (including pseudo) executed in the chance zone, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, so the player can play the game while expecting the chance zone to continue for a long time. Can be done.

In addition, in this control example, the same time as one pseudo-variation time (10 seconds) executed in the special variation pattern in which the variation effect is executed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during one special symbol variation period. Since the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal fluctuation pattern is specified so as to be, for example, after the second special symbol fluctuation executed in the special fluctuation pattern, the second special symbol fluctuation executed in the normal fluctuation pattern is performed. When executed, the variation effect for 10 seconds is repeatedly executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the pseudo-variation effect is repeatedly executed as the special variation pattern or whether the special variation pattern and the normal variation pattern are continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the new second special symbol change is executed, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the chance zone will continue.

In this control example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "40" seconds is selected as the second special symbol fluctuation in the normal state, the fluctuation effect of the special fluctuation pattern is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation time other than "40 seconds" may be selectably configured as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed in the normal state. Further, in this control example, the pseudo-variation time, which is a part of the variation effect of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds, and when the jackpot expectation is high, the pseudo-variation effect is performed with a length other than 10 seconds. It is configured to be easy to execute. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the execution period of one variable effect will be long.

Returning to FIG. 144 (a), the description will be continued. The continuous advance notice execution selection table 222d is a continuous advance notice effect that is executed over a period of a plurality of special symbol changes based on the winning information (whether or not a jackpot is won) included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110 side. It is a data table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to satisfy the execution condition of. Here, when the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied, a special effective time for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the special effective time, the continuous advance notice effect is executed.

When this continuous notice effect is executed, it shifts to a background mode (sky mode) different from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a special symbol corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition is satisfied is satisfied. A continuous effect is executed using the period until the result of the lottery is displayed. Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, among the periods in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high-speed fluctuation period (the 20th special symbol change after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set). Is configured so that the background mode is less likely to shift based on the operation of the frame button 22 as compared with other periods. Even during such a high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

Further, unlike the normal background mode transition, the background mode transition with a higher expectation of winning a big hit can be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, during the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation tends to be shorter than in other periods, so if the background mode is changed as in other periods, the important special symbol lottery result will be overlooked. Since there is a risk that it will end up, it is configured so that it is difficult to shift to the background mode. However, when the background mode is shifted based on the execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect using the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuations is executed a plurality of times, so that the continuous notice is immediately announced after the transition to the background mode. The production result of the production is not displayed. Therefore, even if the background mode transition is executed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Further, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to execute an effect (operation effect) other than the transition to the background mode, and the player is enthusiastic even during the high-speed fluctuation period. It is configured to prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage by operating the frame button 22. Among them, by executing the background mode transition based on the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Here, the contents of the continuous advance notice execution selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 147 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous advance notice execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 147 (a), in the continuous advance notice execution selection table 222d, the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) included in the received winning information and the number of special figures 2 held (the reserved ball of the second special symbol) are displayed. It is stipulated whether or not the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied in correspondence with the number) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, the lottery result is "big hit", the special figure 2 hold number is "3", and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 79". However, in the range of "80 to 198", "no continuous notice" is defined in which the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is not satisfied. Further, in the range where the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is "4" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", the "continuous advance notice" in which the execution condition of the continuous advance advance effect is satisfied is "with continuous advance notice". In the range of "150 to 198", "no continuous notice" is defined in which the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is not satisfied.

On the other hand, in the range where the lottery result is "off", the special figure 2 hold number is "3", and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 194", the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is not satisfied. In the range of "no continuous notice" and "195 to 198", "with continuous notice" in which the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is satisfied is defined. Further, in the range where the special figure 2 hold number is "4" and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 189", the "continuous advance notice no" for which the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is not satisfied is changed to "no continuous advance notice". In the range of "190 to 198", "with continuous notice" is defined, in which the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is satisfied.

As described above, in this control example, the larger the number of special figures 2 held, the easier it is for the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect to be satisfied, and further, the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is more than the case where it is out of order. It is configured so that the execution condition of the continuous notice effect can be easily satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game (a game in which a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640) in order to cause the player to perform a continuous advance notice effect, and the pachinko machine can be used. The operation of 10 can be increased. In addition, the larger the number of special figures 2 held, the higher the expectation of a big hit when the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is satisfied. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous advance notice effect with high expectation of big hit, it is possible to enthusiastically perform a game (a game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640), and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is enhanced. be able to.

In this control example, when a prize information command (a prize information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110 side, only whether or not the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is satisfied with reference to the continuous notice execution selection table 222d. Is configured to determine (determine), and even if the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied, the continuous advance notice effect is not executed at that time, and within a specific period after the execution condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the continuous notice effect is executed when the frame button 22 is operated in. As a result, when a plurality of balls enter the second entrance 640 during one special symbol change period and a plurality of prize information commands are received, the prize information for which the execution condition is satisfied is played. It can be difficult for people to understand. Therefore, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous advance notice effect will continue, and it is possible to prevent the production content of the continuous advance notice effect from becoming monotonous.

In this control example, as described above, the player is configured not to notify (suggest) that the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect has been satisfied, but the execution condition is not limited to this. May be configured to execute a notification (suggestion) effect for notifying (suggesting) the player. For example, by displaying the character "waiting" in the sub-display area Ds, a continuous advance notice effect can be produced. It may be configured to notify (suggest) the player that the execution condition is satisfied. With this configuration, when the notification (suggestion) effect is executed, the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically operated to execute the continuous advance notice effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), it is determined that the valid period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is set (that the valid period is in progress). As an effective period notification mode that can be notified to a person, the icon HR10 imitating the frame button 22 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, but it is set when the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is satisfied. It is configured so that it cannot (difficultly) determine from the display mode of the icon HR10 whether the special effective time is set or the normal effective time is set. With this configuration, the player does not know whether the continuous advance notice effect is executed until the frame button 22 is operated or the normal operation effect is executed, so that the player tries to execute the continuous advance notice effect. The frame button 22 can be enthusiastically operated.

In addition, unlike the configuration of this control example, the player can determine whether the currently set valid period is the special valid time or the normal valid time depending on the display mode of the icon HR10. Alternatively, the icon HR10 may be made to determine whether the currently set valid period is the special valid time or the normal valid time depending on the display timing displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured as. In addition, the period in which the special effective time is set is different from the period in which the normal effective time is set (for example, 3 seconds after the start of the special symbol fluctuation), and the special effective time is set. May not be notified (suggested) to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the frame button 22 is operated to execute the continuous advance notice effect, so that the player is enthusiastic about the frame button 22. Can be operated. Similarly, when the player is configured not to notify (suggest) that the special effective time is set, the effect of notifying (suggesting) that the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied (for example). It may be configured to be executable only (displaying the character "waiting" in the sub-display area Ds). As a result, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being unnecessarily operated in a state where the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is not satisfied. In addition, when the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied and the frame button 22 is operated outside the special effective time, the player is notified that the current time is outside the special effective time. The notification display (for example, the display of "not now" in the sub display area Ds) may be executed, or the guidance display for guiding the special effective time (for example, "press again after 2 seconds" in the sub display area Ds. You may execute (display of "ne").

Further, in this control example, when a prize information command including prize information for the second special symbol is received, a process for satisfying the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is executed with reference to the continuous notice effect table 222d. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect may be satisfied even when the winning information command including the winning information for the first special symbol is received.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 144. The V-notification execution selection table 222e is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the V-notification effect during the jackpot game. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, the high probability state (probability change state) of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed. Then, depending on the type of the jackpot game to be executed, the jackpot game (probability variation jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game during the jackpot game rather than the probability variation jackpot game. A jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which the ball does not easily pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v is configured to be executable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and a ball flowing into the variable winning device 65 depending on the arrangement of the switching valve 65y is in a specific region (V gate). ) It is configured to be divided into a third flow path 65e3 that cannot pass through 65v (difficult) and a fourth flow path 65e4 that can pass through a specific region (V gate) 65v. The switching valve 65y is driven and controlled so as to switch to an arrangement state in which the ball can be distributed to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round game when the probability variation jackpot game is executed.

The V notification effect is for a player who is executing a jackpot game to aim at a period (V period) in which a ball can pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v and a specific area (V gate) 65v. A V guidance effect that guides the game method, a V period effect that notifies that the current period is the V period, and a V success effect that notifies that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. It is an effect that can execute a V failure effect that notifies that the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. By executing this V notification effect, when the probability variation jackpot game is executed, the game for passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v can be easily performed, and the specific area (V gate) can be easily performed. ) Since the player is notified that the ball has passed 65v, it is possible to inform the player that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Here, in this control example, after the normal jackpot game is executed, the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, and the time saving state is set. If so, the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode (see FIG. 134). Further, the "chance mode" is configured to be set even in a part of the case where the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, even if the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to leave the possibility that the probability change state is set internally, so that the player is in the probability change state. You can play the game while expecting it. However, if the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, it is easy to grasp whether or not the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. Even though the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v, if the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game is over, there is a problem that the player feels distrust that the probabilistic state has disappeared. .. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a probability change end condition that is satisfied when the special symbol change is executed 50 times as a probability change end condition for ending the probability change state as in this control example, a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery. Since the probabilistic state ends without doing so, there is a possibility that it is strongly considered that the probabilistic state has not been set even though the ball has passed the specific region (V gate) 65v.

Therefore, in this control example, a process of determining whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the jackpot game is executed, and the presence or absence of the V notification effect during the jackpot game is determined based on the processing result. Then, in the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed, when the ball passes the specific area (V gate) 65v (when the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends), the "chance mode" is performed after the jackpot game ends. Is configured to be set. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not the probability change state is set internally, so that the player who is playing the "chance mode" feels distrust. It is possible to play the game while expecting that the probability change state is set without giving.

Here, the contents of the V notification execution selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 147 (b). FIG. 147 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V notification execution selection table 222e. The V notification execution selection table 222e determines that it is the timing to start the probability variation jackpot game in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 of FIG. 180) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113. If so (S4701: Yes in FIG. 180), it is referred to when deciding whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the jackpot game this time (S4704 in FIG. 180).

As shown in FIG. 147 (b), the V notification execution selection table 222e is made to correspond to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed this time (the jackpot winning jackpot type) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f. The presence or absence of V notification (determination result of whether or not to execute the V notification effect) is specified. Specifically, in the range where the jackpot type is "big hit A" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", "V notification available" indicating that the V notification effect is executed is displayed. In the range of "150 to 198", "no V notification" indicating that the V notification effect is not executed is defined. Further, in the range where the jackpot type is "big hit C, D, E" and the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "V notification is available" is in the range of "190 to 198". Is specified as "no V notification".

When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot type "big hit A" in which the probability variation jackpot game is executed is set, the V notification effect is executed at a rate of about 75%. Here, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, 50% is a probabilistic big hit game (“big hit A”), and the remaining 50% is a normal big hit game (“big hit B”). ing. Therefore, the V notification effect is executed during the big hit game at a rate of about 37.5% when the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the V notification effect is executed during the big hit game at a rate of about 62.5%. The production will not be executed. Further, among the cases where the V notification effect is not executed, the ratio of the probabilistic jackpot game being executed is configured to be about 20%.

On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the jackpot type "big hit C, D, E" in which the probability variation jackpot game is executed is set, the V notification effect is executed at a rate of about 90%. .. Here, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to be a probabilistic big hit game (“big hit C, D, E”). Therefore, in reality, the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed is executed at a rate of about 10% when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this way, by providing a case where the V notification effect is not executed even for the big hit winning by the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variation big hit game is always executed, the V notification effect is not executed, that is, the big hit game. When the "chance mode" is set after the end, the ratio of the game state being the probable change state can be increased.

Further, as described above, when the jackpot (“big hit A”) in which the probability variation jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery is won, and the jackpot in which the probability variation jackpot game is executed in the second special symbol lottery (“big hit C”). , D, E ”)), the rate at which the V notification effect is executed is different. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery, in which the probabilistic jackpot game is difficult to be executed, is more difficult to execute the probabilistic jackpot game than the second special symbol lottery, in which the probabilistic jackpot game is actually executed. Is configured to be difficult to execute. With this configuration, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the frequency at which the V notification effect is not executed during the big hit game can be increased, so that the normal big hit game can be executed in the first special. Even when the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery is completed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to have a sense of expectation.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147 (b), the execution rate of the V notification effect is different depending on the jackpot type, but the execution rate of the V notification effect is set according to other factors. It may be different, for example, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, or depending on the number of times the big hit is won (so-called number of consecutive villas) without shifting to the normal state. The execution rate of the V notification effect may be different, or the execution rate of the V notification effect may be different depending on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22. By making the execution rate of the V notification effect different according to various conditions in this way, it is possible to set a plurality of apparent probability variation ratios (the rate at which the V notification effect is executed in the entire jackpot winning). Can improve the interest of.

In this control example, the above-mentioned V notification effect can be executed only when the probability variation jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot game that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V notification effect may be enabled to be executed even when the normal jackpot game is executed. In this case, in accordance with the timing (the timing at which the first round game is executed) in which the V period (the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the probability variation jackpot game. It may be configured to execute the V notification effect and finally execute the V failure effect to notify that the sphere has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. Further, when the V failure effect is executed even though the game is normally performed during the jackpot game, for example, the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v in the probability variation jackpot game. In spite of the fact that the game is set, the V failure effect may be executed and the "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in this control example, a pattern that does not execute the V notification effect during the probability variation jackpot game can be set regardless of whether the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if a big hit is won, a probabilistic big hit game is always executed. If a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, a V notification effect is always executed. good.

Returning to FIG. 144 (a), the description will be continued. The effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation provides an effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the player operating the frame button 22 which is the operation means when the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode. A data table that is referred to when making a decision, and is a chance mode in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113. When it is determined that a valid operation has been performed on the frame button 22 (S5314: Yes in FIG. 186), the reference is made (see S5315 in FIG. 186). In this way, by changing the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the player operates the frame button 22 with reference to the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation, there are abundant variations for the player. It is possible to provide an operation effect.

Here, the contents of the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation will be described with reference to FIG. 148 (a). FIG. 148 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation. As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the button operation effect selection table 222f is referred to when the time saving state is set and the time saving state selection table 222f1 is referred to when the probability variation state is set. The probabilistic state selection table 223f2 is defined.

In this control example, the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode in a part of the case where the time saving state is set and the case where the probability change state is set. Then, regardless of the set gaming state, a common variation effect is executed during the "chance mode". Further, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected with reference to the same fluctuation pattern table (probability variation / time reduction table 202b2) depending on whether the probability variation state is set or the time reduction state is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, the currently set gaming state is a probable change state from the special symbol change executed in the "chance mode" and the change effect of the third symbol executed in response to the special symbol change. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the time is shortened, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the current state is a probable change state.

However, if the player who is playing the "chance mode" is not provided with information that can suggest the currently set game state, there is a problem that the game in the "chance mode" gets tired early. there were. Therefore, in this control example, a plurality of types of operation effects can be executed in the "chance mode", and the execution ratio of each operation effect is different according to the set game state. .. That is, although the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, the current game state can be predicted based on a plurality of operation effects that are actually executed by making the selection ratio of each operation effect different. It is configured in. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game state.

It should be noted that the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the normal state is set and the effect of the operation effect executed during the "super chance mode" which is the effect mode for notifying that the probability change state is set. Similarly, the mode and the effect mode of the operation effect executed as a part of the variable effect are configured to determine and execute one of the plurality of types of effect modes. The description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148 (b), the contents of the time saving state selection table 223f1 defined in the operation time effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG. 148 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving state selection table 223f1. The time saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table that is referred to when determining the production mode of the operation effect in the "chance mode" in which the time saving state is set, and is the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the timing when the frame button 22 is operated. Different operation modes are defined according to the type of operation method executed by the player for the frame button 22 and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the operation timing is in the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0". In the range of "~ 149", "none" indicates that the operation effect is not executed, and in the range of "150 to 189", whether or not the variable effect being executed is in the reach state is indicated by the third symbol variation. The "reach suggestion" indicating the effect suggested therein is defined, and the "state suggestion" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state is defined in the range of "190 to 198". Further, when the operation method is "long press", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is shifted is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 198". ..

Here, in this control example, a plurality of operation methods that can be executed by the player for the frame button 22 are set, and it is determined when the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 2 seconds. ", And" long press ", which is determined when the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed continues for 2 seconds or more, is set. Then, different operation effects are executed according to the operation method of the player. As a result, the player can execute various operation effects by arbitrarily selecting the operation method. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In this control example, the above-mentioned two types of operation methods are used as the operation methods that can be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 has an operation means other than the frame button 22 ( For example, a second frame button) may be provided so that different operation effects are selected according to the type of frame button pressed by the player, or during a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). It may be configured to set a plurality of operation methods according to the order of operations executed for a plurality of operation means. Further, when the player presses the frame button 22, it is determined as "normal press", and then, when the pressed state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), it is additionally determined as "long press". , It may be configured to execute an operation effect dedicated to "long press".

Further, as an operating means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the configuration of the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player, a lever member that can be tilted in the vertical and horizontal directions by the player and a rotation operation that can be rotated by the player can be performed. An operating means composed of a moving member may be provided. Further, it is determined that the player has executed the predetermined operation by providing a proximity sensor having a predetermined detection area and causing the proximity sensor to detect the hand that has entered the detection area, instead of directly operating the member. A possible operation means (for example, a touch sensor or the like) may be provided, as long as the player can arbitrarily perform a predetermined operation and can select a different operation method according to the operation content.

Further, in this control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press", has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of operation methods may be provided. , Only one type of operation method may be provided. Here, when only one type of operation method is provided, different operation effects may be executed according to the interval at which the operation is executed. As a result, even if there is only one type of operation method itself, it is possible for the player to select various operation effects.

Returning to FIG. 148 (b), the description of the contents of the time saving state selection table 223f1 will be continued. The background mode is shifted to the range where the operation timing is in the normal time reduction fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198". "Background mode transition" is specified to indicate that. Further, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state. Is stipulated.

When the operation timing is in a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f. Finally, the background mode is set in the range where the operation timing is in the normal time reduction fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 198". "Background mode transition" is specified to indicate the transition. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198" in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game ends)). "Past state suggestion" is defined to indicate the effect for suggesting the set game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the contents of the probability variation state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation-time effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation state selection table 223f2. The probability change state selection table 223f2 is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the operation effect in the "chance mode" in which the probability change state is set, and is the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the timing. Different operation modes are defined according to the type of operation method executed by the player for the frame button 22 and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, the operation timing is in the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired effect counter 223f has a value of "0 to 119". In the range of, "None" indicates that the operation effect is not executed, and in the range of "120 to 139", it is suggested during the third symbol variation whether or not the variable effect being executed is in the reach state. The "reach suggestion" indicating the effect to be performed is in the range of "140 to 189", the range of "state suggestion" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state, and the range of "190 to 198" are the background. "Background mode transition" is specified to indicate the mode transition. Further, when the operation method is "long press", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is shifted is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 198". ..

Further, the background mode is shifted to the range where the operation timing is in the normal time reduction fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 169". In the range of "170 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the game is played is defined, and "state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state is defined. Further, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state. Is stipulated.

When the operation timing is in a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f. Finally, the background mode is set in the range where the operation timing is in the normal time reduction fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 198". "Background mode transition" is specified to indicate the transition. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198" in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game ends)). "Past state suggestion" is defined to indicate the effect for suggesting the set game state.

As explained above, when the "chance mode" is set as the production mode after the jackpot game ends, the operation is performed by referring to different data tables depending on whether the time is shortened or the probability is changed. It is configured so that the effect mode of the effect is selected, and the ratio of each effect mode selected is different depending on the set gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player predict the game state currently set based on the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

In addition, among a plurality of game states (probability change state, time saving state) in which "chance mode" can be set as the effect mode at a specific operation timing, an advantageous game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set. As an effect mode (advantageous effect mode) that is easy to be executed when there is, for example, since an operation effect of "state suggestion" that is executed by "normal pressing" in the "first period" is provided, the "first period" Isn't the advantageous game state set when the operation effect of "state suggestion" is executed by the "normal push" in the middle? It is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation.

Further, since the operation effect can be executed a plurality of times during the "first period", the more the number of times the operation effect is executed in the above-mentioned advantageous effect mode during the "first period", the more. Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the advantageous gaming state is set, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22.

In addition, among a plurality of gaming states (probability change state, time saving state) in which "chance mode" can be set as the effect mode at a specific operation timing, an advantageous gaming state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set. As an effect mode (fixed effect mode) that is executed only when the above is performed, for example, an operation effect of "background mode transition" that is executed by "normal pressing" during the "first period" is provided. It is possible to grasp that the advantageous gaming state is set when the operation effect of "background mode transition" is executed by "normal pressing" during "1 period".

Further, as the above-mentioned advantageous effect mode and the final effect mode, an effect mode that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal push" during the "second period") is used. More specifically, when the effect mode of the "state suggestion" is executed by the "normal push" in the "first period", the expectation that the probability change state is set becomes high, and the "second period" When it is executed by "normal push" in "", it is configured so that the expectation that the time saving state is set is high. With this configuration, the player is provided with the enjoyment of playing the game while analyzing in which effect mode the operation effect was executed during which period in which the "chance mode" is set. be able to.

As described above, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, the content of the effect mode of the operation effect that can be selected when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22), and is referred to when the player selects the operation effect. Although the contents of the data table (effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation) have been described, in the first control example, different data tables are referred to according to the set gaming state. Then, in each data table, the same effect mode is defined with different selection ratios. As a result, it is difficult for the player to grasp the current game state only by the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, and by executing the operation effect a plurality of times, the selection ratio of each effect mode can be grasped to obtain the current state. It is possible to grasp the game state. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game so that the player can execute the operation effect a plurality of times.

In this control example, it is configured to refer to different data tables according to the set game state, but the present limitation is not limited to this, for example, the currently set game state and the currently set game state are set. It may be configured to refer to a different data table and select the effect mode of the operation effect based on the effect mode. As a result, when the probability change state is set, different operation effects can be executed depending on whether the effect mode is set to "super chance mode" or "chance mode". can.

Here, when the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode, for example, it is not necessary to execute the "state suggestion" which is the effect mode suggesting that the current game state is set. , Instead, the production mode of "reach suggestion" and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b show a specific lottery result (a jackpot winning or a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or longer is set). It is advisable to specify the production mode of "look-ahead suggestion" that suggests whether or not information is included. As a result, even in the state where the "super chance mode" is set, the player can enthusiastically execute the operation effect.

Further, the type of the data table (effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation) for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special symbol), and the third symbol display. It may be configured so as to be different depending on the stop display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the device 81 or the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot game.

In this case, for example, when the time saving state is set as the game state and the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode, the "chance mode" is set after the end of the normal jackpot game, and the probability variation jackpot game. It is possible to make the production mode of the operation effect executed during the "chance mode" different between the case where the ball cannot be V-winned inside and the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game is completed. Specifically, during the "chance mode" in which the time saving state is set after the probability change jackpot game ends, the production mode of "past jackpot type suggestion" suggesting that the previous jackpot game was the probability variation jackpot game is displayed. It is good to specify. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the probabilistic state is set even though the time saving state is actually set. Further, the production mode of "past game history notification" for notifying that the V prize could not be won even though the previous jackpot game was a probabilistic jackpot game may be specified. This makes it easier to revise the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144 (b). As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, effect counter 223f, slave state setting area 223g, normal symbol hold ball number counter 223h, special effect in progress flag 223i, V winning flag 223j, V effect execution flag 223k, V notification flag 223m, time saving medium counter 223n, special continuous notice A flag 223o, an effect mode storage area 223p, a continuous advance notice executing flag 223q, a SW effective time counter 223r, a special effective time counter 223s, an operating counter 223t, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four holding areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and each of these areas is from the main control device 110. The winning information included in the output winning information command is stored in order from the first area. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

In this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls of the first special symbol and a maximum of four reserved balls of the second special symbol are configured so that they can be reserved and stored. Therefore, the winning information storage area 223b has a maximum of four reserved balls. Four holding areas for the first special symbol and four holding areas for the second special symbol are formed. In this control example, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are set. When executing a new special symbol lottery while having both, the oldest stored prize information (winning information stored in the first area) in the reserved area of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured to move to the area. Then, each winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is configured to shift to the holding area having a lower number. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, for example, regardless of the type of special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol lottery is executed according to the order in which the reserved balls are acquired (so-called pachinko machine of winning order digestion). In the case of machine 10), eight holding areas may be provided in the winning information storage area 223b so that the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 is stored in order from the first area. good. Further, if the pachinko machine 10 (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type pachinko machine 10) capable of simultaneously (overlapping) executing the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the configuration of this control example can be used. On the other hand, instead of one execution area, a first execution area for the first special symbol and a second execution area for the second special symbol are provided, and the first area of the hold area corresponding to each special symbol is provided. It suffices to configure so that the winning information stored in is transferred to the execution area corresponding to each special symbol.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the value corresponding to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a first counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls of each special symbol based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c determines the number of reserved balls. It is designed to be managed.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, a new first special symbol lottery is performed. When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is subtracted in order to execute, the reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction. ) Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is added by entering the second ball entrance 640, or in order to execute a new second special symbol lottery in the main control device 110, the second special symbol When the number of reserved balls in the above is subtracted, the reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command, special figure 2 hold ball number command) transmitted from the main control device 110, the main control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the hold ball number command. The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of 110 is acquired, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c1, the second It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved symbol. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. Is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 122 (b)) of the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing of the image is controlled. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Can be made to. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which execution of the special symbol lottery is suspended.

The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. .. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81. The special figure change start flag 223d has a first special figure change start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special figure change start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special symbol. On / off is set according to the type of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110.

The special figure stop type selection flag 223e is set to on when a stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81. The special figure stop type selection flag 223e has a first special figure stop type selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special figure stop type selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol. Then, on / off is set according to the type of the special symbol included in the stop type command (special figure stop type command) transmitted from the main control device 110.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198". It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated. Although detailed description will be omitted, the effect counter 223f is composed of a plurality of counters, and is defined so that the update rules are different for each. Each counter is configured so that the counter update process is executed every time the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. Then, when a plurality of types of variation pattern selection or various effect selection processes are executed within the execution interval of the main process, the values of different counters of the effect counter 223f are acquired and the processes are executed. ing. As a result, even when the process using the value of the effect counter 223f is executed a plurality of times at the same timing (within the same cycle of the main process), various effects and the like can be selected using the same value of the effect counter 223f. Can be suppressed.

In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223g. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the slave state setting area 223g, a current game state storage area for storing the currently set game state and a past game state memory for storing the game state set before the current game state is set are stored. It has an area and, and is configured so that it is possible to calculate what kind of process the current game state was set through. As a result, for example, when the time saving state is set, is the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends, or the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the probability change end condition is satisfied. It is possible to determine whether or not the time saving state is set in, and execute an effect (past state suggestion effect for suggesting the past game state to the player) based on the determination result. Further, the slave state setting area 223g is configured to be able to store game states such as a jackpot game state and a normal figure hit game state in addition to the normal state, the probability change state, and the time saving state.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 223h is a counter for counting the value corresponding to the normal symbol hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a counter of the normal symbol included in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f for counting the number of reserved balls. The detailed contents are omitted because they are the same as the above-mentioned special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c except that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol.

The special effect in progress flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol change is executed in the normal state, and is turned on when the condition for executing the second special symbol change in the normal state is satisfied. Is set to. Specifically, it is set to ON when the second special symbol change is executed in the normal state, or when the special figure 2 hold is acquired in the state where the first special symbol change is executed. Then, when the first special symbol variation is executed while the special effect in-progress flag 223i is set to on, that is, when the special figure 2 hold is 0, it is set to off. In this control example, a "chance zone" effect (see FIG. 124 (b)) is executed to indicate the period during which the special effect flag 223i is set to on.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed the specific area (V gate) 65v. NS. Specifically, when the V winning command is set in the main control device 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that the V winning command has been received in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determination processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 175), it is determined that the V winning command has been received (S4407 in FIG. 177). : Yes), set to on.

The V winning flag 112j is referred to in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) (S4801 in FIG. 181), and the specific area (see S4801 in FIG. It is determined whether the ball has passed the V gate) 65v (whether the V has won a prize). Then, when it is determined in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) that it is set to on (S4801: Yes in FIG. 181), it is set to off.

In this control example, the V notification effect can be executed as an effect for passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v (V prize) during the jackpot game, and V is configured depending on the presence or absence of the V prize. It is configured to change the production mode of the effect executed at the time of winning a prize (at the end of the V round) and at the ending of the jackpot game. Further, the effect mode at the time of winning the V prize and the effect mode at the ending of the jackpot game are changed according to whether or not the V notification effect is executed. In this way, in order to enable the effect that is variably set based on the presence or absence of the V prize to be executed at a timing (ending time) different from that at the time of the V prize, the presence or absence of the V prize depends on the setting status of the V prize flag 112j. It is configured so that it can be identified.

The V effect execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, and is set to be turned on when it is determined to execute the V notification effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180), when it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4701: Yes in FIG. 180), and the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (see S4218 in FIG. 180). With reference to S4703: No) of FIG. 180 and the V notification execution selection table 222e, whether or not to execute the V notification effect is determined. Then, when it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed (S4705: Yes in FIG. 180), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), when the V winning flag 112j is not set to ON, that is, the V winning is won during the jackpot game. If it does not occur, it is referred to (S4802 in FIG. 181), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4802: Yes in FIG. 181), a process for switching the effect mode of the ending effect is executed (S4802 in FIG. 181). S4804 in FIG. 181) and then set to off (S1804 in FIG. 181).

In this control example, when the probability variation jackpot game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the jackpot game, and when the execution of the V notification effect is decided, the ending is performed at that time. As the effect mode during the period, the effect mode (see FIGS. 127 (b) and 127 (d)) for showing that the probability variation state is set is set. That is, when the V notification effect is executed during the probability change jackpot game, the player is notified when the V prize is won, so that the player is surely changed even in the ending effect executed during the ending period. It is configured so that an effect mode (see FIGS. 127 (b) and 127 (d)) for indicating that the state is set is set. Therefore, if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the effect mode of the ending effect is switched to the effect mode (see FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (c)) for indicating that the time saving state is set. Execute the process.

On the other hand, when the V notification effect is not executed during the probabilistic jackpot game, even if the V prize is won, the player is not notified to that effect, and the time saving state is set as the effect mode of the ending effect. Since the effect mode (see FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (c)) is set in advance, it is necessary to execute the process of switching the effect mode of the ending effect even if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game. There is no.

The time saving medium counter 223n is a counter for measuring the period in which the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (after the jackpot game ends), A predetermined value (“100” in this control example) is set. Then, when the special symbol change is executed while the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n becomes "0", the normal symbol is used. It is determined that the state has shifted to the low probability state. Further, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the normal symbol based on the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n.

The special continuous advance notice flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode, and is a continuous advance notice. It is set to on when the execution condition of the effect is satisfied. When this special continuous notice flag 223o is set to on, a special valid period is set so that the operation on the operating means can be effectively determined, and a specific operation is performed on the operating means during the special valid period. In that case, a continuous notice effect is executed.

Specifically, in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177), which is a part of the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, the special drawing winning information command (corresponding to the special symbol). In the special figure winning information command processing (see S4406 in FIG. 178), which is executed when the winning information command) is received, the current high-speed fluctuation period is in progress (the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is larger than 75). (S4502: Yes in FIG. 178), and when it is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect with reference to the continuous advance notice execution selection table 222d (S4506: Yes in FIG. 178), it is set to ON (S4506: Yes in FIG. 178). S4507 of FIG. 178).

Then, the chance mode is executed when the "chance mode" is set in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation. In the middle effect setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185), the setting status of the special continuous notice flag 223o is referred to (S5210 in FIG. 185), and when it is set to ON, the operation to the frame button 22 is enabled. As the discriminating special valid period, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special valid time timer 223s (S5211 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off.

In this way, a special valid period is set in which the operation on the operating means is effectively determined only when the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied, and the player specifies the operating means within the special valid period. By making it possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect only when the operation of is executed, the player can enthusiastically perform the game in order to execute the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, a plurality of information for executing the continuous advance notice effect (information indicating whether or not the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied, information indicating a period in which the special validity period is set (set period), and information indicating , Information indicating the operation content to be performed on the operation means to execute the continuous advance notice effect), by changing the notification mode of the notification effect for notifying the player, the difficulty level of executing the continuous advance notice effect is facilitated. Can be variably adjusted to.

In this case, when the big hit is won (when the special symbol lottery is performed), it is preferable to configure the structure so that the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect can be easily satisfied. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played the game in order to execute the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, when the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied and the player executes a specific operation on the operation means outside the special validity period, the player sets the timing at which the special validity period is set. It is preferable to configure the guidance notification effect to guide the user. As a result, the player can be made to operate the operation means more enthusiastically, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

The effect mode storage area 223p is a storage area for storing various effect modes set in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and different effect modes are stored according to the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n. Then, when the current effect mode is determined, the stored effect mode is read out. Specifically, in the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the time reduction / medium counter 223n is read (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the effect mode corresponding to the read value (high-speed period (high-speed period (high-speed period (high-speed period))). High-speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period), normal second period (second period)) are set and stored. Then, the stored information is cleared when the high-probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state.

The continuous advance notice executing flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the continuous advance notice effect is set as the variation effect of the third symbol, and is set to ON when the continuous advance notice effect is executed. Then, the setting status is determined by the effect setting process in the chance mode (see S5012 in FIG. 185) (S5208 in FIG. 185), and when it is set to ON (S5208: Yes in FIG. 185), continuous notice is given. The production mode corresponding to the production is determined. Then, it is set to off when the continuous advance notice effect is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the setting of another effect mode that does not correspond to the continuous advance notice effect in the new variable effect executed during the continuous advance notice effect.

The SW valid time timer 223r is a timer for measuring the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 set within the fluctuation display period of the third symbol, and when the operation valid period is set. A value corresponding to the length of the operation validity period is set in, and the value is subtracted with the passage of time. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the value is cleared to 0. In this way, by setting the operation validity period for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22, the effect (operation effect) executed when the operation means (frame button 22) is operated is excessively executed. Can be suppressed.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, as the operation means, in addition to the frame button 22 (first operation means), a second operation means or the like may be used. When a plurality of operation means are provided, different operation validity periods may be set for each operation means. In that case, by providing the SW effective time timer 223r for each operating means, the operating valid period of each operating means can be set in duplicate.

The special effective time timer 223s is set to the frame button 22 only when the effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed in the chance mode while the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON. It is a timer for measuring the operation valid period (special operation valid period) that effectively determines the operation of, and when the special operation valid time is set, the value corresponding to the length of the special operation valid time is It is set so that the value is subtracted over time. Then, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined whether or not it is within the special operation valid period (S5306 in FIG. 186), and when it is determined that it is within the valid time (FIG. 186 S5306: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively handled. In this control example, the frame button 22 is operated within the normal operation valid period (the period in which the value of the SW valid time timer 223r is larger than 0) and the special operation valid period (the value of the special effective time timer 223s is 0). It is configured so that an operation effect different from that when the frame button 22 is operated within a larger period) is executed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated within the special operation valid period. , The continuous advance notice effect is executed over a plurality of special symbol change periods from the next special symbol change to the end of the target special symbol change. Then, when the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the background mode is configured to shift to the dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, within the period in which the transition to the background mode is suppressed by the normal operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player to win the jackpot only by executing the transition to the background mode.

The operating counter 223t is a counter for measuring the period during which the player presses the frame button 22, and when the player measures and presses the frame button 22, the time elapses. The value of the counter is updated. Based on the value measured by the operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player with respect to the frame button 22 is determined (see S5313 in FIG. 186).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 137, the description will be continued. In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 121). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 155. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 189 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the special figure entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 187).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 151 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 sees FIG. 151 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 151 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 151 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the special figure entry port 64, the fluctuating image at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 151 (b) and 151 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the special figure entry port 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 150, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 152, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 152 (b) shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back side B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. ..

As shown in FIG. 152, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the back type change is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on the back surface E is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... With the passage of time. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky indicating the sunrise is displayed as the initial rear image of the back E. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time elapses, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the repeated back image returning to the back image showing the morning glow is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 152 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the image data corresponding to the back surface E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after the power is turned on, and is resident.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the fluctuation starts even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. When the stage change is decided by the lottery at the time, the initial position of the back side B to D is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the image data of the remaining images is displayed while the image data is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range of image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the image data corresponding to the remaining image can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 150) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the backs B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated and stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 150, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the special symbol entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this control example, the third symbol having a different display mode is displayed according to the set background mode (rear image). Therefore, each time the background mode is switched, the display image data of the third symbol corresponding to the background mode after the switching is stored in the third symbol area 235d. As a result, it is not necessary to store the image data for all the third symbols corresponding to all the background modes in the third symbol area 235d, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

In this control example, since the background mode can be switched by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22), the background mode transition is executed a plurality of times in a short period of time. There is. Therefore, in this control example, the image data corresponding to the background mode before switching is not erased from the third symbol area 235d during a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after switching the background mode. As a result, even if an event of frequently switching the background mode occurs, it is possible to prevent the process of storing the image data in the third symbol area 235d from being complicatedly executed. Further, the image data of a plurality of third symbols corresponding to each of the plurality of background modes may be stored in advance in the third symbol storage area 235d.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 153). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 154). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 154).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 154, in the example of FIG. 154). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 154, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 187) (see S6005 in FIG. 187). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 199 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 189 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 189 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S6309 in 189 (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 199 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 199 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 155), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 155), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transferred data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 189 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 198) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 155) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 155, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1, Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 starts an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 189 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 196). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 200). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 200). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 201).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 189 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 195 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 200), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 200). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 195 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (see S7221 in FIG. 196), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 191 (a), S6705 in FIG. 192 (a), S6805 in FIG. 192 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 193). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 191 (a), S6705 in FIG. 192 (a), S6805 in FIG. 192 (b), FIG. See S6905 in 193). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 156 to 172. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

In this first control example, as described above, in a state where both the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 hold) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) are stored. The lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Further, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65 while the jackpot game is being executed, a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured to be done. Further, as an end condition for ending the probabilistic state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the end condition that is established when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). It is configured to provide an end condition that is satisfied when it is executed.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (999, 99, respectively in this control example, respectively). When it reaches 999), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in connection with the entry of the ball into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640 (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157 to 162.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 157) makes various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and uses the determined variation display mode by predetermined control. The first symbol display device 37 can be controlled to enable variable display, the third symbol display device 81 can be used to set various commands for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol, and the determination result ( The control for stopping and displaying is executed in the display mode indicating the hit / fail determination result). Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described.

In this special symbol variation processing (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203k is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot game (during the jackpot game) (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). ), If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the first special symbol holding ball number counter. Acquire the value of 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the counter 203e of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of holdings of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2). (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process shifts to S208.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d acquired in the processing of S203. It is determined whether (N1) is larger than 0 (S210).

If it is determined in the process of S210 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S210: Yes), the number of the first special symbol reserved balls is The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S211), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S212). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S213), and the process is processed by S208. Move to. In the process of S208 executed after the process of S207 or S213, the special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S208), then the special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S209), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S214). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S215, the value of the fluctuation time counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated corresponding to the value of the fluctuation time counter after the update. In this fluctuation time counter, a value indicating the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S209) is set at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and then the process of S215 is executed. It is updated (subtracted) every time it is done. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S214 (S214: Yes), that is, when the value of the fluctuation time counter updated in the processing of S215 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to E is determined.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and when the jackpot is D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to on (S218), and the values of the time saving counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219). ), The process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S218, when the jackpot control process of the main process (see S1804 in FIG. 113) executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process goes to S1901: Yes. The opening command is set by branching (S1902). As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, the update process is executed (S221), and then the process proceeds to S220.

The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1801) of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent to. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10. In the process of S220, a special figure confirmation command is set (S220), and this process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208), which is one of the special symbol variation processes (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S301). Then, based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 140 (a)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery is performed. The result (determination result) is acquired (S302).

After finishing the processing of S302, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S303), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set as a big hit. (S304), the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S305), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S303: No), a special symbol off symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S306), and this process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one of the special symbol variation processes (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the jackpot of the special symbol is set. It is determined whether or not it is done (S401).

In the process of S401, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 141 (a) to 141 (c)) is acquired. The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability change) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is acquired. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the state) is read out (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405. Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern command is set (S406). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol, and is an external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (S1801 of FIG. 167). (See) is output to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S407), the fluctuation start of the special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S408), and the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shown. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409), and this process is terminated. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of the stop symbol indicating the result of the special symbol change this time, that is, the rough type such as the out-of-reach or the out-of-reach. It is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S403.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the content of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 15) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S221). In this update process (S221), the process is executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has elapsed (when the fluctuation is stopped), and the remaining period of the period in which the probability change state is continuously set is updated. A process for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

When the update process (S221) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203i is larger than 0, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol (S501), and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 0. If it is determined to be larger than (S501: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted (updated) by 1 (S502), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203i after the update is 0 (S503). ), If it is determined to be 0 (S503: Yes), a time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S501 that the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not larger than 0 (0) (S501: No), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not currently in the high probability state of the special symbol. The process of S502 to S504 described above for updating is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S505.

Further, in the processing of S503, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not 0, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is larger than 0, and the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol) continues (S503: No). , The process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S505.

In the processing of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0, and when it is determined that the value is larger than 0, that is, when the current state is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S505: Yes), the time reduction The value of the counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S507). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S507, a normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S508), the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the time saving counter 203h, and the current gaming state. The state command indicating is set (S509), and this process is terminated. Further, in the processing of S505, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (0) (S505: No), or in the processing of S507, it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0. In the case (S507: No), the process proceeds to S509 as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) determines whether or not a ball has entered (starting prize) in either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, and if the start winning is achieved, the start winning process is performed. Up to the maximum number of reserved balls (up to 4 in the first entry slot 64 and the second entry slot 640), each of the acquired counter values is stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. It is a process to store each.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved sphere is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a Alternatively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. .. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, which is the first start opening (S601). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64. It is determined that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S602), and the value (S602) is acquired. It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S604), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first ball entrance 64 (the number of hold of the lottery right of the first special symbol) is set (S605).

Then, each value of various counter values (random number counter C1 per first, type counter C2 per first, variable type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is used. Each is held (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

Further, when it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64 (S601: No), or in the process of S603, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 is the upper limit at present. When it is determined that the value is (S603: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S607.

Next, each process from S607 to S612 is the same as the process performed for winning the ball to the first starting port (first ball entry port 64) executed in each process from S601 to S606. The only difference is that the process of the above is the process executed for the second entrance 640, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing each process from S601 to S612, a look-ahead process is executed (S613), and this process is terminated.

This look-ahead process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but the hit / fail determination is made from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. A process for determining the result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, and the like is executed. In this control example, it is configured to execute a process of determining a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present invention is limited to this. Without, for example, when there is a new start winning, all the reserved storages stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b are correct or not. It may be configured to execute the process of discriminating the determination result, the determined fluctuation pattern, the stop type, and the like.

Further, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, that is, the lottery right of the special symbol is newly acquired. In this case, the content of the lottery right (winning information) of the special symbol is determined in advance, but it is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or in the lottery result of the normal symbol. Depending on the situation, the content of the lottery right (winning information) of the special symbol may be determined in advance.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is added, the information regarding the winning is added. It is configured to execute the look-ahead process (S613) based on (winning information), but the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not limited to this, for example, in the process of S603. Pre-reading when it is determined that the upper limit number (4) is reached (S603: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that the process (S613) can be executed. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since it is possible to add value when a ball is put into the first entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is the upper limit. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching.

Next, a look-ahead process (S613), which is a process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S613).

In the look-ahead process (S613 of FIG. 162), first, a random number per first, which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 is read out (S701). Then, the read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the look-ahead hold storage area in the area having the smallest winning order (S702).

Next, the hit / fail determination result is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the look-ahead hold storage area. Here, both the winning / failing determination when the special symbol is in the low probability state and the winning / failing determination when the special symbol is in the high probability state are determined. This is the timing when a new hold memory occurs (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b) and this time. Since there is a time lag with the timing when the jackpot judgment is executed based on the held winning information, the game state set at the timing when the jackpot judgment based on the newly held winning information is executed ( This is because it is difficult to predict the probability state of a special symbol).

Next, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and the fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values read out (S704). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S703 is not a big hit (S703: No), a winning command including information that can identify the out-of-winning and the fluctuation pattern is issued based on the various counter values read out. Set (S705), and then end this process.

Here, the winning command set in the process of S704 or S705 is, in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result), as common information of S701. It is set including information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the process. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

When the winning command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed to a different color from the usual one). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the winning / failing judgment result to the player.

In this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol), the information to be set in the winning command (win / fail judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of a special symbol (high probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a special symbol), a hit / fail judgment result in the case of a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability of the special symbol. It may be configured to discriminate from the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each judgment, or even if the special symbol is in the high probability state, it is in the low probability state. Also, a determination value (value of the random number counter C1 per first hit) determined to be a jackpot may be defined, and a winning command indicating a jackpot of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is performed is accurate. It may be configured to execute the winning / failing determination based on the gaming state. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a constant fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to fluctuate based on the information stored in the reservation.

Further, in this control example, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which the look-ahead process is executed and the hit / fail judgment is predicted in advance in the look-ahead process. Alternatively, information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (reserved storage) newly stored (stored) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set as a winning command and received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to predict the winning / failing judgment result based on the information included in the winning command.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not executed, the specific pre-reading process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player illegally obtains the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The ordinary symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like, and various processes related to the ordinary symbol variation (lottery). (Process to execute normal symbol fluctuation, process to set fluctuation mode (variation time) of normal symbol fluctuation to be executed, process to update normal symbol fluctuation during execution, process to stop normal symbol fluctuation, result of normal symbol lottery This is the process of executing the game content of the game per game, which is executed when is a hit.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 of FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game is over). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S801: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) can be executed (S802: No), then the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is used. The value (M) is acquired (S803), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S804).

If it is determined in the process of S804 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S805). That is, if it is determined in the processing of S804 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information for use in the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol hold 1 → execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current state is in the high probability state (during the time saving) of the normal symbol (S808), and the time saving counter 203h is set to on. (S808: Yes), the hit / fail judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 140 (b)) for high probability (S809). , The process proceeds to S811. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), the hit / fail judgment result is based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 140 (b)) for the low probability time. Is acquired (S810), and the process proceeds to the process of S811.

In the processing of S811, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S811), and if it is determined to be a hit (S811: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S811 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (a miss) (S811: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of the miss, is set. Then (S813), the process proceeds to S814.

In the process of S814, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the time saving medium (high probability state of the normal symbol) by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S814), and in the time saving medium (high probability state of the normal symbol). If it is determined that there is (S814: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds (S815), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S814 that the time is not short (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S814: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 10 seconds (S816), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different depending on the probability state of the set normal symbol, but the variation time is not limited to this, regardless of the set gaming state. , It may be configured so that 3 seconds is always set as the fluctuation time. With this configuration, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) in which a long fluctuation time is generally easy to be set, the time reduction in which a short fluctuation time is easy to be set. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game where the game state is switched to the state (high probability state of the normal symbol), the normal symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, and even though the time reduction state is set, the time reduction state is in progress. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

The method of setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be different depending on the game state, or the fluctuation time may be different depending on the number of reserved balls in the normal figure. The fluctuation time may be different according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to the set probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol. ) And the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (normal symbol reserved number), it may be configured to be variably set based on. Further, the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 may be different depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring the ball to enter the second entry port 640 according to the length of the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the ball enters the second entry port 640. Since the ease of entering the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various playability can be created.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not in the variable display (S802: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. If it is determined whether or not the process has been performed (S817) and it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S817: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S817 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S817: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S818). In the process of S818, when the lottery of the normal symbol this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the “◯” symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is missed, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S812 or S813 described above is performed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S818, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S812 or the process of S813. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S819). If it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not a hit (it is a mistake) (S819: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S819: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is used to determine whether the current game state is in the time saving medium (high probability state of the normal symbol). If it is determined by reference (S820) and it is determined that the time is short (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S820: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 1 as the game content of the game per ordinary figure. The game content (opening operation) of 2 times per second is set (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S820 that the time is not short (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S820: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 5 seconds x 1 as the game content of the game per normal figure. The game content (opening operation) of the times is set (S821), and the process proceeds to S822.

In the process of S822, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of S821 or S823 (S822), and this process is terminated.

Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of performing the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol (the timing of processing S808 to S811) is used. Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S817). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in this control example, the variation processing related to the normal symbol (lottery process) and the variation process related to the special symbol (lottery process) are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation process related to the special symbol (lottery process). Based on the result of the lottery process), the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the special symbol that is executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the normal symbol is being executed, the normal symbol is at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. At the timing when the high-probability state of the electric accessory 640a is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the validity of the normal symbol. If the pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (the opening pattern is executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. ) There was a problem.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. As a result, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In this control example, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a that executes the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and moves it in the hit game of the normal symbol. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail judgment of the normal symbol is performed. The high-probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high-probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is opened, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to be set.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, various information (results of the ordinary symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol fluctuation, the scenario per ordinary symbol, etc.) determined in the ordinary symbol variation processing (see S106 of FIG. 108) are shown. , Commands indicating the contents of various information are set, and are output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process (S107) will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. Further, using the acquired value of the normal hit random number counter C5, the hit / fail judgment (see S811) is executed in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 of FIG. 163) before the actual hit / fail judgment is executed. This is a process for acquiring the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) in advance.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S902), and then , It is determined whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (whether the reserved ball number of the normal symbol has not reached the upper limit value) (S903).

If it is determined in the process of S903 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S903: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not larger than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (S904). ), The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S905), and the lottery result is acquired in advance based on the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 140 (b)) (see FIG. 140 (b)). S906), a prize information command for a general drawing including a normal hit determination result (preliminary determination result acquired in the process of S906) is set (S907), and this process is terminated.

The prize information command for general drawing set in the process of S907 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same process as the prize information command indicating the pre-discrimination result of the special symbol set in each control example described above. NS. With this configuration, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right of the ordinary symbol stored on hold, and to execute the effect based on the prior determination result.

Specifically, for the normal map received in the state where the chance zone is set, that is, in the state where the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the game per game being executed during the normal state. If the winning information command includes information indicating the winning of a normal symbol, it is possible to execute an effect of continuing the chance zone until the next game of winning a regular symbol is executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next game per normal symbol is executed, the first special symbol lottery is entered. As the effect mode of the variable effect executed in response to the effect, the effect mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 122 (b)) is not the first. 2 It is preferable to configure so that an effect mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 124 (b)) is set. With this configuration, when a game per game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period in a normal state, a chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if the chance zone does not end even though the second special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times since the chance zone was set, the player will soon be able to execute the next game per normal figure. Can be grasped, so that the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed in the chance zone, a pseudo variation effect in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped a plurality of times is executed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict when the chance zone will end or whether or not the chance zone is extended.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1601) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 166), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1702). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process shifts to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1712 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1712 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1712). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1713, S1714) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1713, S1714) is executed.

Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1713, S1714) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1704: No). S1707: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 167), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the prize corresponding to the number of acquired balls is given to the payout control device 111. Send a ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 157) and the start winning prize processing (see FIG. 161) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 167), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various types displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 158) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. The command for executing the jackpot effect is set, and the jackpot control process for opening the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1804).

The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. In this jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, winning opening) is used for each round of the jackpot state. Etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed, or whether the specified number of balls have won in the winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 65a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 65a) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 65a) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S822 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S821 and the processing of S823 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. do. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) ends, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B execute the process. The stop symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159). ..

Further, in this control example, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (big hit symbol), the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (a missed symbol). It is configured, and a stop display for that purpose is also executed.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S815 and the process of S816 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S812 or the processing of S813 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 163). Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process is shifted to S1801, and each process after S1801 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1810: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1811 (S1812). In the process of S1812, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random value counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random value counter CINI1 and the second initial value random value counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the values of the variable type counter CS1 and the normal figure variable type counter CS2 are also updated randomly. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and the illegal game aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the hit is acquired is executed. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the processing of S1809, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 165 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1813 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1814). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1815), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (FIG. 166, S1701), By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1801. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various types according to the jackpot. It is a process for executing the effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is turned off, and the jackpot middle flag 203k is set on (S1903). , End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is off (S1901: No), then whether the special symbol is currently being jackpotped (that is, the jackpot middle flag 203k is on). Whether or not (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot hit flag 203k is off) (S1904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is being hit (the jackpot hit flag 203k is on) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round. (S1905).

In the process of S1905, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1905: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1906). ), End this process. The details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

On the other hand, in the process of S1905, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1907). .. Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot is completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1907: Yes), the ending command is set (S1908), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. .. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

In this first control example, when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery, a process of determining the big hit type is executed using the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141 (a)) (S402 in FIG. 159) and the determination is made. It is configured so that the ending period corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the process of S1908, the display ending command corresponding to the length of the ending period determined according to the jackpot type is set. It should be noted that, as in the first control example, the length of the ending period is not set at the time of winning the jackpot, but whether or not the V prize is won during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V)). The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined according to the above.

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), if it is determined to be the start timing of the ending period (end timing of the final round), whether or not a V prize was won during this jackpot game (probability change setting flag 203m). Is set to on), and if it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203m is set to on, the ending display for 17 seconds indicating that the probability change state is set (FIG. 127 (b), If 17 seconds is set as the ending period of the jackpot game in order to perform (d) and it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203m is not set on, the time saving state is set for 15 seconds. In order to display the ending (see FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (c)), the ending period of the jackpot game may be set to 15 seconds.

With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 that can change the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends according to the gaming result during the jackpot game, the ending according to the actually set gaming state. You can set the period.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is different depending on the game result during the jackpot game, any of the period from the determination of the game result during the jackpot game to the start of the ending period The ending period of the jackpot game may be determined at that timing. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, after the first round game is completed (the ball is specified in a specific area). (After the round game that can win the prize to (V gate 65V) is completed), the presence or absence of the V prize is determined, and the round game from the second round to the final round is executed based on the determination result. It may be configured to set the ending period of the jackpot game during the period.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the length of the ending period is set based on the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot game, but instead of this, the winning is performed as in the first control example. The ending period of the jackpot game is set in advance based on the jackpot type, and specifically, the ending period of 17 seconds when the probabilistic jackpot is won and 15 seconds when the normal jackpot is won is set in advance. If it becomes necessary to change the length of the ending period based on the game result during the jackpot game, that is, even though the probability variation jackpot game is executed, V prize is given during the jackpot game. If this is not possible, the length of the preset ending period may be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the frequency of setting the length of the ending period during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S1909 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S1910), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 170. On the other hand, in the processing of S1909, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1909: No), the winning process for controlling the specific winning opening 65a according to the winning is executed (S1911) to specify. An abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the winning opening 65a is normally discharged is executed (S1912), and then this process is terminated. Details of the winning process and the abnormal process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot operation setting process (S1906) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169) is started, it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of one round (S2001). In the process of S2001, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the identification corresponding to the jackpot type is specified. The opening pattern of the winning opening 65a is set (S2003).

Although detailed description is omitted here, in this control example, the content of the round game executed in a specific number of rounds (first round) among the round games executed a plurality of times during one big hit game. Is different depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variation jackpot), the ball is made to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V) as a round game of the first round. It is configured so that a round game in which the switching valve 65y is operated is executed so as to facilitate. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V) only for a specific period of the jackpot games that are executed for a long period of time, so that the player loses his or her concentration. It is possible to execute the game during the jackpot game without any problem.

In this control example, when the first round in the probability variation jackpot game is executed, the ball is caused to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) by the player on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As a guidance notification mode for indicating that it is a chance period, a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" are displayed can be executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of a specific period in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V) among the jackpot games executed for a long period of time in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, based on the detection means that the detecting means has detected that the sphere has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), it is determined that the sphere has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The characters "VGET" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for guidance. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed is satisfied.

The above-mentioned notification mode of the guidance notification may be changed according to the condition being satisfied. For example, "Aim for V" based on the elapsed time of a specific period or the remaining time that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to the specific gate. It is advisable to change the character color of the character, change the size of the display area, or change the character with more emphasized content (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not firing the ball in a situation where the ball is likely to flow down to a specific region (V gate 65V).

Further, in this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V accessory for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the ball moves to the specific gate by changing the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y. It is possible to set a period in which it is easy to flow down and a period in which it is difficult to flow down, but the period is not limited to this. By varying the timing of the open state depending on the jackpot type, it may be possible to set a period in which the ball easily flows down to a specific region (V gate 65V) and a period in which it is difficult to flow down. As a result, the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be made common, so even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is grasped, the big hit game this time can easily pass the ball to a specific area (V gate 65V). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the game is a game. Further, since the operation contents of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and the failure of the V accessory (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2001, if it is determined that this round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processing of S2002 and S2003 is skipped and the normal opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2004). ), The process shifts to S2005. In the process of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S2005), and this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) in the first round. Can be set. As a result, in the jackpots A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) only by the player firing the ball in the first round, so that the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed ( A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol) can be set.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S1910), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203m is on (S2101). In the processing of S2101, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203m is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the sphere has passed the V gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot, so the value of the probability variation counter 203i. 50 is set to the value of (S2102), and the process proceeds to S2103. On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if the probability variation setting flag 203m is off (S2101: No), the processing of S2102 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2103.

In the process of S2103, 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2103), and then the state command is set based on the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the probability variation counter 203i (S2104). The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the subordinate state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot middle flag 203k and the probability variation setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 170), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed the V gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game. can.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1911). This winning process (S1911) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this winning process (S1911), first, it is determined whether the present is the round validity period (S2201). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S2201, if it is not the round validity period (S2201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S2201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2202), and the specific winning opening 65a is determined. If winning is detected (S2202: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203o to update (S2203), and a winning command indicating that winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected is set. (S2204), the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is not detected in the processing of S2202 (S2202: No), the processing of S2203 and S2204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205), and if the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. On the other hand, in the processing of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and the round time has elapsed. If so (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In the process of S2206, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of each round game of the jackpot this time. In this control example, the end condition of the round game is satisfied by the same round time elapsed and the number of winnings regardless of the jackpot type and the number of rounds. The end condition of the round game may be different, or the end condition of the round game may be different depending on the number of rounds executed.

In the process of S2207, the closure of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2207), and the closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether the closure of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S2209), and if it is determined that the closure is based on the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid. 209a is set to off (S2210), and the process shifts to S2211. On the other hand, in the processing of S2209, when it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is due to the completion of a round other than the first round (S2209: No), the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 2665k is turned on. Since it is not set to, the process of S2210 is skipped and the process is transferred to S2212.

In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the probability variation effective flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process shifts to S2212. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less in the processing of S2205 (S2205: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S2206 (S2206: No), The processing of S2207 to S2211 is skipped, and the processing is transferred to S2212.

In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2212: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2213. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag 203 is on in the process of S2212 (S2212: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203r is on (S2217). In the process of S2217, if the probability variation valid flag 203r is off (S2217: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203r is on (S2217: No), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203s (S2218), and then it is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2217: No). S2219). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203s is not the upper limit value (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, the passage of the sphere to the specific area (V gate 65V) is monitored, and the probability change setting flag 203m is updated. Execute the process. As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203s is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific region (V gate 65V), so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time when the ball is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the ball from being illegally passed through the specific region (V gate 65V) and being given a probabilistic state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2219: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2220), and the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203s is reset (S2221). ), End this process.

Further, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific region (V gate 65V) (S2213), and if the sphere has not passed through the specific region (V gate 65V) (S2213: No), This process ends. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed through the specific region (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203n (S2214), and the probability variation setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215). , V prize command is set (S2216), and this process is terminated.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1912). This abnormal processing (S1912) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 168), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is normally discharged. It is a process for.

In the abnormality processing (S1912), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is (S2301), and if it is not the round valid period (S2301: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302). In the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not the ball discharge port switch (not shown) capable of detecting the ball passing through the discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 120 (b)) detects the passage of the ball.

In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203t (S2303), and the process proceeds to the process of S2304. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if the ball does not pass through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304: Yes), the ball brushing period is in progress, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203q to update (S2305). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is not the upper limit value (S2306: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306: Yes), then the number of discharges (the total value of the value of the probability variation passing counter 203n and the value of the discharge number counter 203t) is won. It is determined whether or not the number (value of the winning number counter 203o) matches (S2307).

If it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of ejected items and the number of winning items do not match (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308), and the process proceeds to the process of S2309. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 120B) is closed (the period during which the switching valve 65y is closed), the sphere is illegally flowed into the fourth flow path 65e to enter the specific region. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that pass through (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items match (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2309. In the process of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to off (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203o, the discharging number counter 203t, and the probability variation passing counter 203n are reset (S2311), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 172), a problem may occur in which the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is not normally discharged due to a ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It can be detected and notified at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 186, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 174) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 of FIG. 174), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4117. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S4117 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data shifts to S4008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S4117, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 119). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S4011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of S4008 is performed via the processing of S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to display (directing) that S4102 to S4111 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variation display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command for transmitting various commands to the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114. The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. Details of this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the effect update process is executed (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, the process proceeds to the process of S4112. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4111, a command determination process (S4112) that performs processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 175.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 182.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power off processing, the occurrence of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the state command has been received (S4201), and if it is determined that the state command has been received (S4201: Yes), the state command reception process is executed (S4202). This process ends. This state command reception process (S4202) receives a state command indicating the current game state, sets a mode effect mode according to the game state, and corresponds to the effect mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for displaying (for example, a rear image) is set. For example, when the state command indicating the probability change state is received, the display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set, and when the state command indicating the time saving state is received, the chance mode shown in FIG. 128 is set. The display command corresponding to is set. The details of the game state actually set and the switching control of the effect mode in the mode effect to be executed will be described later. The details of this state command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 176.

When it is determined that the status command has not been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203), and when it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203). : Yes), the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special figure fluctuation pattern command is set to on (S4204), and the fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, this process ends.

When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received in the processing of S4203 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure stop type command has been received (S4206), and it is determined that the command has been received. (S4206: Yes) sets the stop type selection flag 223e (first special figure stop type flag 223e1, second special figure stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command to ON (S4207). The stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this process ends.

When it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). Here, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4209: Yes), the hold ball number is extracted from the received hold ball number command, and the corresponding value is set to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, the normal symbol. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210). Specifically, when the reserved ball number command of the special symbol is received, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command are received. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the special symbol) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value. do.

Further, when the hold ball number command of the normal symbol is received, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the hold ball number of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol). Is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, in the hold ball number command, the ball enters various entry ports (first entry opening 64, second entry opening 640, through gate 67) (starting prize), and the value of various hold ball number counters. Is added, or when the values of the various reserved ball count counters are subtracted when executing various fluctuation start processes, the main control device 110 transmits the data, so that the start winning prize or the fluctuation display is displayed. By the processing of S4210, the values of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol holding ball number counter 223h of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 each time they are set. It can be adjusted to the values of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c possessed by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203d, 203e, 203d of the main control device 110. However, when the start winning is won, when the variable display is set, that is, when the hold ball number command is notified based on the change of various hold ball numbers, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is set. It can be modified to match the values of the various reserved ball number counters of the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.

Further, in the process of S4209, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the winning command has been received in the processing of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4212), and this processing is terminated. This winning command processing (S4212) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and the storage area (voice lamp control device 113) corresponding to the analysis result. The process of storing (storing) in the prize information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and the process of executing the effect (look-ahead effect) based on the received prize information are performed. The detailed contents of the winning command processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

In the process of S4211, when it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether the symbol confirmation command has been received (S4213), and it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has been received. (S4213: Yes) sets the stop display of the third symbol (S4214), and ends this process. If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4213: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the normal figure has been received (S4215), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4215: Yes), the normal figure The related process is executed (S4216), and then the present process is terminated. A detailed description of executing the general map-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124.

In the processing of S4215, if it is determined that the command related to the normal figure has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received (S4217), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4217: Yes). ), The jackpot-related process is executed (S4218), and then this process is terminated. A detailed description of the jackpot-related process (S4218) will be described later with reference to FIG. 180. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (S4217: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4219), and this process is terminated.

Next, the state command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing this state command reception process (S4202). This state command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set gaming state. A process for setting different display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The details of the state command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

When the state command reception process (S4202) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set game state is changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223g and the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time are different. If it is determined in the process of S4301 that there is no change in the gaming state (S4301: No), the present process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4302).

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes), a display command indicating the normal mode is displayed. It is set (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), then the changed gaming state is changed. If it is determined whether the time is shortened (S4306) and the game state is determined to be the time shortened state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the time shortened state) (S4306: Yes), the time saving medium counter 223n The value is set to 100 (S4307), the display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the gaming state is not in the time saving state (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309). When the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4308 described above. When the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to off (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4304. ..

In the process of S4304, the gaming state set in the current state area of the slave state setting area 223g is set in the past state area (S4304), and the information indicated by the state command received in the current state area of the slave state setting area 223g is used. The corresponding game state is set (S4305), and this process ends.

Here, the command set in the processes of S4308 and S4311 is notified to the display control device 114, so that the variation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in this control example, in the voice lamp control device 113, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received fluctuation pattern can be displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, the display data is set. It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the displayed data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the voice lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A discrimination means for determining the existence is provided, and when it is determined that the discrimination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are set. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered due to the execution of the variable effect display having a content different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in the normal variable effect display.

In this control example, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to do so.

Next, the contents of the winning command process (see S4212) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (S4212). This winning command processing (S4212) is set when a winning command (winning information command) set when the lottery right of the special symbol lottery is acquired from the main control device 110 or when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery is acquired. This is a process executed when a winning information command for a general drawing or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability change switch) during a jackpot game is received.

When the winning command processing (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). , It is determined whether the command received this time is a prize information command for general map (S4402), and if it is determined that it is a prize information command for general map (S4402: Yes), the hit information (general) is included in the received command. If it is determined whether or not the winning information per figure) is included (S4403) and it is determined that there is per information (S4403: Yes), then the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, , It is determined whether or not the present is a high probability state of a normal symbol (S4404).

Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high probability state of the normal symbol, that is, it is the normal state (S4404: No), the state in which the lottery right of the normal symbol lottery to win the normal symbol during the normal state has been acquired. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that a chance zone is set, a display command for suggesting the opening of the electric chulong is set (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406. When a display command is set in the process of S4405, the display control device 114 is notified with the same control content as the various display commands set in the control process of the other voice lamp control device, and is in the normal state. A suggestion effect (for example, a small display area Dm3 is set in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) suggesting that the game per normal figure is executed and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (open for 5 seconds). A production that incites whether or not it is formed) is executed.

In this control example, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed only when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery that is won per ordinary figure is acquired in the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is preferable to configure the above-mentioned suggestion effect to be executed even when it is determined that the prize information command for the general drawing contains the prize information indicating a specific loss. As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to set the case where the game per normal figure is executed and the case where the game is not executed. Therefore, the game is performed while letting the player predict the content of the game to be executed in the future. Can be made.

Further, in this control example, the suggestion effect is executed when the lottery right of the ordinary symbol lottery that is won per ordinary figure is acquired in the normal state. Based on the special symbol lottery or the pre-determination result of the special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing at which the game per regular figure is actually executed, that is, for the regular figure indicating the winning of the regular symbol. Pre-game state processing for determining whether or not the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command is executed (the timing when the game per normal figure is executed) is the normal state is executed, and in the normal state When it is determined that there is, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed. This makes it possible to more accurately suggest that a chance zone is set.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 177. When it is determined in the processing of S4402 that the winning information command for general drawing has not been received (S4402: No), when it is determined in the processing of S4403 that there is no winning information (S4403: No), the time saving counter in the processing of S4404 When it is determined that the value of 203h is larger than 0 (S4404: Yes), the process proceeds to S4406.

In the process of S4406, the special figure winning information command process is executed (S4406), and the process proceeds to the process of S4407. The details of the special drawing winning information command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG. 178.

In the processing of S4407, the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2216) set when the ball flows down to the probability change switch (specific gate) in the winning processing (see S1911 in FIG. 171)). (S4407), if it is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409. Further, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4413.

In the process of S4409, it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4409). When the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4409: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to off (S4410), a display command for notifying the V winning is set (S4411), and the V notification is performed. The flag 223m is set to ON (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. Further, in the process of S4409, even when the V effect execution flag 223k is off (S4409: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4413.

In the process of S4413, other processes are executed (S4413), and this process is terminated.

Next, the content of the special drawing winning information command processing (S4406) executed in the winning command processing (S4212 in FIG. 177) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing winning information command processing (S4406).

When the special figure winning information command processing (S4406) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223g (S4501), and the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is set. It is determined whether or not it is larger than 75 (S4502). When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is larger than 75 (S4502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S4503). When it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the presence / absence of continuous notice is selected using the continuous notice execution selection table 222d (FIG. 147 (a)) (S4504), and then continuous. It is determined whether or not the advance notice is executed (S4505). When it is determined that the continuous notice is executed (S4505: Yes), the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

Further, in the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), and in the processing of S4503, it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S4503). : No) In the process of S4505, even if it is determined that the continuous advance notice is not executed (S4505: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4507.

In the process of S4507, a display command based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command is set (S4507), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the general map-related process (S4216) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal drawing-related processing (S4216). In this normal map-related process (S4216), a normal figure variation pattern command indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a normal figure hit start command indicating that the game per normal figure has been started, and a normal figure hit start command indicating that the normal symbol lottery has been executed, and This is a process that is executed when a command to end the game per game is received.

When the normal map-related processing (S4216) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4601: Yes), the normal figure fluctuation for display is started. A command is set (S4602), and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is larger than 0, that is, whether the normal symbol is in a high probability state (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction / medium counter 223n is larger than 0 (S4603: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), the normal drawing received this time is used. It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command is a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the normal symbol lottery that is won per normal figure (S4604), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is not won per normal figure (S4604: No). ), This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won the game per normal map (S4604: Yes), the long open hit is executed and the fluctuation per normal map is executed. Therefore, a display command indicating that the long open wait is in progress is set ( S4605), this process is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4605, the display mode shown in FIG. 123 (b) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it easy for the player to predict that a chance zone is likely to be set soon.

In this control example, a process of displaying the display mode (display mode forming the small display area Dm3) shown in FIG. 123 (b) is used based on whether or not the normal symbol variation is a hit variation. However, the display mode is not limited to this, and is shown in FIG. (Display mode forming the small display area Dm3) may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be changed according to the content of the variation effect (third symbol variation effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation during execution, for example, the third. When a variable effect with a high jackpot expectation (for example, reach effect) is executed in the symbol variation effect, a smaller display area than when a variable effect with a high jackpot expectation (for example, reach effect) is not executed. It is preferable to configure the display contents to be variable so that the display area of Dm3 becomes small. In this way, by variably controlling the display content by having a relationship between the variable effect suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variable effect suggesting the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery, which are executed independently. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to unnecessary provision of a large amount of game information to the player, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 179, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the normal figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4601: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal figure hit start command has been received (S466), and the normal figure hit start command is determined. (S4606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is larger than 0 (S4607), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S4607: No). , A display command indicating that the long is open is set (S4608), and this process is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4608, the display mode shown in FIG. 124 (a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player know that the long open hit is being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4607 that the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is larger than 0 (S4607: Yes), the process of S4608 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the start command per normal figure has not been received (S4606: No), it is determined whether the end command per normal figure has been received (S4609), and when it is determined that it has been received (S4609). S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 223n is larger than 0 (S4610), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223n is 0 (S4610: No), then the normal symbol is held. It is determined whether the value of the ball counter 223h is 1 or more (S4611), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect in-progress flag 223i is set to ON (S4611). S4612), if it is determined that it is not set to on (S4612: No), a display command indicating the chance zone entry is set (S4613), the special production flag 223i is set to off (S4614), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S461 to S4612, if it is determined that the discrimination result is other than the above-mentioned discrimination result, the present processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related processing (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related processing (S4218). In the jackpot-related processing (S4218), processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4218), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is the jackpot start command (S4701). If it is determined that the jackpot start command is used (S4701: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4702). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), the chance mode is entered (time saving state is set). The ending display mode shown is set (S4708), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, when it is determined that it is a probability variation jackpot, the presence or absence of execution of the V notification effect using the V notification execution selection table 222e (FIG. 147 (b)). Is selected (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705). When it is determined that there is a V notification effect (S4705: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), and the ending display mode indicating that the super chance mode is entered (probability change state is set) is set. (S4707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4705 that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4708 described above.

That is, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 141, different lengths of ending periods are set according to the set jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot game is started. The ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game executed this time at the timing is configured to be set in advance. With this configuration, various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control that displays information for indicating the number of prize balls acquired and during execution) Control to display information to indicate the number of round games) and prize ball payout control to pay out prize balls according to the number of balls won to the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed. Since it is not necessary to execute the display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this control example, the process of setting the ending display mode at the start timing of the jackpot game is executed, but the jackpot of a special symbol whose jackpot game is confirmed to be executed is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the fluctuation, or may be set by using the remaining period of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 which is executed during the period when the control processing is small in the jackpot game period. Is also good.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4709), and the round number command has been received. (S4709: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S4710), and it is determined whether the number of rounds this time is one round (V round) (S4711). When it is determined that it is one round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4712). When it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4712: Yes), a display command for guiding the V winning is set (S4713), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S4711 that the number of rounds this time is not one round (V round), that is, a round game other than the first round is started (S4711: No), and in the processing of S4712, V Even when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined that the round number command has not been received in the processing of S4709 (S4709: No), then it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4714), and if it is determined that the command has been received (S4714: Yes). ), The ending process is executed (S4715), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S4786 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, the processing of the ending processing (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is a process executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 of FIG. 180) described above, and is an ending display mode executed during the ending period. Is to execute the process for finally determining.

When the ending process (S4715) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning flag is set. The flag 223j is set to off (S4805), the execution of the ending display corresponding to the already set ending display mode is set (S4804), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON in the processing of S4801 (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802), and the V effect execution flag 223k is determined. If it is determined that is off (S4802: No), the process proceeds to S4804 as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4802: Yes), a display switching command for switching the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period is set. Then (S4803), the process proceeds to S4804.

When the display switching command is set in the process of S4803, the display control device 114 is notified, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set in response to the setting of the probability change state in advance (FIG. 236 (FIG. 236). The process of switching d)) to the display mode (see FIG. 236 (c)) corresponding to the setting of the time saving state is executed. In this control example, since the display period of the display mode to be switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 1827 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variation display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4901). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902), and then the display control device 114 is notified. The special figure 1 effect mode setting process for generating the display variation pattern command based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (S4903), and the data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted. (S4904), the process proceeds to S4905. The details of the special drawing 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to FIG. 183.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4905). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4905: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the fluctuation pattern command is not received from S4909. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906), and then the special figure 2 effect mode setting process is executed. (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special symbol among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. The details of the special drawing 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184.

In the process of S4909, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4909). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (that is, is off) (S4909: No), a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Since it is not in the state of not being executed, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure which is set to on is set. 2 The stop type selection flag 223e2 is set to off (S4910), then the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911), and then this process is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the contents of the special drawing 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 effect mode setting process (S4903). This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed when setting the variation effect of the first special symbol in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and is set. The process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the current gaming state is executed.

When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5001). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5002), and the value of the time reduction counter 223n after the subtraction is displayed. A command is set (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is 0 in the processing of S5001 (S5001: No), the processing of S5002 and S5003 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S5004.

In the process of S5004, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read out (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not the mode is the super chance mode (S5005). When it is determined that the mode is in the super chance mode (S5005: Yes), the fluctuation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and the basic fluctuation time (basic time) is 30 seconds. It is determined whether or not there is (S5007). When it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the effect mode (effect content) is determined based on the probabilistic change effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008), and the determined effect is determined. A display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S5009), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the process proceeds to S5011.

On the other hand, in the process of S5005, when it is determined that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the mode is the chance mode (S5010). When it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the process proceeds to the above-described S5009 process. If it is determined in the process of S5010 that the mode is the chance mode (S5010: Yes), the effect setting process during the chance mode is executed (S5012), and the process proceeds to the process of S5009. The details of the effect setting process (S5012) during the chance mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the contents of the special drawing 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 effect mode setting process (S4907). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed when setting the variation effect of the second special symbol in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and is set. The process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the current gaming state is executed.

When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S5101), and if it is determined to be the normal state (S5101: Yes), A display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S5102), then the special effect during effect flag 223i is set to on (S5103), and the effect mode is based on the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 145). Is determined (S5104), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5105), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, when it is determined that the state is not normal (S5101: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5106), and the time saving medium counter 223n When it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S5106: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5107), and a display command for indicating the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n after the subtraction is set (S5106: Yes). S5108), the process proceeds to S5109. When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is 0 in the processing of S5106 (S5106: No), the processing of S5107 and S5108 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S5109.

In the process of S5109, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read out (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not the mode is the super chance mode (S5110). When it is determined that the mode is in the super chance mode (S5110: Yes), the fluctuation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and the basic fluctuation time (basic time) is 30 seconds. It is determined whether or not there is (S5112). When it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the effect mode (effect content) is determined based on the probabilistic change effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5113), and the above-mentioned S5105 is determined. Process is executed and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, in the process of S5110, if it is determined that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), the effect setting process during the chance mode is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and the process proceeds to the process of S5115. The details of the effect setting process (S5114 (S5012)) in the chance mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

In the process of S5115, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the process of S5105 described above is executed, and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, a chance mode effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 185 shows a chance mode effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed in the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184). ) Is a flowchart showing.

In the chance mode effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether or not the read value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is 99 (S5202). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction / medium counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high-speed period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5202, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223n is not 99 (S5202: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the read time saving medium counter 223n is 79 (S5204). When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes), the normal first period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223n is not 79 (S5204: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the read time saving medium counter 223n is 49 (S5206). When it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. If it is determined in the process of S5206 that the value of the time saving / medium counter 223n is not 49 (S5206: No), the process of S5207 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5208.

In the process of S5208, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution flag 223q is on (S5208). When it is determined that the continuous advance notice executing flag 223q is on (S5208: Yes), the continuous effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5208, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice execution flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether or not the special continuous advance notice flag 223o is on (S5210). When it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special effective time timer (S5211), and the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to off (S5212). ), The process proceeds to S5213. Even when it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is off in the process of S5210 (S5210: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5213.

In the process of S5213, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to the process of S5214. In the process of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5214), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, in order to enhance the effect on the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute the effect (operation effect) according to the operation of the player.

In this control example, the player can operate the frame button 22 by a plurality of operation methods. Specifically, the frame button 22 is pressed for a short time (less than 2 seconds) by "normal pressing" and the frame. It is configured so that it can be discriminated from "long press" in which the button 22 is continuously pressed for a long time (2 seconds or more). Then, different operation effects can be executed according to the determined operation content. As a result, the frame button 22 can be operated by various operation methods in order to cause the player to perform various operation effects, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In this control example, two types of operation methods are used as discriminating operation methods, but the operation method is not limited to this, and the operation method may be one type or three or more types may be provided. Further, in this control example, the operating means that can be operated by the player is one type of the frame button 22, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of operating means that can be operated by the player may be provided. Then, the discriminating operation method may be configured to discriminate not only by the operation for each operation means but also by the combination of the operation contents executed for the plurality of operation means. In addition, when a plurality of operating means are provided (for example, the first operating means and the second operating means), the first operation is executed for the first operating means and the second operating means is provided. It may be configured so that it is determined that the same operation has been executed (determined as the same operation method) as in the case where the second operation is executed. With this configuration, for example, when the arrangement position of the first operation means and the arrangement position of the second operation means are separated from each other, the player can select an operation means that is easy to operate and enjoy the operation. It can be carried out.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107 in FIG. 186), first, whether the SW effective time is larger than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time is set (whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is larger than 0). ) Is determined (S5301). The SW effective time is set corresponding to each variation pattern when the effect of the variation pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. When it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S5301: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is subtracted from the value corresponding to the passage (S5302), and the process proceeds to S5303. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is 0 in the processing of S5301 (S5301: No), the processing of S5302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S5303.

In the process of S5303, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effective time timer is larger than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is larger than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special effective time timer is subtracted (S5304), and the process proceeds to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is 0 (S5303: No), the process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.

In the process of S5305, it is determined whether or not the value of the operating counter 223t is larger than 0 (S5305). When it is determined that the value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not it is within the effective time (S5306). If it is determined that the time is within the valid time (S5306: Yes), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S5307). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S5307: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the value of the operating counter 223t (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. ). In the process of S5306, when it is determined that the time is not within the effective time (S5306: No), and in the process of S5307, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5307: No), the process of S5308 is performed. Skip and move to the process of S5309.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, when it is determined that the value of the operating counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is subtracted (S5312), and it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted operating counter 223t is 0. (S5313). If it is determined that the value of the subtracted operation counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the process proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the value of the subtracted operation counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the process proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, in the process of S5310, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the operating counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and the process proceeds to the process of S5314.

In the process of S5314, it is determined whether or not the present is in the chance mode (S5314). If it is determined that the current mode is in the chance mode (S5314: Yes), the effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309.

In the process of S5314, when it is determined that the current mode is not in the chance mode (S5314: No), the button effect corresponding to the current operation method and the content of the effect being executed is set (S5316), and the button effect of S5309 is set. Move to processing. In the process of S5309, other button processes (background change, etc.) are executed.

Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) described above with reference to FIG. 186, in this control example, the SW effective time and the special effective time remain when the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. The period is configured to be 0. That is, it is configured so that the number of operation effects executed during the period in which each effective time is set is one. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation effect from being excessively executed.

The processing for the remaining period of the SW effective time and the special effective time is not limited to this, and for example, when the effective time of 10 seconds is set, it is within a predetermined period (for example, 1) after the effective time is set. If the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted (within seconds) (S5310: No, S5313: Yes in FIG. 186), a new effective time may be set during the special symbol change period. .. With this configuration, the number of operation effects executed during one special symbol variation period can be made different depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 201. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 187, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 187) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S6102 and S6102, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 187. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 199 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 199 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189 (b)), a simple command determination process (FIG. (See S6308 in 189 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. This can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the special figure entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 189 (a). FIG. 189 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 189 (b). FIG. 189 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 190 to 195.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198.

After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined in the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 155 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 195, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 190, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 191 (a). FIG. 191 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 190. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 191 (b). FIG. 191B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, or complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbol is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (a). FIG. 192 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). FIG. 192 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S6414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (a). FIG. 194 (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 182), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing (timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command) of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern. It indicates a normal stop command).

In the variable stop command processing, first, the variable stop data table indicated by the variable stop command for display is determined, the determined variable stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the variable stop data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (. S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is displayed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the broadcast command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the notification command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (b). FIG. 194 (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received commands for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to read the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this control example, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, the command is not limited to this, and related commands such as a light emission command other than the display command, a voice output command, and an accessory drive command are once received, and processing of the display control device 114 is performed. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device in a state where the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in is added.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). FIG. 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to on, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type of is set to off (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, from the back side image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (RAM type) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 190. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (b). FIG. 195 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 190. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 191 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 191 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 196, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 196. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 196 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by invoking another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 199 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 199 (b). FIG. 199 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) (see S7501: No in FIG. 199 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 200. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S7702), and if it is the transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 155) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 189 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in this first control example, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured so as not to be executed in duplicate (in parallel). The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Further, it is configured so that the ease of executing the lottery of the second special symbol differs depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time saving state, probability variation state) than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state). In order to make it easier to acquire the lottery right for the second special symbol, the entrance to the ball is accompanied by the electric accessory 640a that is opened in the winning game (normal symbol winning game) executed at the time of winning the normal symbol. When a ball enters the (second entrance 640), the lottery right of the second special symbol can be obtained. That is, when the game is played in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery. Taking this as an opportunity, the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be set, and when the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special symbol, is executed. It is configured in. With this configuration, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly different depending on the set game state, so it is expected that the game state with a high degree of advantage to the player will be set. However, it is possible to play games enthusiastically.

In addition, when a winning prize is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640 is configured to be able to execute a game per normal symbol that is released for 5 seconds. There is. With this configuration, even in the normal state, which is a disadvantageous game state for the player, it is possible to temporarily provide a period during which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed. It is possible to make a player who is playing a game aiming to win a special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming to win a prize in a normal symbol lottery, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

Further, in this control example, the effect mode of the special figure 2 variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol, that is, the number of reserved special symbols 2. Specifically, as an effect mode of the special figure 2 variation effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-off variation effect indicating that the lottery result is out of order in the first half period of the variation effect. Is executed, and in the latter half of the period, the third symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) by the pseudo-off variation effect is restarted to execute the pseudo-hit variation effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. The number of times that the third symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-hit fluctuation effect is configured to be changed according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 2. With this configuration, a variable effect that pseudo-stops the third symbol multiple times before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. Can be executed. In other words, it can be made to think that the jackpot has been won through a plurality of second special symbol lottery.

As a result, even if a big hit is won in the special figure 2 hold used for the second special symbol lottery to be executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 hold acquired during the game per normal figure, the player On the other hand, since it is possible to make the player think that he / she has won a big hit because he / she has acquired a plurality of special figure 2 holds during the game, he / she can more enthusiastically acquire the special figure 2 hold during the game. Can be done.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 in the case where the big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, as the above-mentioned pseudo-hit fluctuation effect, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the third symbol display device 81 A variation effect imitating the variation effect displayed on the display surface (the effect mode of the special figure 1 variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery) is executed. It is configured in. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variation effect from being repeated in a situation where the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired, so that the player can receive a pseudo variation effect. It can be difficult to identify what is being done. In addition, after the pseudo fluctuation effect imitating the special figure 1 variation effect is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to perform a variation effect that is unexpected for a person.

In this control example, when the probability variation jackpot game is executed, an effect mode indicating that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance as the effect mode of the notification effect (at the start of the jackpot game). Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate, and the ball hits the specific gate. When it is flowing down, the notification effect of the effect mode set in advance is executed, and the effect mode of the notification effect is switched only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate.

Further, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the probabilistic jackpot, which is advantageous for the player, has a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. It is configured. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed, before the probability change state is actually set. On the other hand, if the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game is completed, even if the notification to that effect is given for a long period of time, the player is only uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probabilistic jackpot game, the jackpot ending It is said that a strange notification effect will be executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different just by executing the process of switching the effect mode of the period to the effect mode executed during the ending period of the normal game. There was a problem. In addition, if the dedicated effect mode set only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate in the probabilistic jackpot game is facilitated in advance, the image data (effect data) for the effect mode is displayed in advance. It is necessary to store the data in the character ROM 234 of the control device 114, and there is a problem that the storage capacity increases.

On the other hand, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type, and during the probabilistic jackpot game. When the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate, only the production mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the production mode set for the second half of the ending period of the normal hit game. It is configured. As a result, a notification effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player is executed without providing a dedicated effect mode that is used only when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate during the probabilistic jackpot game. can do.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to be the same length regardless of the jackpot type. It is configured to switch and set the production mode of the notification effect to be executed when it is not possible to flow down to a specific gate, but it is not limited to this, for example, from the final round period of the jackpot game. By executing the notification effect, the notification effect may be configured to be executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period, or the final jackpot game may be completed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuously executing the round effect executed during the round period and then executing the notification effect, the notification effect may be executed for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

Since this V-winning device 2650 has the same contents as the V-winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. .. Further, the configuration of the right side region of the variable display unit 80 and the ball flowing down the right side region go to the through gate 67, the general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, and the V winning device 2650. Since the rate of entering the ball is the same as that of the left side region described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this control example, regardless of the set game state, and regardless of whether or not the jackpot game is executed, even if the player executes the right-handed game, the left-handed game It is configured so that the same benefits are given even if the above is executed. Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his / her mood.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is symmetrically configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the amount of benefits that the player can obtain is It suffices to configure so that there is no significant difference between the case where the left-handed game is performed and the case where the right-handed game is performed. The number of ball entrances 63 is smaller than the number of entrances 63, and the ratio of balls entering the first entrance 64 is configured to be higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. It is more difficult to win the prize ball than the right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and the right-handed game is easier to win the prize ball than the left-handed game, but it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured to do so. In the case of such a configuration, the player can play the game by any game method in the normal state, that is, while the game of entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is being executed. In a game in which a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 (a game in a time saving state or a probabilistic state), a right-handed game can be considered to be more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game. ..

In each of the above control examples, every time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is used. Has been described for transmission from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is held up to 4 times, and the passage of the through gate 67 is held up to 1 time, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to this. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol. Therefore, for example, each display mode may be set using common image data included in the display control device 114.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the left side of the game board 13 is divided into a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although it is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at the area is executed, it may be configured so that the target area of the different game board 13 is different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, the game board is configured. A left-handed game aiming at the left side area of 13 may be executed, and in the case of a time saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed. May be executed, and the right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set or the jackpot game is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a right-handed game may be executed during the jackpot game and a left-handed game may be executed only during the normal state when the time saving state is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player understand in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth to determine that it has been operated by a lever-shaped operating means, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. Although it is used as an effect operation means for the purpose, it suffices if it is possible to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation on the frame button 22, for example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operating means (frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display can be input. A control device capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of production operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of production operation means can be centrally managed, so that the production operation can be performed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation on the means.

Further, in the first control example described above, when the advantageous gaming state (probability variation state, time saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, during a predetermined period (until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times), A high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time is selected can be set, and the background mode transition effect is not (difficultly) executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period. There is. As a result, the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect during the period when the short fluctuation time is easily selected, and the player grasps the stop display mode of the third symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a difficult situation.

Further, in the first control example, the first operation for the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, that is, the operation in which the background mode transition effect is executed in the state where the normal state is set (“normal push””. ) Is performed, the operation effect of the effect mode different from the background mode transition effect is executed. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this first control example, the background mode is shifted by executing the second operation (“long press”) other than the above-mentioned first operation (“normal press”) even during the high-speed fluctuation period. The production is configured to be executable. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the background mode transition effect to the player who intends to execute the background mode transition effect, knowing that it will be difficult to grasp the stop display mode of the third symbol. can. In this first control example, the period required for determining that the second operation has been executed is longer than the period required for determining that the first operation has been executed. As a result, the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed can be suppressed, so that it is possible to prevent it from becoming excessively difficult to grasp the stop display mode of the third symbol.

As in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first operation process executed by performing the first operation on the operating means is performed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation is performed. The technical idea of preventing (making it difficult) to be executed even if the first operation is performed on the means may be used for other technologies, for example, the volume (volume) of the sound output by the pachinko machine 10. ), And when a liquid crystal display is used as the third symbol display device 81, the brightness adjustment process for adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal display is applied as the first operation process described above, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. If not (for example, when the special symbol change is not executed), the first operation process can be executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the special symbol change is executed). May be configured to make the first operation process difficult to execute.

Further, as the predetermined conditions described above, not only the presence or absence of special symbol fluctuations, but also the conditions that are satisfied when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10 and the conditions that are satisfied during the jackpot game may be set.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the first operation described above is executed, the second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, the first operation process). It is preferable to configure so as to execute (process for notifying that the operation process is not executed). As a result, the player can easily grasp that the first operation process is not executed. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute another operation effect that is not related to the first operation process.

In addition, even when the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned first operation process is executed by executing the second operation different from the first operation as in the present control example. Then it is good. Further, in the first control example, the first operation and the second operation can be executed by differently operating the operation method (frame button 22) of 1, but the first operation and the second operation are not limited to this. A plurality of operating means are provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the first operation can be executed by operating the first operating means (for example, the frame button 22), and the second operating means (for example, other than the frame button 22) is provided. It may be configured so that the second operation can be executed by operating the frame button). Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the second operation so that it is more difficult to execute than the first operation. For example, the first operation means is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 that can be constantly operated by the player. 2 It is preferable that the operating means is arranged on the back side (see FIG. 121) of the pachinko machine 10 which is difficult for the player to operate.

Further, when the above-mentioned first operation means and the second operation means are provided, the first operation valid determination period for effectively determining the operation for the first operation means and the operation for the second operation means are effectively performed. The second operation valid determination period for determination may be set in a unified manner, or a different period may be set. When each operation valid determination period is unified, the effective period determination process can be simplified. In addition, when different periods are set, the period for determining that the operation is valid differs depending on the type of operating means to be operated. Therefore, the game is enthusiastically played to operate various operating means at various timings. Can be done.

In the first control example described above, a normal state and a plurality of advantageous gaming states (probability variation state, time saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set, and among the advantageous gaming states. , When any of the game states is set, it is possible to notify the player of the period (remaining period) until the next normal state is set, not the period until the set game state ends. It is configured.

Here, conventionally, when an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability variation state or a time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the player is notified of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues (the number of special symbol fluctuations). There is something to do. Specifically, "100 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is displayed by subtracting 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed. be. As a result, the player can easily grasp how many more special symbol lottery can be executed during the currently set advantageous gaming state.

Further, in recent gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of state types can be set as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player, and as advantageous gaming states, a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a time saving state) and the first of them. There are some that can set the most advantageous gaming state (for example, the probability variation state), which is more advantageous than the advantageous gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the gaming state shifts from the most advantageous gaming state to the normal advantageous gaming state, the player displays the remaining period display mode for indicating the period during which the most advantageous gaming state continues. After that, when the normal advantageous gaming state is set, the player is notified using the remaining period display mode for indicating the period during which the normal advantageous gaming state continues.

That is, in the state where the most advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to let the player grasp the period (remaining period) for which the most advantageous gaming state continues, but it is set after the most advantageous gaming state ends. It was not possible for the player to grasp what kind of game state the game state is, and how long the game state set after the most advantageous game state ends will continue. ..

Therefore, when the most advantageous gaming state ends, the player is set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state, or is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state. There is a problem that it is not possible to grasp whether (for example, a normal state) is set, and it becomes difficult to understand what the game should be aimed at in the most advantageous game state.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, when a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states are continuously set, the period until the plurality of types of advantageous gaming states are completed, that is, the next normal state. Is configured to display the advantageous game state remaining period display mode for the period until is set. With this configuration, when different types of advantageous gaming states are continuously set, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed so as to straddle the continuously set advantageous gaming states. It is possible to let the player play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the first control example, it is currently set when the remaining period of one advantageous gaming state period straddling a plurality of advantageous gaming states (probability variation state, time saving state) that are continuously set is notified. It is configured so that the player can perform an effect that is difficult for the player to identify whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the gaming state set during the advantageous gaming state period, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the advantageous gaming state is set by the player.

In this first control example, it is currently set when the remaining period of one advantageous gaming state period straddling a plurality of advantageous gaming states (probability variation state, time saving state) that are continuously set is notified. It is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect that can suggest the game state and the game state that has been set in the past. As a result, the player can be interested in the content of the suggestion effect executed during the game state period.

Further, in the first control example, the operation effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect modes during the advantageous gaming state period, and the selection ratio of each effect mode is changed according to the set game state. ing. Therefore, the current gaming state can be predicted by the player based on the effect mode of the operation effect executed during the advantageous gaming state period, so that the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the selection ratio of each effect mode is only different according to the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved as the number of operation effects executed during the advantageous game state period is increased. can. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means (frame button 22). In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the "chance mode" as described above with reference to FIG. 149, and "reach suggestion" is selected as the effect mode of the operation effect. Is configured to execute a "reach suggestion" effect that suggests the reach line or reach symbol to the player if the special symbol change during execution is in the reach state or not. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the reach state in the winning information related to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and based on the determination result. It may be configured to notify the player that the second special symbol change in the reach state is executed before the second special symbol change is executed. In this way, the effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced by expanding the effect target of the operation effect not only to the special symbol variation being executed but also to the special symbol variation held and stored (special symbol variation to be executed in the future). Can be done.

Further, in the first control example described above, the player operates the frame button 22 to execute an effect for showing the result of the background mode transition or the special symbol lottery. As functions that can be executed by operating the operating means, for example, a volume adjusting function for adjusting the volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 137) of the pachinko machine 10, and a third function formed by a liquid crystal display. A brightness adjustment function for adjusting the brightness on the display surface of the symbol display device 81 may be used. As for the volume adjustment function and the brightness adjustment function, as in the case of the background mode transition described above, there is a risk that it may be difficult to see the variation effect of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. , When a predetermined condition is satisfied, specifically, when a period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is set, and another period is set. It may be configured to be more difficult to execute than.

In the first control example described above, the background mode transition can be executed even while the high-speed fluctuation period is set, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the background mode transition is not completely executed. Is also good. Further, in the above-described first control example, a specific effect mode (background mode transition) is likely to be executed as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means, and it is more difficult to execute than the first period. Although the second period is provided, three or more periods in which the ratio of the operation effect is executed in a specific effect mode may be set.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 210. The second control example is different from the first control example described above in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and the control contents are different. .. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described above with reference to FIG. 122B is configured to be displayed on one layer. Was there. On the other hand, in the second control example, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz constituting the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to be displayed on different layers. Then, by controlling the display of the main symbol sz displayed on different layers and the sub symbol fz in synchronization with each other, it is possible to variablely display each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first control example described above. It is configured in.

Here, conventionally, as the identification information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one in which the third symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) can be executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player can play the game while expecting a big hit by suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something I could do.

By the way, as a general gaming machine, a symbol variation display using a plurality of (for example, three) symbol sequences formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, the third symbol with numbers 1 to 9) is displayed. There is a device that executes an effect (for example, a reach effect) that raises the jackpot expectation when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol sequence other than one symbol string. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the variable display in which only the variable speed of the variable display is changed is executed without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol sequence. Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to enhance the effect of the variation effect using the variation display of the symbol sequence.

In addition, it has been proposed to increase the variation of the variable display by arranging the identification information (sub symbol) other than the identification information (main symbol) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery in one symbol row. Even if such a configuration is used, there is a problem that the effect of the variation effect cannot be enhanced only by changing the variation display speed of the symbol sequence formed by the main symbol and the sub symbol.

Furthermore, when a plurality of symbol strings having different arrangements and types of the main symbol and the sub symbol are easily arranged in advance and a specific variable effect is executed, the effect of the variable effect can be obtained by changing the symbol string itself. Although there is something to be enhanced, there is a problem that the display control becomes complicated because it is necessary to execute the control to display different symbol sequences in a variable manner according to the variable effect to be executed.

On the other hand, in this control example, the symbol string display is configured to be executed by using a plurality of layers. Specifically, the main symbol and the sub symbol constituting the symbol sequence are configured to be displayed on different layers. Then, in the normal state, by synchronizing the main symbol and the sub symbol and displaying them in a variable manner, the various symbols forming the symbol sequence are displayed in a specific arrangement (see FIG. 122 (b)), and the main symbol is displayed in a variable manner. By making the variable display content different from the variable display content of the sub-symbol, the symbol sequence can be variablely displayed in a mode other than the specific symbol arrangement.

With this configuration, while using the image data of the third symbol (main symbol, sub symbol) forming a specific symbol sequence, the variation display of the third symbol can be easily performed in an aspect other than the specific symbol arrangement. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

Here, with reference to FIG. 202, the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 202 (a) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the display layer formed on the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example and the display screen, and FIG. 202 (b) is the main pattern layer sr. FIG. 202 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect executed when the display of the sub-design layer fr is set to on, and FIG. 202 (c) shows the display effect of FIG. 202 (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the production result of.

As shown in FIG. 202A, in the second control example, the main symbol layer sr on which the main symbol sz is displayed and the sub-design layer fr on which the sub-symbol fz is displayed are overlapped and formed. The main symbol layer sr is arranged in front of the sub-design layer fr (on the front side from the player's point of view). In FIG. 202A, only the main symbol layer sr and the sub symbol fz are marked, but in reality, various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. Layers are superimposed.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. 155, the back image used in the one-frame image, the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), The effect ( Each sprite corresponds to each sprite such as effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol). A layer is formed. Then, with respect to the overlapping display images, the display image displayed on the front layer is given priority and can be visually recognized.

In the second control example configured in this way, when both the main symbol sz displayed on the main symbol layer sr and the sub symbol fz displayed on the sub symbol layer fr are variablely displayed. , Since the main symbol sz is displayed with priority over the sub symbol fz, the identification information (main symbol sz) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is the identification information (sub symbol fz) that does not indicate the result of the special symbol lottery. ), Which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the result of the special symbol lottery. Further, in order to make the result of the special symbol lottery easier for the player to see, it is not necessary to control the variable display so that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz do not overlap, so that the variable display control can be simplified. , The variable display of the main symbol sz can be executed by making maximum use of the limited display area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 202A, the main symbol layer sr is arranged on the front side (priority) of the sub symbol layer fr, and the main symbol sz has priority over the sub symbol fz. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the sub symbol layer fr is set to the main symbol layer sr so that the sub symbol fz is displayed with priority over the main symbol sz. It may be configured to be arranged on the front side (priority). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the main symbol sz while each symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery until the fluctuation of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) is stopped and displayed. Can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 202 (b) and 202 (c), the variation effect executed by the display control for each symbol layer will be described. As described above, in this control example, the main symbol sz constituting the symbol sequence and the sub symbol fz can be displayed independently. Further, it is possible to set whether or not to display the display image that is set to be displayed for each layer. That is, it is configured so that the presence / absence (on / off) of display can be set for the layer itself while internally performing display control for each layer.

FIG. 202 (b) shows an example of a display screen when the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to off and the display of the sub symbol layer fr is set to on. On the display surface of the symbol display device 81, only the sub symbol fz among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed until the main symbol sz is displayed, so that the reach line for notifying the player of the reach line effective in the third symbol variation this time is given to the player. The characters "Reach line notice start" indicating that the notice effect has been executed are displayed. After that, the effect result corresponding to the stop position of the sub symbol fz is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 202 (c), the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed in the "diamond shape", and as an effect result indicating that the effective line L4 and the effective line L5 (see FIG. 122) are in the reach state, the sub symbol is displayed. The characters "double reach confirmed" are displayed in the display area Ds. Then, when the reach line advance notice effect is completed, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to on, and what is the type of the main symbol sz that is in the reach state on the effective line L4 and the effective line L5 (see FIG. 122)? A variable effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not it will be, and then a double reach effect (see FIG. 131) is executed.

As described above, in the second control example, since it is possible to execute the variable display of the main symbol sz and the variable display of the sub symbol fz differently, the sub symbol fz is displayed in a variable manner first. Therefore, the player is notified of the place where the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed, and then the main symbol sz is displayed in a variable manner, so that the type of the main symbol sz in the reach state can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to show the player stepwise the effect result of the third symbol variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect.

In the reach line advance notice effect described with reference to FIGS. 202 (b) and 202 (c), only the stop display position of the main symbol sz is notified to the player in advance by the stop display position of the sub symbol fz. However, in addition to this, for example, the arrangement of the stopped-displayed sub-symbol fz may be configured to indicate the type of the stopped-displayed main symbol sz, that is, the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, for example, it is effective when the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed in all areas other than the area forming the effective line L2 (see FIG. 122 (a)) as the effect result of the reach line advance notice effect. It is preferable to configure the line L2 (see FIG. 122A) so that the combination of the specific main symbol sz (for example, the combination of "3.4.1" from the top) is stopped and displayed.

Here, when the combination of the specific main symbol sz is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the third symbol is restarted, and the variation effect (so-called pseudo-continuous variation effect) that raises the expectation of winning the jackpot is executed. , It is preferable to configure the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) to be executed as it is. With this configuration, when the reach line advance notice effect is executed, the player can be more interested in the effect result.

Further, when the reach line notice effect for displaying only the sub symbol fz in a variable manner is executed first, the reach line notice effect this time is to notify only the stop display position of the main symbol sz in advance, or the stop display is displayed. In order to make it easier for the player to understand whether the type of the main symbol sz is also notified in advance, for example, after the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202 (c)), each sub displayed as stopped. Depending on the type of display mode formed by using the symbol fz (for example, the graphic display displayed by connecting each sub symbol fz with a line), it is preferable to configure so as to notify the effect result of the reach line notice effect this time. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 202 (c) (the state in which the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed in a diamond shape), when the diamond shape is displayed, the effect result of the reach line notice effect this time is the stop of the main symbol sz. The position is indicated in advance, and when a heart-shaped figure connecting four sub-symbols fz is displayed, the player is informed in advance that the specific main symbol sz is stopped and displayed. It is preferable to configure it to notify.

In this way, by executing the effect (advance notification of the effect result) using the sub-symbol fz that is stopped and displayed between the time when the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed and the time when the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed. , Since the result of the variation effect (variation effect using the third symbol) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player in a stepwise manner, the player is continuously interested in the variation effect to be executed. Can be given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of various symbols stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described. In this control example, similarly to the first control example described above, a back image for the sea background and a back image for the mountain background can be set as the back image. Specifically, when the background mode transition is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, the currently set rear image (for example, the sea background) is changed to the currently unset rear image. It is configured to switch to (for example, mountain background).

Further, the second control example is configured so that the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz) is different depending on the type of the set (displayed) rear image. With this configuration, the main symbol sz in the display mode according to the type of the back image can be displayed in a variable manner, so that the effect of switching the back image can be enhanced.

Here, the content of the image data of the main symbol sz displayed corresponding to the back image will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 (a) and 203 (b). FIG. 203 (a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of a main symbol for the sea used when a sea image (sea background) is set, and FIG. 203 (b) is a mountain image (mountain background). It is a schematic diagram which shows the image data of the mountain main image used when is set. Each of these image data is stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and is stored in the character when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the background mode transition is executed. The corresponding image data is read from the area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d or the third symbol row area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. Since the contents of the process of reading the image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing the image data in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

As shown in FIG. 203 (a), the image data corresponding to the main marine symbol sz includes nine types (octopus, harisenbon, turtle, shark, shrimp, anglerfish, jugon, angelfish, crab). Image data (D1 to D9) indicating the main symbols with the numbers "1 to 9" are stored. The main symbol image data D1 to D9 are stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which they are actually displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, when reading the image data corresponding to the main symbol, it is sufficient to read the image data D1 in order and store the image data in the third symbol area 235d.

Further, in the second control example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 122 (a)), that is, the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed when the reach state is reached, are nine main symbols (images). While it is formed by the main symbols corresponding to the data D1 to D9), the symbol sequence Z2 (see FIG. 122 (a)), that is, the symbol sequence that is variablely displayed during the reach state, is composed of 10 main symbols. It is configured to be formed with a pattern. Specifically, the nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) forming the above-mentioned symbol sequence Z1 are changed with the number 4 added to the shark mode symbol (image data). It is configured to form the symbol row Z2 with 10 main symbols including the main symbol corresponding to DA). Then, in the symbol string Z2, after the main symbol sz with the number 9 passes, the main symbol sz with the number 4 passes, and then the main symbol sz with the number 1 passes. It is configured to be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the main symbol sz of the specific type (the main symbol with the number 4 in this control example) can be passed a plurality of times before the variable display of the symbol string makes one round. When the reach state is established for the main symbol sz of the game, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be won (the main symbol sz that is the combination of the jackpot is likely to be stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reach state). Can be visually suggested to the person. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of main symbol sz the reach state is established, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 203 (b), there are nine types of image data (elephant, lion, jugon, sai, peacock, bear, wild boar, rat, snake) in the image data corresponding to the mountain main symbol sz. Image data (D1 to D9) indicating the main symbols with the numbers "1 to 9" are stored in each. The main symbol image data D1 to D9 are stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which they are actually displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, when reading the image data corresponding to the main symbol, it is sufficient to read the image data D1 in order and store the image data in the third symbol area 235d.

Then, as in the case where the sea background is displayed, nine symbol rows Z1 and symbol rows Z3 (see FIG. 122 (a)), that is, nine symbol rows that are stopped and displayed when the reach state is reached. The symbol string Z2 (see FIG. 122 (a)), that is, the symbol sequence that is variablely displayed during the reach state, is formed while the main symbol (main symbol corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) is formed. It is configured to be formed by 10 main symbols. Specifically, the nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) forming the above-mentioned symbol sequence Z1 are changed with the number 4 added to the aspect symbol of the die (image data). It is configured to form the symbol row Z2 with 10 main symbols including the main symbol corresponding to DA). Then, in the symbol string Z2, after the main symbol sz with the number 9 passes, the main symbol sz with the number 4 passes, and then the main symbol sz with the number 1 passes. It is configured to be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the main symbol sz of the specific type (the main symbol with the number 4 in this control example) can be passed a plurality of times before the variable display of the symbol string makes one round. When the reach state is established for the main symbol sz of the game, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be won (the main symbol sz that is the combination of the jackpot is likely to be stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reach state). Can be visually suggested to the person. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of main symbol sz the reach state is established, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in the second control example, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned main symbol sz is read out from the character storage area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol sequence area 235 g as the symbol sequence data for displaying the symbol sequence. It is configured. That is, among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbol row image data corresponding to the main symbol (image data in which each main symbol sz is displayed at intervals where the display position of the sub symbol fz is skipped) is generated for each symbol row. However, it is configured to be stored in the third symbol row area 235 g. Then, using this main symbol sequence image data, the main symbol sz is variedly displayed on the main symbol layer sr. With such a configuration, the number of image data used for display control can be reduced as compared with the variable display of image data for each symbol, so that the processing load of display control can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the second control example, among the symbols forming the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz can be independently and variablely displayed. Therefore, even if a plurality of main symbols sz possessed by each symbol sequence are formed by one image data (main symbol sequence image data) and displayed in a variable manner, various modes of variable display of the sub symbol fz can be varied. Variable display can be performed. Therefore, even if the number of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

Further, among the third symbols forming each symbol sequence, the main symbol sz, which is the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, is displayed in a variable manner for each symbol sequence using the main symbol sequence image data. Since the sub-symbol fz, which is the identification information that is executed and does not show the lottery result of the special symbol, is configured to execute the variable display for each symbol, the main symbol sz showing the lottery result of the special symbol Various variation effects can be executed by varying the content of the variation display of the sub-symbol fz without changing the content of the variation display. That is, in order to diversify the variable display effect of the third symbol, the main symbol sz in which the display mode of the stop display is determined in advance changes the content of the variable display of the sub symbol fz while executing the predetermined variable display. By making it variable, various variable effects can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the variable display effect of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol with reliable and varied contents.

In this second control example, all the main symbols sz forming the symbol sequence are configured to be possessed by one image data (main symbol sequence image data), but the present invention is not limited to this, and all the main symbols are not limited to this. Of the symbol sz (each main symbol sz with numbers 1 to 9), only a part of the main symbol sz (for example, the normal main symbol sz with an even number) is generated. The symbol string image data and the probabilistic main symbol string image data that generates only the symbol strings of the remaining main symbol sz (for example, the probabilistic main symbol sz with an even number) are stored in the third symbol column area 235 g. Then, the stored image data may be used to variably display the main symbol sz on the main symbol layer sr.

In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the target special symbol lottery is a probabilistic jackpot, that is, when the combination indicating that the main symbol sz with an odd number is used to be a jackpot is stopped and displayed. Only the variation display using the probabilistic main symbol sequence image data It is possible to change the content of the variation display using the normal main symbol sequence image data while executing the predetermined variation display. Specifically, the variation display using the normal main symbol sequence image data is executed at a higher speed than the variation display using the probability variation main symbol sequence image data, and the player assigns an odd number to the probability variation main symbol sz. It may be configured to be visible only. As a result, the third symbol variation this time is displayed in a variable manner only for the probabilistic main symbol sz, and only the probabilistic main symbol sz is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal symbol (main symbol with an even number) is stopped and displayed. It is possible to notify the player that the jackpot cannot be won normally without being played.

Further, when a configuration is used in which the image data forming the main symbol sz is divided into the normal main symbol row image data and the probabilistic main symbol row image data, the normal main symbol row image data is used and the normal main symbol row image data is used. The normal main symbol layer (layer) for displaying the symbol and the probabilistic main symbol layer (layer) for displaying the probabilistic main symbol using the probabilistic main symbol row image data are configured to be different from each other, and the special symbol lottery is performed. Depending on the result, it is determined whether or not to display the main symbol sz displayed on the normal main symbol layer or the probabilistic main symbol layer (whether or not to enable (turn on) the display of each layer). It may be configured to do so. Further, as in the first control example described above, the variation display control using the image data of each symbol may be executed without generating the symbol sequence image data forming the symbol sequence.

Next, the content of the image data of the sub-symbol fz will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (c). FIG. 203 (c) is a diagram schematically showing image data of the sub-symbol fz stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2. This image data is stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and is stored in the character storage area when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the background mode transition is executed. The corresponding image data is read from 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. Since the contents of the process of reading the image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing the image data in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

As shown in FIG. 203 (c), in the character storage area 234a2 according to the second control example, as the image data of the sub symbol fz, a normal sub symbol fz imitating a triangular mark (see FIG. 122 (b)). The image data SD1 of the above, the image data SD2 of the sub-symbol fz for the advance notice effect imitating a bubble, and the image data SD3 of the special sub-symbol fz imitating the number 16 are stored at least. Although omitted in FIG. 202 (c), the sub-symbol fz for the advance notice effect is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and is shown in FIG. 202 (c). The sub-symbol fz for the advance notice effect that imitates the shown bubbles is the sub-symbol fz used when the sea background is set. Therefore, in the character storage area 234a2, the image data (not shown) of the sub-symbol fz (not shown) for the advance notice effect that imitates the leaves as the sub-design fz used when the mountain background is set is also in advance. It is stored.

Here, in the second control example, among the third symbols that are variablely displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, only the sub symbol fz that does not show the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed on the sub symbol layer fr. The sub-symbol fz is set to the third symbol display device independently of the main symbol sz, which is configured to be possible and is variablely displayed in the fluctuation pattern (variation time, stop display position) predetermined by the main symbol layer sr. It is configured so that it can be variablely displayed on the display surface of 81. Therefore, various variation effects using the sub symbol fz can be easily executed without changing the variation display content of the main symbol sz. Further, when various variation effects using the sub symbol fz are executed, the main symbol layer sr is preferentially displayed over the sub symbol layer fr even if a part of the variable effect is displayed overlapping with the main symbol sz. Since the arrangement is made so as to be such, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the main symbol sz.

In this second control example, as the variation effect using the sub-symbol fz, various variation effects are executed in addition to the reach line advance notice effect described with reference to FIGS. 202 (b) and 202 (c). For example, the sub symbol fz is switched to the display mode for the advance notice effect using the image data SD2, and the fluctuation direction of the main symbol sz (for example, the left direction) at the start of the variation display of the third symbol. The third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol sz, sub symbol) is switched to a special display mode using image data SD3, and a warning effect at the start of fluctuation that fluctuates and displays in the opposite direction (right direction). According to the number and arrangement of the sub-symbol fz (sub-symbol fz imitating the number 16) of the special display mode that is stopped and displayed when the fluctuation of the symbol fz) is stopped, the jackpot type suggestion effect that suggests the jackpot type can be executed. It is configured.

In this way, the identification information (sub symbol fz) different from the identification information (main symbol sz) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the identification information (main symbol sz) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery fluctuates. By making it possible to execute various variation effects using the identification information (sub symbol fz) that can be variablely displayed during the displayed period, the player can be made to pay attention to the variable display sub symbol fz. Can be done.

Further, in the second control example, unlike the fluctuation display control of the main symbol sz, the fluctuation display control of the sub symbol fz is configured to be executed for each symbol, so that the symbols are formed in the symbols Z1 to Z3. It is easy to execute control to switch the display mode of only a part of the plurality of sub-symbols fz to be displayed (for example, only in the vicinity of the main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed) to the display mode for variable effect. Can be done. Further, normally, it is possible to display so that the number of sub-symbols fz displayed one between the main symbols sz is two or more, and it is necessary not to display only a part of the sub-symbols fz. Can be done.

Further, the timing for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be the start timing of the special symbol variation or the timing at which the special symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 203 (d), the contents of each image data used for the variable main symbol in the second control example will be described. FIG. 203 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main symbol for variation. The variable main symbol is the symbol string Z2, that is, the tenth main symbol provided in the symbol string that is variablely displayed during the reach state, and is the main symbol stored in the character storage area 234a2. Of the display data, this is the main symbol in which the image data DA is used.

Conventionally, there is a case where the identification information (third symbol) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed in a variable manner, and when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. .. In this case, a variable effect is executed to encourage the player whether or not the identification information stopped and displayed becomes the specific identification information. Here, in general, a variation effect using a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of types of identification information are formed in a specific order is executed. Specifically, a variation effect using a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of identification information (for example, main symbol sz) with numbers 1 to 9 is formed is executed in a specific order.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, in order to enhance the effect of the effect of the third symbol variation, the variation effect that changes the display mode of the third symbol during the variation display is executed, but the identification information during the variation display ( When changing the third symbol), if the numbers 1 to 9 attached to the identification information, that is, the specific information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery are changed, for example, 1 to 9 Although the fluctuation display was executed using the nine third symbols with each number of, the third symbol with the number 5 was added in the middle of the fluctuation, and the third symbol with the number 6 was added. When switching to 3 symbols, the 3rd symbol with the number 6 disappears, so the player distrusts that the result of the special symbol lottery was changed during the variable display of the 3rd symbol. There was a risk of giving a feeling.

Further, for example, a variable display is executed using nine third symbols with numbers 1 to 9, and a new third symbol with a number 6 is added in the middle, for a total of ten. When switching to the variable display using the third symbol of No. 3, it is necessary to execute display control to cope with the increase in the number of the third symbol to be displayed in a variable manner, and the control content is difficult. There was a risk that it would become.

On the other hand, in this control example, the symbol row Z2 is formed by 10 main symbols by each of the main symbols numbered 1 to 9 and the main symbol for change. Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of the main symbols without changing the number of the main symbols forming the symbol sequence while leaving the various symbols with the numbers 1 to 9. Further, even if the display mode of the main symbol for change is changed to various display modes, the number of main symbols forming the symbol string Z2 does not change, so that the display control for the symbol string Z2 is easily executed. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 203 (d), in the character storage area 234a2 according to the second control example, the image data DA1 of the normal main symbol sz with the number 4 as the image data of the main symbol for change, and the image data DA1 of the number. Image data DA2 of the normal main symbol sz with 7; image data DA3 of the V main symbol sz imitating the letter V, image data DA4 of the special main symbol sz imitating the number 16; At least the image data DA4 of the symbol sz is stored. Although omitted in FIG. 202 (d), the main symbol sz is usually displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and is shown in FIG. 202 (d). The normal main symbol sz imitating "shark" and the normal main symbol sz imitating "dugong" are the main symbols sz used when the sea background is set. Therefore, in the character storage area 234a2, image data (figure) of the normal main symbol sz (not shown) imitating "rhino" or "wild boar" as the normal main symbol sz used when the mountain background is set. (Not shown) is also stored in advance.

Here, in the variable display effect of the third symbol in the normal time, the main symbol for change using the image data DA1 is configured to be displayed in the symbol column Z2, and when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the main symbol for change using the image data DA2 is displayed in the symbol row Z2 in a part or a small part when the special symbol lottery is lost and the winner is won. That is, in the normal state, the main symbol for change sz that imitates the "shark" with the number 4 is displayed in a variable manner, so that the main symbol (the main symbol with an even number) that normally suggests a big hit is 5 When the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, while the symbol row Z2 is formed by a total of 10 main symbols, which are 5 main symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) indicating the winning of the probability variation jackpot. In a part of the above, or in a small part of the case where the special symbol lottery is missed and won, the change main symbol sz that imitates the "Jugon" with the number 7 is displayed in a variable manner, and the normal jackpot win is usually won. There are 4 main symbols (main symbols with even numbers) that suggest, and 6 main symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) that indicate the probability variation jackpot winning, so the symbol row Z2 is made up of a total of 10 main symbols. It will be formed.

As a result, did you win the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) that is advantageous to the player in the special symbol lottery that is currently being executed? It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. As a condition for using the change main symbol sz that imitates the "dugong" with the number 7, the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is more satisfied than the case where it is not (missing). It suffices if it becomes easy, and it may be configured not to be used when the result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, among the cases where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, it is preferable to configure it so that it is easier to use when the probability variable big hit is won than when the normal big hit is won. As a result, it is possible to associate the apparent number of each type of main symbol (even number, odd number) with the probability variation jackpot winning ratio, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Further, the V main symbol sz shown in the image data DA3 is a display mode that is not normally displayed, and is used as a main symbol for change when a special condition is satisfied during the variable display of the third symbol (main symbol). It is what is displayed. This V main symbol sz is used as a general-purpose main symbol that is a combination indicating a jackpot winning when stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reach state regardless of the type of the main symbol sz in the reach state. By using the general-purpose main symbol in this way, for example, even when the main symbol that is the combination of winning the jackpot passes on the effective line in the reach state, it is not necessary to wait for the symbol row Z2 to make another round. , It can be expected that the third symbol (main symbol) is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the variable display effect of the third symbol, the normal main symbol (main symbol sz with an even number) and the probabilistic main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number) are used. In the case of a double reach state, if the V main symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of each overlapping reach state, it indicates that the jackpot was won by the main symbol on the side that is advantageous to the player. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust even if the V main symbol is variablely displayed in the double reach state. Further, in this control example, the V main symbol is used as the general-purpose main symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed this time when the combination indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed using the V main symbol. In addition to the jackpot game, duplicate jackpot suggestion indicating that the right to execute at least one jackpot game has already been acquired (there is winning information indicating the jackpot winning in the special figure hold stored in the hold). It may be used as a symbol, or it may be configured to indicate that a plurality of execution rights of the jackpot game have been acquired only by displaying the V main symbol in a variable manner. With this configuration, when the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to make the player play the game with a greater sense of expectation.

Next, the special main symbol sz shown in the image data DA4 and the unfortunate main symbol sz shown in the image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third symbol, and the main symbol sz is a combination indicating a jackpot winning. This is the main symbol for change used in the promotion effect that can be executed after the display is stopped. Here, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, an advantageous jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous jackpot game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot game (probability jackpot game). (Normal jackpot game) and In some (or all) cases where the jackpot winning in the combination using) is stopped and displayed, the type of the main symbol sz that is stopped and displayed is changed to the probabilistic main symbol sz (main symbol sz with an odd number). It is configured so that the promotion effect for changing to is feasible.

During this promotion production, it is not a period that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery (big hit, miss) using the main symbol sz, but a period to suggest whether the jackpot won this time is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, as the main symbol for change, the special main symbol sz shown in the image data DA4 indicating that it is a probabilistic jackpot or the disappointing main symbol sz shown in the image data DA5 indicating that it is a normal jackpot is set. NS. In this way, by changing the display mode of the main symbol for change according to the timing when the content to be notified to the player is changed by using the main symbol sz, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. ..

In this second control example, the type of the main symbol sz stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning by the promotion effect is configured to execute the effect of promoting from the normal main symbol sz to the probabilistic main symbol sz. However, the number of round games (number of rounds) executed during the jackpot game is not limited to this, for example, from the main symbol showing the small number of rounds to the main symbol showing the number of rounds larger than the number of rounds. It may be configured to perform an effect that promotes to. In this case, as the main symbol for change, a plurality of image data are prepared in a display mode suggesting the number of rounds that can be executed, and the main symbol for change is used according to the type of jackpot that was actually won. It may be configured to determine the display mode of.

Further, in this control example, the main symbol sequence image data of the symbol sequence Z2 is generated by using the nine main symbol sz with the numbers 1 to 9 and the above-mentioned change main symbol sz, and the third symbol sequence is generated. It is configured to be stored in the area 235g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main symbol sz for change is not included in the main symbol column image data, but is stored in the third symbol area 235d, and is referred to as the sub symbol fz. Similarly, it may be configured to execute the variation display control for each symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to easily change the display mode of the main symbol sz for change in the symbol string Z2 once set.

Further, separately from the main symbol layer sr on which the main symbol sz is displayed, the change main symbol layer sr1 on which the change main symbol sz is displayed is arranged, and the change is made using the change main symbol layer sr1. It may be configured to display the main symbol sz. In this case, since the change main symbol sz is displayed only in the symbol string Z2, the display area of the change main symbol layer sr1 is limited to the display area of the symbol string Z2, and the change main symbol layer sr1 is displayed. Is not prioritized over the main symbol layer sr and is arranged at a position where it is displayed with priority over the sub symbol layer fr. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change main symbol sz from being hidden by the sub symbol fz, and to display the change main symbol sz without disturbing the display of the main symbol sz.

Each of the image data described above with reference to FIGS. 203 (a) to 203 (d) is a part of the image data indicating the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) stored in the character storage area 234a2. However, in reality, other image data is also stored. For example, each image data stored as the main symbol display data has an image corresponding to a display mode (for example, a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or a display mode in which the target creature is pleased) showing different actions. When data is stored and the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit), by replacing the image data, the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz) stopped and displayed can be changed. It can be changed.

Specifically, the number 7 was added when the third symbol indicating that the jackpot was won was stopped and displayed (when the "dugong" with the number 7 was stopped and displayed in the normal display mode). It is configured so that the "dugong" is switched to a special display mode that gives a surprised look. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won by the display mode of the third symbol. Further, the image data corresponding to this special display mode is configured to be used for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the start of the third symbol change, and immediately after the start of the third symbol change, It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting that the player has won a big hit in a special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the flow of variation display of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the variable display effect of the third symbol and the display content of the symbol sequence displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In FIG. 204, as an example of the third symbol variation effect, a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds indicating a jackpot winning is used.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command indicating the start of the special symbol variation, the variation display mode of the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz is based on the variation pattern (command) received this time. To determine. Specifically, in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, the presence / absence of the advance notice effect, the presence / absence of the reach effect, and the stop symbol are determined. And set the corresponding display command. After that, the set display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the variation pattern command executed in the command determination process of the display control device 114 (see S6302 in FIG. 190). In process 2 (see S6455 in FIG. 209), the received display command (variation pattern command) is analyzed, the variation display table is determined based on the analysis result, and the main symbol corresponding to the currently set background mode is determined. The image data of the main symbol sequence using sz (main symbol row image data) is read from the third symbol row area 235 g, and the image data corresponding to the sub symbol fz corresponding to the currently set background mode is the third symbol row. It is read from the area 235g, a display image is generated, and the display image is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

Then, a normal fluctuation period is set for 10 seconds after the third symbol variation effect is executed. This normal fluctuation period is a period in which all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, and is set as a period in which the background mode transition can be executed by the player operating the frame button 22. When the background mode transition is executed during this normal fluctuation period, of the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz, each symbol displayed in the display mode corresponding to the background mode is the background after the transition. Control to switch to the display mode corresponding to the mode is executed.

After that, when the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed and reach the reach state, a reach fluctuation period of 40 seconds is set, and a reach effect suggesting (fanning) whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. Is executed. During this reach fluctuation period, the background mode transition is not executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the light emitting mode of various decorative LEDs mounted on the pachinko machine 10 is variable. The production is executed. Further, in a part of the reach effect, it is configured to execute the operation effect in which the valid period (SW valid period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set, and the frame is within the set valid period. By operating the button 22, an effect that is not executed if the frame button 22 is not operated is executed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated, a definite notification indicating that the special symbol lottery this time has won a big hit and a suggestion notification indicating that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit are executed. It is configured to be possible. With this configuration, the player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special symbol can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22. In addition, since an effect that cannot be seen without operating the frame button 22 during the operation effect is provided, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22 even for a player who wants to see various effects. ..

As described above, since the background mode transition is not executed during the reach fluctuation period, the background mode suggests (fans) whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. Is switched, and the display mode of the third symbol is also switched accordingly, so that it is possible to suppress the reach effect that is difficult for the player to understand. Further, since the operation effect is executed during the reach variation period in which the background mode transition is not executed, for example, the variation effect (so-called hidden) that does not notify the player of the SW valid period set in the operation effect. Even if the operation effect) can be set, the player can positively operate the frame button 22.

In this case, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a notification mode for notifying the player that the background mode transition is not executed (for example, "during reach, even if the button is pressed, the background is the background". A notification mode for setting a comment display of "the mode does not change") or notifying the player that the hidden operation effect is being executed (for example, if the button is pressed at some timing during reach) It is good to set the comment display) of "A special effect will be executed". As a result, the player can be made to execute the operation effect with peace of mind.

Then, at the timing when the reach fluctuation period ends, the third symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the normal main symbol sz (main symbol sz with an even number) among the combinations of the main symbols sz indicating the jackpot winning. After that, the promotion effect for promoting the normal main symbol sz that won the big hit to the probabilistic main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number) is executed. When this promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot winning is a probabilistic jackpot, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the sub symbol fz and the main symbol sz for change are changed. The display mode of the symbol sz is determined. Then, the promotion effect using the symbol sequence for the promotion effect is executed using the promotion fluctuation period (10 seconds).

Here, as the symbol string for promotion effect, for example, the display mode of the main symbol sz for change is the display mode using the image data DA4 (see FIG. 203 (d)), and the display mode of the sub symbol fz is the image data SD3. In the case of the display mode using (see FIG. 203 (c)), in addition to the normal probabilistic main symbol sz (main symbol sz with an odd number), an advantageous jackpot advantageous to the player. Since many symbols indicating that the player has been elected can be displayed, it is possible to visually notify the player that there is a high possibility that the player will be promoted to a probabilistic jackpot in this promotion effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the content of the variation effect executed in the second control example will be described. FIG. 205 shows an effect example of the variation effect of the third symbol executed for the same variation pattern command, and FIG. 202 (a) illustrates the flow of the variation pattern used in the effect example. FIG. 202 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the normal effect, and FIG. 202 (c) is the flow of the reach line notice effect (see FIG. 202 (b)). 202 (d) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the advance notice effect in which the fluctuation direction of the sub-symbol fz is different from the usual one.

As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when a fluctuation pattern command indicating a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set is set in the main control device 110, a reach effect is produced by the voice lamp control device 113. The display variation pattern command to be executed is set. Further, various advance notice effects using the sub-symbol fz are executed by using the period until the reach effect is executed. In the second control example, as described above, the main symbol sz forming each symbol sequence and the sub symbol fz are configured to be independently variable and displayable, so that the variable pattern received from the main control device 110 can be displayed. Various variation effects (notice effects) can be executed by varying only the variation pattern of the sub symbol fz while varyingly displaying the main symbol sz in a specific variation pattern in response to a command.

Specifically, in the effect A shown in FIG. 205 (b), similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the third symbol variation display in which the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are synchronized (FIG. 202). (A)) is executed, and the normal pattern of reaching the reach state is shown. In this way, by controlling the display so that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz, which are independently and variablely displayed, are synchronized with each other, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are apparently changed as one symbol sequence. You can make it look like it is being displayed.

Next, in the effect B shown in FIG. 205 (c), the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to off (set to non-display) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation of the third symbol. In the meantime, the effect pattern in which the reach line notice effect for stopping and displaying the variable display of the sub-symbol fz is executed is shown. That is, the same display control as in 205 (a) described above is executed for the main symbol sz, but the main symbol layer sr is set to be hidden in the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period. Therefore, the player is configured so that the variable display of the main symbol sz cannot be visually recognized.

Then, the sub symbol fz is displayed in a variable manner using the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period (see FIG. 202 (b)), and the sub symbol fz is displayed at the end timing of the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period. By stopping and displaying the symbol fz, the position where the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed is displayed in the third symbol variation display this time (see FIG. 202 (c)). After that, in the latter half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to on (set to display), and the second half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period is used to set the main symbol. The fluctuation display of sz is executed, and the reach state is reached 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, as in FIG. 205 (b).

That is, when the effect B shown in FIG. 205 (c) is executed, that is, when the reach line advance notice effect is executed, the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed before the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed. Since it is possible to notify the player of only the position to be reached, it is possible to determine in advance whether the third symbol variation display will be double reach, single reach, or non-reach (from the start of variation of the third symbol). It becomes possible to grasp (after 15 seconds). Therefore, when the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz cannot reach the reach state with respect to the normal pattern (see FIG. 205 (b)) that takes 30 seconds to grasp whether or not the reach is reached. It is possible to shorten the period for giving the player an excessive sense of expectation.

Further, when the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can reach the reach state, the player can enjoy the remaining fluctuation time while expecting which main symbol sz will bring the reach state. You can do it. In the second control example, when the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can reach, the sub symbol fz is stopped because it is configured to always be in the reach state. At the display timing, the player can easily determine whether or not the third symbol variation this time is in the reach state.

Finally, in the effect C shown in FIG. 205 (d), the normal display is executed for the main symbol sz as in the above-mentioned effect A, and the sub symbol fz is displayed for a predetermined period (3) from the start of the fluctuation. Only (seconds) shows an effect pattern in which an effect different from that of effect A is executed. Specifically, a display mode using image data SD2 (see FIG. 203 (c)) is set as a display mode of the sub-symbol fz displayed at the start of fluctuation, and the fluctuation display direction (left direction) of the main symbol is defined as The sub-symbol reverse variation display that fluctuates the sub-symbol fz in the reverse direction (right direction) is executed, and then the variation display using the normal sub-symbol fz is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the main symbol sz. It is a production pattern.

As in the effect pattern shown in the effect C, the player is allowed to make the variation display direction of the main symbol sz different from the variation display direction of the sub symbol fz at the timing when the third symbol variation display is started. This is a surprising effect, that is, the player who has recognized that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are formed in the same sequence of symbols and that they are displayed in a variable manner only in the same direction is recognized. Since the sub-symbol fz is displayed in a variable manner in a mode that does not exist, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

As described above, in this second control example, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are configured to be independently variable and displayable, and correspond to the variable pattern command set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By setting the variable display mode of the main symbol sz and changing only the variable display mode of the sub symbol fz without changing the variable display mode of the main symbol sz, various variation effects can be executed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display result of the main symbol sz is different from the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, when the sub symbol fz is variablely displayed first, for example, the sub symbol fz is enlarged and displayed, and the variable display is executed so that the sub symbol fz covers the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, during which time. In addition, the variable display position of the main symbol sz and the symbol type may be changed.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208. FIG. 206 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the content of the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is changed with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the third symbol row area 235 g is added to the resident video RAM 235. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 203, each image data D1 to D9 of the main symbol display data corresponding to each background mode and each image data SD1 of the sub symbol display data ~ SD3, etc., which is different from the character storage area 234a2 of the first control example described above in that each image data DA1 to DA5, etc. of the main symbol display data for change is stored, and the image data stored in other areas It is the same. Since the details of each image data newly stored in the second control example have been described above with reference to FIG. 203, the description thereof will be omitted.

The third symbol row area 235g reads out a plurality of image data of the main symbol sz stored in the character storage area 234a2 to generate one image data (main symbol row image data) as a symbol string in advance, and the generated main symbol. It is a storage area for storing column image data. When the main symbol sz is variablely displayed on the main symbol layer sr, the main symbol row image data stored in the third symbol row area 235 g is read out and displayed based on the drawing contents specified in the display data table. The main symbol sz is displayed in a variable manner by setting the position coordinates variably. With this configuration, the number of image data used when the main symbol sz is variablely displayed can be reduced as compared with the case where the image data generated in units of the main symbol sz is used. The processing load can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the drawing contents related to the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) are drawn with respect to the display data table (see FIG. 153) in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. They differ in that they differ, and are otherwise the same. The detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, in the drawing content of the display data table, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting the image for one frame, and the sprite is displayed according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either back A or B corresponding to the background mode (either "sea mode" or "mountain mode") selected by the player, or is different from back A and B. Information that specifies whether to display the back image is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surface A and B as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

Next, the type of sprite for displaying the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. First, for the sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, ...), the display position coordinates indicating the stop position of each sub-symbol fz that was stopped and displayed in the previous variation effect are set. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop position of the sub symbol fz in the previous variation effect. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), unlike the main symbol sz, the sub symbol fz is not given a unique number, and all the sub symbol fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, the variation effect can be easily started from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variation effect simply by setting the display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub-symbol fz that was stopped and displayed in the previous variation effect. can do.

Although a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 208, in the second control example, a plurality of display modes can be set as the display mode of the sub-symbol fz, and the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a plurality of display modes. According to the display mode of each sub-symbol fz to be displayed, each sub-symbol fz is displayed in the corresponding display mode by designating the storage destination of the image data used for display in the drawing list. Here, if the display mode of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variation effect and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the current variation effect are different, the start timing of the variation effect, that is, , The display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be different from the drawing information corresponding to the address "0001H" of the display data table, or the sub-symbol fz may be varied by using the display mode of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variation effect. The effect may be started and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be changed so as to change the display mode of the sub-symbol fz during high-speed fluctuations that make it difficult for the player to see.

In the former case, since the sub-symbol fz is displayed in the display mode used in the current variation effect before the variation effect is started, that is, at the timing when the sub-symbol fz is stopped, the variation to be executed from now on. It is possible to let the player grasp the production content of the production in advance, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. Further, in the latter case, since the display mode of the sub-symbol fz can be changed at a timing that is difficult for the player to notice, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz can be smoothly changed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. can.

Next, among the types of sprites for displaying the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81, the sprite for displaying the main symbol sz will be described. In the main symbol row (main symbol row 1, main symbol row 2, ...), the symbol row type offset information is stored as the symbol row type information for specifying the main symbol sz of the third symbol to be displayed. There is. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each main symbol sz. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the main symbol sz. The display of the main symbol sz in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each main symbol sz has a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the main symbol sz. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each main symbol sz, the main symbol sz to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the main symbol sz fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the main symbol sz is fluctuating and displayed at high speed, the main symbol sz is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the main symbol sz is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

Further, in the second control example, the image data of each main symbol sz displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be one image data (main symbol string image data) for each symbol column. There is. For example, for each main symbol sz with numbers 1 to 9 that are variablely displayed in the symbol string Z1, the main symbol sz with the number 3 becomes the head of the image data, and then the main symbol sz. The main symbol with a predetermined interval (interval in which the sub symbol fz is displayed) so that the numbers attached to are in the order of "3 → 2 → 1 → 9 → 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4". The column image data is generated and stored in the third symbol column area 235 g. Then, by varying the display position coordinates of the main symbol sequence image data based on the passage of time, an image in which only the main symbol sz forming the symbol sequence Z1 is variablely displayed is displayed on the main symbol layer sr. It is configured. The size (coordinate range) of the display area formed on the main symbol layer sr is set to a size that makes it impossible to display all the images included in the main symbol sequence image data, and FIG. 202 (a). ), A maximum of three main symbols sz are set to a size that can be displayed.

Therefore, based on the offset information included in the symbol column type offset information, the type of the main symbol sz to be displayed on the main symbol layer sr is specified, and the specified main symbol sz is made to correspond to the position to be displayed. The display range of the symbol string image data is determined, and the display of each main symbol sz is executed in the display range. In this way, when the variable display is executed without changing the arrangement relationship of the main symbols sz, image data is provided for each main symbol sz as in the first control example described above, and the image data is provided one before. Based on the offset information of the stop symbol of the main symbol sz in the variation effect of, the symbol type of each main symbol sz displayed when starting the current variation effect is specified, and then the content of the variation effect to be executed is set. Correspondingly, rather than variably setting the display position (display position coordinates) of the image data of each main symbol sz while synchronizing them, a symbol sequence in which a plurality of main symbols sz are defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined interval. The load of the display control process can be reduced when the image data is generated and the variation effect is executed using the symbol sequence image data.

When the display control method of the second control example is used, it is difficult to change the arrangement of the main symbols sz and the arrangement interval of the main symbols sz. In that case, It is better to execute the display control for variable display of each main symbol sz by using the image data corresponding to each main symbol sz as in the first control example described above. Further, the configuration of the first control example described above and the configuration of the second control example are fused, and only the specific main symbol sz uses the image data of the symbol unit to form a plurality of main symbols other than the specific main symbol. On the other hand, it may be configured to use the main symbol sequence image data. In this case, it is possible to easily execute control for changing the image data to be used or changing the display position (variable display speed) for a specific main symbol, and also for special display control. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control when displaying the plurality of main symbols sz in a variable manner with respect to the plurality of main symbols sz that are always displayed with the synchronized variable display contents without executing.

In this second control example in which one image data (main symbol string image data) is generated for each symbol string, each of the symbol string Z1, the symbol string Z2, and the symbol string Z3 (for each symbol string). ) It is configured so that different drawing contents are set, and the number 4 is added to each main symbol sz to which the numbers 1 to 9 which are displayed in a variable manner are attached to the symbol string Z2. The main symbol sz becomes the beginning of the image data, and then the numbers attached to the main symbol sz are determined in the order of "4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → 3". The main symbol sequence image data with an interval (interval in which the sub symbol fz is displayed) is generated and stored in the third symbol sequence area 235 g. Further, for the symbol string Z3, the main symbol sz with the number 1 is at the beginning of the image data for each main symbol sz with the numbers 1 to 9 that are displayed in a variable manner, and then the main symbol sz with the number 1 is added. Open a predetermined interval (interval at which the sub symbol fz is displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main symbol sz are in the order of "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9". The main symbol row image data is generated and stored in the third symbol row area 235 g.

By using the main symbol string image data corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 configured in this way and controlling the display so that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed to the left, the main symbol layer. In sr, only the main symbol sz displayed in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is variablely displayed. As described above, the type of the main symbol sz located at the head of the main symbol row image data is different for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a result, in the state where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (initial state), on the central position of the third symbol display device 81, that is, on the effective line L2 (see FIG. 122 (a)), "3" is displayed in order from the top. The main symbol sz with the number ".4.1" is stopped and displayed. That is, by configuring the numbers attached to the main symbols sz, which are the head positions of the main symbol sequence image data, to be different, in the initial state in which the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, each of them is used. By simply setting the initial display so that the start position of the main symbol string image data forming the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is on the effective line L2, the combination of the main symbols sz different from the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to simplify the display control in the initial state.

Next, the contents of the drawing list in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list is different from the drawing list of the first control example described above (see FIG. 155) in that the type of pride for displaying the third symbol is changed, and is the same except for that. be. The detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 208, a back image and a sub symbol (sub symbol 1, sub symbol 1) used in the image of one frame. Sub-design 2, ...), Main symbol row (main symbol row 1, main symbol row 2, ...) Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), Character (character 1, character 2, ...) The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as the reserved ball number symbol 1, the reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., The error symbol). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address.

That is, as drawing instruction contents for the image of the sub-symbol fz, information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored and a plurality of information corresponding to the sub-symbol fz stored in the third symbol area 235d. From the image data SD1 to SD3 (see FIG. 203 (c)) of the above, the address indicating the image data used for the drawing instruction this time is described. Further, the drawing instruction content for the image of the main symbol sz corresponds to the information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored and the main symbol row stored in the third symbol row area 235 g. From a plurality of image data (main symbol sequence image data), an address indicating the image data used for the drawing instruction this time is described.

<Regarding the control processing content in the second control example>
Next, the control processing contents in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 and 210. In the second control example, at least the control processing contents executed by the display control device 114 are different from those of the first control example described above. In addition, the types and contents of the effect mode of the variable effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 are also different. The other contents are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second control example, the content of the variation effect mode of the third symbol set by the voice lamp control device 113 is different. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 205, the second control example. Of the three symbols, a display command for executing various variation effects only for the sub symbol fz can be set. However, the method of setting the display command corresponding to the variation effect is the same as the variation display setting process (see S4113 of FIG. 182) of the first control example described above, and only the specific setting contents are different. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the contents of various variation effects executed for the sub-symbol fz executed in the second control example are described above with reference to FIG. 205, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the content of the control process executed by the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process 2 (S6455). The variation pattern command process 2 (S6455) executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and is a display control device of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. For the variation pattern command processing executed in 114 (see S6405 in FIG. 191), the types of the main symbol sz for change and the sub symbol fz used during the current variation effect are determined, and the resident video RAM 235 The difference is that processing for storing in various storage areas has been added. Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fluctuation pattern command processing 2 (S6455), first, the shaded fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) is analyzed (S6501), and the fluctuation pattern command this time is for indicating the jackpot winning (main control device). It is determined whether the command is a variable pattern command selected when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery executed in 110 (S6551). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot variation is (S6551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the display variation pattern command this time contains information indicating the effect mode of the promotion effect (S6552), and the promotion effect is performed. When it is determined that the information indicating the effect mode is included (S6552: Yes), the change main symbol corresponding to the command is determined for the change main symbol of the promotion-only symbol sequence, and the third symbol row area is used. Store and move to S6554. Further, in the processing of S6551 if the current fluctuation is not a jackpot fluctuation, or if it is determined that the promotion effect is not executed in the processing of S6552, then the process proceeds to S6554 and the analysis is performed in the processing of S6501. Based on the information obtained, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern received this time includes information for executing the advance notice effect using the sub-symbol fz (see FIG. 205), and the advance notice effect of the sub-symbol fz is performed. When it is determined to be executed (S6554: Yes in FIG. 209), the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the current sub-design notice effect is determined, and the image data corresponding to the determined display mode is stored in the character ROM 234. It is read from the character storage area 234a2 of the above and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

After that, the variation display data table corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined, the display variation pattern for 0 is set in the display, and the variation pattern command executed by the display control device 114 of the first control example described above is executed. The same process of S6502 to S6505 as the process (see S6405 in FIG. 191) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear image change command process 2. The back image change command process 2 (S6469) is changed when the back image change flag 233w is set to on for the above-mentioned back image change command process (see S6419 in FIG. 195 (a)). The difference is that the type of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) corresponding to the back image (background mode) is determined, and the process of storing in the third symbol area 235d and the third symbol row area 235 g is added. ing. Since the other processes are the same, the same processes are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) is executed, first, the rear image change flag 233w is set to on (S7001), and the third symbol (main symbol sz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) is set. , Sub-symbol fz) is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the third symbol area 235d and the third symbol row area 235 g (S7002). After that, the rear image discrimination flag 223x corresponding to the changed rear image type is set to ON (S7051), and this process is terminated.

<About a modified example of the second control example>
Next, a modified example of the above-described second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 211. In the second control example described above, the main symbol sz constituting the third symbol is displayed (drawn) on the main symbol layer sr, and the sub symbol fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub symbol layer fr. By controlling the display of the display content of the main symbol layer sr and the display content of the sub symbol layer fr in synchronization with each other, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are regularly changed in a specific permutation. By making it displayed and further variably setting only the display control content for the sub symbol fz, various variation effects can be produced without changing the variation display content for the main symbol sz for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. It was configured to be feasible.

On the other hand, in the present modification, the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) is displayed (drawn) on one layer as in the first control example described above. Further, the difference is that a plurality (two) layers for displaying (drawing) the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) are provided. Then, by varying the display control content of the third symbol displayed on the two layers (third symbol image A and third symbol image B), a special variation effect can be executed. It differs in that it is. The other contents are the same as those of the second control example described above, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 211 (a) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the display layer formed on the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the second control example and the display screen, and FIG. 211 (b) is a triple reach. FIG. 202 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the effect, and FIG. 202 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the triple reach state is reached by the triple reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a), in the modified example of the second control example, the third symbol layer A and the third symbol layer B are overlapped and formed as the layer on which the third symbol is displayed. The third symbol layer A is arranged in front of the third symbol layer B (on the front side from the player's point of view). In FIG. 211 (a), only the third symbol layer A and the third symbol layer B are marked, but in reality, various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Each layer that displays is superimposed.

Then, by executing the variable display of the third symbol synchronously with respect to the third symbol layer A and the third symbol layer B, the appearance of FIG. 125 of the first control example described above ( It is configured so that the same fluctuation display as the fluctuation display of the third symbol shown with reference to b) can be executed.

In this modified example configured in this way, similarly to the second control example described above, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer A and the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer B , Can be independently controlled for variable display. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer B has a single reach of “9”. In this state, it is possible to continue the third symbol variation of the third symbol layer A. In this state, depending on the result of the third symbol change of the third symbol layer A, the number of the third symbol in the reach state increases, so that the characters "reach! Promotion chance" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), when the double reach of "1" and "9" is established in the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer A, the three third symbols appear to be three. Becomes a "triple reach" in which is in the reach state. In this way, when the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner by overlapping the third symbol using a plurality of layers and the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in one layer, the order of the symbol rows of each third symbol is changed. It is possible to easily execute a variable effect that requires variable display control, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this way, when the variation display of the third symbol is different for the plurality of third symbol layers, for example, the layer on the side to be preferentially displayed (third symbol layer A) is used. The third symbol displayed as is a true third symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, and the third symbol displayed on the non-priority side layer (third symbol layer B) is decorated. The fluctuation pattern of the third symbol of the third symbol layer A is based on the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern set by the main control device 110) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Is determined, and the third symbol is determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the determined fluctuation pattern of the third symbol of the third symbol layer A (based on whether or not a jackpot is won and the type of reach). It is preferable to configure it so as to determine the variation effect content of the third symbol displayed on the layer B. Then, it is preferable to configure the third symbol layer A and the third symbol layer B to execute different variable display controls in the case where the big hit is won in the special symbol lottery than in the case where the jackpot is not won. ..

Further, in this modification, the variation effect in which the variation display of the third symbol layer A and the variation display of the third symbol layer B are completely different has been described, but the variation effect is not limited to this, for example. It may be configured to shift the start timing by 0.2 seconds and then execute the variation effect that synchronizes the variation display contents during the high-speed variation of the third symbol variation. In this way, by making the variable display of the third symbol layer A different from the variable display of the third symbol layer B only for a part of the period of the variation effect, it is possible to give the player a slight sense of discomfort. It is possible to make the player draw more variable displays.

As described above, in the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, a symbol sequence composed of symbols including a main symbol sz having identification information for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol lottery. It is configured to execute various display controls for each of the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) of Z1 to Z3, but the display areas overlap on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As long as it is a symbol that is dynamically displayed as described above, a symbol other than the symbol (third symbol) of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be provided.

For example, during the execution of the third symbol variation, the special symbols that the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 do not have may be dynamically displayed in the display area overlapping the display areas of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. .. Further, the above-mentioned special symbol may be dynamically displayed during the period during which the third symbol variation is being executed, and the dynamic display of the special symbol may be started during the execution of the third symbol variation. The special symbol may be stopped or hidden during the execution of the third symbol variation.

Even in such a configuration, the variation display mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz may be determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol is referred to as the above-mentioned sub symbol fz. Similarly, it is possible to set a variation pattern for production. Further, since the above-mentioned special symbol is not a symbol possessed by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 unlike the sub symbol fz, it is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing and the stop timing of the third symbol variation. Even without it, it does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of fluctuation patterns that can be set as compared with the sub-symbol fz, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

Further, the dynamic display mode of the special symbol may be configured to be different from the dynamic display mode of the third symbol described above. For example, the dynamic display direction of the third symbol is to the left (FIG. 202 (a)). (To the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 202), the dynamic display direction of the special symbol is different from the dynamic display direction of the third symbol (for example, to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 202 (a)). Good to configure. As a result, even if the special symbol is dynamically displayed in the display area that overlaps with the display area of the third symbol variation display during the period during which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the player can dynamically display the special symbol. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the display has been executed.

In the above-mentioned example, the dynamic display direction of the special symbol is set to be the opposite direction as the dynamic display direction of the third symbol, but the dynamic display direction may be different, for example. , Not in the left-right direction, but in the up-down direction (the direction of moving up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 202 (a)) and the front-back direction (from the back side to the front side from the viewpoint of FIG. It may be a direction of moving to the side) or an oblique direction (a direction of moving to the diagonal side in which the moving line indicating the moving direction is shifted by an angle of less than 90 degrees). Further, in the above-described example, in order to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the variation display of the special symbol has been executed during the variation of the third symbol, the dynamic display direction of the third symbol and the dynamic display direction of the special symbol are determined. However, the pattern is not limited to this, and by making the size of the third symbol that is dynamically displayed different from the size of the special symbol, the variation display of the special symbol can be displayed during the fluctuation of the third symbol. It may be configured to notify the execution in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed before the third symbol variation is executed, and the third symbol variation is stopped and displayed (including a display state in which the player is swinging to the extent that it is difficult to identify). ), It may be configured to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol.

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the above-mentioned example, in order to inform that it is difficult to understand that the fluctuation display of the special symbol has been executed during the fluctuation of the third symbol, the dynamic of each symbol (third symbol, special symbol) is performed. It may be configured so that the display direction and size are the same. With this configuration, it is not possible to know that the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed unless the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are watched. A player who wants to know that the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed can be continuously interested in various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, unlike the third symbol, the special symbol does not have to be displayed at all times. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol is not shown according to the display mode when the stop display is performed as in the third symbol. However, for example, it may be configured to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol has been won by the start of the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this way, by changing the timing (dynamic display start timing, stop display timing) in which the information for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is provided according to the type of the symbol to be dynamically displayed, it is dynamic. Since the timing at which the player should pay attention can be changed according to the various displayed symbols, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by starting the dynamic display in this way, it is suggested that the dynamic display is executed when a special symbol indicating that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is used. As a standby display mode, at least a part of the special symbol may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when a special symbol in a display mode in which a plurality of fish are grouped is used as the special symbol, only the fish displayed near the beginning of the special symbol on the fluctuation direction side is displayed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the dynamic display of the special symbol is started. In this case, it is preferable to configure not all of the display modes showing the special symbols but a part of them to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when a special symbol is displayed as a standby display mode, it is possible to prevent the special symbol from being mistakenly recognized as being dynamically displayed.

Further, in the second control example described above, the main symbol sz forming the third symbol and the sub symbol fz are configured to be displayed on different layers, and the display control content executed for each layer is set. By making them different, the variable display mode of the main symbol sz and the variable display mode of the sub symbol fz are configured to be different. In addition to this, for example, as a layer capable of displaying the sub symbol fz. A first sub-design layer and a second sub-design layer are provided, and the sub-design fz displayed on the first sub-design layer and the sub-design fz displayed on the second sub-design layer overlap. It may be configured so that only one of them is displayed. Further, by controlling the display so that the stop display positions of the sub-symbols fz displayed on the plurality of display layers are different, and then executing the reach line advance notice effect shown in FIG. 202 (b), the main symbol sz May be configured to more limit the position where is displayed as a stop.

In the second control example described above, the display layer for displaying one symbol (main symbol sz) constituting each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 and another symbol (sub symbol fz) are displayed differently. By configuring the display control to be executable for each display layer, various variation effects can be executed, but the symbol of the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured. As long as different display controls can be executed for each type of symbol forming the row (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz), the configuration may be such that they are displayed on the same display layer. In this case, when the display targets displayed as a result of each display control are duplicated, it is necessary to predefine which display target is to be displayed, which complicates the display control process. It is possible to achieve the same effect as each effect described in the control example.

Further, even when a configuration is used in which the results of a plurality of display controls are displayed on the same display layer, other than the plurality of symbol types (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) constituting the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Symbols, that is, symbols other than the third symbol that are dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (for example, the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result (big hit). In order to show that there is a high possibility of winning), various displays described in the second control example described above are targeted for various symbols including decorative symbols (decorative symbols that are dynamically displayed during a predetermined period during special symbol fluctuation). Control processing may be executed.

In the second control example described above, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the display mode of the main symbol sz is switched to the display mode corresponding to the background mode after switching. When the background mode transition effect is executed, not only the display mode of the main symbol sz but also the display mode of the sub symbol fz may be switched. In this case, the image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as the image data of the sub-design fz stored in the character storage area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, the image data corresponding to the background mode after switching is stored. Is read out and stored in the third symbol area 235d.

In addition, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is determined, and the type of the sub-symbol fz displayed after the background mode is switched is determined based on the determination result. You may. Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is a big hit, it is easier to determine the sub-symbol fz type than when the big hit is not won. It is preferable to provide a mode or a display mode imitating "V". With this configuration, by executing the background mode transition effect and switching the background mode, it is possible to easily predict the result of the special symbol lottery before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. , It is possible to make the player positively execute the operation effect.

Further, the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit may be different depending on the combination of the set background mode and the type of the displayed sub symbol fz. For example, the first production mode (sea). When the type of sub-symbol fz (display mode for sea mode) that is normally used in mode) is used in the second effect mode (mountain mode), the special symbol lottery that is being executed wins a big hit. It may be configured to indicate that it is likely to be present. In this way, by executing the effect of combining the background mode and the type of the sub-symbol fz, it is possible to execute various effects without increasing the type of the sub-symbol fz.

Further, in this control example, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the process of changing the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) is executed. In addition to that, the number and position of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122 (a)) formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed.

Further, the reach line advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b) was executed, and the background mode transition effect was executed in a state where the sub symbol fz was stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202 (b)). In that case, the stop display position of the main symbol sz notified by the reach line notice effect may be changed, and in this case, it is better when the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is a big hit. , The stop display position of the main symbol sz may be changed more easily than in the case of non-big hit winning, and conversely, in the case of non-big hit winning, the main symbol sz is not winning. It may be configured so that the stop display position can be easily changed.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 222. In the first control example described above, when a specific region (V gate 65v) is formed in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game and the game ball passes through the specific region (V gate 65v) during the jackpot game. , It was configured to set the probability change state after the jackpot game was completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120, the balls winning in the wide (opening width 50 mm) large winning opening 65a are collected at one place using the first flow path 65e1 and the fifth flow path 65e5, and the second flow path. It was configured so that the V gate 65v could be reached by letting 65e2 flow down. However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above, the ball winning from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the first flow path 65e1), that is, the ball launched by the left-handed game is on the left side. When a ball is won in the variable winning device 65 after flowing down the area, and a ball won from the right side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the fifth flow path 65e5), that is, a ball launched by a right-handed game is in the right area. When the variable winning device 65 is won after flowing down, and the timing when the variable winning device 65 is won is different from the timing when the V gate 65 can be reached. Therefore, when the probability variation jackpot game is executed, A state in which the ball can flow down the fourth flow path 65e4 so that the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can reach the V gate 65v regardless of whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is performed. It was necessary to position the switching valve 65y for a long period of time. Further, as the period during which the ball winning the variable winning device 65 can pass through the V gate 65v is set to be long, the length of the period (V valid period) for effectively determining the ball passage of the V gate 65v (specific area) is set. Since it is necessary to set it for a long time, there is also a problem that it is difficult to detect an illegal act during the jackpot game, that is, an act of passing the ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) by the illegal game.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the ball launched by the left-handed game flows down the left side region and then wins the variable winning device 65, and the ball launched by the right-handed game The period until the ball winning the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific region is substantially the same as the case where the variable winning device 65 is won after flowing down the right region. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the length of the period (V valid period) for effectively determining the passage of the ball to a specific area, and it is possible to shorten the length of the period (V valid period). It is possible to easily find the act of passing the V gate 65V (specific area).

As described above, in the third control example, the configuration in the variable winning device 65 is changed and the content of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided in the variable winning device 65 is changed. It is different from the first control example, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is an electric accessory with respect to the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 119). The difference is that the arrangement of the nail members to be planted in the lower region of 640 is different. Specifically, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the ball flowing down the left side region or the ball flowing down the right side region is the opening of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. While the nails are planted so that the prizes can be evenly won in the width direction, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the ball flowing down the left side region is the variable winning device 65. A plurality of balls flowing down the right end area of the specific winning opening 65a in a C shape below the electric accessory 640 so as to easily win a prize on the right end side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Nail members are planted.

That is, in the third control example, a variable winning device having a specific winning opening 65a having a wide opening width so that a ball that has flowed down the left side region by the left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down the right side region by the right-handed game can be won. After providing the 65, in order to suppress the winning of the ball near the central portion in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a, an electric accessory 640 is provided above the central portion of the variable winning device 65 as a winning inhibitory member. Further, a plurality of nail members planted in a V shape are provided as guiding members for guiding the winning of the ball in the vicinity of both ends in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a.

With this configuration, regardless of whether the right-handed game or the left-handed game is performed during the jackpot game, the ball near both ends in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Winning can be promoted. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 213, but the variable winning device 65 of the third control example is symmetrical in its internal structure (the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a is viewed as the left-right direction). ), And by setting the winning position of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a to a symmetrical position, the ball winning the specific winning opening 65a can be placed in each area (for example,) in the variable winning device 65. It is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the period until passing through the specific area).

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 213 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. 213 (b) is a flow path of the ball winning the specific winning opening 65a. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically.

The variable winning device 65 of the third control example is also a ball received by the opening / closing door 65b which is opened during the jackpot game state, similarly to the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 120). Is configured to be guided by the guide member 65d to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 provided on both end sides of the specific winning opening 65a. Then, the sphere that has flowed down the first opening 65a1 passes through the sphere detection sensor 65s1 (see FIG. 213 (b)), and a payout control is executed in which 15 spheres are paid out as prize spheres. Similarly, the ball flowing down the second opening 65a2 passes through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see FIG. 213 (b)), and a payout control is executed in which 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 212, in the third control example, since the ball is configured so as to be difficult to win from the vicinity of the central portion of the specific winning opening 65a, the ball received by the open / close door 65b in the open state. Can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. Therefore, the number of winning balls before flowing down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 increases, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging, and the specific winning opening 65a is won. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the prize ball is not paid out (the ball does not pass through the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2).

As shown in FIG. 213 (b), the variable winning device 65 of the third control example is specified with respect to the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 120 (b)) used in the first embodiment described above. The ball that has won the prize opening 65a (the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2) is largely different in that the path guided to the discharge port 65 is symmetrically configured.

First, the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213 (b), the switching valve 65y is in the closed state (the V gate 65V is arranged). When it is in a state of protruding so as to block the flow path), it flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the first discharge port 65h1. The time (ta) required for the sphere to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be about 2 seconds. Similarly, the sphere that has passed through the sphere detection sensor 65s2 flows down the second flow path 65r2 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213 (b), the switching valve 65y is in the closed state (the V gate 65V is arranged). When it is in a state of protruding so as to block the provided flow path), it flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the second discharge port 65h2. The time (tb) required for the sphere to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be about 2 seconds, which is the same as the time ta described above.

That is, in the third control example, the ball that has won a prize near the left end of the specific winning opening 65a by the left-handed game and has passed through the first opening 65a1 is also near the right end of the specific winning opening 65a by the right-handed game. The ball that has won the prize and passed through the second opening 65a2 is also configured to reach the switching valve 65y after the flow time at the same position.

Then, when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the flow path in which the V gate 65V is arranged is buried so that a sphere can pass through), as shown in FIG. 214, the first flow path 65r1 is opened. The flowing ball passes through the buried switching valve 65y (indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 214), passes through the first V gate 65v1, and flows into the third discharge port 65h3. Further, the ball flowing down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to pass through the buried switching valve 65y, pass through the second V gate 65V2, and flow into the fourth discharge port 65h4.

In the third control example, when the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 (the cumulative number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) reaches a predetermined number, the switching valve 65y is closed (FIG. 213). It is configured to switch from the open state (see FIG. 214) to the open state (see FIG. 214), and reaches the switching valve 65y after the predetermined number of balls pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2. The time (about 0.5 seconds) required for the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 to reach the predetermined number and the switching valve 65y to be opened is shorter than the time until (about 2 seconds). It is configured to be. Therefore, the predetermined number of spheres described above can pass through the V gate 65V as they are. Therefore, when the switching valve 65y is opened, the ball can be reliably flowed down to the specific region (V gate 65V).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 in the third control example is the same as the structure of the sorting device 300 (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, but for convenience of explanation, FIGS. 213 and 214. It is shown in a simplified diagram as shown in. Therefore, as for the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the third control example, the contents of the first embodiment described above are of course applied, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. In the third control example, the contents of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game are different from the first control example described above, and the various processing contents based on the differences are different. They differ in that they are the same otherwise. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Specifically, the difference is that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed and the content of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Is the same.

Here, the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 215, the RAM 203 of the third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 139 (b)) in that a V period timer 203ca is added. Everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V-period timer 203ca is for measuring the period during which the switching valve 65y is positioned in the open state so that the ball can pass through the specific region (V gate 65v), and is for measuring the specific region (V). A predetermined time (5 seconds) is set when the condition for allowing the ball to pass through the gate 65v) is satisfied. Then, in the jackpot middle update process (see S1954 in FIG. 220) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, the value of the V period timer 203ca. Is updated, and when the V period elapses (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0), the switching valve 65y is configured to switch to the closed state.

In the third control example, the number of balls won in the specific winning opening 65a (the number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2) in the round game of the specific number of rounds during the probability variation jackpot game (round game of the first round). ) Is determined to be a predetermined number (2 pieces), a V condition that allows the ball to pass through a specific region (V gate 65v) is satisfied, and the switching valve 65y is operated for a predetermined period (5 seconds). It is configured to switch to the open state.

That is, instead of controlling the switching valve 65y based on the passage of time from the start of the jackpot game, the switching valve 65y is switched and controlled based on the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. It is configured to do. With this configuration, the open state period of the switching valve 65y can be set during the period during which the ball could not be won by the variable winning device 65 even though the game was normally performed during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific region (V gate 65v) due to the termination.

Further, in the third control example, a sphere that satisfies the V condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, that is, a sphere that has passed the ball detection sensors 65s1 or 65s2 in the predetermined number (2) is the switching valve. The period required for the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state (about 0.5 seconds) after the V condition is satisfied is shorter than the period required for reaching 65y (about 2 seconds). At least, a sphere that satisfies the V condition can pass through a specific region (V gate 65v). With this configuration, when the V condition is satisfied, the sphere can be reliably passed to the specific region (V gate 65v).

In this control example, the V condition is satisfied and the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state for a predetermined period (5 seconds). That is, as the end condition for ending the open state of the switching valve 65y, only the period elapse end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period elapses is set, but the end condition is not limited to this, and for example, the ball is a specific region (V gate). A V-passing end condition that is satisfied when passing 65v) may be provided, or if the ending condition of the V-round game (first round game) is satisfied, or the ending condition of the V-round game is satisfied. A round end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds required for the ball winning the variable winning device 65 during the V round to reach any of the discharge ports 65h) has elapsed may be provided. .. In this way, various end conditions may be set so that the open state of the switching valve 65y is switched to the closed state when any of the end conditions is satisfied first. As a result, the period during which the switching valve 65y is in the open state can be shortened as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the specific region (V gate 65v) unnecessarily. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball collides with the ball detection sensor provided in the V gate 65v and the ball detection sensor is physically destroyed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 216, the RAM 223 of the third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 144 (b)) in that a V timer 223ca is added. , Other than that, it is the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V-timer 223ca is a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the setting of the period (V-winning period) in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V-gate 65v), and the V-timer is V-winning. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V period command set by the main control device 110 when the possible period is reached, the value corresponding to the predetermined period (3 seconds) is set. Then, the value of the V timer 223ca is continuously updated (subtracted) until the ball passes through the specific region (V gate 65v), and when the value becomes 0 (when a predetermined period has passed), a guide for V winning is given. The emphasized guidance notification is executed.

That is, while the maximum V-winning period is set for 5 seconds, the emphasis guidance notification is executed when 3 seconds have passed since the V-winning period was set. .. Here, as described above, normally, a ball that satisfies the V condition is configured to win a V prize as it is, and it takes about 2 seconds for a ball that satisfies the V condition to win a V prize. It is configured to be. That is, when the value of the V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is conceivable that the ball that satisfies the V condition does not win the V prize. Therefore, since it is necessary to aim for the V prize by using an additional ball, the emphasis guidance notification is configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot win the V prize depending on the game content of the player even though the period during which the V prize can be won is set.

In this control example, the emphasis guidance notification is executed based on the elapsed time since the V condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a sphere that satisfies the V condition may be used. It is configured to execute emphasis guidance standby notification when it is detected that it has passed through a region having no specific region (V gate 65v) (for example, a flow path having a discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 213 (b))). You may. Further, in this control example, when it is detected that the ball that triggered the switching of the switching valve 65y to the open state has not passed through the specific region (V gate 65v), the above-mentioned emphasis guidance notification is executed. However, instead of this, it may be configured to execute an abnormality notification for notifying the outside that an abnormality (for example, ball clogging) has occurred in the flow path in the variable winning device 65. good.

Further, in this control example, when the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the winning of a predetermined number (second) of balls, the switching control for immediately switching the switching valve 65y to the open state is executed. In this case, the balls (first winning ball) that have won the variable winning device 65 before the predetermined number (second) are guided to the switching valve 65y that is in the open state. , It may pass through a specific area (V gate 65V). Therefore, when a predetermined number (second) of winnings is detected, a waiting time (about 1.5) considering the time (about 2 seconds) until the second winning ball reaches the switching valve 65y. Seconds) may be set, and the switching valve 65y may be controlled to be switched to the open state after the standby time has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to facilitate passing only the ball that triggered the switching of the switching valve 65y to the open state to the specific region (V gate 65V).

Further, in this control example, the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) during one big hit game, so that a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the big hit game is completed. Even if multiple balls pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game, the privilege given to the player (providing a high probability state of a special symbol) does not change. In addition to that, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the privilege given to the player is different according to the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game is used, the above-mentioned By setting the waiting time, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the specific region (V gate 65V) excessively.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 in which the contents of the benefits given to the player are different according to the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game is used, for example, the winning jackpot Depending on the type of, the number of winnings (V winning condition) that triggers the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state is different, or the number of winning balls that triggers the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state is a variable winning device. It is preferable to make the waiting time from winning the prize 65 until the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state, or to make the condition for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state (V end condition) different.

Specifically, as a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, a small number of balls is set as a V winning condition in order to make it easier for a plurality of balls to pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game. Then it is good. As a result, the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the establishment of the V winning condition can be shortened, so that the jackpot game can be executed for a long time while the V winning condition is satisfied, and a plurality of jackpot games can be executed. Can be easily passed through the specific region (V gate 65V). Moreover, the waiting time may be shortened. As a result, the sphere (the sphere flowing down the first flow path 65r1 and the second flow path 65r2) that won the variable winning device 65 before the sphere that satisfied the V winning condition is also in the specific region (V gate 65V). Can be made to pass through. Further, the V end condition may be configured to be satisfied based on the elapsed time regardless of the number of balls passing through the specific region (V gate 65V). With this configuration, when a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically perform the game in order to pass a large number of balls to a specific area (V gate 65V). ..

On the other hand, for the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player, it is difficult for a plurality of balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game for the above-mentioned advantageous jackpot game. In addition, a large number of balls can be set as a V winning condition, a long waiting time can be set, and a V end condition can be set as a condition that is satisfied when one ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V). It is preferable to set the condition to be satisfied after a lapse of time (for example, 0.1 second lapse) that makes it difficult to pass through the specific region (V gate 65V).

With this configuration, the degree of expectation that the ball passes through the specific region (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game can be greatly different depending on the type of the jackpot game to be executed. Further, as the ball flow path in the variable winning device 65, a normal flow path and a special flow path capable of causing the ball to flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter period of time than the normal flow path are provided. Is good. Specifically, the special flow path is provided with a delay means (for example, a crune) that stagnates the flow of the spheres, and the spheres discharged from the special flow path are connected in beads rather than the spheres discharged from the normal flow path. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be easily discharged.

In this case, when the timing when the switching valve 65y is opened and the timing when the spheres are discharged from the special flow path match, it is possible to facilitate passing many spheres to the specific region (V gate 65V). can. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the player can select whether the ball winning in the variable winning device 65 can easily flow down the normal flow path or the special flow path, for example. When the left-handed game is executed, the ball winning the variable winning device 65 is easier to flow down the normal flow path than the special flow path, and when the right-handed game is executed, the special flow path is easier than the normal flow path. It is good to configure it so that it can easily flow down. Further, in this case, using the display surface of the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, the left-handed game is a stable game in which one ball can easily pass through a specific area (V gate 65V). It is difficult for a right-handed game to pass a ball to a specific area (V gate 65V), but if the timing is right, a large number of balls can be passed to a specific area (V gate 65V). It is good to execute the guidance display. In addition, in the past jackpot game, it is memorized whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game is executed. Specifically, which of the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 has the larger number of balls detected during the jackpot game? Is determined, a storage means for determining the game method during the jackpot game based on the determination result and storing the result is provided, and the game method stored in the storage means and the game result during the jackpot game (specific area). It is preferable to execute the history display that displays the number of balls passing through (V gate 65V) as the past history.

Thereby, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player select the game method to be executed during the jackpot game. In the above-mentioned control example, the privilege given when passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is set to the high probability state of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is advantageous to the player, for example. A lottery right that tends to be a lottery result may be granted, or a second jackpot game different from the jackpot game may be granted. In this case, it is advisable to provide a grant right storage means that can store the rights to which the above-mentioned benefits are granted up to a predetermined number. As a result, even if a plurality of grant rights are acquired in a short period of time, the benefits can be reliably granted on the condition of a predetermined number. Further, in this control example, the ball that has won a prize in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part of the case where the lottery result is other than the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol. In the above-described configuration, a small hit winning is set in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a short period of time, and the ball winning in the variable winning device 65 during the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is set as described above. You may use it. In addition, the above-described configuration may be used for a variable ball-entry means (for example, an electric accessory 640) in which a ball can be won in a winning game executed when a winning game is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols.

Further, in this control example, all the spheres that have passed through the switching valve 65y in the open state are configured to be able to pass through the specific region (V gate 65V), but the switching valve is not limited to this and is in the open state. A distribution member may be provided so that a part of the sphere that has passed through 65y can pass through a specific region (V gate 65V). Further, in this control example, as a variable means capable of changing between a first state in which the sphere is easily passed through the specific region (V gate 65V) and a second state in which the sphere is difficult to pass through, the sphere is selected from a plurality of flow paths. A switching valve 65y for switching the flow path is used, but the configuration of the variable means is not limited to this, and can be changed to, for example, a retention position in which the ball is retained for a predetermined period and an open position in which the ball is not retained. Variable configuration that allows the sphere to pass through the specific region (V gate 65V) within a period of effectively determining the passage of the sphere to the specific region (V gate 65V) by retaining the sphere for a predetermined period. Means may be provided. Further, a plurality of variable means may be provided in the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control processing contents of the main control device in the third control example>
Next, the control processing contents of the main control device in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220. In the third control example, the jackpot control process 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) is replaced with the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) with respect to the first control example described above, and the winning process (S1911 in FIG. 171) is performed. The winning process 4 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) is executed instead of (see)), and is the same except for the execution. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1854) will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S1854). In the jackpot control process 4 (S1854), with respect to the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) described above, the control content executed at the start of the jackpot and the case where the ball wins the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. The difference is that the control content executed in is changed, and the control content for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca during the jackpot game is added. Other than that, the contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 4 (S1854) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901), and if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901: Yes), Next, the opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to off, the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to on (S1903), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), then whether the jackpot game is currently in progress (the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON). (S1904), and if it is determined that the game is not in the jackpot game (S1904: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (the jackpot medium flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1904: Yes). S1905), if it is determined that it is the start timing (S1905: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1951), the round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1952), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1905, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), the same S1907 to S1910 as the jackpot control process of the first control example described above (see S1804 in FIG. 168). Execute the process and end this process. Further, in the processing of S1909, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: No), the winning process 4 is executed (S1953), then the abnormal processing is executed (S1912), and then the jackpot middle update process is executed. (S1954) to end this process.

Next, the contents of the winning process 4 (S1953) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process 4 (S1953). The winning process 4 (S1953) differs from the winning process (S1911 in FIG. 171) of the first control example described above in the control processing content during the V round (1 round) in which the switching valve 65y can be in the open state. It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description of the contents will be omitted.

When the winning process 4 (S1953) is executed, first, the same processing of S2201 to S2204 as the winning process (S1911 of FIG. 171) of the first control example described above is executed, and the processing of S2204 is completed, or , When it is determined in the process of S2202 that the ball has not won the specific winning opening 65a (S2202: No), the V round process is executed (S2251). The details of this V-round process (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but a process for controlling the opening / closing of the switching valve 65y when the first round game (V-round game) is executed. Is to be executed.

When the V-round process (S2251) is completed, next, the same processes of S2205 to S2208 and S2211 to S2221 as described above (see S1911 of FIG. 171) are executed, and this process is completed.

Next, the contents of the V-round process (S2251) executed in the winning process 4 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V round process (S2251).

When the V-round process (S2251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current state is in one round (during V-round) (S2401), and if it is determined that it is not in one round (S2401: No), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current round is in progress (S2401: Yes), then the value of the winning number counter 203o is "2", that is, the variable winning device during the first round game. It is determined whether the number of winning balls to 65 is "2" (S2402), and if it is determined to be "2" (S2402: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S2403), and V A V period command indicating a winning period (a period during which the ball can be guided to a specific area (V gate 65V)) is set (S2404), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the V period timer 203ca. (S2405), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not "2" (S2402: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in this control example, in the specific round game executed during the jackpot game, when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 satisfies the predetermined condition (the number of winnings is 2). The control process for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state is executed so that the sphere can easily pass through the specific region (V gate 65v). As a result, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from switching to the open state during the jackpot game without the ball being won by the variable winning device 65.

In this control example, the switching valve 65y is configured to be a V-round that can be switched to the open state only in the specific round (1st round) during the jackpot game. The round may be configured to be configurable as a V-round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to the open state. In this case, in the V round processing (S2251), the number of rounds of the newly executed round game is determined, and it is determined whether or not the round game of the determined number of rounds is the V round.

Then, when it is determined to be a V round, the state of the switching valve 65y may be switched and controlled based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during the V round. Further, in this case, the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON (the condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) may be different for each of a plurality of V rounds to be set.

Further, when a V-round game is being executed, a notification means may be provided to notify the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the game content until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to be turned on is satisfied. For example, when the V round is started, it is necessary to indicate the V round notification indicating that the current round game is the V round and the number of winnings required to satisfy the condition that the V solenoid 209a is set to be ON. It is advisable to configure the notification of the number of winnings to be executed. This makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically play a game in order to pass the ball through a specific area.

Next, the contents of the jackpot middle update process (S1954) will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the jackpot middle update process (S1954). In this jackpot middle update process (S1954), a process for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca set during the jackpot game is executed.

When the jackpot update process (S1954) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is larger than 0, that is, whether the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1961). .. Then, when it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not larger than 0 (0) (S1961: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the processing of S1961 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is larger than 0 (S1961: Yes), then the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and the updated V period timer 203ca If it is determined whether the value is 0 (S1963) and if it is not 0 (S1963: No), it is not the timing to turn off the solenoid 209a, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1963, when it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to off (S1964), and a command indicating the end of the V period is set (S1964). S1965), this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing content of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222. In the third control example, the jackpot-related process 4 (see S4258 in FIG. 221) is performed instead of the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) for the first control example described above, and the effect update process (see FIG. 174). It differs in that the effect update process 4 (see S4151 in FIG. 222) is executed instead of (see S4111), and is the same except for the execution. The same control processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) will be described with reference to FIG. 221. The jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) is a point in which the control process content executed when a V period command is received from the main controller 110 is added to the jackpot-related process (S4218) of the first control example described above. Is different, and the others are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S1713 as the above-mentioned jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, in the process of S4709, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), then it is determined whether the V period command has been received (S4751), and the V period command has been received. When it is determined (S4752: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the V timer 223ca, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined that the V period command has not been received in the process of S4751 (S4751: No), then the same processes of S4714 to S1715 as the above-mentioned jackpot related process (see S4218 of FIG. 180) are executed. , End this process.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 4. In the effect update process 4, a process of updating the value of the V timer 223ca set during the jackpot game and a process of setting the effect mode when the value of the V timer 223ca becomes 0 are executed. It is configured to be possible.

As shown in FIG. 222, when the effect update process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V timer 223ca is larger than 0 (S5401), and when it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S5401). S5401: Yes), then the value of the V-period timer 203ca is updated (S5402), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V-period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the process of S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403: Yes), then it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S5404), that is, If the V notification effect is being executed during the jackpot game that is currently being executed, a display command that emphasizes the guidance of the V prize is set (S5405), and the number of updates of various counters and timers is executed. This process ends.

As described above, in the third control example, the variable winning device 65 is arranged at a place where a winning can be made regardless of whether the right-handed game or the left-handed game is performed, and further, the ball is played by any game method. Even when it is fired, it is configured so that there is no big difference in the period from when the ball wins a prize to when it reaches the switching valve 65y. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the jackpot game can be smoothly executed without setting an unnecessarily long period (V valid period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed the specific region (V gate 65v). .. Further, by shortening the V validity period, it is possible to easily monitor the act of passing the ball to a specific area by an illegal game.

Further, since the switching control of the switching valve 65y is executed based on the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65, the ball is won in the variable winning device 65 due to ball clogging or the like occurring during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from being opened in a state where it cannot be made to operate. In this control example, the number of winning balls is measured in units of round games, and when the measurement result is a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is opened for a predetermined period within the round game period. However, it is not limited to this, and the cumulative value of the number of prizes since the start of the jackpot game and the cumulative value of the number of prizes since the predetermined measurement conditions are satisfied during the jackpot game, Alternatively, when the cumulative value of the number of winnings in the plurality of jackpot games reaches a predetermined measurement result, the control to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state may be executed.

Further, the maximum period of the period during which the switching valve 65y is opened is not limited to the period until the end of the round game, for example, the switching valve straddles the next round game to be executed. 65y may be configured to continue in the open state.

Further, in the third control example, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), one switching valve 65y is configured to block both the first V gate 65v1 and the second V gate 65V2, but the present invention is limited to this. Two switching valves 65y are provided so as to block each V gate. For example, when the ball detection sensor 65s1 detects a predetermined number of winnings, only the switching valve on the side covering the first V gate 65V1 is used. When the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winnings in the open state, only the switching valve on the side covering the second V gate 65V2 may be opened. As a result, the range of the switching valve that is in the open state can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the V gate 65V unnecessarily.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 231. In the fourth control example, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed from the first control example described above, and the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. And the difference is that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 is changed. Further, there is a difference between the control content executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in that a part of the control content is changed. The other contents are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, after the jackpot game is completed, the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) or the time saving state (low probability of the special symbol) is set as an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. The state (high probability state of the normal symbol) was configured to be settable. When the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability change state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and then until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, that is, the jackpot game. The time saving state was set until the number of special symbol lottery reached 100 times after the end. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol is executed 100 times.

That is, in the above-mentioned first control example, even if any advantageous gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol lottery is performed unless the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. It was configured so that the advantageous gaming state would continue until it was executed 100 times. When the advantageous gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the period until the advantageous gaming state ends, that is, until the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player is set. It was configured to notify the player of the period (see FIG. 128 (a)).

With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, the period until the currently set advantageous gaming state (probability variation state or time saving state) ends. Instead, the player can be made to grasp the period until the disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set. Therefore, as compared with the case of notifying the player of the period until the currently set advantageous gaming state (for example, the probabilistic state) ends, that is, the period from the end of the probabilistic state to the end of the time saving state. Since it is possible to grasp in advance the period during which the advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, continues, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the first control example described above, among the plurality of advantageous gaming states (probability change state, time saving state), the period during which the more advantageous probabilistic state continues is the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. In the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of 50 special symbol lottery, the player determines whether the currently set game state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state. (See FIG. 128 (b)). As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 that notifies the period until the next disadvantageous gaming state is set in the state where the advantageous gaming state is set, the currently set gaming state is among the plurality of advantageous gaming states. It was possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict which one.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, when the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game is completed, the high probability state of the special symbol is set. The lottery for shifting to the low probability state (so-called fall lottery) is configured to be feasible, and when the fall lottery is won, the gaming state is configured to shift from the probability change state to the time saving state. That is, in the above-mentioned first control example, when the probabilistic state is set, the probabilistic state is continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, but in the fourth control example, it is special. If the fall lottery is won before the symbol lottery is executed 50 times, the probability change state ends at that point.

With this configuration, even if it is understood that the probabilistic state is set by the suggestion effect executed during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, the player can determine how long the probabilistic state will continue. Because it can be difficult to understand, it is possible to pay more attention to the content of the suggestion effect to be executed.

Further, in the fourth control example, as the suggestion effect executed during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, not only the suggestion of the currently set gaming state but also the probabilistic state ends by winning the fall lottery. It is also configured so that the timing can be suggested.

<About the electrical configuration of the 4th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 226. The fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a lottery (falling lottery) for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state can be executed. The difference is that a configuration for executing a fall lottery has been added.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 223, the ROM 202 of the fourth control example is a point in which a part of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d is changed from the ROM 202 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 139 (a)). The difference is that the fall lottery table 202da is newly added, and the other points are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be mainly described as being different from the first control example. In this fourth control example, the content of the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different from the above-mentioned first control example, and the detailed content is different. Will be described later with reference to FIG. 224 (a), but the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the value set in the time saving counter 203h according to the selected jackpot type, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol. Is configured to be set differently. As a result, the length of the period during which the advantageous gaming state (probability variation state or time saving state) set after the jackpot game ends can be made different. Therefore, when the advantageous gaming state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the notification effect for notifying the player of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues (the remaining period until the disadvantageous gaming state is set).

Here, with reference to FIG. 224 (a), when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) in this control example, the reference special figure 2 jackpot for selecting the jackpot type is used. 2 The contents of the table 202dd will be described. FIG. 224 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2.

As shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value of the acquired first hit type counter c2 and the game state at the time of winning are set in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2 after the jackpot game is completed. The jackpot type with different values of the time saving counter 203h is specified. That is, the length of the period during which the advantageous gaming state (probability change state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game is continued differs depending on the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, as the jackpot type, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time saving state, it is "50". However, in the probabilistic state, "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h, and "big hit C" capable of setting "50" as the value of the probabilistic counter 203i is the acquired first hit type counter C2. In the range of values in the range of "30 to 69", "100" is the value of the time reduction counter 203h when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time reduction state, and "90" is the value of the time reduction counter 203h when the value is in the probability variation state. The game state at the time of winning is in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired is "70 to 99" for the "big hit D" which is set as and can set "50" as the value of the probability variation counter 203i. "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h in the normal state or the time saving state, and "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h in the case of the probability variation state, and "50" can be set as the value of the probability variation counter 203i. "Big hit D" is specified.

Regarding the contents of the round game executed corresponding to each jackpot type, the explanation of the value set in the probability variation counter 203i defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2, and the ending period (S). Since it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the period during which the time saving state continues is different depending on the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, the jackpot is different. When the jackpot D is selected as the type, "100" is set in the time saving counter 203h if the jackpot winning state is in the time saving state, and "90" is set in the time saving counter 203h if the jackpot winning state is in the probability change state. Therefore, after the jackpot game executed when the jackpot D is selected, the previous time according to the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to let the player know whether the game state at the time of winning the jackpot was a probabilistic state or a time saving state.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), and is currently set. In the pachinko machine 10 in which a notification effect capable of notifying only that an advantageous gaming state is set is executed without specifically notifying the gaming state, which is the case when a big hit is won during the advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible for the player to grasp after the fact whether or not the big hit was won in the state where the game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to predict the future game based on the past game results, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), the value set in the time reduction counter 203h is changed according to the game state set at the time of winning the big hit, so that the value is displayed after the big hit game is completed. It was configured to let the player predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot according to the display content of the remaining period notification mode (a mode for notifying the remaining period until the advantageous game state ends), but this is limited to this. Even if different values are set for the time reduction counter 203h, for example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed after the end of the jackpot game is standardized (for example, "70" is displayed), which is advantageous. When the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed in the game state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining period notification mode is variably displayed according to the value of the actual time reduction counter 203h. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the game state set at the time of the previous jackpot winning after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in the advantageous game state, the player can be made to execute the game aiming at the jackpot winning and the game for grasping the game state set in the past in duplicate. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game in the advantageous game state at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, by changing the value set in the time reduction counter 203h according to the game state set at the time of winning the big hit, the remaining period notification mode (advantageous game state ends) displayed after the big hit game ends. It was configured to let the player predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot according to the display content of (a mode of notifying the remaining period until the jackpot is won), but the player can change the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. As long as it is a timing that can be grasped after the fact, it may be configured to be suggestive at other timings. It may be configured to notify the player of the state. In this case, an effect of directly notifying the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be executed, or an effect suggesting the duration of the advantageous gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 223, the description will be continued. The fall lottery table 202da is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter Cd1, which will be described later, is stored. The value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 acquired when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (at the time of starting winning) is any of the values specified in the fall lottery table 202da. When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 224 (b). FIG. 224 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202da. As shown in FIG. 224 (b), the fall lottery table 202da defines two determination values of "0, 1" as determination values for determining a fall in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Here, the fall lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter Cd1, there are two judgment values that are determined to fall, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Is 1/500.

In the fall lottery table 202da in this control example, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the probabilistic state (determination value for the probabilistic state of the special symbol) is defined, and the special symbol is defined. The judgment value for the low probability state of is not specified. This is because it is wasteful of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low-probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol is already in the low-probability state.

In this control example, the fall lottery table 202da and the regularly updated fall lottery counter Cd1 are compared to determine whether or not to shift (fall) from the probabilistic state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol. Is judged. That is, from the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) which is the most advantageous state to the player among the advantageous gaming states, although it is one of the advantageous gaming states, it is more than the probabilistic state. Can randomly shift to a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the probabilistic state to continue for as long as possible.

In this control example, after the jackpot game is completed, the maximum duration (50 times) of the high probability state of the special symbol is defined by the value of the probability variation counter 203i, which is longer than the maximum duration (50 times). It is configured so that the high probability state of the normal symbol continues for the period. That is, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, no matter when the high probability state of the special symbol shifts (falls) to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured. Therefore, the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) to the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). Therefore, the timing of winning the fall lottery is not grasped by the player depending on the execution frequency of the game per normal figure.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the current gaming state is the probabilistic state or the time saving state during the advantageous gaming state (during the high probability state of the normal symbol). , It is possible to make the player interested in the production content of the suggestion effect that suggests the game state ex post facto, which was set at the time of winning the jackpot.

In this control example, a lottery (judgment) was made as to whether or not to shift (fall) from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state of the special symbol, but it is a lottery (judgment) to shift to another state. ) May. For example, whether or not to shift from the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be determined by a lottery executed for each change. As a result, it is possible to randomly determine how long the advantageous gaming state will continue, so that the game can be performed in the hope that the advantageous gaming state will continue for each change. Further, for example, it may be configured so that lottery is possible whether or not to shift from the low probability state of the special symbol to the high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, in this control example, the above-mentioned fall lottery is configured to be executed every time the special symbol lottery is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the type of the special symbol to which the special symbol lottery is executed may be used. Depending on the situation, the ease of executing the fall lottery may be different. For example, when the second special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, is performed, the first special symbol lottery is performed. It may be configured so that the fall lottery is more easily executed than when it is performed. With this configuration, the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state due to the fall lottery executed based on the first special symbol lottery, and the game is advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to perform.

Further, at the execution timing of the fall lottery, a means for determining the number of times the fall lottery is executed may be provided so that the number of fall lottery executed when the execution opportunity of the fall lottery is established is different. good. In this case, it is preferable to set the range of the number of times determined by the number-of-times determining means to "0 to 5" and design so that the average value is one time. With this configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed and the number of times the fall lottery is executed can be separated, so at what timing the high-probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state. It can be more difficult to understand what to do. In this case, a suggestion means that can suggest the number of times determined by the number-of-times determination means (the number of times the fall lottery is executed) is provided, and a period during which the player is likely to fall (a plurality of times is determined by the number-of-times determination means). It is preferable to configure the period in which it is difficult to fall (the period in which 0 times are determined by the number of times determination means) and the period in which it is possible to suggest. As a result, the game can be played while predicting the presence or absence of a fall based on the content of the suggestion by the suggestion means.

Further, in this control example, the execution of the special symbol lottery is used as the execution trigger of the fall lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the fall lottery may be executed when the normal symbol lottery is executed. Alternatively, it may be configured to execute a fall lottery when a ball enters a specific winning opening (for example, a general entry opening 63) provided in the game board 13.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 225. As described above, the fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that it has a fall lottery function. Further, the various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113 are also different in that the effects based on the result of the fall lottery can be executed. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and FIG. 225 (b) is the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 225 (a). As shown in FIG. 2254 (a), in the fourth control example, the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation is replaced with the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation (see FIG. 148) with respect to the first control example described above. It is different in that it is provided, and is the same except for that. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the effect selection 2 table 222df at the time of button operation will be described with reference to FIG. 226 (a). FIG. 226 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the effect selection 2 table 222df at the time of button operation. As shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the fourth control example, the data table referred to when the probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game is completed is the probabilistic state selection table with respect to the first control example described above. The difference is that 223f2 (see FIG. 149) is changed to the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2, and the other points are the same.

Here, the contents specified in the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2 will be described with reference to FIG. 226 (b). FIG. 226 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2. Similar to the above-mentioned probability variation state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2 is used when selecting an effect mode to be executed as an operation effect when the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is completed. In the data table referred to in the above, the point that the lottery result of the fall lottery was added to the factor for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect to the probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), and the lottery of the fall lottery. It differs in that it is possible to select an effect mode that can suggest information based on the result, and that the selection ratio of each effect mode is partially changed. The other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2, similarly to the above-mentioned probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), the timing and operation method of the player operating the frame button 22 (operation means) and the acquired effect counter 223f are displayed. In addition to the value, an effect mode to be executed as an operation effect is defined in accordance with the setting status of the short fall flag 223 da, which is set based on the lottery result of the fall lottery. The details of this short fall flag 223da will be described later, but a flag for indicating that the duration of the probabilistic state has been a predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol lottery is 20 times or less) by winning the fall lottery. This is set to ON when the probabilistic state ends in a short period of time.

In the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2, the same contents as the above-mentioned probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) are defined in the area referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to off. Therefore, a detailed description will be omitted. Here, the specified contents of the area referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to ON will be specifically described.

When the short fall flag 223da is set to ON, the operation method is "normal push" during the first period (the period in which the number of special figure fluctuations is 1 to 20), which is the high-speed fluctuation period. Therefore, in the range where the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 149", there is "none" indicating that the operation effect is not executed, and in the range of "150 to 189", the variable effect being executed is displayed. The "reach suggestion" that indicates the effect of suggesting whether or not the player is in the reach state during the third symbol change, and the range of "140 to 189" is the effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state. In the range of "state suggestion" and "190 to 198" to be shown, "state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state is defined. Further, when the operation method is "long press", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is shifted is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 198". ..

Further, the background mode is shifted to the range where the operation timing is in the normal time reduction fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 189". In the range of "190 to 198", the "background mode transition" indicating that the game is played is defined, and the "state suggestion" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state is defined. Further, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state. Is stipulated.

When the operation timing is in a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f. Finally, the background mode is set in the range where the operation timing is in the normal time reduction fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 189". The "background mode transition" indicating that the transition is to be made is set in the range of "190 to 198" after the end of the previous jackpot game, but the fall lottery was won early and the time was shortened. "Early fall notification" is stipulated, which indicates an effect for notifying that the transition has occurred. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198" in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game ends)). "Past state suggestion" is defined to indicate the effect for suggesting the set game state.

As for the various operation effects in the fourth control example, as in the first control example described above, not only the lottery result for the special symbol change executed this time but also the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. An operation effect based on the information may be executed. For example, using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing of winning the fall lottery is determined in advance, and the operation based on the determination result is determined. The production may be configured to be executable. Specifically, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out in the order of execution of the special symbol lottery, and the information indicating the value of the falling lottery counter cd1 included in each winning information wins the falling lottery. Determine if it indicates a value. In this case, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores in advance information corresponding to the value of the fall lottery counter cd1 that wins the fall lottery, and is included in the stored information and the winning information. The determination may be executed based on the information indicating the value of the fall lottery counter cd1.

Then, among the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the prize information in which the execution order of the special symbol lottery is fixed, that is, the second special symbol lottery has priority over the first special symbol lottery. In this control example to be executed, if there is no winning information for winning the fall lottery in the winning information for the second special symbol lottery, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed and the winning information The process of calculating the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to each of the winning information of the second special symbol lottery stored in the storage area 223b is executed, and the period during which the fall lottery cannot be won, that is, the probability change state Determine the duration of the period (the most advantageous period). Then, the effect mode of suggesting the most advantageous period for notifying the player of the determined most advantageous period may be executed as the operation effect.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest (notify) to the player the period during which the fall lottery cannot be won, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, as the display mode of suggesting the most advantageous period, it is preferable to display at least a part of the total time of each fluctuation time resulting as the most advantageous period. As a result, the player can be made aware of the time during which the most advantageous period lasts at least. Further, by displaying the most advantageous period in time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period, so that the fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation time can be displayed. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is set to have a higher possibility of winning a big hit, the player is expected to set a short fluctuation time as a fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation, which is a novel playability. Can be provided.

As described above, when the operation effect is executed based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the operation effect is executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means). The player may operate the frame button 22 (operation means) to execute the operation effect at the timing when the special symbol change is newly started in the state where the effect mode of the operation effect is determined. It may be configured to do so. In this case, a notification means for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player has been accepted, and a notification means for notifying that the waiting period until the operation effect is executed is in progress. And, it is good to provide. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust that the operation effect is not executed even though the frame button 22 is operated. In the effect of notifying the most advantageous period, the most advantageous period may be displayed not by the time as described above but by the number of times the special symbol change is executed. In addition, if it is determined that there is winning information having information indicating that the fall lottery is won in the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the fall lottery is won and the special symbol is displayed. Calculate the period until the high-probability state shifts to the low-probability state, and execute an effect that suggests winning the fall lottery and an effect that suggests the remaining period until the high-probability state of the special symbol ends. It may be configured as follows.

<Regarding the control processing content in the 4th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 229, among the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth control example, the points different from the first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example has the function of the fall lottery as described above, and the duration of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is changed. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the example, and the control contents regarding this difference are different. Specifically, for the control content of the main control device in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (FIG. 227) is replaced with the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158). (See S258 of FIG. 162) is replaced with the look-ahead process (see S613 of FIG. 162), and the look-ahead process 5 (see S653 of FIG. 228) is replaced with the jackpot end process (see S1910 of FIG. 170) to replace the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 229). The difference is that it is configured to execute (see S1960), and is otherwise the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 227, the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S258) will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S258). When this special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S258) is executed, the same process of S301 as the above-mentioned special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and then the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set to 0. Is also large (S351). Here, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not larger than 0, that is, it is not in the high probability state of the special symbol (S351: No), the above-mentioned special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158). The same processes of S302 to S307 are executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S351, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203i is larger than 0, that is, it is in a high probability state of the special symbol (S351: Yes), then the value of the acquired fall lottery counter Cd1 is used. , The value specified in the fall lottery table 202da is compared (S352), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S353).

When it is determined that the fall lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), and the high probability state of the special symbol has shifted to the low probability state. A command is set (S355), the same processes of S302 to S307 as the above-mentioned special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 of FIG. 158) are executed, and this process is terminated. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the low probability state of the special symbol set. On the other hand, in the process of S353, when it is determined that the fall lottery has not been won (S353: No), the processes of S353 to S355 are skipped, and the above-mentioned special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 of FIG. 158) is performed. The same processes S302 to S307 are executed, and this process is terminated. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed in the normal state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the special symbol is actually executed in the state where the execution condition of the special symbol lottery is satisfied (the state in which the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see S258 in FIG. 227) is executed). It is configured to execute a fall lottery before executing the lottery. With such a configuration, a special symbol lottery according to the lottery result of the fall lottery can be immediately executed, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

The execution timing of the fall lottery and the execution timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to be different from the present control example. For example, the fall lottery may be executed after the special symbol lottery is executed. It may be configured. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fall lottery is executed immediately after that. Therefore, the special symbol lottery executed in the high probability state of the special symbol is executed. By the time the lottery result is stopped and displayed (by the time the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed), an event will occur in which the fall lottery is won and the low probability state of the special symbol is set. When such a state occurs, for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol change currently being executed becomes the last change in which the special symbol lottery is executed in a high probability state. It is preferable to configure the fall notification effect to indicate that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay more attention to the result of the special symbol change during execution.

Further, in this control example, when the fall lottery is won, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed before the next special symbol lottery is executed. However, not limited to this, for example, when the fall lottery is won, the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol continues is subtracted by 2 or more (the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted by 2 or more), or the height of the special symbol is high. The remaining number of special symbol lottery that can be executed during the probability state may be set to a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Even in such a configuration, by winning the fall lottery, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the game state (probability change state) that is most advantageous to the player will continue, so that the player is nervous. It is possible to play a game with a feeling.

In this control example, when the player is not won in the fall lottery, that is, when the high probability state of the special symbol continues, the effect for suggesting or notifying the player to that effect is not executed. The period during which the high-probability state of the special symbol continues (the period during which it continues) is difficult for the player to understand, but it is not limited to this, and in some cases where the player does not win the fall lottery. It may be configured to notify the player to that effect. In this case, for example, not only the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 determined to be won (fall) but also the value determined to be out of specification (for example, 998,999) is specified in the fall lottery table 202da. When it is determined to be a value, by setting a command indicating a specific deviation, the player may be configured to perform an effect for indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a specific deviation. When a command for indicating that the lottery result of the fall lottery is out of order is set and a command for indicating that the lottery result of the fall lottery is out of order is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the fall lottery is performed. A lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute an effect indicating that the lottery result is out of order, and when it is determined that the effect is to be executed in the lottery, the out-of-order effect may be executed.

Next, the contents of the look-ahead process 5 (S653) in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 5 (S653). The look-ahead process 5 (S653) has a special symbol holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a) with respect to the look-ahead process (see S613 of FIG. 162) executed in the first control example described above. In the process of reading out the various counters stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b), the types of the various counters to be read are different, and the other points are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the look-ahead process 5 (S653) is executed, the first random number counter newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is executed. C1, the first hit type counter C2, the fall lottery counter Cd1, and the variable type counter CS1 are read (S751), and then S702, which is the same as the look-ahead process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the first control example described above. ~ S705 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when a new special symbol lottery right (special symbol hold) is acquired in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161) (special symbol hold ball storage area). In the look-ahead process 5 (S653) executed (when new winning information is stored in), the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is also configured to be read, and the winning command including the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is set. , It is configured so that it can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, it is possible to determine whether the special figure holding ball acquired by the voice lamp control device 113 contains information indicating the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that wins the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the period until the fall lottery is won.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S1960) will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S1960). The jackpot end process 5 (S1960) is different from the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170) in that the processing content for setting the value of the time reduction counter 203h is different. They are different, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot end process 5 (S1960) is executed, first, the same process of S2101 and S2102 as the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170) is executed, and then the jackpot end process 5 (S1960) is executed. A value corresponding to the game state and the jackpot type is set in the time saving counter 203h (S2153), a status command is set based on the value of the probability variation counter 203i set this time and the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2104), and the jackpot is hit. The middle flag 203k and the probability variation setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and this process ends.

Here, the processing content of S2153 will be described in detail. In this control example, the current game state, the game state set at the time of the previous jackpot winning, and the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won can be temporarily stored in the gaming state storage area 203g. It is configured. Then, when the process of S2153 is executed, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type stored in the game status storage area 203g are read out, and the value specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d is set as a time saving counter. Set to 203h.

In this control example, the value to be set in the time saving counter 203h is determined at the time when the jackpot end processing 5 is executed, that is, when all the round games during the jackpot game are completed. With this configuration, the setting conditions that can be satisfied during the round game of the jackpot game, for example, the setting conditions that are satisfied when the specific area (V gate 65V) is passed during the round game (V round game) are satisfied. The value set in the time reduction counter 203h can be changed depending on the presence or absence of.

Regardless of the configuration used in this control example, for example, at the start of the jackpot game or at the time of selecting the winning jackpot type, the value of the time saving counter 203h based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined. , The value corresponding to the determined content may be set in the jackpot end processing 5 (see S1960). With such a configuration, it is not necessary to retain the information indicating the game state at the time of winning the big hit during the period of the big hit game, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231 of the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above Explains the points that differ from the control processing contents executed by. The fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a fall lottery is executed, and the control process content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is also a fall lottery. It differs in that it executes the processing related to.

Specifically, the difference is that the command determination process 5 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 5 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 5 (S4162). As shown in FIG. 230, in the command determination process 5 (S4162), when it is determined that the jackpot related command is not received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the first control example described above. (S4217: No), then it is determined whether the fall command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4251), and when it is determined that the fall command has been received (S4251: Yes), the fall-related process (S4252) is executed. It is different in that it does. When it is determined that the fall command has not been received in the process of S4251 (S4251: No), or after the fall-related process (S4252) is executed, the command determination process of the first control example described above (FIG. 175). The same process of S4219 as in S4112) of the above is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the contents of the fall-related process (S4252) executed in the command determination process 5 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall-related processing (S4252). This fall-related process (S4252) is set when it is determined in the fall lottery executed by the main control device 110 (see S352 and S353 in FIG. 227) that the fall lottery has been won (FIG. 227). This is a process executed when the fall command is received (the timing at which the high probability state of the special symbol ends) is executed.

When the fall-related process (S4252) is executed, first, the value of the time saving counter 203h is read out (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502). The value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of time reductions (the number of special symbol lottery that can be executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol) set after the jackpot game is completed, and each time the special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, for example, if the number of time reductions is set to 100 after the jackpot game ends, the number of special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game ends will fall by the time it reaches 20 times. Whether or not the lottery is won is determined. That is, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery at an early stage even though the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

In the process of S5502, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503), and the time saving state is set in the slave state setting area 223g. (S5504), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 80 or more (S5502: No), the process of S5503 is skipped, the process of S5504 is executed, and this process is terminated.

By setting the short fall flag 223da to ON in the processing of S5503, it is determined that the frame button 22 was operated during the chance mode in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186), and the probability change state is selected. When the effect mode is selected with reference to the two tables 222 df2 (FIG. 226 (b)), the effect mode is selected with reference to a data table different from the case where the short fall flag 223 da is set to off. .. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the result of the fall lottery after the fact depending on the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<About the production example in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 232, among the variation effects of the third symbol executed in the second control example described above, the variation direction of the sub symbol fz is executed so as to be different from the variation direction of the main symbol sz. The contents of the reverse fluctuation display effect (see FIG. 205 (d)), which is an effect, will be described. FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the reverse fluctuation display effect.

As described above, in the second control example, the main symbol sz including the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the sub symbol fz different from the main symbol sz are configured to be independently display controllable. For example, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), the sub symbol fz is variablely displayed before the variable display of the main symbol sz, and then the sub symbol is displayed before the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed. By displaying the fz at a stop, it is possible to execute a reach line advance notice effect that notifies the player of only the stop display position of the main symbol sz. In addition to that, as shown in FIG. 205 (d), the sub symbol fz is variablely displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) in a direction different from the variable display direction of the main symbol sz according to the start timing of the special symbol variation. It is configured so that the reverse fluctuation display effect can be executed.

The content of this reverse fluctuation display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 232. First, a variation pattern command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is transmitted from the main control device 110. Then, when the variation pattern command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining the effect mode of the variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (variation display setting process (FIG. 182)). In (see S4113)), the process of determining the effect mode (variation pattern) for the main symbol sz is executed. As a result, based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, the effect mode of the main symbol sz, which is the identification information (identification symbol) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, is surely set. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main symbol sz for showing a lottery result different from the result of the special symbol lottery actually executed from being stopped and displayed.

After that, a process for setting the effect mode of the sub symbol fz is executed based on the effect mode of the main symbol sz determined by the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect mode in the reach state is set as the effect mode for the main symbol sz, and when it is determined that the effect mode in the reach state is set, the effect mode of the sub symbol fz is set. The process of selecting is executed. If the effect mode for reaching the reach state is not set as the effect mode for the main symbol sz, the variation pattern corresponding to the effect mode set for the main symbol sz is set for the sub symbol fz. It is configured as follows. As a result, the sub symbol fz can be variablely displayed in synchronization with the main symbol sz which is variablely displayed in the effect mode (variable pattern) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are displayed in a variable manner as a sequence of symbols arranged in a specific order.

In the above-described example, when the effect mode for the main symbol sz is in the reach state, the process for selecting the effect mode for the sub symbol fz is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the reach state, when an effect mode that becomes a specific reach state (for example, a super reach state) is set, a process for selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz may be executed. Alternatively, even in a part of the case where the effect mode set for the main symbol sz is in the non-reach state, the process for selecting the effect mode of the sub symbol fz may be executable. That is, when the effect mode of the main symbol sz is set in the effect mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is likely to be a big hit, it becomes easy to execute the process of selecting the effect mode of the sub symbol fz. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, a big hit is given to the player only by setting (executing) an effect mode different from the normal effect mode (an effect mode synchronized with the effect mode of the main symbol sz) as the sub symbol fz. You can have a sense of expectation of winning.

Further, in the above-described example, when the process of selecting the effect mode of the sub symbol fz is not executed, the effect mode (synchronous effect mode) corresponding to the effect mode of the main symbol sz is set for the sub symbol fz. It is configured so that the variation effect in which the variation display of the sub symbol fz is synchronized with the variation display of the main symbol sz is executed. As a result, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the sub symbol fz is variablely displayed so as to follow the variable display of the main symbol sz. The same variation display as in FIG. 122 (b)) will be executed. Therefore, for the player, the plurality of main symbols sz and the plurality of sub symbols fz are arranged in a predetermined order (1 (main symbol sz) → triangular mark (sub) as shown in FIG. 122 (b). It can be made to think that the variable display is controlled as a symbol sequence that performs symbol fz) → 2 (main symbol sz) → ...).

Therefore, when the effect mode of the main symbol sz and the effect mode of the sub symbol fz are set differently, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, so that the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the process of setting the effect mode for the main symbol sz and the process of setting the effect mode for the sub symbol fz are different, the process of variablely displaying the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz in a dissynchronized pattern. Can be easily executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the effect mode (variable pattern) for all the third symbols (main symbol sz and sub symbol fz) as in the first control example described above, for example. , When setting an effect mode (variation pattern) in which only the variation display mode of the sub symbol fz is different, only the variation display mode of the sub symbol fz is targeted for all the third symbols (main symbol sz and sub symbol fz). It is necessary to set different effect modes (variation patterns), but as in the second control example, the effect mode for the main symbol sz and the effect mode for the sub symbol fz can be set independently. As a result, it is only necessary to variably set the effect mode for the sub-symbol fz, and the process for setting the effect mode of the third symbol can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 232. When the process of selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown) is displayed with reference to the determination result. By using, the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected. Here, in the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown), the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz corresponds to the result of the special symbol lottery and the effect mode set for the main symbol sz. Is stipulated. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" and "double reach" is set as the production mode of the main symbol sz, "reach line notice production" is selected at a rate of 60%. It is stipulated that "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected at a rate of 20% and "no sub-design effect" is selected at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" and "single reach" is set as the production mode of the main symbol sz, "reach line notice production" is selected at a rate of 20%, and 20 It is stipulated that "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected at a rate of% and "no sub-design effect" is selected at a rate of 60%.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off" and "double reach" is set as the effect mode of the main symbol sz, "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected at a rate of 40%, and 60 It is stipulated that "no sub-symbol effect" is selected at a rate of%, and when "single reach" is set as the effect mode of the main symbol sz, "reach line notice effect" is set at a rate of 5%. Is selected, "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected at a rate of 5%, and "no sub-design effect" is selected at a rate of 90%.

When the "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected using the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown) defined in this way, the display mode for selecting the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is next. The selection process is executed. In this display mode selection process, a process for selecting the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the third symbol variation effect (effect mode of the sub-symbol fz) is executed, and the special symbol lottery is performed. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected according to the result and the set jackpot type. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz that can be selected here is set in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which has been described with reference to FIG. 203 (c) in the above-described second control example. It becomes a memorized display mode.

That is, in the display mode selection process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display sub-symbol mode command (display command) for specifying the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is set, and the set display sub When the display control device 114 receives the symbol mode command (display command), the process of reading the corresponding image data from the character storage area 234a2 is executed.

In the display mode selection process, for example, as shown in FIG. 203 (c), the display mode SD1 of the “triangle mark” which is the normal display mode of the sub-symbol fz and the “bubble” indicating that the jackpot expectation is high are imitated. One of the display mode SD2 that is displayed and the display mode SD3 that imitates the "number 16" indicating that the advantageous jackpot game (16 rounds game) that is advantageous to the player is executed when the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the display mode is selected, and it is easier to select the display mode SD2 when the result of this special symbol lottery is a big hit than when it is not a big hit (in the case of a miss). In addition, when the advantageous jackpot game is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed this time, the advantageous jackpot game is not executed (if the jackpot is not won, the jackpot is won. , When a jackpot game other than the advantageous jackpot game is executed), the display mode SD3 is configured to be easier to select.

With this configuration, the player can be interested in both the effect mode set for the sub symbol fz and the display mode set for the sub symbol fz. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

FIG. 232 shows a state in which the “reverse fluctuation display effect” is executed as the effect mode of the sub symbol fz, and the display mode SD2 imitating the “bubble” is set as the display mode of the sub symbol fz. , The "reverse fluctuation display effect" is executed in which the main symbol sz is variablely displayed to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 232 and the sub symbol fz is variablely displayed to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 232. In this way, as the variation display of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz are variablely displayed in opposite directions. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising variation effect. Further, as an effect mode using the sub symbol fz, the sub symbol fz is variablely displayed in a variable display direction different from the variable display direction of the main symbol sz. Can inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect mode is different.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 232, all the sub-symbols fz displayed on the display surface are displayed in the display mode SD2 imitating the "bubble" selected by the display mode selection process described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the display mode of any of the sub-symbols fz may be changed among the plurality of sub-symbols fz. In this case, only the display mode of the sub symbol fz arranged in the vicinity of the main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed is configured to be easily changed to the display mode selected by the display mode selection process described above. Is also good. Thereby, it is possible to easily predict the stop display mode of the main symbol sz based on the display mode of the sub symbol fz.

In addition, on the display screen shown in FIG. 232, an example in which the sizes of all the sub-symbol fz displayed on the display surface are the same is displayed, but the size (magnification ratio) of the sub-symbol fz and , Rotation angle, translucency value, etc. may be set differently. In this case, the value specified in the display data table (see FIG. 207) for displaying each sub-symbol fz may be changed.

Further, in FIG. 232, at the timing when the third symbol variation is started, the display mode of the sub symbol fz is switched from the normal display mode SD1 of the “triangular mark” to the display mode SD2 imitating the “bubble”, and the reverse fluctuation. An example in which the display effect is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timing before the start of the third symbol change, after the previous third symbol change is stopped and displayed, the third symbol change this time is shown. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz is switched during the period until the three symbol fluctuations are started, and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is switched during the period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop. You may.

When the process of switching the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed during the period from the stop display of the previous third symbol variation to the start of the current third symbol variation, for example, a look-ahead process Analyzes whether it is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and when the special symbol lottery (variation) executed next becomes a specific lottery result (for example, big hit winning), it is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to change the display mode of the sub-symbol fz. In this case, the display used for the next execution of the sub-symbol fz variation effect before setting the effect mode of the main symbol sz for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (variation) to be executed next. The aspect will be determined. In this way, by using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing of notifying the player of each mode used for the production mode of the third symbol variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the third symbol variation effect to be executed.

Further, when the process of switching the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed during the period from the start of the third symbol change to the stop, the sub-symbol fz is set at the time when the third symbol change is started. It may be displayed in the display mode before the switching, or may be configured to display the sub symbol fz after the process of switching the display mode is executed.

<About switching control of the switching valve executed during the jackpot game>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a specific round game (V round game) is started as described using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219). When it is determined to be the case, the control process for the switching valve 65y (see FIG. 120 (b) or FIG. 213 (b)) is executed. That is, it is configured so that a specific round game (V round game) is executed only when the jackpot game to be executed is a probability variation jackpot game, and when it is a normal jackpot game, a specific round (V round) is executed. It was configured so that the game) would not be executed. With this configuration, it was possible to prevent the ball from winning a V (passing through a specific area (V gate 65V)) during a normal jackpot game, but it depends on the type of jackpot game to be executed. Therefore, since it is necessary to change the content of the control process for the switching valve 65y, there is a problem that the processing load during the jackpot game is increased.

Therefore, control processing other than the control processing content for the switching valve 65y used in each of the above-mentioned control examples may be used. For example, a V-round game is also executed in a normal jackpot game, and the V-round game is performed. The condition for terminating may be different from that of the probabilistic jackpot game so that the ball cannot win the variable winning device 65 during the V-round game. Further, as in the fourth control example in which the above-mentioned V-round processing (see S2251 in FIG. 219) is executed, the switching valve 65y is switched and controlled based on the number of winning balls after the V-round game is executed. In the normal jackpot game, the number of winning balls for switching and controlling the switching valve 65y is set to a number larger than the number of winnings for ending the V-round game (for example, 10). It may be configured so that the switching control of the valve 65y is not executed.

Further, even if the control content (switching condition) of the switching valve 65y is set to be the same for the probability variation jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the ball passes through the specific region (V gate 65V) during the execution of the normal jackpot game. , It may be configured not to effectively process the passage. That is, even if the ball passes through a specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.

Further, regardless of the type of the jackpot game, the switching valve 65y is opened for the predetermined period when the predetermined period elapses after the jackpot game is started (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set). Even if the switching control is executed and the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65b in the jackpot game is configured to be different according to the type of the jackpot game, the V winning probability for each jackpot game type is configured to be different. good.

In the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, both the effect mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz and the effect mode (variation pattern) of the sub symbol fz are set by the voice lamp control device 113 ( (Selection) is configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may be configured to set the effect mode (variation pattern). In this case, the result of the special symbol lottery is shown. It is preferable that only the effect mode of the main symbol sz is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect mode of the sub symbol fz is set by the display control device 114.

The second control example and the modified example of the second control example have been described above, but the effect mode of the variation effect for dynamically displaying various symbols executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In the case, it is sufficient that the effect mode is set independently for the type of the symbol to be dynamically displayed and the display control is executed independently, and the configuration shown in the above-mentioned control example is sufficient. A configuration other than the above may be used.

For example, a plurality of display layers for displaying the sub-symbol fz are provided, and as in the modified example of the second control example described above with reference to FIG. 211, the sub-symbol fz is overlapped to enable variable display. Is also good.

Further, when a plurality of display layers are provided, display priorities are set for each layer, and display modes displayed on the display layers overlap on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Was controlled so that the display mode displayed on the layer having a high priority could be visually recognized by the player. However, the display is not limited to this, and for example, a display layer on which the priority is not set is provided. The display mode displayed on the plurality of display layers may be overlapped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, for example, when the "reverse fluctuation display effect" referred to in FIG. 232 is executed, the sub-symbol fz imitating a "bubble" is displayed in the sub-symbol fz of the "triangle mark". It is possible to suggest in advance that the display mode of the sub-symbol fz changes from "triangular mark" to "bubble" by controlling the display (setting the semi-transparent value and enlargement ratio of each sub-symbol) so that It may be configured to display in a display mode.

As described above, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the game states are the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and the player than the normal state. There are two types of advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player: a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol). It is configured so that the advantageous gaming state of can be set. Further, the time saving state is set after the probability change state is completed.

Then, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the period until the normal state is set, for example, when the probability change state is set, the time saving state set after the end of the probability change state ends. However, the period until the normal state is set can be notified to the player as the duration of the advantageous gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period until the end of the advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, instead of the period until the end of the currently set gaming state. It is possible to let the player play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the case of notifying the period during which a plurality of advantageous gaming states are continuously continued as the continuation period of one advantageous gaming state, depending on the content and execution frequency of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the player can grasp the detailed game state currently set. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while predicting the current game state while grasping the period until the normal state is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the most advantageous gaming state (probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first among the plurality of advantageous gaming states, and then the most advantageous gaming state is set. It is configured so that a normal advantageous gaming state (time saving state), which is more disadvantageous than the (probability variation state), is set, but it may be configured so that a plurality of advantageous gaming states can be continuously set. For example, a game. In addition to the normal state, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state, the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is also set as the state, and the latent state is higher than the probabilistic state. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be more advantageous to the player, the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state, latent state) in which the special symbol or the normal symbol is in a high probability state is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. Then, the value of the probability variation counter 203i indicating the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues can be set to be larger than the value of the time reduction counter 203h indicating the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues. ..

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, for example, "100" can be set as the value of the probability change counter 203i and "50" can be set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h as the probability change state after the jackpot game is completed. After the jackpot game is completed, the probability change state is set as the advantageous game state, and then the latent probability state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, a period during which a plurality of advantageous gaming states continue continuously, that is, a latent state set after the probability change state. It is advisable to notify the period until the end of the game as the duration of the advantageous gaming state of 1. Further, in this case, it is possible to execute a transition suggestion effect that can suggest to the player whether or not the currently set gaming state may shift to another gaming state during the duration of the advantageous gaming state. It is good to configure in. As a result, the player can only understand that there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state during the advantageous gaming state, so that the player can enjoy predicting the content of the game to be executed during the advantageous gaming state. Can be provided. Further, in the case where the currently set gaming state may shift to another gaming state during the duration of the advantageous gaming state, the gaming state after the shift is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. An advantageous transition suggestion effect that can suggest whether or not it may be possible may be configured to be feasible. Further, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the timing at which the gaming state shifts during the advantageous gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game within that period while grasping the period until the normal state is set.

Further, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, when a big hit is won during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is configured to end. The most advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) is set. Therefore, winning a big hit during the advantageous gaming state does not cause a disadvantage to the player, but for example, among a plurality of advantageous gaming states, the normal advantageous gaming state (probability changing state) that is more advantageous to the player comes first. In the pachinko machine 10 that is set so that the most advantageous gaming state (latent state state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal advantageous gaming state (probability variation state) is set, the pachinko machine 10 is set during the normal advantageous gaming state. In some cases, it may be more advantageous for the player to set the most advantageous gaming state without winning the jackpot than to win the jackpot.

Therefore, it is configured to execute a period effect in which the player can identify the period in which it is advantageous for the player to win the jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous game state and the period in which it is disadvantageous. Then it is good. As a result, the result of the special symbol lottery can be watched based on the content identified by the period production, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, as the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if it is set during the normal advantageous gaming state, and the game even if it is set during the normal advantageous gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type that is not disadvantageous to the player, is the jackpot winning advantageous to the player based on the production content of the above-mentioned period production and the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot? It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting whether or not. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the game of aiming for the big hit in the special symbol lottery, but also in the timing of the big hit and the big hit type set at the time of the big hit.

In the first control example described above, one of a plurality of types (two types) of advantageous gaming states (probability variation state, time saving state) is set after the jackpot game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the normal state can be set after the jackpot game is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the first control example described above, the effect mode (super chance mode) for notifying that the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set according to the effect result of the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game. It is configured to set an effect mode (chance mode) for notifying that an advantageous game state (probability change state or time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state has been set after the jackpot game is completed. .. As a result, in the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, the chance mode is set after the jackpot game ends, even though it is notified that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. It can be suppressed from being executed.

For the technique of the first control example configured in this way, for example, an effect mode selection means capable of arbitrarily selecting the effect mode set after the jackpot game is completed is provided, and the effect mode selection means is used in advance. By making it possible to select an arbitrary effect mode, the effect mode of the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game and the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game can be changed to the contents selected by the effect mode selection means. It may be configured to correspond and set. Specifically, as the effect mode set after the jackpot game is completed by the effect mode selection means, only the "complete notification mode" for notifying the actually set game state and the advantageous game state are set. The "chance notification mode" for notifying is configured to be selectable, and the player operates any of the operating means (frame button 22) during the period when the special symbol lottery is not executed on the pachinko machine 10. The production mode can be selected.

A storage means for temporarily storing the effect mode selected by the player is provided, and information that can identify the effect mode stored in the storage means is stored on a part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub). It is displayed in the display area Ds) so that the player can always identify the currently set effect mode. Then, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the effect mode stored in the storage means is read out. For example, when the "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, as a jackpot game effect, as an effect of guiding the ball to pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V prize) during the jackpot game. When the V notification effect is executed and the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends (FIG. 127 (FIG. 127). b), (d)), if it does not pass, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (c)). When the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "super chance mode" (see FIG. 131 (a)) indicating that the current game state is the probability change state is set, and the time is shortened after the jackpot game ends. When the state is set, a "chance mode" (see FIG. 128 (a)) indicating that the current gaming state is a time saving state is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V prize that serves as an opportunity for determining the game state.

On the other hand, when the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the above-mentioned V notification effect is not executed as the jackpot game effect, and after the jackpot game is completed, the "chance" is set regardless of the game state. Mode "is set. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game without notifying the player of the set game state and the presence or absence of the V prize that serves as an opportunity to determine the game state. When the effect mode is not selected by the effect mode selection means, the "initial mode" is stored in the storage means as in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, which is the same as the first control example described above. In addition, it is decided by lottery whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the big hit game, the big hit game effect is executed based on the lottery result, and based on the effect result of the big hit game effect, after the big hit game is completed. The production mode is set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an arbitrary effect mode desired by the player without discomfort, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, as a means for selecting various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, the selection ratio of various effect modes (see FIG. 148) selected for the operation effect executed when the chance mode is selected. The player may be provided with an effect frequency selection means that can be arbitrarily selected. Specifically, the selection ratios of the various production modes to be selected are greatly deviated or the difference in the selection ratios is small depending on whether the probability variation state is set or the time saving state is set. It is advisable to provide an effect frequency selection means that allows the player to select the selection ratio so that the selection ratio can be selected. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to provide an arbitrary effect mode desired by the player without discomfort, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the first to fourth control examples described above, a specific area (V gate 65V) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery is sphered. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed. As a configuration in which a special game different from the privilege game can be provided to the player based on the fact that the ball has passed through a specific area while the game is being executed, for example, a lottery result different from the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery. When a small hit is won, a second privilege game (small hit game) different from the privilege game (big hit game) can be executed, and a variable ball-entry means (variable winning device) that is opened during the second privilege game. 65 may be used, or other winning devices may be provided separately.) A specific area through which the ball that has entered the ball can pass is provided, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the second privilege game, the second privilege is provided. A configuration may be used in which a privilege game (big hit game) can be executed after the game (small hit game) is completed.

In each of the above embodiments, every time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is used. Has been described for transmission from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the special figure entrance 64 is held up to 4 times, and the passage of the through gate 67 is held up to 1 time, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to this. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the special figure entry port 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol. Therefore, for example, each display mode may be set using common image data included in the display control device 114.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the left side of the game board 13 is divided into a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although it is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at the area is executed, it may be configured so that the target area of the different game board 13 is different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, the game board is configured. A left-handed game aiming at the left side area of 13 may be executed, and in the case of a time saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed. May be executed and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set or the jackpot game is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a right-handed game may be executed during the jackpot game and a left-handed game may be executed only during the normal state when the time saving state is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player understand in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth to determine that it has been operated by a lever-shaped operating means or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 changes the effect mode of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the operation of the player. Although it is used as an effect operation means for the purpose, it suffices if it is possible to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation on the frame button 22, for example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operating means (frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display can be input. A control device capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even when a plurality of production operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of production operation means can be centrally managed, so that the production operation can be performed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation on the means.

Further, in the sixth embodiment described above, a switching button group 22z (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the game per accessory is provided, and the movable valve 750 and the like. Part of each operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), third frame button (release button) 22c, or The whole may be configured to be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly known as a setting) is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot can be changed according to the setting as a pachinko machine. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The degree of advantage for each setting may be changed by changing the ratio according to the setting. Further, for example, the rate at which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is determined after the end of the big hit is changed according to the setting, or a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be changed. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly increased (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot finishes in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of jackpot rounds to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be set to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out is more likely to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probabilistic state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting the setting of a plurality of stages, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (FIG. 142) referred to when the fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control device 110 based on the set setting value. (Refer to), or the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol in the voice lamp control device 113 is different, or executed as the variation effect. It is preferable to configure so that the types of various selection tables referred to when selecting the detailed effect mode to be performed are different. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable effect to be executed, so that the variable effect that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

Further, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect described above with reference to FIG. 148 or FIG. 226 is made different based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10. Defines the effect mode of "setting suggestion" for suggesting the set value as the effect mode of the operation effect so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each set value. In addition, the effect content of the operation effect executed in the effect mode of "setting suggestion" is configured to be different according to each set value, and the selection ratio of the other effect modes is changed according to the set value. It is good to configure as follows. With this configuration, when the operation effect of "setting suggestion" that directly suggests the set value is executed, the effect content is displayed, and when other operation effects are executed, each effect mode. By grasping the selection ratio of the above in a complex manner, it is possible to predict the set value set in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player is interested in the various operation effects to be executed. be able to.

Further, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to be different depending on the set gaming state, for example, from the setting "1" which is disadvantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 where the set value can be set in 6 steps up to the setting "6" which is advantageous to the player, the settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game which is advantageous to the player. The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (probability change state) is set, and the settings "4" to "6" are set, and the player is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. 2 By making the selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the gaming state (time saving state) is set the same, the pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value disadvantageous to the player is set is played. It is possible to make the player think that the set value that is advantageous to the player is set.

In addition, as in the first control example described above, the same effect mode is used when the first game state (probability change state) is set and when the second game state (time reduction state) is set. By setting the "chance mode", the above-mentioned effect can be made more remarkable when a configuration is used that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the currently set gaming state. .. Further, as in the first control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in which the second gaming state is set after the first gaming state is completed determines whether or not the first gaming state is actually set. By making it difficult, the effect can be more remarkable.

In this way, the effect mode is based on the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (big hit lottery result, set game state, selected fluctuation pattern (variation time)). By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the player from easily discriminating the set value set in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments and each control example may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Point where the sphere passing through the route constructing means becomes a blindfold for the passing means>
The path-constructing means is provided with a route-constructing means in which the game ball is configured to flow down and a passage-passed means in which the game ball flowing down the route-constituting means is configured to be able to pass through. It is characterized by providing a displaceable means that can be arranged at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the first game ball on the front side of the first game ball that flows down the path forming means on the upstream side of the passing means. Game machine A1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which a large prize component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431 is provided, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to be recognized by the decorative plate 302. There is a machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since it is difficult to always recognize the ball detection hole 431 by the decorative plate 302, it is confirmed that the ball has entered the ball detection hole 431 and the launching of the game ball is continued or stopped. There was a possibility that the player would be dissatisfied because he could not cope with the game mode of performing. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the part related to the launch operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first gaming ball in the path forming means is a predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see. Will be done. Therefore, in a state where the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to confirm the flow of the first game ball and determine whether to continue or stop the launch operation of the game ball. Can be improved in relevant areas.

The mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

The mode of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entry port (for example, a start port) related to a lottery of symbols, a prize ball opening related to payout of prize balls, or another game ball can pass through. It may be the means of.

In the gaming machine A1, the displaceable means is a second gaming ball that flows down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, so that the displaceable means. As compared with the case of preparing other decorative members, the material cost and the design cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A2, the path forming means includes a front-back direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of arranging a second gaming ball on the front side of the first gaming ball. ..

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, a front-rear direction path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be arranged on the front side of the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball is viewed from the front. At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the game ball of.

In the gaming machine A3, the front-back direction path is the second when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path forming means at a firing interval set in the launching device. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to hide at least a part of the first gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, when a plurality of gaming balls flow down the path forming means at the firing interval, it is difficult for the second gaming ball to recognize the first gaming ball. Can produce the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize from normal times.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear direction path is characterized in that the front side component is arranged on the center side of the game area with respect to the back side component.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-back direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player looking at the means to be passed, so that the first gaming ball Can be easily hidden in the second game ball. That is, the effect of the blindfold can be improved.

In the game machine A5, the front side component is arranged in the line of sight of a player who sees the passing means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, the same blindfold effect is produced regardless of the length of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball arranged in the front-rear path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved, but the first game ball and the second game ball are on the line of sight. When the game balls of are arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the path forming means includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of arranging a second game ball on the front side of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction thereof. The gaming machine A7 is characterized by comprising a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows the game ball to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the line of sight of the player can be blocked by the gaming ball flowing down the path in the left-right direction, so that the player can use the passing means. On the other hand, the blinding effect can be produced not only when the passing means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift to the left or right, but also to a line of sight that shifts to the left or right and looks into it. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the mode of entering the ball through the passing means without depending on the direction of the player's line of sight (a blindfold effect can be generated in all directions).

This action is remarkable by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with a wall portion. That is, in the configuration in which one side of the left and right sides is sealed by the wall portion, the wall portion is a blindfold on one side of the left and right sides, so that it is easy to configure a state in which the visibility to the passing means cannot be passed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path forming means includes a first flow path through which the gaming ball passes through the passing means in the first aspect, and a second flow path through which the gaming ball passes in the second aspect. The first gaming ball can be visually recognized by being covered with at least a part of the predetermined displaceable means regardless of which of the flow paths of the path-constructing means. The gaming machine A8, which is characterized in that it is configured in such a manner.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, it may be difficult to recognize the flowing mode of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means regardless of whether or not the passing means has passed. , It is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the route forming means.

The first aspect and the second aspect are not limited in any way. For example, the flow direction of the sphere may be different, or the detection sensor through which the sphere passes may be different.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means for dividing the flow direction of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the passing means, and the branching means includes a switching means for switching the flow direction of the received game ball. The path-constructing means is a gaming ball whose flow-down route is divided by a branching means, and the gaming ball A9 is configured such that a gaming ball that has reached the switching means flows down the same route in a predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the gaming ball that has reached the switching means flows down the same route in a predetermined section, so that the gaming ball that has reached the switching means immediately after that. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the flow of the game ball as compared with the case where the flow mode corresponds to the flow path of the game ball. As a result, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the gaming machine A9, the path forming means includes a projecting portion projecting on the side of the flowing game ball, and the projecting portion acts on the branching of the gaming ball in the branching means. Machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, it is possible to act on the branching of the gaming ball at the projecting portion. Durability can be improved.

In the gaming machine A10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion, and the first projecting portion includes the first projecting portion. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the protrusion amount of the second protrusion is different from that of the second protrusion.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the influence of the first protruding portion on the gaming ball and the influence of the second protruding portion on the gaming ball are determined according to the flow mode of the gaming ball. Can be different. As a result, it is possible to generate an action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow mode of the game ball while utilizing the fixed first protrusion portion and the second protrusion portion.

<Points where the sphere passing through the route constructing means appeals the introduction to the means to be passed>
The path-constructing means is provided with a route-constructing means in which the game ball is configured to be able to flow down, and a passage-passing means in which the game ball flowing down the route-constituting means is configured to be able to pass through. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined portion constituting an upstream side, the predetermined portion being arranged on a side that stands out from the means to be passed, and being configured to be able to guide a game ball to the means to be passed.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a large prize component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431 is provided, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is hard to be recognized by the decorative plate 302. Depending on the state of the winning component 300, there are gaming machines in which the game ball flows down at a position off the decorative plate 302, or the game ball flows down so as to be hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, special feature). See Kai 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the highly visible gaming ball that flows off the decorative plate 302 is rather configured to deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flows down, so that it is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. Since a part of the flowing game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, so we paid attention to the game ball. There was a possibility that the player would be dissatisfied because things tend to be wasted. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in that the flow mode of the game ball after attracting attention is made meaningful to pay attention to.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the gaming ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, the degree of improvement in the attention to the gaming ball and the degree of improvement in the attention to the gaming ball are determined. It can be associated with the passing of the game ball through the means to be passed. Therefore, since the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion passes through the passing means can be improved, it can be improved in that it is meaningful to pay attention to the game ball after it has attracted attention.

Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and it is less likely that the player misses the game ball heading to the passing means. be able to.

The mode of the passing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entry port (for example, a start port) related to a lottery of symbols, a prize ball opening related to payout of prize balls, or another game ball can pass through. It may be the means of.

The mode of the conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it may be on the display device side that is easy for the player to catch the eye, on the winning opening side or the starting opening side, on the front side (front side) that is easy for the player to see, or on the specific entry opening. It is directly linked to the stage side (mainly the place where the game ball is temporarily retained at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) as the part where the line of sight easily gathers as the place where the probability of entering the ball is remarkably high, and the jackpot acquisition. The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as an operation target, the production operation button side, the range where the game ball deviating from the entry opening flows down (the range where the player is frustrated and chases with his eyes) , The bright side or other side may be used for switching between light and dark by the light emitting means. Further, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine B1, the path-constructing means includes a second predetermined portion that makes the game ball that has entered the route-constructing means less noticeable than at the time of entering the ball, and the predetermined portion is more than the second predetermined portion. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is placed on a prominent side.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the gaming ball that has entered the path forming means flows down the predetermined portion by lowering the attention in the second predetermined portion before flowing down the predetermined portion. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the game ball when playing.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined portion includes a section in which the flow speed of the gaming ball is different, that is, the gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the effect of gathering the line of sight of the player can be improved as compared with the case where there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming ball.

The game machine B3 is characterized in that the second flow-down speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is higher than the first flow-down speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that has entered the path forming means reaches a predetermined portion.

A gaming machine B5, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speeds of the gaming balls in a predetermined directional view are different.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball in a predetermined direction is different regardless of the actual flow speed of the game ball. Since it can be configured, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball in a predetermined direction view at an arbitrary predetermined position, the player's line of sight can be easily gathered at the predetermined position and the eyes can be distracted from other parts. ..

It should be noted that the mode in which the apparent displacement speeds of the game balls are different is not limited at all. For example, there may be a difference between the case of displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction in the front view and the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-rear direction component, and the case of displacement on a straight line. It may be different from the case where it is displaced in a curved or meandering shape, or it may be different in other cases.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the introduction means configured to be able to introduce the game ball into the path forming means is provided, and the predetermined portion is arranged outside the introducing means in a predetermined direction. Characteristic gaming machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the visibility of the introduction means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to both ensure the visibility of the introducing means and improve the attention of the game ball that is likely to pass through the passing means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the gaming ball on the front side of the path forming means is provided with an avoiding means configured to flow down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passing means or the predetermined portion. The gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the gaming ball is configured to be able to flow down on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the gaming ball is the line of sight toward the passing means. Since the avoidance means for avoiding the above is provided, it is possible to secure the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the passing means at the same time.

The flow mode of the game ball affected by the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, it may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or a game ball heading toward the means to be passed. Based on the last position that can be confirmed by the player, it may flow down while avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the above-mentioned last position and the position of the player's eyes. Good, or anything else.

In the gaming machine B7, the path forming means includes a receiving state changing means that can change the state between a receiving state that can accept the flowing game ball and a non-accepting state that cannot accept the flowing game ball, and the receiving state changing means is The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that, in the state change from the accepted state to the non-accepted state, the gaming ball that has reached the accepted state changing means in the accepted state can be guided to the path forming means side. ..

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball that has flowed down so as to be bridged after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means. Can be done.

The gaming machine B7 or B8 is provided with a partitioning means that is arranged above the passing means in a front view and partitions the gaming area, and the partitioning means is configured so that the gaming ball can flow down the left and right outside. Characteristic gaming machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7 or B8, the partitioning means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the passing means, so that the field of view toward the passing means can be increased. It can be easily secured.

The mode of the partitioning means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes the flow surface of the game ball, or may be a ball entry port forming means that allows the game ball to enter. Further, the partitioning means may be a means for fixing the shape (appearance) or a means for changing the shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine B9, the path forming means includes a receiving state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state capable of accepting a flowing game ball and a non-accepting state not accepting the flowing game ball, and the receiving state changing means of the partition means. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the portion on the state changing means side is configured to easily guide the game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B9, the gaming ball being accepted by the receiving state changing means can be configured to be accepted in a manner of being pushed into the receiving state changing means by the partitioning means. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball that has slipped sideways in the state of being accepted deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

For example, as a means for changing the receiving state, a special winning device provided with an opening / closing plate that tilts and displaces in the left-right direction axis is assumed, and as a partitioning means, a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed. .. A game ball that reaches the special winning opening just before the opening / closing plate is closed is often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening / closing plate, and the direction of formation of the edge ( It slides sideways in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate).

Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the formation range of the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate, if at least a part of the opening / closing plate is arranged above the passing means, the game ball skids. After the later game ball has fallen to the front side, it may pass through the front position of the passing means, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

If it is not possible to avoid the game ball falling to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to arrange the opening / closing plate while avoiding the front view position of the passing means, which reduces the degree of freedom in designing the opening / closing plate. become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the gaming ball after skidding from falling to the front side of the opening / closing plate, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the opening / closing plate.

In any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the game ball flowing down the path-constituting means and the gaming ball flowing down the front side of the path-constituting means are configured to flow down in a similar flow-down mode. The gaming machine B11.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the gaming ball that may flow down the path forming means and pass through the passing means and the front side of the path forming means are flowed down. By making it difficult to distinguish between a game ball that does not pass through the means to be passed, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls that flow down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the case where the game ball easily enters the route forming means and the case where it is difficult to enter from the game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the route forming means.

A gaming machine B12, wherein any of the gaming machines B1 to B11 includes a light emitting means for irradiating light from the rear side of a sphere flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid that the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to secure the route length to the V outlet in a small space>
A route-constructing means in which a game ball can flow down, a passing means in which a game ball flowing down the path-building means can pass through, and a first state in which the game ball can flow down into the passing means. A state switching means configured to be switchable between a second state different from the first state is provided, and the path forming means includes a delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a gaming ball is configured to be able to flow down toward the passing means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit 75 that is configured to be movable to the left or right is arranged in the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 12, and the game ball is arranged by the arrangement of the distribution unit 75. There is a gaming machine configured so that the flow direction of the machine can be changed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is indispensable for the distribution unit 75 to operate for a short period of time in order to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and ball biting by the distribution unit 75, and some players shake. In some cases, he felt distrustful of the behavior of the division 75 and could not continue the game with peace of mind.

As an example of the means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second large winning opening 12 to the distribution portion 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution portion 75 from directly below the second major winning opening 12 to a position near the left and right center portions of the game area (near the first major winning opening 10), the second major winning opening 12 can be used. It is possible to secure a long flow path length up to the distribution portion 75. As a result, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when this means is executed, it becomes necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide range from the second prize opening 12 to the first prize opening 10, and the design of the game area is free in this range. The degree is limited. That is, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is limited in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of the game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the path forming means includes a predetermined delay means, even if the vertical length of the path forming means in the front view is shortened to save space, the path forming means can be entered. It is possible to secure a long time for the ball to pass through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passaged means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route forming means. It is possible to avoid erroneous winning without operating the opening / closing device that switches whether or not to enter the constituent means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening / closing means is operating in a hurry. As a result, it is possible to avoid erroneous entry of the game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The mode of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed in the flow path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow path for causing the game ball to flow down in the flow path having a front-rear direction component may be provided.

In the gaming machine C1, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the flow path toward the front side of the predetermined flow path is compared with the flow path toward the back side. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the acceleration of the pachinko and pachislot machine C2 is increased.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

The cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the flow path toward the front side is compared with the flow path that maintains the front-rear position and flows down. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the acceleration of the flowing gaming ball is increased.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing on the front side. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

The cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is such that the gaming ball is located in front of the passing means in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being configured to pass through.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the gaming ball is arranged at the front position, the visibility in the vicinity of the passing means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the range in the vicinity of the means to be passed.

The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a plurality of the front positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C5, by arranging the gaming balls at a plurality of front positions, at least a part of the gaming balls on the back side can be hidden by the gaming balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the back side of the game ball on the back side, the field of view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. ..

In this case, when the entry interval of the game ball into the predetermined flow path is short, it is possible to configure a state in which the game ball is always arranged at any of the front positions, so that the passing means cannot be visually recognized. It will be possible.

A gaming machine C6, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the path forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner in a top view.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for arranging the path forming means having the same length can be shortened.

Further, since it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall as compared with the case where the folded path is formed, the strength of the channel can be improved, and compared with the case where the folded path is folded at 180 degrees, the strength of the channel can be improved. The possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the path forming means includes a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction, and the gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the left-right width of the path forming means can be suppressed. Can be done.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the passing means is arranged diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path forming means.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to easily accommodate the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means in the field of view of the player who is visually recognized from the front side. ..

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the path forming means is configured so that the first receiving means configured to accept the game ball and the means different from the first receiving means so that the gaming ball can be accepted. A game characterized in that the second receiving means is provided, and the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the receiving mode of the game ball of the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive the game ball at all times, and further, the first receiving means and the first receiving means and the game machine C9. Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the mode of accepting the game ball of the second receiving means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball.

The mode of accepting the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the game ball may be accepted only by the first receiving means, the game ball may be accepted only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of balls are accepted by the first receiving means and the second receiving means is received. A predetermined number may be accepted by the means. Further, the frequency of ball entry for each receiving means may be different, or the ball entry position may be different.

In the gaming machine C9, the change in profit obtained by the player is limited to either the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or the gaming ball is accepted, or the first receiving means and the second receiving means are accepted. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that it is generated depending on whether or not the gaming ball is accepted in both of the above.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C9, the player can easily launch the gaming ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player. ..

The profit that the player can obtain is not limited in any way. For example, it may be easy to recognize the flowing game ball, or the profit related to the game obtained by the flowing game ball (payment of prize balls, acquisition of jackpot, game state after the end of the jackpot will be in a probable state, The gaming state may be changed to the normal state (falling, etc.).

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the path forming means is a gaming machine C11 characterized in that the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means are symmetrically configured.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage regardless of whether the gaming ball is launched mainly on the left or right side.

In any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the path forming means includes a receiving state changing means configured so that the state can be changed between an accepting state in which the flowing game ball can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the flowing game ball cannot be accepted. The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the mode of changing the state.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the mode of the state change. The influence of skill level on the profits obtained by the player can be reduced.

The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the mode of changing the state of the receiving state changing means is composed of a plurality of types.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C12, even when the gaming ball is launched in a certain firing mode, the receiving mode of the gaming ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means Can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted from the mode of changing the state of the receiving state changing means.

<Points about the opening / closing member that moves parallel to the flow direction of the sphere>
A route-constructing means in which a game ball can flow down, a passaged means in which a game ball flowing down the route-constructing means can pass through, an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the route-constructing means, and the above-mentioned The state switching means is provided with a state switching means configured so that the state can be changed in a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the route forming means. A gaming machine XA1 characterized in that it is configured to follow a direction.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine including a large prize-winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the flow direction of the gaming ball and the opening / closing direction of the opening / closing plate of the prize-winning component 300 are substantially perpendicular directions, and the opening / closing operation is completed without the opening / closing being involved in the rolling of the gaming ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening / closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, the displacement direction of the state switching means is configured to be along the flow direction of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball is in a state of being close to or in contact with the state switching means. By causing the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling mode of the game ball. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top, the rolling rotation is forward with respect to the game ball. Since the load for rotating is given, the game ball can be accelerated.

On the contrary, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on the top, so that the game ball rotates with respect to the game ball. Since a load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Further, when the state switching means slides to grab the lower end of the rolling game ball, the game ball is given a load having a component not only in the rolling direction of the game ball but also in a direction orthogonal to the rolling direction. Therefore, changes in the flow mode of the game ball can occur in a complicated and irregular manner.

Due to the influence of these influences on the flow mode of the game ball, the flow mode of the ball on the state switching means can be changed in various ways when the state switching means is opened and closed, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball gets bored. You can concentrate on the game without having to.

Further, the arrangement relationship between the opening / closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged so as to rub against the side surface of the game ball, or it may be arranged so as to oppose the game ball in the downward direction and collide with the game ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball so that the game ball can be repelled, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flow direction of the game ball, and the game ball is introduced thereafter. May be configured to be regulateable with less resistance.

In the game machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means can be executed while the state switching means and the game ball are in contact with each other.

According to the game machine XA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine XA1, the game ball can be rotated by the state change of the state switching means.

In the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the state switching means includes a changing means for changing the direction of the load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

According to the gaming machine XA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the load given from the gaming ball during the displacement of the state switching means can be released, and the load given to the state switching means can be reduced. ..

<Points about the opening / closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when it is open and in the second direction when it is closed>
A route-constituting means in which a game ball can flow down, a passing means in which a game ball flowing down the path-constituting means can pass through, an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passing means, and the above-mentioned A state switching means configured to be able to change the state in a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means is provided, and the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state. The gaming machine XB1 is configured so that the gaming ball can be guided in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine including a large prize-winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right in the state of projecting to the front side, but in the state of retracting to the rear side, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. And will not guide you. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of being retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (frame portion, etc.) for guiding the flow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371, in order to guide the flow of the game ball. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the number of configurations (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the gaming ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or not, so that it is dedicated to guiding the flow path of the gaming ball. Since the members can be eliminated, the number of required configurations (members) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to diversify the flow direction of the game ball in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set to the left-right direction with respect to the game ball flowing down along the front-back direction. In this case, in front view, the difference (difference) in the direction after the guidance by the state switching means is maximized while allowing only a slight displacement of the game ball to be recognized before being guided by the state switching means. Can be planned.

The arrangement of the guide portion that causes the guide action by the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may be arranged on the movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion is arranged on the non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball becomes the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. It may be configured so that it can be switched to a state in which it is easy to come into close contact with each other.

When the guide portion is arranged on the movable member, the design takes into consideration the influence on the game ball during the operation of switching the state, as well as the guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed. It is preferable to do so.

For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, a surface (planar surface, curved surface, etc.) that is inclined with the flow direction rather than providing a flat wall portion orthogonal to the flow direction. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward by providing the wall portion having a shape of). This makes it easier to avoid the backflow of the game ball.

In the gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by the displacement in the third direction, and the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. ..

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state switching means malfunctions due to the load given by the guided gaming ball.

In the gaming machines XB1 or XB2, the path forming means includes a pair of left and right paths, and the state switching means includes a pair of guides capable of receiving game balls from the pair of left and right paths, respectively, and the pair of guides. The gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are symmetrically configured in each section.

According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the flow path of the gaming ball can be complicated. Further, in the pair of guide portions, the first direction and the second direction are symmetrically configured, so that the displacement received by the state switching means due to the load received by the pair of guide portions from the game ball is symmetrical in the left and right directions. be able to.

Thereby, for example, when the game balls are put into a pair of left and right paths in a substantially equal number of balls, the arrangement of the state switching means can be easily made uniform by the load received from the game balls by the guide unit.

In the gaming machine XB3, the state switching means includes a protruding portion formed so as to project in a direction intersecting the third direction.

According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB3, the contact area with other members can be reduced by the overhanging portion, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

The gaming machine XB3 or XB4 is provided with a contact means configured to be able to abut in the introduced state or the non-introduced state of the state switching means, and by abutting with the abutting means, the state switching means in the left-right direction. The gaming machine XB5 characterized in that the displacement can be corrected.

According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, the load from the gaming ball can be received from either the left or right direction. It can be returned in order by the action of the means.

<Separation, inversion, coalescence, rotation are a series of operations>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable so that the surface to be visually recognized changes, the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and the first displacement in a predetermined mode of displacement. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the rotating base 214 arranged at the tip of the base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable a plurality of times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the displacement means because the surface visible to the player is the same.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the visible surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable according to the displacement, so that the attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Further, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by the relative displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member, it is possible to improve the attention to the displacement means.

In the game machine D1, the displacements of the predetermined embodiment include a first displacement that is close to each other with respect to a gathering portion in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The gaming machine D2, wherein the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily generated dynamically. That is, as the displacement with reference to the gathering portion, the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced at the terminal portion where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest only by the first displacement. Where the 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member appear to stop and the effect of effect may be reduced, by mixing the 2nd displacement, displacement in the rotational direction can be generated even at the end portion. Therefore, the effect of production can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement of the predetermined aspect includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the decoration to be visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different by reversing the surface visually recognized by the third displacement. Can be made.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it acts in a direction that limits the displacement of members.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to the fixing acts in a direction to limit the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so that the load related to the fixing acts. Can be taken into consideration to design the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, in the case of transmission of driving force closer to a gear, if deformation of the shape is not taken into consideration and mechanical displacement occurs, if a load related to fixing is taken into consideration, the elastic change of the member due to the load becomes apparent. As a result, the displacement timing of the member can be delayed.

Further, the degree of fixation may be different depending on the visible surface of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the action of fixing differs depending on the surface on which the player can see, the degree of fixing on the side on which the player can see can be adjusted.

As a result, for example, with respect to the inverted surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is firmly united and easily visible as an integral unit, and the other surface is loosely united and easily visually displaced in a relative displacement state. Can be done.

Further, for example, by configuring the first displacement member and the second displacement member to have different degrees of suction for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs. can.

The mode in which adsorption is possible is not limited in any way. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape, or it may utilize the attractive force between the magnet and the metal portion. Further, as the metal portion attracted to the magnet, for example, the first reversing member or the second reversing member may be designed so as to use a fixing screw, a screw or the like.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, the displacement means is displaced in the first displacement mode in the forward direction and the first displacement in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to be displaced in the first displacement mode after the displacement in the predetermined mode.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement modes of the displacement means are configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is before the first displacement mode. Since the predetermined mode is configured as an additional displacement mode, the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when the displacement means is retracted can be reduced. As a result, the attention force to the displacement means at the time of evacuation can be reduced, so that the attention force of the displacement means displaced at the effect position can be relatively improved.

In the conventional machine, the mode of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, so after projecting to the effect position (front side position of the liquid crystal display area) and then retracting to the evacuation position (outside position of the liquid crystal display area). It had to rotate multiple times in the opposite direction again. In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight tends to gather on the member retracted from the effect position, which may be regarded as a problem.

The displacement mode is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. Further, the displacement may be on a plane, may be spread over a plurality of planes, or may be three-dimensional.

In the gaming machine D5, the displacement means includes a releasing means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, a change in the displacement mode of the displacement means can be caused by the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

In any of the game machines D1 to D6, a light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means is provided, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the first displacement member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured so that the visible mode of light from the light emitting means can be changed depending on whether the surface to be visually recognized is one side or the other side.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visible surface of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Can be changed.

For example, there are cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as individually emitting light, and cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as integrally emitting light. Can be changed with.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a detecting means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means is provided, and the detecting means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an acceptable state. Characteristic gaming machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the state in which the displacement of the displacement means is acceptable can be detected by the detecting means, so that the displacement means collides with the surrounding structural part during the displacement. It can be avoided.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the displaceable section of the displacement means by the detecting means, the displacement mode including enlargement / reduction after the displacement from the effect position to the retracted position to some extent. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress an increase in the attention force to the displacement means when the displacement is performed from the effect position to the retracted position, as compared with the case where the displacement is performed in a displacement mode including enlargement / reduction from the start of the displacement. ..

One of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a detecting means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detecting means is configured to be able to detect two or more kinds of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. Amusement machine D9.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detection means arranged can be reduced. Various aspects are exemplified as the types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value for each arrangement or posture of different movable members, or may be a numerical value involved in the change of the operation mode when the operation mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detecting means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to construct a structure for detecting the arrangement and the posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

In any of the game machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have a surface facing the player side on one side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one surface toward the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be capable of reversing the posture of the surface and the attitude of the other side. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished from each other, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member have the other side facing the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member D10, which is characterized in that the displacement is indistinguishable.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the states of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side. It is possible to maintain a high expectation of the player for the occurrence of.

<Points to change the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having multiple visible surfaces>
A displacement means including a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible is provided, and the displacement means includes a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and the first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible, depending on the arrangement. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that it can be switched between a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible and a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes a reversing operation unit 71 that is configured to be reversible and is configured to be able to change the appearance that is visually recognized by a player by changing the surface to be visually recognized (for example). , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the reversing of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a state where the position is fixed, the line of sight of the player cannot be changed by the change of the surface to be visually recognized. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of efficiently changing the line of sight of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a state in which the second visible surface is easy to see, depending on the arrangement. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the path of the arrangement change of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the displacement means is provided with an opening portion that allows the displacement means to be visually opened, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a player who visually recognizes the back side through the open portion can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine E2, the displacement means is arranged closer to the back side when it is arranged on the edge side of the opening portion than when it is arranged on the center side of the opening portion. ..

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, when the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion, the displacement means is largely visible on the front side, and the displacement means is on the edge side of the opening portion. When arranged, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to achieve both the visibility of the displacement means and the suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his / her eyes.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and a set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that it is difficult to visually recognize the first visible surface and the second visible surface of another set when the surfaces are visible.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, different characters and figures are applied to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set to displace the displacement means. It is possible to make different characters and figures visible to the player who visually recognizes the above, and the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set which are not intended to be visually recognized are configured to be difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the displacement means from being completely lost.

For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big hit and the expectation is low are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second group, the lottery result is displayed. When characters or figures indicating that there is a high expectation of a big hit are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a big hit is achieved through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of the jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained. However, it is possible to continue to visually recognize the display regarding the expectation of the jackpot.

It should be noted that the mode of configuration that is difficult to see is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a surface different from the player side (rear side surface, left and right outer surface, etc.), or may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first visible surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized (before confirmation). And it is possible to make it easier to avoid predicting a set of second visible surfaces. As a result, the attention to the displacement means can be improved.

The mode in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at a high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part may be coupled and separated so that one of them can be combined and separated. It may be difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts in a separated state, or it may be difficult to recognize by creating a relatively dark part by setting the light and darkness by the light emitting means.

In this case, the mode of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, only one of a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visually recognized, and the other is operated so as to face the back side so as not to be visually recognized. It may be configured so that some of them and other parts can be visually recognized at the same time, but they are arranged so as to operate in a state of being visually recognized.

The gaming machine E5 includes an opening portion in which the displacement means is visually opened, and the switching operation is executed in a state where the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion. Game machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the switching operation can be easily made visible to the player, and the attention to the switching operation can be improved.

In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of a part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side. Pachinko machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visible surface is visible during operation and the entire surface is invisible, so that the first visibility is possible during operation. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the possible surface.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, a second displacement means configured to be able to shield at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface is provided, and the displacement means together with the second displacement means said the first. 1 A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it can be switched to a third state for visually recognizing a visible surface.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, at least a part of the second visible surface is made difficult to be visually recognized by the second displacement means, so that the effect position of the displacement means is determined. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between the first visible surface and the second visible surface according to the displacement. The gaming machine E9 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface. The surface that is easy to see can be arbitrarily changed without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the person.

In the gaming machine E9, the gaming machine E10 is characterized in that the posture of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. can.

The gaming machine E9 or E10 includes an auxiliary means configured to be placed close to the displacement means. In the first state, the displacement means is placed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means. Is a gaming machine E11 characterized in that it is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, a state in which the auxiliary means is arranged close to the displacement means to be visually recognized integrally and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are visually recognized separately. It can be configured, and a plurality of impressions given to the player by the displacement means can be configured.

The mode of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the means may be a fixed arrangement or a movable means.

The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the auxiliary means can be switched between a state in which the auxiliary means is made visible integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is made visible separately from the displacement means. ..

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately, so that there are variations in the visible mode with respect to the number of members. Can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means and the displacement amount of the arrangement means at the same point differs depending on the section>
A displaceable means for displacement, an arrangement means in which a first portion is arranged on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second portion of the arrangement means are provided, and the support means thereof is provided. Is a gaming machine F1 characterized in that the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion during displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. There is a gaming machine that includes a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for the purpose, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotating accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). See publication). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated during the tilt displacement of the base arm 220, a problem may occur in the mechanism. As a result, since it is assumed that the rotational displacement of the rotating accessory 211 is performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the disposing means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at at least two points, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion can be controlled by the support means, the arrangement means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacement means while stably supporting the arrangement means. Can be done. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

The mode of the supporting means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in the fixed base means in a manner in which the displacement is restricted, or may be supported by being connected to a second displaceable displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to the electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guidance) the displacement of the second portion by the wall portion.

In the game machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means is the second portion when the displacement means displaces the first section. A first range for supporting the second portion and a second range for supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, and the second portion is displaced in the first range. The gaming machine F2 is configured such that the direction and the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the displacement speed of the displacement means can be made different even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is the second. Since it is configured to allow a change in the displacement direction of the portion, the displacement of the disposing means can be smoothed even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means includes a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range. When the portion of is displaced from the side with a large displacement to the side with a small displacement, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restricted portion) between the first range and the second range.

The mode of the load required for the displacement with respect to the first portion of the second portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled or the second portion may be pushed.

The mode of the limiting portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be an embodiment in which an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second portion is set, or an embodiment in which the displacement direction of the second portion is switched.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the end side of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the relative displacement amount of the above-mentioned first section is configured to be smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means based on the displacement means in the first section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to form a section in which the relative displacement amount of the displacement means with respect to the displacement means is small at the position in the middle of the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, a position where the displacement means and the disposing means can be easily visually recognized can be provided, and as a result, the displacement means and the disposing means can be visually recognized integrally. Easy positions can be increased.

The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement velocity (ratio) of the second portion with reference to the displacement velocity of the first portion can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the disposing means on the support means side. Therefore, it is possible to configure an operation effect in which the displacement speed of the disposing means is variable by simple drive control (constant speed drive) of the drive means.

A gaming machine F6 in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, wherein the supporting means is configured to reduce the displacement velocity at the displacement termination of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to easily stop the disposing means at an early stage at the displacement end.

The method for preventing the second part from bouncing back is not limited in any way. For example, a method configured to reduce the displacement velocity of the second portion at the end of displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. A method may be used in which the displacement of the second portion is regulated by a shape device such as erecting a wall in the displacement direction of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

Further, the method is not limited to the method of reducing the displacement amount of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied by a magnetic force or the like at the displacement end of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved by an urging force such as a coil spring. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the supporting means is a displacement locus of the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion, and the second portion when the first portion is stopped at the displacement end. The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the displacement loci of the displacement are configured to intersect with each other.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F6, a support means having a function of guiding the displacement of the second portion due to the displacement of the first portion causes a first portion when the first portion is stopped. The return displacement (bound) of the second portion can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a supported means that is displaceably supported by the disposing means is provided, and the supported means has a relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacement means. A gaming machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding amount of displacement.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complicated effect can be executed by the supported means that is displaced jointly with the disposing means.

The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arrangement means on the predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced, or the arrangement means may be displaced at a position distant from the predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced (for example,). , A displacement mode different from the slide displacement mode on a predetermined plane (for example, a rotational displacement mode centered on a predetermined axis) may be used.

The mode of displacement of the disposing means according to the amount of displacement of the disposing means is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed, or the displacement may be maintained while maintaining the posture.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion includes a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting the displacement locus of the first portion. Gaming machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced, the relative displacement amount of the second portion with respect to the first portion returns and changes (for example, after the increase). Since the mode can be reduced), it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the displacement amount of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

The gaming machine F8 or F9 is characterized in that the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the disposing means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to the displacement means with the disposing means sandwiched between them. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the supported means is displaced by the original driving means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the disposing means includes a posture changing means for changing the posture so as to switch the surface facing the player side between the first surface and the second surface according to its own displacement. The posture changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is oriented toward the player side in a state where the second portion is arranged at the displacement end. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed to the player side, so that the second part becomes the displacement end. Since the player can grasp that the game has been reached, the end of the effect operation by the displacement means can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any of the game machines F1 to F11, the electrical wiring is configured to be inserted into the disposing means through the second portion, and the electrical wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second portion. The disposition means comprises an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted, the opening being displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with a peripheral portion formed around it. A game machine F12 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F11, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from coming into contact with the surrounding portion.

The arranging means may be configured as a means for combining the plurality of members when the second portion is composed of a plurality of members, or when another member is disposed in the second portion, the arrangement means may be configured. It may be configured as a means for preventing the separate member from falling off from the second portion.

<Characteristic AA group>
A first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first information acquisition condition, and a first determination capable of executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means. 1 Distinguishing means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a first identification information for showing a first discrimination result by the first discriminating means, and a first dynamic display means thereof. The second information is acquired based on the first dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining the first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the method and the establishment of the second information acquisition condition. Based on a possible second information acquisition means, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means. Then, the second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminating and the second discriminating information for indicating the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means can be dynamically displayed on the display means. A display means, a second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a specific first. 1 When the first identification information for showing the discrimination result or the second identification information for showing the specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player. The effect mode executing means capable of executing the effect mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information in the game machine having the privileged game execution means, and the effect mode executed by the effect mode execution means. It has a selectable effect mode selection means, and the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means. The game machine AA1 characterized by this.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a production mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. is provided as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. Some of them are determined and the determined production mode is executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AA1, since the effect mode to be executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is changed by the number of stored second information, it can be executed after that. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of times the second identification information is dynamically displayed, and even if the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is not displayed, the game continues for the subsequent game. By making them interested, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode executing means is the specific second movement. The gaming machine AA2, characterized in that the effect mode is executed when the target display mode is executed.

According to the gaming machine AA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the player to memorize the second information, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved. ..

In the gaming machines AA1 or AA2, the effect mode is continuously executed after the period of the second dynamic display mode being executed corresponding to the number of stored second information is completed. The gaming machine AA3, which is set in a period straddling the following dynamic display of the second identification information.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AA1 or AA2, the effect mode is configured to be executable over a dynamic display period of the second identification information that is executed a plurality of times in succession. Therefore, there is an effect that the second dynamic display mode of a plurality of times can be made to look like the dynamic display of 1, and the interest can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball in the second ball-entry means. A variable member that can be changed into a first state in which a ball can be entered and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition. In a gaming machine having a variable control means that changes from to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a pre-determination means that can determine the establishment of the specific condition in advance before the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that the effect mode selection means is configured so that a specific effect mode can be selected at least based on the result of the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, a specific production mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily determining the establishment of a specific condition that triggers the acquisition of the second information. Therefore, there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristic AB group> (The effect is variable depending on the number of holdings in Special Figure 2 during the execution of the fluctuation pattern)
A first information acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first information acquisition condition, and a first determination capable of executing the first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means. 1 Distinguishing means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a first identification information for showing a first discrimination result by the first discriminating means, and a first dynamic display means thereof. The second information is acquired based on the first dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining the first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the method and the establishment of the second information acquisition condition. Based on a possible second information acquisition means, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means. Then, the second discriminating means capable of executing the second discriminating and the second discriminating information for indicating the second discriminating result by the second discriminating means can be dynamically displayed on the display means. A display means, a second dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a specific first. 1 When the first identification information for showing the discrimination result or the second identification information for showing the specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player. The effect mode executing means capable of executing the effect mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the effect mode executed by the effect mode execution means in the game machine having the privileged game execution means. It has a selectable effect mode selection means, and the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means. The game machine AB1 characterized by this.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the lottery result is notified by lottery based on the lottery result or the like as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. By determining the production mode and executing the determined production mode, there is an attempt to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AB1, the second information is stored in the effect mode executed during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display. Since it is determined based on the number, not only the result of the first determination but also the information regarding the possibility that the second determination can be executed can be determined from the production mode, and the player can play the game at an early stage. It has the effect of suppressing the trouble of getting bored.

In the gaming machine AB1, the effect mode selection means selects the effect mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information that is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AB2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1, the production mode is selected according to the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of second information stored during the execution, so that the production mode is various. There is an effect that various production modes can be executed.

In the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode is subsequently executed. The gaming machine AB3, characterized in that an effect related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information is executed.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, when the second information is stored, the operation of the second identification information is performed after the execution of the first identification information is completed. Since the target display is started and the effect mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, the second is preferentially executed. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is started at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a first ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a game ball in the second ball-entry means. A variable member that can be changed into a first state in which a ball can be entered and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition. In a gaming machine having a variable control means that changes from to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a pre-determination means that can determine the establishment of the specific condition in advance before the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AB4 is characterized in that the effect mode selection means is configured so that a specific effect mode can be selected at least based on the result of the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, a specific production mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily determining the establishment of a specific condition that triggers the acquisition of the second information. Therefore, there is an effect that the acquisition of the second information can be expected.

<Characteristic AC group> (Special figure 1 fluctuation effect is used as a simulated effect of special figure 2 variation)
A first discrimination means that executes the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination that executes the second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. The means, the first privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming the predetermined first determination result, and the first 2 The second privilege game execution means for executing the first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the predetermined second determination result, and the first determination are executed. Based on the fact, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect for showing the determination result of the first determination, and the determination result of the second determination based on the execution of the second determination. The second effect executing means is provided with a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect, and the second effect executing means satisfies at least a predetermined specific condition. The gaming machine AC1 is characterized in that the second effect of the effect mode including at least a specific effect mode that is likely to be executed during the effect period of the first effect can be executed.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a production mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. is provided as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. Some of them are determined and the determined production mode is executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the first effect can be executed as an effect for showing the determination result of the second determination, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the second effect executing means can execute the second effect of the effect mode including at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect. The gaming machine AC2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC1, it is possible to execute the second effect using the display mode showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

In the gaming machine AC2, the second effect executing means executes a second effect mode for showing the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode within one effect showing the determination result of the second determination. A gaming machine AC3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic AD group> (Double display including probability variation even if it hits normally)
To show the result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means after the first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination and a plurality of first identification symbols are dynamically displayed on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode. A first dynamic display means capable of stopping and displaying by a combination of the above, a second discriminating means capable of executing a second discrimination, and a plurality of second identification symbols dynamically displayed on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode. After the display, the second dynamic display means that can be stopped and displayed by the combination for showing the second determination result by the second determination means, and the display means for showing the specific first determination result. When the first identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific combination of, or when the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the display means in a specific combination for showing the specific second determination result, the game is played. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a person, the privilege granting means is stopped and displayed with a combination of identification symbols corresponding to the first specific combination among the specific combinations. In this case, the first privilege can be given as the privilege, and when the combination of the identification symbols corresponding to the second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, it is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. The gaming machine is configured to be able to grant a second privilege, the gaming machine has a determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and the first dynamic display means has a specific period. When set, the remaining identification symbols can be any combination of the first specific combination and the second specific combination in a state where the first identification symbol of 1 is dynamically displayed. AD1 is a gaming machine AD1 characterized in that the first identification symbol is displayed in the specific combination after displaying a plurality of reach display modes that are stopped and displayed in combination.

When a game machine such as a pachinko machine is notified of the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening by a combination of a plurality of symbols, it is subsequently given according to the type of the displayed symbol. Some of them are configured so that the benefits are different to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, some symbols constituting the combination in which the privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player is not given is stopped and displayed, so that the interest in the game is before the result is notified. There was a problem that it decreased.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

According to the gaming machine AD1, when the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination in a specific period, the specific combination is displayed through the multiple reach display modes, so that the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the second privilege are supported. It is possible to have a long-term expectation that both of the combinations will be displayed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AD1, the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period. The gaming machine AD2.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD1, a specific combination is displayed through a plurality of reach display modes even in a specific period in which the first privilege is determined by the determining means, so that the specific period There is an effect that it is possible to easily have a sense of expectation that the second privilege will be given even when the first determination is executed.

In the gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second privilege when the specific second determination result is obtained in the specific period, and the second dynamic display means is set to the specific period. If so, the second identification symbol of 1 is dynamically displayed, and the remaining identification symbols are stopped and displayed at a combination capable of being any combination of two or more different second specific combinations. The gaming machine AD3, characterized in that the second identification symbol is displayed in the specific combination after displaying the special plurality of reach display modes.

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD2, it is necessary to make the player recognize at an early stage that the second privilege advantageous to the player is always given when the specific second judgment result is a specific second determination result in a specific period. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic AE group> (Punk ED control at the time of probability change)
It is executed by the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game execution means. The privilege game type determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege game from a plurality of types, a specific area through which the game ball can pass when the specific privilege game is executed, and the game ball in the specific area. A setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state as a gaming state that is set after the execution of the privileged game when passing through, and the privileged game In a gaming machine having a suggestion mode executing means for executing a suggestion mode capable of suggesting the game state set after the execution of the privilege game when the above is completed, the suggestion mode is the first suggestion mode. It is configured by combining the second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal gaming state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the advantageous gaming state are configured in the same period. The gaming machine AE1 characterized in that it is configured in the suggested mode.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the result of a lottery based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning game, and different winning games are executed depending on the winning type, and during a specific type of winning game. Is a variable ball entry area that can be changed between a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult to enter. There is an attempt to improve the interest of the game by setting the gaming state to be advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if a specific type of hit game is executed, the gaming ball may not enter the variable ball entry area, and the control load in the notification control in that case increases. There was a problem of doing it.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing a control load.

According to the gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to the same period, it is possible to set the mode suggesting according to the state of entry into a specific region while suppressing the period for displaying the suggestion mode from changing. There is an effect that the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the privilege game can be facilitated and the control load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine AE1, when the privilege game is executed, the suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution means according to the type of the privilege game to be executed, and the specific suggestion mode setting means. Of the suggestion modes set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the privilege game, the second suggestion mode is switched to the second suggestion mode corresponding to other than the specific privilege game. The gaming machine AE2, characterized in that it has a switching means capable of performing the above.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AE1, the suggestion mode is displayed even if the suggestion mode is set at the start so as to suppress the concentration of the control load at the end of the privilege game. Since it is possible to switch to a suggestion mode corresponding to the normal gaming state and make a suggestion without changing the period for doing so, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be executed.

<Characteristic AF group> (Establish ED periods of different lengths depending on the jackpot type)
By the discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and the privilege game execution means. The end of the award game is terminated based on the award game type determining means capable of determining the type of the award game to be executed from a plurality of types and a predetermined end condition being satisfied during the execution of the award game. The gaming machine AF1 is characterized by comprising, as a period for indicating, a period setting means for setting a period of a length according to the type of the privileged game being executed.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a production mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. is provided as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. Some of them are determined and the determined production mode is executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AF1, since different periods can be set according to the type of privileged gaming, there is an effect that the interest of the gaming can be improved.

The gaming machine AF1 is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, it is possible to execute a specific effect at different periods set according to the type of privileged game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. effective.

The gaming machine AF1 or AF2 is provided with a period switching means capable of switching the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game. The featured gaming machine AF3.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AF1 or AF2, the length of the period can be changed even when the variable condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game, so that the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic AG group> (The ED period can be changed depending on the presence or absence of V prize)
The discriminating means capable of executing the discriminating, the privileged game executing means capable of executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result, and the executing of the privileged game Based on the specific area through which the game ball can pass and the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, it is possible to set an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. The state setting means and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition during the execution of the privilege game are provided. The specific period setting means is characterized in that the specific period having different lengths can be set depending on whether the game ball passes through the specific area or not during the execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine AG1.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a production mode for notifying the lottery result by lottery based on the lottery result etc. is provided as an effect for showing the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening. Some of them are determined and the determined production mode is executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage due to the content of the production mode.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine AG1, it is possible to set a specific period of different length depending on whether the game ball passes through the specific area or not during the execution of the privilege game, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can be made to.

The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that the gaming machine AG1 has a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect during the specific period.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AG1, a specific effect can be executed within a specific period, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AG2, the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passage status of the game ball to the specific area during the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine AG3, since the notification mode is included in the specific effect, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic AH group> (Restriction control of button operation)
A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means thereof The setting execution means capable of executing the setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation, and the operation means being operated when a specific condition is satisfied in the dynamic display period of the identification information. The gaming machine AH1 comprising: a regulatory means for regulating the execution of the above setting based on the above.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) via a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. There are many things that the player has devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol change period). Among them, there is one in which a plurality of effect modes are facilitated in advance so that the mode of the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation period is different for each effect mode.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, different variable effects can be provided to the player by switching the effect mode, so that the player gets tired of the game early by providing only the same variable effects. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Further, there is also a gaming machine in which the effect mode can be arbitrarily switched by operating an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877). In such a gaming machine, since the player himself / herself can select the most interesting production mode from the plurality of production modes, the variable production with low interest is executed, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the slingshot. Further, since it is necessary for the player himself / herself to operate the operating means in order to switch the effect mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, as described above, when the effect mode can be switched at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the operation means, for example, immediately before the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, or when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When a short fluctuation period is set as the fluctuation period, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery due to the switching of the production mode, so that the motivation to operate the operation means is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AH1, the operation means is operated because it is possible to regulate the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied in the dynamic display period of the identification information. This makes it possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In the gaming machine AH1, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the end condition are satisfied. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period to be performed, and the specific condition, at least one of the conditions for establishing the short gaming state is set. A game machine AH2 characterized in that it is set as one.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AH1, the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means can be regulated in the short game state, so that the setting executing means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, an effect mode setting means capable of at least setting a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode based on the settings executed by the setting execution means. A gaming machine AH3 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AH1 or AH2, different production modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, so that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. Has the effect of being able to suppress.

In any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, there is a specific setting means capable of executing the specific setting, and the regulation means is the setting execution means based on the operation of the operation means when the specific condition is set. The AH4 is configured so that the specific setting by the specific setting means can be executed without executing the setting by the above.

According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, the specific setting is performed even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operating means during the period when the specific condition is satisfied. Is executed, and by providing the player who has operated the operating means with an operation by operating the operating means, there is an effect that the operation of the operating means can be made a meaningful act.

The gaming machine AH4 has a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the information of the identification information that is stopped and displayed before the identification information is stopped and displayed based on the specific setting. The gaming machine AH5, which is characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AH4, when a specific condition is satisfied, the information of the identification information to be stopped and displayed can be identified before the stop display by the suggestion effect, and the specific condition can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage by executing various effects by operating the game when it is established.

<Characteristic AI group> (Notifies the advantageous period across multiple gaming states)
A discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and a first game state as a game state. At least a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state and is different from the second gaming state can be set. In a gaming machine having the above-mentioned game state setting means, the game state setting means can set the second game state after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the second game state can be set. 2 The third gaming state can be set when the first setting condition is satisfied in the state where the gaming state is set, and is different from the first setting condition in the state where the third gaming state is set. The first game state can be set when the second setting condition is satisfied, and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the period until the second setting condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AI1 is characterized by having an advantageous period determining means for determining an advantageous period based on the above, and a notification means capable of notifying the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determining means.

Conventionally, when an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the player is notified of the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes). Specifically, "100 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is displayed by subtracting 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed. be. As a result, the player can easily grasp how many more special symbol lottery can be executed during the currently set advantageous gaming state.

Further, in recent gaming machines, there are those in which a plurality of state types can be set as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player, and the advantageous gaming states include the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the time saving state) and the first advantageous gaming state. There are some that can set a second advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) that is more advantageous than one advantageous gaming state.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, for example, when the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the time saving state) is set, the player is notified of the period (remaining period) in which the first advantageous gaming state continues. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to notify which gaming state is set after the first advantageous gaming state is completed. That is, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player is set to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state, or is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state. There is a problem that it is not possible to grasp whether or not the gaming state is set, and it is difficult to understand what the game should be aimed at during the first advantageous gaming state, and the motivation for playing is reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by improving the player's motivation to play. ..

According to the gaming machine AI1, when a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set, an advantageous period determined based on the period until the first gaming state is set again by the notification means. Is notified, so even if the gaming machine has a plurality of gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, it is possible to grasp the period during which the gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AI1, in a state in which the notification means has notified that the advantageous period has been reached, the suggestion effect execution capable of executing the suggestion effect for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine AI2 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine AI2, it is possible to suggest the currently set gaming state while notifying the player of the advantageous period until the first gaming state is set, so that the content of the suggestion effect to be executed is executed. It has the effect of making people interested in pachinko and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AI2, the suggestion effect executing means is a past suggestion for suggesting the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means in a state in which the notification means has notified that the advantageous period has been reached. The gaming machine AI3 is characterized in that it can also be produced.

According to the gaming machine AI3, the gaming state set in the past can be suggested to the player by the suggestion effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the content of the past suggestion effect and analyze the past game content during the advantageous period, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. ..

In the gaming machine AI2 or AI3, the notification means can display the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period on the display means, and the suggestion effect executing means changes the remaining period display mode. The gaming machine AI4 is characterized in that it is possible to suggest a currently set gaming state or a previously set gaming state.

According to the gaming machine AI4, by changing the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period, a suggestion effect regarding the gaming state is executed. There is an effect that the suggestion effect can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4 has a second suggestion effect means capable of suggesting the timing at which the first setting condition can be satisfied in a state where the notification means has notified that the advantageous period has been reached. The gaming machine AI5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AI5, since the player can predict the timing at which the gaming state is switched during the advantageous period, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the advantageous period at an early stage. There is.

Any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI5 has an advantageous notification means capable of notifying the player of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player among the second gaming state and the third gaming state. The featured gaming machine AI6.

According to the gaming machine AI6, since the player can grasp the superiority or inferiority of a plurality of gaming states set during the advantageous period, it is more interesting to predict which gaming state the currently set gaming state is. Can be given.

<Characteristic AJ group> (One symbol sequence is variablely displayed by controlling multiple symbol display)
A display means for displaying suggestion information capable of suggesting a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the suggestion information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for showing is displayed, the suggestion information is composed of a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols. At least a first symbol string and a second symbol string composed of a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols different from the first symbol string are set, and the dynamic display means is the first. It is configured that the second symbol string can be dynamically displayed in a second direction different from the first direction during the period when the symbol string is dynamically displayed in the first direction. The featured gaming machine AJ1.

Conventionally, as the identification information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). In addition, various effects (variable effects) can be executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player can play the game while expecting a big hit by suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol string is formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, a third symbol with a number from 1 to 9), and the plurality of symbol sequences (for example, three) are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in a symbol row other than one symbol row, an effect that raises the expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, There is something that performs reach production). In this way, the player is given a big hit by performing a variable effect to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using a plurality of symbol rows. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the third symbol is only changed and displayed for each symbol row without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol row. Therefore, for example, the speed of the variable display of each symbol row can be changed. There are only variations such as making it variable, changing the fluctuation direction of each symbol row, and changing the size at which each symbol row is displayed. There was a problem that it was required to further improve the interest of the game by increasing it.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, since the first symbol sequence and the second symbol sequence are dynamically displayed in different directions, it becomes easier to distinguish between the first symbol sequence and the second symbol sequence, and the discrimination result is discriminated from the suggestion information. It has the effect of making it easier to do.

The gaming machine AJ1 has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestion information can be dynamically displayed, and the first symbol sequence is set at the start of the dynamic display period. Based on the above, the second symbol string is dynamically displayed in the first direction, and the second symbol string is dynamically displayed in the second direction based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming machine AJ2 is characterized in that a part of the symbols constituting the second symbol sequence is dynamically displayed in the second direction at least at a position where they overlap.

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ1, the first symbol sequence and the second symbol sequence are dynamically displayed at the overlapping positions, so that it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the display area. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine AJ2 has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestion information can be dynamically displayed, and the first symbol string and the second symbol string are the above-mentioned movements. The gaming machine AJ3 is configured to be dynamically displayed in each of the first direction and the second direction based on the start of the target display period.

According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ2, the first symbol sequence and the second symbol sequence are dynamically moved in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period. Since it is displayed, it has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the display control means capable of displaying and controlling the suggestion information is provided, and the display control means displays the discrimination result according to the display mode of the first symbol sequence. A gaming machine AJ4 characterized in that one symbol sequence can be displayed and controlled.

According to the gaming machine AJ4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ3, the discrimination result is displayed using the display mode of the first symbol string, so that the display mode of the dynamic display of the first symbol string is based on the discrimination result. It is possible to freely set the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol string. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the dynamic display of the suggestion information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AJ4 has a first display layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol sequence and a second display layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol sequence. At least a part of the first display area in the first display layer and the second display area in the second display layer are configured to overlap, and the first display area and the first display area are overlapped with each other. 2. The gaming machine AJ5 is characterized in that the first symbol sequence can be displayed so as to be visible to the player with priority over the second symbol sequence at a location where the display area overlaps.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ4, when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap, the first symbol row is displayed so as to be visible to the player. NS. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode for showing the discrimination result can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player while performing the effect of effectively using the display area.

In the gaming machine AJ4 or AJ5, the display control means is a sum of the plurality of symbols constituting the first symbol sequence and the plurality of symbols constituting the second symbol sequence arranged in a predetermined order. The gaming machine AJ6 is characterized in that the first symbol sequence and the second symbol sequence can be displayed and controlled so as to be composed of a symbol sequence.

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ4 or AJ5, the first symbol string and the second symbol string can be dynamically displayed as a total symbol string, so that the player can see the total symbol. It can make you think that the columns are organized. Among them, since the first symbol sequence and the second symbol sequence can be dynamically displayed in the opposite directions, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and enhance the effect. effective.

In the gaming machine AJ6, the display control means has the first symbol sequence and the first symbol sequence as the total symbol sequence when the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine AJ7 is characterized in that the display can be controlled so as to facilitate the dynamic display of the second symbol sequence.

According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ6, it is more difficult to dynamically display the first symbol string and the second symbol string as the total symbol string when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. be able to. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first symbol string and the dynamic display of the second symbol string are in different modes, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific determination result and enhance the effect of the effect. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic AK group> (Velo control of V-type machine is executed based on the number of hits by the attacker)
When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means, the game ball is difficult to enter from the first state to the first state. In a gaming machine having a variable ball-entry means that can be changed to a second state in which it is easy to enter a ball, a first specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means can pass, and a first specific region thereof. A first detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through an area, a second specific area through which a game ball that has passed through the first specific area can pass, and a game ball passing through the second specific area. A second detecting means capable of detecting the above, a taxiway capable of guiding the gaming ball passing through the first specific region to the second specific region, and an allowable state in which the gaming ball can pass through the second specific region. It has a variable means that can be changed to a regulated state that is difficult to pass, and the variable means changes from the regulated state to the permissible state based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detecting means. The gaming machine AK1 is characterized in that it is configured to be variable until a variable condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, a gaming machine (so-called V probability machine) that provides a specific area in an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game and sets a probability change state after the jackpot game ends when a game ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-11807). In such a gaming machine, the rate at which the probability variation state is set is predetermined by setting the first state in which the game ball easily passes through the specific area for a predetermined period based on the elapsed period from the start of the jackpot game. It was configured to be possible.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the first state is set based on the elapsed period from the execution of the jackpot game, so that the attacker wins the game ball due to a trouble of the gaming machine during the jackpot game, for example. There is a problem that a predetermined period in which the first state is set elapses while a situation in which the first state cannot be set occurs, and the player's willingness to play is reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by improving the player's motivation to play. ..

According to the gaming machine AK1, the variable means is changed to an allowable state based on the measurement result of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, so that the second specific area depends on the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means. It is possible to pass the game ball to the ball, which has the effect of making the player interested in the number of balls entered into the variable ball entry means and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AK1, the variable means is variable to the allowable state during a period during which the variable means in which the predetermined number of game balls in the first specific region can be changed to the allowable state can be reached. The gaming machine AK2, which is characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK1, it is possible to allow a predetermined number of gaming balls that have passed through the first specific area to enter the second specific area and pass through the second specific area. There is an effect that the number of balls entering the second specific area can be limited by controlling the game ball.

In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, a period determining means capable of determining the period from when the predetermined number of gaming balls have passed through the first specific region until the gaming balls are detected by the second detecting means. The gaming machine AK3 is characterized by having an abnormality processing means capable of executing an abnormality processing based on the determination result of the period determination means.

According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AK1 or AK2, problems such as staying on the guideway even though the player has passed a predetermined number of gaming balls in the first specific area can be caused at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to be discovered.

In any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, the termination condition is a period shorter than the period during which the next gaming ball reaches the variable means after the predetermined number of gaming balls are detected by the second detecting means. A gaming machine AK4 characterized in that it is set to be established when a lapse of time has passed.

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, there is an effect that a predetermined number of gaming balls can be surely entered into the second specific area.

One of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4 is characterized in that it has a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball in the second detecting means. Amusement machine AK5.

According to the gaming machine AK5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, even when the privilege game is executed, it is possible to motivate the gaming ball to enter the second specific area. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of boring bonus games.

<Characteristic AL group> (By changing the symbol sequence, some symbols in the symbol sequence can be switched)
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, display means for displaying the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification symbol on the display means. , A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification symbol for showing a specific determination result is displayed after the identification symbol is dynamically displayed, and the privilege granting thereof. In a gaming machine having a privilege type determining means capable of determining a privilege type given by means, a dynamic display period capable of determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the identification symbol is dynamically displayed can be determined dynamically. Of the display period determining means and the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, in the first period, the first identification symbol is displayed as the identification symbol for showing the first result, and the second identification symbol is displayed. A setting means that is for showing a second result different from the first result in the period and can be set so that at least a second identification symbol different from the first identification symbol is displayed. A gaming machine AL1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, as the identification information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one in which the third symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) can be executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player can play the game while expecting a big hit by suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol string is formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, a third symbol with a number from 1 to 9), and the plurality of symbol sequences (for example, three) are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in a symbol row other than one symbol row, an effect that raises the expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, There is something that performs reach production). In this way, the player is given a big hit by performing a variable effect to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using a plurality of symbol rows. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the third symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery only changes during the fluctuation period from the start of the third symbol change to the stop display, the third symbol During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and the motivation to play the game decreases.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and can improve the interest of the game by suppressing the decrease in the motivation to play during the period of the third symbol change. Is intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AL1, among the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show different results from the identification symbol, the player can continue to be interested in the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AL1, the dynamic display means can stop and display the first identification symbol at the end of the first period, and the second period is at least a period after the first period has elapsed. The gaming machine AL2, which is characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine AL2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AL1, it is possible to inform the player that the first period has ended and the second period has begun in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. effective.

In the gaming machine AL2, the dynamic display means can display the first identification symbol for indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result as the first result. The gaming machine AL3 featuring.

According to the gaming machine AL3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL2, the determination result of the discrimination means is notified to the player before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses. Therefore, the player who wants to quickly grasp the discrimination result of the discrimination means can be made to pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification symbol executed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AL3, the dynamic display means can display the second identification symbol for indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means as the second result. Amusement machine AL4.

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the end of the second period, an identification symbol for indicating the privilege type can be displayed. That is, after displaying the discrimination result of the discriminating means, the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means can be displayed. Therefore, after notifying the player that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means can be notified to the player, so that at least the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that the dynamic display of the second period can be executed with a sense of security.

In the gaming machine AL4, the privilege type determining means is at least one of a plurality of privilege types including a first privilege type and a second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type. The privilege type is determined, and the second identification symbol is displayed in a display mode including at least information for indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means. The featured gaming machine AL5.

According to the gaming machine AL5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL4, the display mode of the second identification symbol indicates the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means, so that the second identification symbol is dynamically displayed. Even during this period, the player can be made to predict the determined privilege means, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AL5, the game machine AL5 has a symbol sequence setting means capable of setting a symbol sequence in which a plurality of the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, and the dynamic display means The identification symbol can be dynamically displayed based on the symbol row set by the symbol row setting means, and the symbol row setting means can display at least a part of the first symbol row set during the first period. The gaming machine AL6 is characterized in that a second symbol sequence in which the first identification symbol to be formed is switched to the second identification symbol can be set.

According to the gaming machine AL6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL5, a second symbol string in which the first identification symbol forming at least a part of the first symbol string is switched to the second identification symbol is set. The number of identification symbols included in the first symbol sequence and the number of identification symbols included in the second symbol sequence can be the same. Therefore, since it is not necessary to change the dynamic display mode of the identification symbol executed by the dynamic display means according to the type of the set symbol sequence, the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification symbol is reduced. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine AL6, the symbol sequence setting means can form the first symbol sequence in which the first identification symbol for showing the same discrimination result of the discrimination means is duplicated, and the second symbol sequence is set. In this case, the gaming machine AL7 is characterized in that any of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.

According to the gaming machine AL7, since the first identification symbol that is duplicated in the first symbol sequence is switched to the second identification symbol, the dynamic display executed during the first period is displayed even during the second period. It is possible to confirm each first identification symbol displayed on the screen. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic AM group> (Restriction is released by another operation during button operation restriction control)
A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result on the display means. An operation means that can be operated and a type of operation for the operation means in a gaming machine having a privilege giving means that can give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed. As an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating at least the first operation and the second operation different from the first operation, and the setting executing means capable of executing the setting based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. And the regulation means for restricting the execution of the first setting by the setting execution means when the operation determination means determines the first operation, and the setting execution means has the regulation. The gaming machine AM1 is characterized in that the first setting can be executed when the second operation is determined by the operation determining means during the regulation by the means.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) via a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. There are many things that the player has devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variable effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol change period). Among them, there is one in which a plurality of effect modes are facilitated in advance so that the mode of the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation period is different for each effect mode (for example, a patent). Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).

In the gaming machine configured in this way, different variable effects can be provided to the player by switching the effect mode, so that the player gets tired of the game early by providing only the same variable effects. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Further, there is also a gaming machine in which the effect mode can be arbitrarily switched by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. In such a gaming machine, since the player himself / herself can select the most interesting production mode from the plurality of production modes, the variable production with low interest is executed, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the slingshot. Further, since it is necessary for the player himself / herself to operate the operating means in order to switch the effect mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, as described above, when the effect mode can be switched at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the operation means, for example, immediately before the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, or when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When a short fluctuation period is set as the fluctuation period, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery due to the switching of the production mode, so that the motivation to operate the operation means is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine AM1, even if the first setting based on the first operation is regulated, the first setting can be executed by executing the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means in order to execute various operations.

In the gaming machine AM1, the setting executing means can execute a second setting different from the first setting when the first operation is determined by the operation determining means during the regulation by the regulating means. A gaming machine AM2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1, the second setting is executed when the first operation is executed during the regulation, so that the setting executing means is executed even though the first operation is executed. Can suppress the situation where does nothing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

In the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period determining means until the end condition is satisfied. As the dynamic display period determined by The gaming machine AM3 is characterized in that, when it is determined by the operation determining means that the first operation is performed, it can be regulated that the first setting is executed by the setting executing means.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, it is possible to regulate the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means in the short game state, so that the setting executing means is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine AM3 has an effect mode setting means capable of at least setting a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode based on the settings executed by the setting execution means. The gaming machine AM4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AM4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AM3, different production modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines AM1 to AM4, the operating means has a first operating unit for executing the first operation and a second operation different from the first operating unit for executing the second operation. A gaming machine AM5 characterized by having a unit and a unit.

According to the gaming machine AM5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AM1 to AM4, the operation is executed for different operation units depending on whether the first operation is executed or the second operation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly executing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine AM5 is characterized in that the second operating unit is provided at a position that is more difficult for the player during the game to operate than the first operating unit.

According to the gaming machine AM6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM5, the ease of operation of each operation unit is made different so that the first operation using the first operation unit becomes a normal operation and the second operation unit is used. The second operation using the above can be used as an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being worried about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic AN group> (Execution of different contents by operation during button operation restriction control)
A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means thereof A first setting execution means capable of executing the first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation, and a regulation means for restricting the execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means. A second setting executing means that executes a second setting different from the first setting when the operating means is operated in a state where the execution of the first setting is restricted by the regulating means. The gaming machine AN1 featuring.

Conventionally, as the identification information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one in which the third symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) can be executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player can play the game while expecting a big hit by suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol string is formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, a third symbol with a number from 1 to 9), and the plurality of symbol sequences (for example, three) are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in a symbol row other than one symbol row, an effect that raises the expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, There is something that performs reach production). In this way, the player is given a big hit by performing a variable effect to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using a plurality of symbol rows. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the third symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery only changes during the fluctuation period from the start of the third symbol change to the stop display, the third symbol During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and the motivation to play the game decreases.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and can improve the interest of the game by suppressing the decrease in the motivation to play during the period of the third symbol change. Is intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AL1, among the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show different results from the identification symbol, the player can continue to be interested in the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AN1, when the operating means is operated while the first setting is regulated, the second setting is executed, so that nothing is executed even though the operating means is operated. It can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

In the gaming machine AN1, the regulating means can regulate the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine AN2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN1, the execution of the first setting is restricted by the regulatory means while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed, so that the first setting is executed. This has the effect of suppressing the difficulty in grasping the dynamic display result of the identification information by the player.

In the gaming machine AN2, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the end condition are satisfied. The dynamic display period to be performed includes a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period can be easily determined, and the regulation means is a state in which the short game state is set. The gaming machine AN3 is characterized in that it can regulate that the first setting is executed by the setting executing means when the operation determining means determines that the first operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN1 or AN2, it is possible to regulate the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operating means in the short game state, so that the setting executing means is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AN3, an effect mode setting means capable of at least setting a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode based on the first setting executed by the setting execution means. The gaming machine AN4 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine AN4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AN3, different production modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, so that the player is prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines AN1 to AN4, the operating means includes a first operating unit for executing the first operation and the first operating unit for executing a second operation different from the first operation. The gaming machine AM5, characterized in that it has a different second operating unit.

According to the gaming machine AN5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AN1 to AN4, the operation is executed for different operation units depending on whether the first operation is executed or the second operation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly executing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine AN6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AN5, the second operating unit is provided at a position that is more difficult for the player during the game to operate than the first operating unit.

According to the gaming machine AN6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN5, the ease of operation of each operation unit is made different so that the first operation using the first operation unit becomes a normal operation and the second operation unit is used. The second operation using the above can be used as an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being worried about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic AO group> (Chance if stage change is difficult)
A display means for displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a specific discrimination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the operating means that can be operated by the player and the operating means thereof Based on the operation, at least the first effect mode and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode can be set as the effect mode, and the effect by the effect mode setting means. The gaming machine has a period setting means capable of setting a first period in which the mode can be set and a second period in which the effect mode setting is more difficult to execute than the first period. The gaming machine AO1 is characterized in that when the setting of the effect mode is executed during the second period, it is possible to provide information that is more advantageous to the player than when it is executed during the first period.

Conventionally, as the identification information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one in which the third symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) can be executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player can play the game while expecting a big hit by suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol string is formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, a third symbol with a number from 1 to 9), and the plurality of symbol sequences (for example, three) are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in a symbol row other than one symbol row, an effect that raises the expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, There is something that performs reach production). In this way, the player is given a big hit by performing a variable effect to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using a plurality of symbol rows. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the third symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery only changes during the fluctuation period from the start of the third symbol change to the stop display, the third symbol During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and the motivation to play the game decreases.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and can improve the interest of the game by suppressing the decrease in the motivation to play during the period of the third symbol change. Is intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AL1, among the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show different results from the identification symbol, the player can continue to be interested in the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AO1, when the effect mode is set in the second period in which it is difficult to set the effect mode, it is possible to provide advantageous information to the player, so that the effect mode is set during the second period. It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting it to be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AO1, when the effect mode setting means is executed during the second period, the effect mode setting means sets the first effect mode and the third effect mode different from the second effect mode. A gaming machine AO2 characterized by being possible.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AO1, by setting the third effect mode, it is possible to notify the player that the effect mode has been set during the second period. It has the effect of being able to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In any of the gaming machines AO1 to AO3, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display until the end condition is satisfied. The dynamic display period determined by the period determining means includes a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined, and the period setting means is set by the short gaming state. The gaming machine AO4 is characterized in that the second period can be set when the above-mentioned second period is set.

According to the gaming machine AO4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AO1 to AO3, it is possible to make it difficult to set the effect mode during the short game state. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result of. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines AO1 to AO4, having a notification means capable of notifying the player that the second period is set by the period setting means before the second period is set. The featured gaming machine AO5.

According to the gaming machine AO5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AO1 to AO4, it is possible to make the player know in advance that the second period will be set, so that a desired production mode is set. The second period can be set in this state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered because the second period is set in the effect mode that the player does not want.

<Characteristic AP group> (Ease of stage change can be changed by pre-reading)
Based on an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an information acquisition condition, an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the information stored in the information storage means. , The discrimination means capable of executing the discrimination, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means are specified. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. The first effect mode is when the switching condition is satisfied with the pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discriminating the information stored in the information storage means before the discrimination by the discriminating means based on the information is executed. Therefore, it has a switching means capable of switching the effect mode to a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, and the switching condition is such that the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is the first pre-determination result. The gaming machine AP1 is characterized in that it is more likely to be established when the second pre-determination result is different from the first pre-determination result than when the first pre-determination result is obtained.

Conventionally, as the identification information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one in which the third symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, various effects (variable effects) can be executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the player can play the game while expecting a big hit by suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, one symbol string is formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, a third symbol with a number from 1 to 9), and the plurality of symbol sequences (for example, three) are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in a symbol row other than one symbol row, an effect that raises the expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, There is something that performs reach production). In this way, the player is given a big hit by performing a variable effect to suggest whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using a plurality of symbol rows. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the third symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery only changes during the fluctuation period from the start of the third symbol change to the stop display, the third symbol During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game and the motivation to play the game decreases.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and can improve the interest of the game by suppressing the decrease in the motivation to play during the period of the third symbol change. Is intended to provide.

According to the gaming machine AL1, among the dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show different results from the identification symbol, the player can continue to be interested in the identification symbol dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AP1, since the ease with which the switching condition is satisfied can be changed according to the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means, the player can determine the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means when the production mode is switched. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine AP1 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine the operation for the operation means, and the switching condition is the case where the operation is determined by the operation determination means. The gaming machine AP2, which is characterized in that it can be established in.

According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP1, the switching condition can be satisfied even when the player operates the operating means, so that the player is enthusiastically operated by the operating means. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine AP2, when the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is the second pre-discrimination result, the switching means changes from the first effect mode to a third effect mode different from the second effect mode. A gaming machine AP3 characterized by being switchable.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AP2, the third effect mode is set to notify the player that the result of the pre-determination by the pre-discrimination means is the second pre-determination result. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display until the end condition is satisfied. As the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means, there is a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined, and the switching condition is set to the short gaming state. The gaming machine AP4 is characterized in that it is more difficult to establish the case where the short gaming state is set than when the short gaming state is not set.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP3, it is possible to make it difficult to switch the effect mode during the short game state. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to grasp the discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

In any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP4, having a notification means capable of notifying the player that the short gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means before the short gaming state is set. The gaming machine AP5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine AP5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AP1 to AP4, it is possible to make the player know in advance that the short gaming state is set, so that the short gaming state is set. It is possible to enthusiastically operate the operating means in order to satisfy the switching condition before the switching condition is established. As a result, it is possible to easily set the short game state with the desired effect mode set, so that the short game state is set in the effect mode not desired by the player, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have operating means, and some gaming machines execute various settings based on the operation result of the operating means. In such a gaming machine, the interest is improved by operating the operating means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-249877).
However, further improvement of interest is required.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of the information acquisition condition, and an information storage in which the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored. Based on the means, the information stored in the information storage means, the discrimination means capable of performing the discrimination, and the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means can be dynamically displayed on the display means. When the possible dynamic display means and the identification information for indicating that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A pre-determination means that has a possible privilege game execution means and can pre-determine the information stored in the information storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the information is executed. The switching condition includes a switching means capable of switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode different from the first effect mode when the switching condition is satisfied. It is easier to establish the case where the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than the case where the pre-determination result is the first pre-determination result.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 has an operating means that can be operated by the player and an operation determining means that can determine the operation of the operating means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. Can be established when the operation is determined by the operation determination means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the switching means is from the first effect mode when the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is the second pre-discrimination result. It is possible to switch to a third effect mode different from the second effect mode.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is a dynamic display that determines a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3. A period determining means and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means until the end condition is satisfied. The switching condition is more difficult to be satisfied when the short gaming state is set than when the short gaming state is not set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 indicates that in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the short gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means before the short gaming state is set. It has a notification means capable of notifying.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an information acquisition condition, an information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the information storage means thereof. Based on the information stored in the information storage means, the discrimination means capable of performing the discrimination and the identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means can be dynamically displayed on the display means. A privilege game that can execute a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the display means and the identification information for indicating that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. A pre-determination means having an execution means and capable of pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the information is executed, and a switching condition. When it is established, it has a switching means capable of switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode different from the first effect mode, and the switching condition is the pre-determination means. It is easier to establish the case where the pre-determination result is the second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than the case where the pre-determination result is the first pre-determination result.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine the operation for the operation means, and the switching condition is satisfied when the operation is determined by the operation determination means. What you get.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, the switching means can switch from the first effect mode to a third effect mode different from the second effect mode when the determination result of the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result. be.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 3. That is, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the end condition until the end condition is satisfied. The target display period includes a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period can be easily determined, and the switching condition is shorter when the short game state is set. It is more difficult to establish than when the game state is not set.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4. That is, it has a notification means capable of notifying the player that the short game state is set by the game state setting means before the short game state is set.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
81 Third symbol display device S307 Dynamic display means S602 Information acquisition means S604 Information storage means S1804 Special game execution means S4212 Preliminary determination means S5205 Switching means S5307 Operation determination means

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means that can acquire information based on the establishment of information acquisition conditions,
An information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and an information storage means for storing the information.
A discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the information storage means, and
A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the discrimination means on the display means, and
When the identification information for indicating that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means. In a gaming machine that has
A pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discriminating the information stored in the information storage means before the discrimination by the discriminating means based on the information is executed.
It has a switching means capable of switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode different from the first effect mode when the switching condition is satisfied.
The switching condition is more likely to be satisfied when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than when it is the first pre-determination result. A gaming machine characterized by being.